Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


=CALIFORNIA 

STATE;UNIVERSITY: 

FULLERTON 


1983r85iCATALOG 



CAUFORNIA 
STATE UNIVERSITY 
FULLERTON 
1983-85 CATALOG 


2 


THIS CATALOG 


Within this catalog may be found general academic and administrative information as well as specific 
descriptions of the departments, their majors and the courses offered in each. The first major part 
contains orienting information such as the calendar, materials on The California State University, an 
overview of Cal State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on the campus. 
The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: admission, registration, records and 
regulations; academic advisement; and university courses. The next sections describe the depart- 
ments and the programs of study and courses they offer. The final part of the catalog contains a listing 
of the faculty and administration. An index may be found at the end to help the reader locate specific 
items. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic year It covers, changes in some 
programs and rules occur. The class schedule and subsequent errata sheets are the final authority 
in regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regulations. This publication may be bought 
for a small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

The production of the catalog was under the direction of the Office of the Provost and Vice President 
for Academic Affairs and the Office of Public Affairs. Stephen L. Daigle and jerry j. Keating were 
the editors; Christine M. Gunther of Cover All Graphics produced the cover design; and Leland P. 
Holder was the photographer. 


CHANGES IN RULES AND POLICIES 

Although every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the information in this catalog, 
students and others who use this catalog should note that laws, rules and policies change from time 
to time and that these changes may alter the information contained in this publication. Changes may 
come in the form of statutes enacted by the Legislature or rules and policies adopted by the Board 
of Trustees of The California State University, by the chancellor or designee of The California State 
University, or by the president or designee of the institution. Further, it is not possible in a publication 
of this size to include all of the rules, policies and other information which pertain to the student, 
the institution, and The California State University. More current or complete information may be 
obtained from the appropriate department, school or administrative office. 

Nothing in this catalog shall be construed, operate as or have the effect of an abridgement or a 
limitation of any rights, powers or privileges of the Board of Trustees of The California State 
University, the chancellor of The California State University or the president of the campus. The 
Board of Trustees, the chancellor and the president are authorized by law to adopt, amend or repeal 
rules and policies which apply to students. This catalog does not constitute a contract or the terms 
and conditions of a contract between the student and the institution or The California State Univer- 
sity. The relationship of the student to the institution is one governed by statute, rules and policy 
adopted by the Legislature, the Board of Trustees, the chancellor, the president and their duly 
autfwrized designees. 

Effective date: August 22, 1983 



Beginning with the 1984 Summer Olympics team handball competition, Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton will celebrate its 25th Anniversary. Events honor- 
ing the university will take place throughout the 1984-85 academic year. Details 
of these activities will appear in other university publications. 


3 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

GENERAL INFORMATION— Cal State Fullerton Calendars 6, The California 
State University 9, Cal State Fullerton 13, Cal State Fullerton: An Overview 
18, Student Services 31. 

ADMISSION, REGISTRATION, RECORDS AND REGULATIONS— 

Admission to the University 40, Registration 53, Records and Regulations 58. 

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS— Bachelor's Degree 74. 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT— 83. 

UNIVERSITY CURRICULA— 87. 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS— 93. 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS— 129. 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND COMMUNITY SERVICE— 
157. 

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES— 197. 

SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS, SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING- 299. 
GRADUATE PROGRAMS— 362. 

FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION— 426. , 

INDEX— 457. 

REGIONAL MAP— 463 


CAMPUS MAP— 464 


4 


NONDISCRIMINATION POLICY 

Sex 

The California State University does not discriminate on the basis of sex in the educational programs 
or activities it conducts. Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, as amended, and the 
administrative regulations adopted thereunder prohibit discrimination on the basis of sex in educa- 
tion programs and activities operated by California State University, Fullerton. Such programs and 
activities include admission of students and employment. Inquiries concerning the application of 
Title IX to programs and activities of California State University, Fullerton may be referred to 
Rosamana Gdmez-Amaro, the campus officer assigned the administrative responsibility of reviewing 
such matters or to the Regional Director of the Office of Civil Rights, Region 9, 1275 Market Street, 
14th Floor, San Francisco, California 94103. 

Handicap 

The California State University does not discriminate on the basis of handicap and is in compliance 
with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations adopted 
thereunder. 

More specifically. The California State University does not discriminate In admission or access to, 
or treatment or employment in, its programs and activities. Rosamaria G6mez-Amaro, Director of 
Affirmative Action, has been designated to coordinate the efforts of California State University, 
Fullerton to comply with the act and its implementing regulations. Inquiries concerning compliance 
may be addressed to this person at California State University, Fullerton, Langsdorf Hall 901 B, 
Fullerton, California 92634, (714 ) 773-3951. 

Race, Color, or National Origin 

The California State University complies with the requirements of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 
1964 and the regulations adopted thereunder. No person shall, on the grounds of race, color or 
national origin, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be otherwise 
subjected to discrimination under any program of The California State University. 



GENB%M 

INFORMATION 


6 


CAL STATE FULLERTON CALENDARS 


1983-84 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 

SUMMER SESSION 1983 

Instruction begins 

Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

Initial period for filing applications for admission to the spring 

semester 1984 begins 

Instruction ends 

FALL SEMESTER 1983 

August 22 , Monday Academic year begins 

August 29, Monday Instruction begins 

September 5, Monday Labor Day — campus closed 

September 8, Thursday Rosh Hashanah — campus open 

September 9, Friday Admission Day — campus open 

September 17, Saturday Yom KIppur — campus open 

October 10, Monday Columbus Day — campus open 

November 1, Tuesday ...Filing period opens for applications to the fall semester 1984 

November 11, Friday Veterans Day — campus Open 

November 24-25, Thursday, Friday ....Thanksgiving recess — campus closed 

December 9, Friday Last day of classes 

December 12, Monday Examination preparation day 

December 13-16, Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations 

December 17, Saturday Winter recess begins 

january 2, Monday Winter recess ends 

January 3, Tuesday Semester ends 

SPRING SEMESTER 1984 

january 19, Thursday Semester begins 

january 30, MorKlay Instruction begins 

February 13, Monday Lincoln's Birthday — campus open 

February 20, Monday Washington's Birthday — campus closed 

April 5, Thursday Martin Luther King, Jr., Memorial Observance 

April 16, Monday Spring recess begins 

April 23, Monday Instruction resumes 

May 18, Friday Last day of classes 

May 21, Monday Examination preparation day 

May 22-25, Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations 

May 26-27, Saturday, Sunday CommeiKement exercises; semester ends 

May 28, Monday Memorial Day — campus closed 


June 1, Wednesday 

July 4, Monday 

August 1, Monday.. 

August 19, Friday .. 


7 


1984-85 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 


SUMMER SESSION 1984 

June A, Monday Instruction begins 

July 4, Wednesday Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

August 1, Wednesday Initial period for filing applications for admission to the spring 

semester 1985 begins 

August 24, Friday Instruction ends 

FALL SEMESTER 1984 

August 27, Monday ...Academic year begins 

September 3, Monday ...Labor Day — campus closed 

September 4, Tuesday Instruction begins 

September 10, Monday Admission Day — campus open 

September 27, Thursday Rosh Hashanah— campus open 

October 6, Saturday Yom Kippur — campus open 

October 12, Friday Columbus day — campus open 

November 1, Thursday Filing period opens for applications to the fall semester 1985 

November 12, Monday Veterans Day — campus open 

November 22-23, Thursday, Friday ....Thanksgiving Day— campus closed 

December 14, Friday Last day of classes 

December 17, Monday Examination preparation day 

December 18-21, Tuesday-Friday Semester examinations 

December 22, Saturday Winter recess begins 

January 3, Tuesday Winter recess ends 

January 4, Wednesday Semester ends 


SPRING SEMESTER 1985 


January 24, Thursday Semester begins 

February 4, Monday Instruction begins 

February 12, Tuesday Lincoln's Birthday — campus open 

February 18, MorKlay Washington's Birthday— campus closed 

April 1, Monday Spring recess begins 

April 8, Moruiay Instruction resumes 

April 11, Thursday Martin Luther King, Jr., Memorial Observance 

May 24, Friday Last day of classes 

May 27, Monday Memorial Day— campus closed; examination preparation 

day 

Semester examinations 
.Commencement exercises; semester ends 


May 28-31, Tuesday-Friday 
June 1-2, Saturday, Sunday . 




r- 


■':''0‘-'‘ '■ ■^'''■j( 

.ti'.v> ■ . ■ ■• J*;'- ■• 


A-i 


: r.flT ; . M ..,.-.v-n .i . 


’ '“) irf'-»vv'>‘' 

: ■■ 

! .■ ■ ^'i 

- <‘.r.',; 


r t 


.•?-::i;- ; / \ \ i^ar i 

ri.i/ . '. .( . ' iArri-- >•}< 


• • vj ' r. V ..ij.; 

. . .rv'., r/ f' 

V " X • v' t .'4;*d ^ 1 

(A y"i»,-Jtu‘il 
/{ ‘ U- > iiJvVA 

'* !' ^V; 

y;.b *< 

* y, fy.* 

^r.iy . >/ '".u 


9 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY 



CaMtrmi Stall Caitfa. MkartllaM 
CiMirnia Stan PalytacaMC UMvaralty, 

PawaM 

CaMarma Stala UMvartily. NartUrtiva 
C H Hafi MB Stan Uanartay. Las Aafina 
CaMariMi Stan Uaivartllv. Oaartafaaz HMs 
CaMaran Stan Uanart«v. Lauf BaacP 
Onic9 ot ffn ChMPClior. Long Bo»ch 
CaMaran Stan Uanartlly, Faiartaa 
CaMaran Stan Caiafi. Saa Baraartfna 
Saa onfa Stan UanartHy 


It Stan Unwarsity 
a Snta Univarsitv. Chico 
Snn Unwarorty 
CaMaran Snn Umvarsity. SKramanto 
Saa Fraacnca SUn Umvarsity 
CaMaran SUta Uatvaraity. Hayward 
Saa Jata Snn Uaivaraity 
CaMaran Stan CoNaga. SnataUui 
CaMaran Snn UaivariHy, FrHaa 
CaMaran Palytachaic Snta Uaivarttty 
Saa Lan Obtspa 


The individual California State Colleges were brought together as a system by the Donahoe Higher 
Education Act of 1960. In 1972 the system becan>e The California State University and Colleges and 
in 1982 the system became The California State University. Today, 16 of the 19 campuses have the 
title ''university.'' 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — was founded as a Normal School in 1857 and 
became the first institution of public higher education in California. The newest campus — California 
State College, Bakersfield — began instruction in 1970. 

Responsibility for The California State University is vested in the Board of Trustees, whose members 
are appointed by the governor. The trustees appoint the chancellor, who is the chief executive officer 
of the system, and the presidents, who are the chief executive officers on the respective campuses. 
The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents develop systemwide policy, with actual implementa- 
tion at the campus level taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The Academic 
Senate of The California State University, made up of elected representatives of the faculty from each 
campus, recommends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the chancellor. 


10 


Academic excellence has been achieved by The California State University through a distinguished 
faculty, whose primary responsibility is superior teaching. While each campus in the system has its 
own unique geographic and curricular character, all campuses, as multipurpose institutions, offer 
undergraduate and graduate instruction for professional and occupational goals as well as broad 
liberal education. All of the campuses require for graduation a basic program of "General Education- 
Breadth Requirements" regardless of the typ>e of bachelor's degree or major field selected by the 
student. 

The California State University offers more than 1,500 bachelor's and master's degree programs in 
some 200 subject areas. Nearly 500 of these programs are offered so that students can complete all 
upper-division and graduate requirements by part-time late afternoon and evening study. In addition, 
a variety of teaching and school service cr^ential programs are available. A limited number of 
doctoral degrees are offered jointly with the University of California and with private institutions in 
California. 

The Consortium of The California State University draws on the resources of the 19 campuses to 
offer regional and statewide off-campus degree, certificate and credential programs to individuals 
who find it difficult or Impossible to attend classes on a campus. In addition to Consortium programs, 
Individual campuses also offer external degree programs. 

Enrollments in fall 1982 totaled over 315,000 students, who were taught by a faculty of 18,000. Last 
year the system awarded over 50 percent of the bachelor's degrees and 30 percent of the master's 
degrees granted in California. More than 800,000 persons have been graduated from the 19 cam- 
puses since 1960. 

CONSORTIUM OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY 

The Consortium of the C5U — "The 1,000-Mile Campus" — is a separate, fully accredited, degree- 
granting entity of the C5U. It draws on the combined resources of the 19 campuses to offer external 
statewide and regional degree, certificate, and teaching credential programs. 

The Consortium was established in 1973 to meet the needs of adults who find It difficult or impossible 
to participate in regular on-campus programs. Instruction is thus provided students in convenient 
places at convenient times. Currently, programs a/e offered in nK)re than 20 geographic areas 
throughout California. 

Full- and part-time C5U faculty, as well as qualified experienced practitioners, go where the students 
are, or provide opportunities for individualized home study. Programs can be tailored to meet the 
specific needs of employees in business. Industry, education or government. 

Consortium programs are upper-division or graduate level. All courses offer residence credit leading 
to bachelor's or master's degrees. Credit and course work are transferable statewide. Programs are 
financed by student fees. 

Academic policy for The Consortium is established by the statewide Academic 5enate of the C5U. 
Degrees or certificates are awarded by The Consortium In the nanr^e of the Board of Trustees of the 
C5U. The Consortium is accredited by the Western Association of 5chools and Colleges. 

For more information contact: The Consortium of The California 5tate University, 400 Golden 5hore, 
Long Beach, California 90802; (213) 590-56%. 

The statewide Admissions and Records Office may be reached by dialing the following numbers: 
Los Angeles and Long Beach areas (213) 590-56%; all other areas in California toll free (800) 
352-5717. 

OFFICE OF THE CHANCELLOR 
THE CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY 


400 Golden Shore, Long Beach, CA 90802, (213 ) 590-5506 


Df . W. Ann Reynolds . 

Mr. Harry Harmon 

Mr. D. Dale Hanner ... 
Dr. Alex C. 5herriffs ... 

Dr. Robert Tyndall 

Mr. Mayer Chapnun . 


Chancellor 

Executive Vice Chancellor 

Vice CharKellor, Busirtess Affairs 

Vice CharKellor, Academic Affairs 

Acting Vice Chancellor, Faculty and 5taff Affairs 
Vice CharKellor and Cerwral Counsel 


11 

TRUSTEES OF THE CALIFORNIA 
STATE UNIVERSITY 


Ex Officio Trustees 

The Honorable George Deukmejian 

CoverTKX of California 

The Hofwable Leo T. McCarthy 

Lieutenant Governor of California 

The Horxxable Willie L Brown, Jr 

Speaker of the Assembly 

The Honorable Louis “Bill" Honig. — 

Sute Superintendent of Public Instruction 

Dr. W. Ann Reynolds 

Chancellor of The California Sute University 


Sute Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Sute Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Sute Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

.. 721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento 95814 
400 Golden Shore, Long Beach 90802 


Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years, except for a student trustee and alumni trustee whose terms are for 
two years. Terms expire in the year in parentheses. Names are listed in order of appointment to the board. 
Appointments are subject to confirnution by the Sute Senate. 


Dr. Claudia H. Hampton (1986) 

41 57 Sutro Ave., Los Angeles 90006 
Mr. Willie ). Stennis (1983) 

Golden Bird, Inc. 

3947 Landmark, Culver City 90230 

O. Juan Gomez-QuirK>nes (1984) 

Professor, History Department 
University of California, Los Angeles 
405 Hilgard Ave., Los Angeles 90024 
Mr. John F. O'Connell (1984) 

Bechtel Power Corp. 

P. O. Box 3%5, San Francisco 94119 
Ms. Blanche C Bersch (1984) 

415 N. Camden Dr,, Suite 107, Beverly Hills 90210 
Mr. Michael R. Peevey (1985) 

California CourKil for Environmenul & 

Ecortomic Balance 

215 Market St, Suite 1311, San Francisco 94105 
Mr. John F. Crowley (1965) 

1855 Folsom St, 5th Floor, San Francisco 94103 
Ms. Wallace Albertson (1986) 

1618 Sunset Plaza Dr., Los Angeles 90069 
Mr. Doriald G. Livingston (1987) 

Carter Hawley Hale Stores, Inc. 

550 S. Flower St, Los Angeles 90071 


Ms. Celia I. Ballesteros (1987) 

Keating Building 

432 F. Street, Suite 406, San Diego 92101 
Mrs. Lynne Myers (1988) 

514 Doheny Rd., Beverly Hills 90210 
Dr. August F. Coppola (1988) 

Zoetrope Studios 

1040 N. Las Palmas Ave., Los Angeles 90038 
Mr. George M. Marcus (1989) 

Marcus & Millkhap Incorporated 
2626 Hanover St., Palo Alto 94304 
Mr. Blaine B. Quick (1983) 

Blaine (>jick & Associates 
1 1 52 Orange Ave., Cororudo 92118 
Mr. Dixon R. Harwin (1990) 

Alwin Management Company, Inc. 

9300 Wilshire Blvd., BeveHy Hills 90212 
Mr. Thomas J. Bernard (1989) 

Tomar, Inc. 

2115 Kern St., Suite 1, Fresno 93721 
Mr. Roland E. Amall (1990) 

REA Companies 

11878 LaGrange, Los Angeles 90025 

Mr. Daniel J. Branfnun 

Associated Students Office 

Sonoma Sute University 

1801 E. Couti Ave., Rohnert Park 94928 


Officers of the Trustees 
(Sovemor George Oeokmejian 
President 

Mr. John F. O'Connell 
Chairman 


Mrs. Lynne Myers 
Vice Chair 

ChafKellor W. Ann Reyr>olds 
Secretary-T reasurer 


12 


CAMPUSES OF THE CALIFORNIA 
STATE UNIVERSITY 


California State College, Bakersfield 
9001 Stockdale Highway 
Bakersfield, California 93309 
r President 

(005) 033-2011 

California State University, Chico 
1st and Normal Streets 
Chico, California 95929 
Dr. Robin S. Wilson, President 
(916) 895-6116 

California State University, Dominguez Hills 
Carson, California 90747 
Dr. Donald R. Certh, President 
(213) 516-3300 

California State University, Fresno 
Shaw and Cedar Avenues 
Fresno, California 93740 
Dr. Harold H. Haak, President 
(209) 407-9011 

California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 
Dr. jewel Plummer Cobb, President 
(714) 773-2011 

California State University, Hayward 
Hayward, California 94542 
Dr. Ellis E. McCune, President 
(415) 881-3000 

Humboldt State University 
Areata, California 95521 
Dr. Alistair W. McCrone, President 
(707) 826-3011 

California State University, Long Beach 
1250 Bellflower Boulevard 
Long Beach, California 90840 
Dr. Stephen Horn, President 
(213) 498-4111 

California State University, Los Angeles 
5151 State University Drive 
kos Angeles, California 90032 
Dr. James M. Rosser, President 
(213) 224-0111 

California State University, Northridge 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridge, California 91330 
Dr. James W. Cleary, President 
(213 ) 885-1200 


California State Polytechnic University, Pomona 
3801 West Temple Avenue 
Pomona, California 91768 
Dr. Hugh O. LaBounty, President 
(714) 598-4592 

California State University, Sacramento 
6000 J Street 

Sacramento, California 95819 
Dr. W. Lloyd Johns, President 
(916) 454-6011 

California State College, San Bernardino 
55(X) State College Parkway 
San Bernardino, California 92407 
Dr. Anthony H. Evans, President 
(714) 807-7201 

San Diego State University 
53(X) Campanile Drive 
San Diego, California 92182 
Dr. Thomas B. Day, President 
(619) 265-5000 

imperial Valley Campus 
720 Heber Avenue 
Calexico, California 92231 
(619) 357-3721 

San Francisco State University 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco, California 94132 

President 

(415) 469-2141 

San lose State University 
Washington Square 
San Jose, California 95192 
Dr. Ciail Fullerton, President 
(408) 277-2000 

California Polytechnic State University, 

San Luis Obispo 

San Luis Obispo, California 93407 
Dr. Warren J. Baker, President 
(805) 546-0111 

Sonoma State University 
1801 East CoUti Avenue 
Rohnert Park, California 94928 
Dr. Peter Diamandopoulos, President 
(707) 664-2156 

California State College, Stanislaus 
800 Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock. California 95380 
Dr. A. Walter Olson, President 
(209) 633-2122 


13 


CAL STATE FULLERTON 


UNIVERSITY ADVISORY BOARD 

William Bridgford, Chair 

Chairman of the Board, Bridgford Foods Corp 

Evelyn E. Bauman, Vice Chair 

Robert F. Beaver 

President, Willard-Brent Co., Inc 

lames D. Carrington 

Pastor, Friendship Baptist Church 

Lawrence R. Holmes 

President and Chief Executive Officer, Orange Bancorp, Inc. 
Frederick T. Mason 

Attorney at Law 

William J. McCarvey, Jr. 

Chairman of the Board, McCarvey-Clark Realty, IrK 

James O. Perez 

Judge, Orange County Superior Court 

Ruth Schermitzler 

Janies D. Woods 

President and Chairnun of the Board, Baker Oil Tools 


Anaheim 

Fullerton 

Los Angeles 

Fullerton 

Fountain Valley 

Santa Ana 

Fullerton 

Santa Ana 

Brea 

Orange 


UNIVERSITY ADMINISTRATION 

President 

Staff Assistant 

Executive Assistant 

Director of Affirmative Action 

Administrative Assistant 

Associate Vice President for Development and Community Relations .... 

Assisunt Director for Development and Community Relations 

Coordinator, Alumni Affairs - 

Director, Public Affairs — •••• — 

Director, Public Information 

Provost ar>d Vice President for Academic Affairs 

Administrative Program Specialist 

Associate Vice President, Academic Affairs 

Academic Planning Analyst 

Associate Vice President Academic Programs/Graduate Studies 

Director of Graduate Affairs 

Associate Vice President, Externied Education — 

Coordinator of University ConfererKes arni Facilities 

Director of Operations, Extended Education 

Director of Community Programs, Extended Education 

Director of Program Services, Exter>ded Education 

Associate Vice President Student Academic Affairs/ Special Programs 

Dean, School of the Arts 

Dean, School of Business Administration and Ecornxnics 

Dean, School of Human Development and Community Service 

Dean, School of Humarwties arxi Social ScierKes 

Dean, School of Mathemtics, Science and Engineering 

University Librarian 

Assistant to the University Librarian 

Associate University Librarian 

Chair, Collection Managen>ent 

Chair, Processing Services 

Chair, Readers' Services 

Dean of Admissiorw and Records 

Assistant to the Dean 

Director of Admissions 

Director of Relations with Schools and Colleges 

Registrar 

Director of Academic Advisement 

Assistant to the Director 


Jewel Plummer Cobb 

Norma Morris 

Donna C. Rhodes 

Rosamaria Gdmez-Amaro 

F. Caroline Cosgrove 

Duane L. Day 

.... Brenda Simmons- Parker 

Sue Scott 

Jerry J. Keating 

Judy M. Mar>del 

Frank Marini 

Martys K. Rietman 

Michael H. Clapp 

Stephen L Daigle 

Giles T, Brown 

Gladys Fleckles 

David L. Walkington 

Martin E. Carbone 

James T. Mavity 

Betty Robertson 

Alex W. Sharpe 

... Brenda L. Wash (acting) 

Jerry Samuelson 

Henry R. Anderson 

Peter A. Facior>e 

Don A. Schweitzer 

A. James Dieferxierfer 

Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

E. Sue Boeltl 

Carolyn Kaceru 

Donald W. Keran 

Margaret L. Keithahn 

Patricia L. Bril 

Ralph E. Bigelow 

Frartcis M. Casey 

Mildred H. Scott 

William P. Gowler 

John B. Sweeney 

Michael P. Onorato 

Frances Vose 


14 


Director of Academic DaU Systems and Institutional Research 

Administrative Assistant - 

Director of Athletics 

Associate Athletic Director 

Athletics Business Manager 

Director, Educational Opportunity Program 

Assisunt Director, E.O.P. Academic Affairs 

Assistant Director, EO.P. Guidance 

Director of Faculty Affairs and Records 

Administrative Assistant 

Director of Faculty Research 

Coordinator, ContracU and Grants 

Director of Information Services 

ADP Manager 

Instructional Coordinator 

Manager, Operatioruil Support 

Manager, Administrative Programming 

Director of Learning Resources Services 

Coordirtator, Learning Assistant Center 

Coordinator, Media Production 

Director, Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 

Associate Director - 

Coordinator of Health Professions 

Coordinator of Student Affirmative Action 

Radiation Safety Officer 

Vice President for Administration 

Administrative Program Specialist 

Assistant Administrative Analyst 

Associate Vice President, Facility Planning and Operations 

Administrative Assistant 

Campus Planner 

Assistant Campus Planner 

Coordinator, Energy /Space 

Environmenul Heahh and Safety Officer 

Director of Public Safety 

Director of Physical Plant 

Personnel Management Director 

Office Manager 

Assistant Personnel Management Director 

Personnel Management Specialist - 

Personnel Management Specialist 

Business Manager - 

Administrative Assistant 

Accounting Officer 

Budget Officer 

Administrative Program Specialist 

Procurement and Support Services Officer 

Foundation Business Manager/Comptroller 

Tiun Shops, Inc. Manager 

Dean of Student Services 

Assisunt Dean, Student Services — — 

Assisunt Dean, Student Services 

Administrator for Associated Students — * 

Director, Career Development Center 

Director, Financial Aid - 

Director, Handicapped Student Services — 

Director, Housing and Academic Appeals 

Director, Intematiorul Education and Exchange - 

Director, Student Health and Counseling Service 

Director, Testing and Research 

Director, University Activities Center 

Director, University Center 

Director, Women's Center 

Coordinator, Veterans' Services 


Charles J. Mosmann 

Mary Wise-Aguilar 

Lynn Eilefson 

Leanne L Grotke 

Edward O. Carroll 

Bernard L. Martinez 

Stephanie M. Ortiz 

Jeremiah W. Moore 

Gordon M. Bakken 

Kay Adams-Hemandez 

Marlene D. de Rios (acting) 

Elizabeth Gewin 

One H. Dippel 

Edward T. Card 

Dick Bednar 

Charles Sowers 

Bobbe Weber 

Ernest B. Gourdine 

Ron Fisher (acting) 

Coreen A. Strosser 


Denise Cummings 

Miles D. McCarthy 

... Ronald E. Hughes (acting) 

John Elliott 

Marion P. Sneed (acting) 

.......Marianne Kreter 

Tim Hughes 

James B. Sharp 

Joanie Donovan 

Glenn Lemon 

Philo Rohrbot^ 

James j. Corbett 

Charles Robinson 

William Huffman 

Beryl Kempton 

Richard D. Schulman 

Marilyn White 

David J. Losco 

Emily E. Gilbert 

Anr>e E. Elkins 

Thomas A. Williams 

Joseph J. Dusbabek 

Robert E. McPeek 

Robert G. Fecarotu 

Charles R. Umlauf 

David D. Baird 

Roruld G. Lamb 

Karl Lorentzen 

T. Roger Nudd 

. RoberU F. Browning (acting) 

William J. Reeves 

William G. PoHock 

John W. Gillis 

Thomas D. Morris 

Paul K. Miller 

Lynne K. McVeigh 

Louise G. Lee 

David P. Frelinger 

Charles W. Buck 

Charmairte L Coker 

Harvey A. McKee 

Diane N. Reeves 

Roy A. WilHiams 


15 


Schools, Divisions and Departments 

(Administrators serving as Chairs unless otherwise noted) 

Jerry Samuelson, Dean 

Frank E. Cummings, III, Associate Dean 

George R. James 

David O. Thorsen 

Alvin J. Keller 

Charles Redmon, Jr. 


School of the Arts .... 

Art Department 

Music Department 

Theatre Department 

Administrative Assistant 


School of Business Administration and Economics 

Accounting Department 

Economics Department 

Finance Department 

Management Department 

Management ScierKe Department 

Marketing Department 


Henry R. Anderson, Dean 

Kenneth D. Goldin, Associate Dean 

Trini U. Melcher 

Eric J. Solberg 

Marco E. Tonietti 

Dorothy B. Heide 

John A. Lawrence 

Irene L. Lange 


School of Human [Development and Community Service Peter a. Facione, Dean 

Judith V. Ramirez, Associate Dean 

Administrative Assistant Handy 

Division of Teacher Education James W. Cusick 

Counseling Department Michael C. Parker 

Educational Administration Department J*ck Preble 


Heahh Education, Physical Education and Recreation Department Eula M. Stovall 

Nursing Department Vera M. Robinson 

Reading Department Norma B. Inabinette 

Special Education Department Calvin C. Nelson 

Child Development Program Carol P. Barnes, Coordinator (acting) 

Human Services Program — - Corinne S. Wood, Coordinator 

University Recreation Program Ronald G. Andris, Director 


School of Humanities and Social Sciences. 

Administrative Assistant 

Afro-Ethnic Studies Department 

American Studies Department 

Anthropology Department .......... ... 

Chkano Studies Department 

Communications Department 

Criminal Justice Department 

English and Comparative Literature Department 

Foreign Languages and Literatures Department 

Geography Department 

History Department 

Linguistics Department 

Philosophy Department 

Political Science Department 

Psychology Department 

Religious Studies Department 

Sociology Department 

Speech Communication Department 

Gerontology Program 

Latin American Studies Program 

Liberal Studies Program 

Russian and East European Area Studies Program 

M.A. in Social Scierxres Program 


Don A. Schweitzer, Dean 

Dennis F. Berg, Associate Dean 

Elaine Hutchison 

Carl E, Jackson 

John D. Ibson 

Roger Joseph 

Isaac Cardenas (acting) 

Edgar P. Trotter, III 

Garrett W. Capune 

Thomas P. Klammer 

Leon J. Gilbert 

Wayne N. Engstrom 

James F. Woodward 

Donald A. Sears 

Craig K. lhara 

Julian F. S. Foster 

P. Christopher Cozby 

Joseph Kalir (acting) 

Tony Bell 

Joyce M. Flocken 

Rosalie Gilford, Coordinator 

.William J. Ketteringham, Coordinator 

Ronald E. Clapper, Coordinator 

Robert S. Feldman, Coordinator 

Roger Joseph, Coordinator 


School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering a. James Diefenderfer, Dean 

Margaret Woyski, Associate Dean, Academic Affairs (acting) 
John Olmsted, Associate Dean, Administrative Affairs (acting) 

Division of Engineering 

Civil Engineering Department Dindial V. Ramsamooj 


16 


Electrical Engineering Department Mohinder S. Crewal 

Mechanical Engineering Department James j. Rizza 

Biological Science Departn>ent Steven N. Murray 

Chemistry Department Patrick A. Wegner 

Computer ScierKe Department Edward F. Sowell 

Earth ScierKe Department John A. Ryan 

Mathematics Department - James O. Friel 

Physics Department Louis N. Shen 

Environmental Studies Program Vincent J. Buck, Coordinator 

Science Education Program Caylen R. Carlson, Coordinator 

COMMUNITY MINORITY AFFAIRS ADVISORY COUNCIL 

James O. Perez, Chair 

Judge, Orange County Superior Court Santa Ana 

W. J. Bill Thom, Vice Chair 

President, Anaheim Office Furniture & Supply, Inc Anaheim 

Rudolph Trujillo, Secretary 

President, Tru Industries Buena Park 

Frederick Aguirre 

Attorney-at-Law Fullerton 

Benedict Boyd 

Education /Health Specialist, Orange County Human Relations Commission Santa Ana 

James D. Carrington 

Pastor, Friendship Baptist Church Fullerton 

Amin David, Jr. 

President, Regal Products Anaheim 

Anthony Espinoza 

Account Executive, Bache, Halsey, Stuart, Shields, Inc Pasadena 

Jerry Folsom 

Project Director, Orange County Indian Center Employment and Training 

Program Carden Grove 

Manuel B. Frias 

Director of Personnel Services, El Camino College Torrance 

Maria Mendoza 

EEO Officer, Orange County Manpower Commission Santa Ana 

Joe Montes 

Health Services Consultant Santa Ana 

Ramon Najera 

President, Mexicola, IrK El Toro 

Mahlon Puryear 

President, Orange County Urban League, Inc Santa Ana 

Heiiinda Sullivan 

President, Sperm Bank, Inc Santa Ana 

Mary White 

Educator/Consultant Anaheim 

Joshua White 

Developer/ 1 nsurarKe Planner Anaheim 

Joe Wilson 

Research Coordinator, Capistrano Unified School District San Juan Capistrano 


17 


CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, 
FULLERTON FOUNDATION 


Board of Directors 

jewel Plummer Cobb, President* 
Marion P. Sneed, Vice President* 
Maria C. Linder, Secreury** 

David L. Palmer, Treasurer 
Clare C. Carlson 
Peggy Cotton 
HiKon Dalessi 
A. james Diefenderfer* 

Richard A. Houston** 

Leslie Lahmt 

Administrative Officer 

E. Karl Lorentzen, Executive Director 


Frank Marini* 

T. Roger Nudd* 
Christopher Powers t 
Walter J. Pray 
Clarence Schwartz 
Mark H. Shapiro** 
Robin Terryt 
Edgar Trotter** 
Richard M. Wagner 


TITAN SHOPS, INC. 

Board of Directors 

Ronald C. Lamb * 

T. Roger Nudd* 
Leanne Pearcyt 
Christopher Powersf 
Clarence J. Schwartz 
Robin Terryt 
Edgar Trotter** 


• Adminiftrator 

••Facuky 

tScudem 


Marion P. Sneed, President* 

David L. Palmer, Vice President 
Richard M. Wagner, Secretary-Treasurer 
Edward Carpenter 
jewel Plummer Cobb* 

Leslie Lahmt 

Administrative Officer 

E. Karl Lorentzen 


18 


CAL STATE FULLERTON: AN OVERVIEW 


GOVERNANCE 

Governance on the campus at California State University, Fullerton is the responsibility of the 
president and her administrative staff. Working closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, review, and/or recommend for approval, various university 
programs, policies, and procedures. Although the president is vested with the final authority for all 
university activities, maximum faculty and staff participation in campus decision-making and gover- 
nance has become traditional. Students also are actively involved, with student representatives being 
included on almost all university, school, and departmental committees and policy-making bodies. 

ADVISORY BOARD 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board consists of community leaders interested 
in the development and welfare of the university. The board advises the president on a number of 
matters, particularly those affecting university and community relations. Members are appointed by 
the president for terms of four years. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

Institutions of higher learning disseminate and advance knowledge. The philosophy which guides 
an institution can limit or promote the successful achievement of these objectives. Therefore, from 
its inception. Cal State Fullerton has consciously endeavored, through its educational program, to 
enhance the fullest possible development of those it serves. For both professors and students this 
entails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, to a comprehensive rather than a narrow 
approach in major areas of study, and to a concern with research and other creative activity. 
The university is committed to provide students with the intellectual skills necessary for their 
continued personal and professional development, as well as an awareness of human achievement. 
The general education forms one segment of a student's program of study. The other two major 
segments are courses taken in the major field of concentration, and courses taken as electives. 
Specifically, the general education program has as its objectives the development in each student 
of: 

• The skills of reading, writing, computing and thinking. 

• An understanding of the development of Western civilization. 

• An awareness of the content, approaches, and methods of the various disciplines and of the 
interrelationships of those disciplines. 

• An understanding of cultural diversity within our own society and of the cultures of other 
societies. 

• An appreciation of aesthetics through practice or criticism of the arts. 

To achieve these objectives the faculty of California State University, Fullerton has established a 
general education program described under "'Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor's Degree." 

RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 

In 1957 Cal State Fullerton became the 12th State College in California to be authorized by the 
Legislature. The following year a site was designated in northeast Fullerton. It was purchased in 1959, 
when Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed as founding president, when the first staff was selected 
and when plans for opening the new college were made. Orange County State College started classes 
for 452 full- and/or part-time students in September, 1959, using leased quarters for its administrative 
offices on the Fullerton Union High School campus and for its classrooms at Fullerton's Sunny Hills 
High School. In the fall of 1960, the college opened classes on its own campus, where it occupied 
12 temporary buildings. The name changed to Orange State College in July, 1%2, to California State 
College at Fullerton in July, 1964, to California State College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to California 
State University, Fullerton in June, 1972. The first permanent building, the six-story Letters and 
Science Building, was occupied in 1%3. 

Today, there are many dramatic evidences of additional, rapid growth. Sixteen buildings or building 
clusters have been completed, and enrollment has climbed to approximately 23,400. Since 1%3 the 


19 


curriculum has expanded to include lower division work and many graduate programs. 

The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1%0 established the California State Colleges as a system 
under an independent Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State Colleges, and related 
them to both the community colleges and the University of California system. Cal State Fullerton 
was the first of the State Colleges to submit and secure approval for a five-year master curricular 
plan and one of the first three to secure approval of a master building plan. It also was able to think 
in terms of its ultimate enrollment objectives from the beginning. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as acting president for seven months, was 
appointed the second president of Cal State Fullerton. Dr. Miles D. McCarthy became acting 
president In January, 1981, and Dr. jewel Plummer Cobb took office October 1, 1981. 

THE HUMAN AND NATURAL ENVIRONMENT 
OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Fullerton, a city of approximately 100,000 inhabitants, is located in northern Orange County, about 
30 miles southeast of central Los Angeles. It is in the center of the new Southern California population 
center and within easy freeway access of all the diverse natural and cultural attractions of this region. 
Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in size of California's 58 counties, but 
it is second largest county in population (1.9 million), and in total personal income. Orange County 
has experienced during the last three decades almost unprecedent^ growth as communities contin- 
ue to occupy the diminishing expanses of open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new ecorwmic and life styles in Orange 
County. Underneath the soil, archeologists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and gather- 
ing Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 4,0(X) years ago in what was a benign and 
bountiful region. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: 
Mission San Juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradition in Orange County, and subse- 
quent adobes from the great larnJ grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both customs and 
many names persist from this period, and so does some ranching. The architectural and other 
eviderKes of the subsequent pioneer period are still quite visible; farmsteads, old buildings from the 
new towns that then were esubllshed in the late 18(X)'s, mining operations, and traces of early resort 
and other types of pronrotional activities. For about 100 years, farming was the main economic 
activity with products such as grapes, walnuts, vegetables, and increasingly oranges, replacing the 
older wheat and cattle ranches. Tc^ay, agriculture still is very important. Orange County ranks high 
among California's counties in mineral production with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay 
mining and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange County and the development of 
such attractions as Disneylarnf, Knott's Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of the 
Masters, and the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center continue to make tourism an increasingly 
important activity. So does the Mediterranean-type climate with: rainfall averaging 14 irKhes per 
year; and gef>erally mild days (with either freezing or 100-degree temperatures uncommon) with 
frequent morning fogs during the summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can 
be reached by car In half an hour, and mountain and desert recreation areas are as close as an hour's 
drive from the campus. 

THE CAMPUS AND ITS BUILDINGS 

OKe part of a vast orange grove. Cal State Fullerton's attractively landscaped campus now consists 
of 225 acres bounded on the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by State College Boulevard, 
on the north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the east by the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding the campus is predominantly suburban; It 
includes housing tracts, apartment complexes, shopping centers, space-age industrial firms and still 
remaining orange groves and uf>developed hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immediate environment. The new campus of the 
Southern California College of Optometry, with its four modernistic buildings, opened in the spring 
of 1973. It is just north of Cal State Fullerton. To Cal State's immediate south is Pacific Christian 
College, a liberal arts school with a Bible emphasis, where students started classes in the fall of 1973. 
The Western State University College of Law, California's largest law school, occupied its new 
campus to the immediate west of Cal State in January, 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density urban layout of buildings and facilities 


20 


developed to serve a predominantly commuting public. The university's modern buildings were 
planned so that no student should need more than 10 minutes to go from one class to another. The 
campus is surrounded with landscaped parking facilities. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1%3. This imposing 
structure, master planned to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate science 
instruction and research, has been used to house other programs until they could warrant new 
facilities of their own. 

Since 1%3, growth has been rapid. The Performing Arts Center was completed in 1964, the Physical 
Education Building in 1%5, the Library Building in 1966, the Commons in 1%7, the Humanitles-Social 
Sciences Building and Visual Arts Center in 1%9, William B. Langsdorf Hall (Administration-Business 
Administration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, the Student Health Center In 1974, the 
Education-Classroom Building and University Center in 1976, and an addition to the Visual Arts 
Center in 1979. Langsdorf Hall and the Engineering Building reflect a commitment to programs with 
high community involvement. In addition to the many undergraduate students who study and learn 
in these buildings, many professional engineers and local businessmen also use these very advanced 
facilities to continue their education. 

In the northeast corner of the campus is the Fullerton Arboretum, which was dedicated in the fall 
of 1979. It includes a 15-acre contoured botanical garden, a three-acre organic garden and a 
two-acre experimental plot. The ecologically arranged floras depicts habitat from the desert to the 
tropics. The Fullerton Arboretum also includes Heritage House, a 19th-century restored dwelling. 
Heritage House serves as a cultural museum for North Orange County as well as an Arboretum 
office. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that approach the main entrance to the 
university's modern campus also provide comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learning 
resources available in Southern California: many other colleges and universities; museums, libraries, 
art galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of economic governmental, social, and cultural activities and 
experiments that may be found in this dynamic and complex region of California and the United 
States. 

Information concerning the instructional, laboratory and other physical plant facilities which relate 
to the academic program may be obtained from the Office of Facility Planning and Operations. 

COMMUNITY SUPPORT GROUPS 

California State University, Fullerton seeks to establish and maintain close relationships with the 
communities it serves through a network of 1 1 community support groups. More than 7,000 persons 
are members of these groups. Each group determines, for itself, membership criteria and annual 
membership fees. Two of the groups (President's Associates and Friends of the State University) 
have broad interests in fostering university /community understanding; the nine others (Alumni 
Association, Art Alliance, Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum, Music Associates, Parents' Association, 
Patrons of the Library, Reading Educators' Guild, Titan Athletic Foundation, Tucker Wildlife Sanctu- 
ary) focus their interests on specific university programs or activities. 

Questions about community support groups may be directed to the Office of Development and 
Community Relations. 

STUDENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any campus comes from the nature 
and vitality of its students. Diversity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, strong 
achievement records, and relative maturity are some of the predominant characteristics of the 
23,400-member student body at Cal State Fullerton. 

The university is a commuter institution, with no university-affiliated housing. Thirty-four percent of 
the students work 35 hours or more a week, and yet nearly 54 percent take 1 2 or more units of course 
work each semester. Seventy-four percent come from a radius of 1 5 miles from the campus, but 
many have lived elsewhere before coming to Orange County. 

Twenty-eight percent are lower division students, 52 percent are university juniors and seniors, and 
another 20 percent are doing postbaccalaureate or graduate work. Over seven-eighths of the upper 
division students are transfers from other institutions, principally community colleges. The median 
age is 23; more than fifty percent are women. Most participate in both the day and evening programs 
during the regular semesters and 16 percent are involved only in the late afterrKwn or evening 
program. 


21 


Many already have clearly defined disciplinary, professional and artistic interests. Sixteen percent 
have not declared an academic major and are in the process of exploring different fields of knowl- 
edge. For the past three or four years most of the undergraduates have searched for meaningful 
vocations and corresponding employment opp)ortunities upon completion of degree programs. Most 
are trying to understand themselves and their world so that they can become more effective human 
beings and citizens. 

Data regarding student retention in the academic programs at Cal State Fullerton may be obtained 
from the Office of Academic Data Analysis and Institutional Research. 

PRESIDENT'S SCHOLARS PROGRAM 

Cal State Fullerton has inaugurated the President's Scholars Program as a means of recognizing the 
academic and extracurricular excellence of a highly select group of students. Unlike many scholar- 
ship opportunities at the university that are based on need and merit, this program is based solely 
on merit. 

Funded by the President's Associates, the program began in 1979 with the first President's Scholars 
selected from the high school graduating class of 1979. Each year, 10 additional President's Scholars 
are selected with the potential eligibility of all chosen individuals extending for a maximum of four 
years. 

President's Scholars receive $500 a year, are hosted at special receptions, and are honored In other 
ways. They are highly visible on campus and are expected to assume leadership roles. 
Candidates are considered by a committee of members of the university faculty and administration, 
as well as a community representative. The committee makes its recommendations to the president, 
who personally selects the scholars. 

Application forms are available by telephoning or by writing President's Scholars Program; Office 
of Relations with Schools and Colleges; California State University, Fullerton; Fullerton, CA 92634. 

THE FACULTY 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher learning is the quality and dedication of its 
faculty. Cal State Fullerton is proud of the high caliber of its faculty and of the commitments of its 
individual faculty members to teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1982 there were 840 full-time faculty and administrators and 548 part-time faculty 
members teaching on the campus. For the full-time faculty members, the median age was 44 and 
almost all had some previous college or university teaching experierKe before coming to Fullerton. 
Faculty members also have a wide variety of experiences and accomplishments in research, the arts, 
professional work, consulting and other creative activities. Seventy-eight percent of the full-time 
faculty have earned their doctoral degrees, and these have come from nwre than 100 major colleges 
and universities. 

Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge in an academic specialty, demon- 
strated skill and experience in teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and research. 
Retention and promotion criteria include service to the university and to the community. 
Information corKerning the faculty and other personnel may be obtained from the Office of Faculty 
Affairs and Records. 


ACADEMIC AFFAIRS 

The university offers a full four-year program of freshman through senior work as well as credential 
programs for teachers, and graduate, master's level work in many disciplines and professional fields. 
The university provides a diversity of educational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of back- 
grourxjs and interests of its students. Approximately 2,800 courses have been developed to provide 
learning from introductory to highly specialized, in-depth and advanced, work in a wide variety and 
growing number of fields of study. 

Fullerton currently awards the baccalaureate and the master's degree in diverse fields of knowledge. 
Many of the baccalaureate and master's degree programs offer a choice of specializations (or 
options or emphases). 

Certain traditions have developed with the academic programs at Fullerton. One is that of relative 
balance in strength of the programs in the physical scierKes, the social scierKes, the humanities and 
the fine arts. Another is that of academic excellence in the various specializations offered by the 


22 


university and the comparative freedom given to departments and professional schools to develop 
programs for their majors. Through the general education program of the University, students are 
prepared In basic subjects and gain experience in a variety of carefully selected disciplines. 

ACCREDITATION 

Cal State Fullerton is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. Specific 
programs have been accredited by the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology, the 
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business, the American Chemical Society, the American 
Council on Education for journalism, the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association, the 
National Association of Schools of Art, the National Association of Schools of Music, the National 
Assocation of Schools of Theater, the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education, the 
Board of Directors of the National Athletic Trainers Association and the National League for Nursing. 
The Public Administration concentration is listed by the National Association for Schools of Public 
Administration. Cal State Fullerton is a member of the Council of Graduate Schools In the United 
States and the Western Association of Graduate Schools. 

SCHEDULE OF CLASSES 

The regular, educational program of the university is offered continuously from 8 a.m. until 10 p.m. 
Monday through Friday. The class schedule, listing all classes nieeting during these hours. Is prepared 
for each semester and can be purchased at the Titan Bookstore. 

The classes held during the late afternoon and evening hours are part of the regular university 
program. Students enrolling in these classes must have met all admission requirements of the 
university, including the filing of an official application for admission, the filing of complete official 
transcripts from other schools, colleges and universities and in the case of lower-division applicants, 
the completion of required tests for admission. 

Classes which are offered during the sumnner sessions and by the Office of Extended Education do 
not require admission to the university, but some courses do require specific prerequisites. Special 
schedules are provided for the summer sessions and extended education programs. 

OFFICE OF THE PROVOST AND VICE PRESIDENT FOR 
ACADEMIC AFFAIRS 

The Office of the Provost and Vice President for Academic Affairs is responsible for the leadership 
and coordination of all campus academic matters. The provost Is the chief academic officer for the 
campus and is directly involved in the areas of curriculum, faculty personnel processes and budget 
and resource allocation as they pertain to Instruction and academic support. 

Information concerning the academic programs of Cal State Fullerton may be obtained from the 
Office of the Provost and Vice President for Academic Affairs. This information may Include: 

1 . The current degree programs and other educational and training programs; 

2. The instructional, laboratory, and other physical plant facilities which relate to the academic 
program; 

3. The faculty and other instructional personnel; 

4. Data regarding student retention at Cal State Fullerton and, if available, the number and percent- 
age of students completing the program In which the student is enrolled or expressed interest; 
and 

5. The names of associations, agencies or governnr>ental bodies which accredit approve, or license 
the institution and its programs, and the procedures under which any current or prospective 
student may obtain or review upon request a copy of the documents describing the institution's 
accreditation, approval or licensing. 

O/iffce of Academic Programs 

The Office of Academic Programs coordinates the development of educational programs; provides 
an all-university perspective on educational activities at the campus; and stimulates academic 
innovations. 

Particular responsibilities include leadership with the Curriculum Committee, General Education 
Committee, Graduate Education Committee, Committee for Educational Development and Innova- 
tion and other groups and individuals concerned with changing and improving the educational 


23 


programs of this institution. Responsibilities relating to the Chancellor's Office include regular review 
and updating of the Academic Master Plan; coordination of program performance review; and staff 
reports for the Chancellor's Office relating to academic planning. 

Office of Student Academic Affairs and Special Programs 

The Office of Student Academic Affairs and Special Programs coordinates academic services for 
undergraduate students. The office provides assistance to the faculty to help assure academic quality 
and high standards in the undergraduate programs and to insure a diversity of educational opportuni- 
ties for students. In particular, these responsibilities include coordination of University advising, 
recruitment and retention activities (including Student Affirmative Action and Educational Opportu- 
nity Programs), and academic enrichment, assistance and tutorial programs. 

Office of Extended Education 

The Office of Extended Education serves traditional and non-traditional students through self- 
sufficient extension, summer session, adjunct enrollment and community programs. Anyone may 
enroll in extension courses or programs. It is not necessary to be formally enrolled at the university. 
For information about establishing an extension course, or for current offerings, consult the Office 
of Extended Education. 

Extension Credit 

The maximum extension credit acceptable toward a bachelor's degree is 24 semester units. Six 
semester units of extension credit may be applied toward a master's degree with prior approval. 
Extension credit may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements for graduation. 

Intersession 

In January, between fall and spring semesters, a concentrated intersession extension program is 
offered. Intersession course topics range from academic offerings (paralleling regular university 
course content) to specially designed topics for selected groups. Intersession is a time for intensive 
studies and exploration. 

Summer Session 

Sumnf>er session is for students who want to accelerate completion of degree or credential require- 
ments or who want to enrich their educational backgrounds. All courses are the equivalent of 
university courses offered during the academic year and confer residence credit. (A selected 
program of extension courses offering extension credit only is also offered during the summer.) Day 
and evening classes are scheduled. 

Students who wish to enroll only for summer session do not need to formally enroll at the university, 
but are expected to have satisfied any prerequisites for courses in which they enroll. Admission to 
sumnf)er session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

There is no limit to the total number of units a person may take in summer session. However, a 
recommerxied program of study should not exceed 1 % units of course work per week of instruction. 
For veterans' benefit purposes, or>e unit per week is considered a full load. 

AdjurKt Enrollment 

AdjurKt enrollment allows those who are not formally enrolled in the university to take regular 
university courses for extension credit. Enrollment is on a space-available basis and with instructor 
permission. Students pay an extension fee and register through the Office of Extended Education. 

Community Programs 

The Office of Extended Education sponsors various community educational outreach programs, 
including the Continuing Learning Experience (CLE) program for retired persons. Check with the 
office for other current activities. 

Veterans 

Veterans may use the educational benefits available to them under federal and state laws to enroll 
in university extension courses, provided the classes are part of their prescribed and recognized 
objectives as approved by the Veterans Administration. 


24 


INSTRUCTIONALLY RELATED SERVICES AND PROGRAMS 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 

The Center for Internships and Cooperative Education was established to offer students the opportu- 
nity to combine academic experience with periods of professional employment related to their 
academic major. The center is the focal point and coordinating office for the initiation, development 
and expansion of cooperative education. 

Students gain a clearer understanding of their career objectives through the application of their 
academic studies in the "world of work." Learning while working outside the classroom enables 
students to obtain a broader perspective of themselves. Many departments offer internship courses 
which carry academic credit. Some internships are salaried and consequently assist students in 
financing their educational living expenses. 

The employer receives the services of individuals who are highly motivated, eager to learn and aware 
of theoretical developments in their field. The employer also finds participation in cooperative 
education to be one of the most reliable means of recruiting personnel for full-time employment 
upon graduation. 

The university, through the establishment of the Center for Internships and Cooperative Education, 
has provided a means for students to enhance their academic program (s) and career objectives. 

Computer Center 

The Computer Center is located in the basement of the Science Building, offering consulting services 
to students and faculty as well as performing administrative data processing. As a component of the 
CSU Distributed Computer Network, the university offers a wide range of computing resources. The 
campus host computer is a CDC Cyber 170/730 with dual processors, 262,000 words of memory 
and 2.0 billion characters of on-line disk storage. It provides timesharing services to over 100 users. 
Also available are two additional timesharing computers; a PDF 11/45 which supports UNIX and 
a PDP 1 1 /70 which provides RSTS. Users have access to many computer languages and a variety 
of statistical and other applications programs. Through the facilities of the network, users are able 
to share access with other campuses to a large capacity Cyber 1 70/760-730 complex located at the 
Division of Information Systems in Los Angeles. 

Students have access to all these computing resources from 250 terminals connected to the campus 
data communications network. Terminal labs located at several sites on the campus allow students 
convenient access. 

Educational Opportunity Program 

The Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) provides comprehensive services for educationally, 
disadvantaged and/or culturally different students. These services include the identification, selec- 
tion, counseling and retention of students who would not normally acquire a university education 
because of academic, financial or motivational barriers. 

EOP gives each of the students individual attention. It uses knowledge of the student's distinctive 
piatterns of social behavior, learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to assist them in realizing 
their full potentialities. EOP strives to develop a sense of community among its students through 
creative and identity-seeking activities. 

The services offered by the Educational Opportunity Program include: recruiting, advisement coun- 
seling, tutoring, and retention services. The services ensure a progressive rate of student achieve- 
ment. 

Recruiting 

EOP recruiting teams visit high schools and colleges within a specified service area and advise 
students of the benefits of higher education at Cal State Fullerton. Utilizing Affirmative Action 
guidelines, a special attempt is made to recruit students with high academic potential. Assistance 
with admissions and financial aid procedures is provided. 

Counseling Service 

The counseling component is one key to the effectiveness of EOP. Peer counselors, working under 
the direction of professional counselors, are the important liaisons between each irxfivkJual EOP 
student and the university as a whole. Assistance and guidance are provided to help the student 
resolve academic, social, financial and personal problems. The EOP Counseling Center also acts as 


25 


a referral point to direct students to the appropriate support services, e.g., financial aid, housing, 
Learning Assistance Center, tutorial services, health services. 

Learning Resource Services 

The Learning Resource Services consists of a Learning Assistance Center and Instructional Media 
Center. 

Learning Assistance Center 

Located on the lower level of the Library Building, a Learning Assistance Center (LAC) is for all 
university students who need improvement in their present learning skills, particularly In the areas 
of reading, writing, computation and study skills. This center contains special study materials, 
collateral textbooks and taped programs that supplement regular course offerings. Individual tutoring 
is available to students on request and through faculty or peer counselor referrals. All tutors are 
selected on the basis of ability in their area of concentration. Prior to tutoring, they are assigned to 
a series of education courses designed to give the prospective tutor a greater understanding and 
awareness of the nature of the learning process. 

Instructional Media Center 

The Instructional Media Center, located in the lower level of the Library building, includes audiovis- 
ual and instructional television services. 

Services to the faculty and students include use of audiovisual equipment and materials, and rental 
of films. Services for faculty include production of transparencies, charts, graphs, diagrams, audi- 
otapes and cassettes, tele-lectures and all types of still and motion picture photography. Instructional 
television services include distribution of off-the-air or videotaped programs from master control to 
classrooms, videotaping facilities and playback both in the studio or classroom and off the campus. 
The center is responsible for the coordination and development of instructional applications of 
media, and the improvement of programs and materials designed for instructional use. Liaison and 
service relations are maintained with other media learning-oriented units on the campus. Personnel 
of the center assist the faculty in their analysis of media needs and the procurement or production 
of materials pertinent to instructional development. 

Instructional Media Center staff are also responsible for the operation of the cable television system 
which provides educational access programming to the cities of Fullerton and Anaheim. Program- 
ming from the Communications Department and the Theatre Department, along with instructional 
programming from the Instructional Media Center, is provided. 

The Library 

The Library houses books, periodicals, documents, microforms, phonorecords and other materials 
selected through the joint efforts of faculty and librarians to support the graduate and undergraduate 
programs of the university. In addition to the general collections, in-depth special collections de- 
signed to support instructionally-related research have been created and developed. 

A general information desk located on the first floor of the six-story building provides directional 
assistance as well as descriptive materials and guides to the use of the Library. Librarians offer 
subject-specialized referecKe and research assistance. Introductory tours are conducted at the 
beginning of each semester; specialized tours and lectures are given as requested by faculty. The 
Library offers courses in bibliographic research as a regular part of the curriculum. 

The book collection includes more than 500,000 volumes and is increasing at the rate of 20,000- 
25,000 volumes per year. The Library currently subscribes to over 4,000 periodicals and newspapers; 
backfiles in bound volumes and microforms represent approximately 11,000 titles. The Library has 
been a selective depository for U.S. government publications since 1%3; and a depository for 
California state documents since 1%5. Additionally, there are collections of documents of other 
states, of Great Britain and of major international agencies. The total document collection now 
numbers about 400,000 items. The Library has access to over 200 bibliographic data bases which 
can be searched via a computerized reference retrieval service. 

Materials for required and recommended classroom reading are made available for limited loan 
periods in the Reserve Book Room. For the Library user's conveniecKe, photocopying nwichines 
(including microform printers), typewriters, calculators, group study rooms and music listening 
booths are provided. 


26 


In addition to the many resources available on the campus, mutual use agreements make accessible 
to students and faculty the library collections of all of The California State University and Colleges; 
University of California, Irvine; University of California, Riverside; Fullerton College; and other local 
specialized colleges and universities. Interlibrary borrowing arrangements with major university 
libraries throughout the country expand further the research potential for the Cal State Fullerton 
community. 

Student Affirmative Action 

CORE (Comprehensive Outreach, Retention and Enhancement) Student Affirmative Action (SAA) 
is part of The California State University's systemwide Student Affirmative Action plan. This plan was 
mandated by the California Legislative in 1974 under Assembly Concurrent Resolution No. 151. 
The intent of this resolution was to address the underrepresentation of ethnic minority, women and 
economically disadvantaged students enrolled in California postsecondary Institutions. The Fullerton 
SAA program focuses on these and other underrepresented groups who are academically qualified 
and meet the system's regular admission requirements. SAA's program of outreach, retention and 
educational enhancement serves 11 high schools, five community colleges and 10 community 
agencies within the university's service area. 

The SAA outreach component provides community agencies, high school and community college 
students and their parents with information on higher education alternatives, admissions, financial 
aid, testing and other requirements and procedures. 

Retention efforts, in conjunction with existing services, focus on academic support services, personal 
and career development activities, and social and cultural experiences for SAA targeted students. 
Student Affirmative Action personnel recognize that students are more likely to succeed In an 
environment where they are treated with sensitivity and understanding. Educational enhancement 
workshops and other activities are planned by the SAA staff for faculty, staff and administrators. 
These workshops, and other activities that comprise the educational enhancement component, help 
to create a more sensitive environment for minority and underrepresented students. 

RESEARCH OFFICES 

Much and varied research is going on at Cal State Fullerton. Most of this is being done by individual 
faculty members and students as part of their scholarly and professional development activities. 
Research training is an important part of the education for more advanced work in rTK>st disciplines 
and professions, and many of our students are encouraged and assisted to learn and apply research 
skills in either independent or team projects. 

The Research Committee of the Faculty Council and the Office of Faculty Research provide stimulus, 
coordination and direction to the research efforts of the university. 

A Student Research Fellowship program and a Faculty Research Grant program award, at times, 
"seed grants" for research projects. The Departmental Associations Council (DAC) also allocates 
monies for student-initiated research. Services supporting research are given by the Cal State Fuller- 
ton Foundation, the university Computer Center, and the university Library. Augmenting the on- 
campus aids to research are the great and diverse resources available for study in the Southern 
California area. 

In addition grants are received from the Office of Academic Program Improvement of the Chancel- 
lor's Office. 

The university is particularly appreciative of the support money provided for faculty each year by 
the Friends of the State University. 

Office of Academic Data Systems and Institutional Research 
The Office of Academic Data Systems and Institutional Research serves as an information center 
and a problem-solving agency which collects, interprets and disseminates information. These data 
include enrollment histories and projections, distributions of data according to selected factors (e.g., 
level, type of instruction, unit value), summaries of student characteristics, and other statistics related 
to student population, course offerings and resources. Most of the data collection arxj analysts is 
related to the reporting requirenients of The California State University and other agencies. The office 
is also responsible for operation of computer-based systems dealing with curriculum and with 
faculty. 


27 


Office of Faculty Research 

The Office of Faculty Research provides personal assistance to faculty and staff in their efforts to 
obtain external funding for research and other creative activities. The office offers information on 
proposal writing and critiquing, helps to assemble teams for responding to requests for proposals, 
and serves as both an idea and technical support resource service. Budget development, proposal 
typing and duplicating services are also provided. 

INSTITUTES AND SPECIAL STUDY CENTERS 

A number of special centers with specific research objectives are operating at the university. These 
include the Center for Professional Development, the Center for Economic Education, the Interna- 
tional Business Center, Field Services and Professional Development Center, the Institute for Molecu- 
lar Biology, the Institute for Reading, the Sport and Movement Institute, the Institute for Early 
Childhood Education, the Laboratory for Phonetic Research, the Speech, Language and Hearing 
Clinics, the Institute of Geophysics, the Institute for Community Research and Development, and 
the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

Center for Professional Development 

The Center for Professional Development, housed within the School of Business Administration and 
Economics, provides a vehicle to serve the needs of the Orange County business community. The 
center's major activities fall into three areas: 

1. Professional developn^ent, personal finance and small business/entrepreneurship programs 
offered in conjunction with the Office of Extended Education in the areas of accounting, finance 
and real estate, managennent, management information systems, management science and 
marketing. 

2. In-house training and development programs to fit the specific needs of individual companies, 
government agencies, non-profit institutions, and other organizations. These programs vary in 
length from one-day seminars to extensive and ongoing training programs. 

3. Industry research and consulting projects utilizing the specialized faculty resources of the 
center on a project consulting basis. 

The operations of the Center for Professional Development are coordinated by the center's execu- 
tive director, who may be contacted directly corKerning the above mentior>ed programs or other 
new program possibilities. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers at colleges and universities in the 
United States working with the national joint Council on EcofK>mk:s Education and the Economic 
Literacy CourKil of California to expand ecoriomic understanding. Center programs include ( 1 ) 
services to schools and colleges, individual educators, and the community; (2) research and profes- 
sior^l training; and (3) operation of an ecorK>mic education information center. 

International Business Center 

The need for an international dimension to busir>ess education is underscored by the importarKe 
of international business operations to domestic firms and the development of multinational firms 
and agencies. Equally important is a growing awarer>ess of the diversity among the world's cultures 
and economies, and an understanding of an unavoidable interdependence between nations. The 
International Business Center has undertaken to meet these challenges in the international area by 
developing internatiorial business programs within the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
rK)mics. 

Field Services and Professional Development Center 

The Field Services Center is housed in the School of Human Development and Community Service. 
Established to provide nonprofit institutions and agencies with consultative services and educational 
programs, the Center can help solve existing problems and offer suggestions for more effective 
human services in Orange County and throughout Southern California. This evolving outreach 
program is specifically designed to interact with school districts, hospitals, human service agencies 
and nonprofit organizations. 


28 


Services offered by the center include: 

• Creating new educational programs to meet current needs 

• Providing qualified consultants on a variety of issues 

• Presenting courses at locations convenient for organizations 

• Co-sponsoring conferences on subjects related to human services 

• Assisting with applications for state and federal grants related to human service programs 
The Field Services and Professional Development Center works closely with the Office of Extended 
Education. Questions concerning operations may be directed to the Office of Extended Education 
or by contacting the executive director of the Field Services Center. 

Institute for Reading 

The Institute for Reading was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere congenial to 
research and creative activity for development of reading and related programs. In the fulfillment 
of this purpose, the institute is dedicated to the pursuit of issues encountered in teaching of reading 
to children and adults, using an interdisciplinary approach whenever feasible. 

The institute ( 1 ) encourages communication of ideas and information among its membership for 
mutual professional improvement; (2) encourages students to affiliate with members and to adopt 
an interdisciplinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) seeks ways of improving 
the professional skills of its membership through interdisciplinary communication; and (4) fosters 
research and creative activities. 

The Reading Clinic is located In the School of Human Development and Community Service. It 
serves as a clinic and laboratory for graduate students in the reading option of the Master of Science 
in Education, Reading and the Reading Specialist Credential. Children from community schools 
attend the Reading Clinic for diagnosis and remediation. 

Institute for Early Childhood Education 

The Institute for Early Childhood Education ( 1 ) fosters and encourages communication of ideas and 
Information among its membership for mutual professional development; (2) encourages its mem- 
bers to engage in research and writing related to the problems of early childhood education; (3) 
encourages students and teachers to adopt an approach of Inquiry to solve their professional 
concerns relating to the education of young children; and (4) seeks ways of improving the Individual 
teaching performance of its membership through communication with others at all levels of Instruc- 
tion. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 

The purposes of the institute are: (1) to foster and encourage communication of ideas and informa- 
tion among its membership for mutual professional improvement; (2) to encourage students to 
adopt affiliation with the membership and to adopt an interdisciplinary understanding of their 
particular areas of emphasis; (3) to foster an active research program on the part of the membership 
on problems best approached by the Integration of chemistry, physics and biology; and (4) to seek 
ways of Improving the individual teaching performance of its membership through interdisciplinary 
communication at all levels of Instruction. 

The Institute sponsors a series of special seminars devoted to topics in the nrK)lecular biological 
sciences, featuring speakers from its own personnel and from other campuses. 

Laboratory of Phonetic Research 

The Laboratory of Phonetic Research is a research and training facility in the Department of 
Linguistics. It Is equipped with electromechanical facilities for the acoustical, psychoacoustical, and 
physiological study of human speech. Its objectives are twofold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and experience to assist the language handicapped. 
Research. To provide advanced students and faculty with facilities for research on language 
function and dysfunction. 

Institute of Geophysics 

The Institute of Geophysics is an interdisciplinary organization currently comprised of faculty nnem- 
bers from the Departments of Earth Science and Physics. It was established to foster the communica- 
tion of ideas and information; encourage interdisciplinary research; and improve instruction in 


29 


geophysics. Membership is open to all faculty members who are interested in all aspects of geophy- 
sics. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. The sanctuary provides for a program of continuing educational service to the commu- 
nity; a research center for biological field studies; a facility for teacher education in nature 
interpretation and conservation education; and a center for training students planning to enter into 
the public service field of nature interpretation. 

Sport and Movement Institute 

The Sport and Movement Institute is concerned with human nwvement and endeavors to: ( 1 ) 
promote and support research and other scholarly activities on the part of the membership; (2) 
stimulate generation of new ideas and information; (3) interpret and disseminate research findings 
to facilitate application by practitioners; (4) provide the services of evaluation, consultation and 
advisement to members of the university and community at large: (5) provide opportunities for 
student participation in the activities of the institute. 

Speech, Language and Hearing Clinics 

The Speech, Language and Hearing Clinics operate as a nonprofit California State University, Fuller- 
ton Foundation agency, providing speech and hearing services for individuals with communication 
disorders. In addition it is an off-campus clinical program for graduate students that involve experi- 
efKes within n>edical and paranriedical settings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on campus 
and off campus is to provide opportunities for teaching, service and research. The on-campus clinic 
is accredited by the Board of Examiners of the American Speech and Hearing Association and the 
California State Department of Education. 

The Institute for Community Research and Development 

The purpose of the Institute is to make the research, scholarly, and professional resources of the 
university available to local communities. Technical and research expertise is provided through 
problem-oriented research projects, consulting, workshops, seminars, and conferences on critical 
local policy questions. 

The California Desert Studies Consortium 

The California Desert Studies Consortium consists of seven State University campuses including 
Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona, and San Bernardino. The 
primary objectives of this consortium are to promote and provide physical and academic support 
for undergraduate educational programs in a variety of disciplines and to better understand and 
manage the physical and biological aspects of desert environments. The newly developed CSU 
Desert Studies Center provides living and laboratory space for over 100 undergraduates at a time 
at Soda Springs in the Mojave Desert, a location central to all high desert study areas. 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium, which consists of six State University campuses 
(Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona), participates in training 
managers and scientists and in educating the general public by coordinating and facilitating marine 
educational and research activities. It provides facilities for introducing students to the marine 
environment or for intensive participation by students pursuing professional programs. The major 
facility is the R. V. Nautilus (Siy vessel) which is used by classes and research programs in biology, 
geology and ocean engineering. In addition the Consortium serves as an educational and research 
liason between regions, states and nations. 

CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, 

FULLERTON FOUNDATION 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was established and incorporated in October 
1959 to provide essential student faculty and staff services which cannot be provided from state 


30 


appropriations; to supplement the program and activities of the university in appropriate ways; and 
to assist otherwise the university in fulfilling its purposes and in serving the people of the State of 
California — especially those of the area in which the university is located. 

Services provided by the foundation Include administration of scholarship and student loan funds; 
sponsored research programs; Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary; and certain institutes. 

The foundation's overall policies are administered by a board of trustees composed of members of 
the university faculty, administration and students as well as community leaders. 

TITAN SHOPS, INC. 

Tiun Shops, Inc., Is comprised of the Titan Bookstore and food services and vending for the campus. 
Established and Incorporated in July 1971, it is administered by a board of trustees composed of 
members of the university faculty, administration, students and community business leaders. 

Titan Bookstore 

Students are able to purchase or order books and supplies as needed for classes from the on<ampus 
bookstore, owned and operated by Titan Shops, IrK. It is located in Commons I directly east of the 
University Center and west of the Library. 

Food Service 

Titan Shops, Inc., is responsible for the food service facilities on the campus. Titan Shops has a 
contract with Servomation to operate the campus food services and the vending machines on the 
campus. 


31 


STUDENT SERVICES 


While classroom activity is devoted to the academic development of the learner. Student Services 
offers programs which simultaneously provide students with services and opportunities for personal 
growth. Some Student Services programs such as housing and financial aid emphasize their service 
and educationally supportive roles; others, like counseling, accentuate their developmental aspects. 
The opportunities offered by the university's Student Services program vary from the traditional 
social activities to lectures and concerts funded through the Associated Students. Developmental 
activities include the exploration of personal and vocational life styles and holistic health. 

Student Services are comprised of the Career Development Center, Financial Aid, Handicapped 
Student Services, Health and Counseling Center, Housing and Transportation Office, International 
Education and Exchange Program, Testing and Research, University Activities Center, Associated 
Students, University Center (Student Union), Veterans' Services, Women's Center and Adult Re- 
entry Center. 

OFFICE OF THE DEAN 

The efforts of all of the Student Services are coordinated and supervised by the Dean of Student 
Services. The dean is responsible for the quality of student life on the campus and works with faculty, 
administration and students to improve the campus environment. The dean is aided by an assistant 
dean for programs and operations and an assistant dean for budget and personnel. Additionally, this 
office is charged with administering the university's academic appeals procedure and the student 
disciplinary codes. 

CAREER DEVELOPMENT CENTER 

The Career Development Center helps students within the context of their total educational develop- 
ment to define career goals and objectives and assists them In achieving these goals. In addition to 
its own resources, the center works closely with academic departments, the Academic Advisement 
Center, the Center for Cooperative Education and Internships, the Testing Center and other campus 
services to ensure that every student has an opportunity for career exploration and planning. The 
university believes that both students and employers are best served when graduates are placed in 
professions well suited to the student's interests, talents and education. All registered students are 
welcome to use the services of the center without cost. 

The university will furnish, upon request, information concerning the subsequent employment of 
graduates from programs or courses of study which have the purpose of preparing students for a 
particular career field. This information includes data concerning average starting salary and the 
percentage of previously enrolled students who obtained employment. The Information provided 
may Include data collected from either graduates of the campus or graduates of all campuses in The 
California State University. Copies of the published information may be requested from the director 
of the center. 

Career Development Services 

The Career Development Center assists students to explore and plan their career options. Profes- 
sional counselors help students evaluate personal values, skills and vocational interests through 
group and Individual counseling and testing. The center's System of Interactive Guidance and 
Information (SICI ) uses computer technology to provide students with a clear and easily understood 
ap)proach to the career decisiofvmaking process. A growing career library provides materials on 
career opportunities, labor market information, job search techniques and related topics. Information 
about careers in education, business, industry ar»d government is also available. 

Programs on career exploration are conducted throughout the year. Career information sessions 
introduce students to professionals working in a variety of fields. Career seminars offer assistance 
in goal setting and career decision making, job search techniques, interviewing skills, resume writing 
arxj graduate school application procedures. 

A course titled "Career Exploration and Life Planning" (Counseling 252) is taught each semester 
by the center's counselors. This three-unit course is offered through the School of Human Develop- 
ment and Community Service. 


32 Student Activities 


Part- Time Placement 

The center provides assistance for part-time or seasonal employment while attending the university. 
New students may contact the center regarding part-time employment after August 1 for the fall 
semester, or after January 1 for the spring semester. Listings for clerical workers, drivers, custodians, 
teacher aides, drafting, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, gardeners, and other jobs are 
received daily and posted in the center. 

Business, Industry and Government Placement 

Career placement counselors assist students and alumni who are seeking full-time employment in 
defining occupational preference, pursuing job leads and writing resumes. Each semester, the center 
coordinates an on-campus recruitment program in which employers interview students who are 
approaching graduation. 

Educational Placement 

Students in teacher education, pupil personnel services, or administration curricula of the university 
who are in the final semester of a credential, student teaching or directed fieldwork program are 
eligible for educational placement services. Counselors help students establish a professional em- 
ployment file, supply information about openings and assist in making referrals to school districts 
and educational institutions. 

Minority Relations 

Minority Relations is responsible for broadening the awareness of the entire community to the career 
development services available to all minorities and for encouraging minority students to register 
with the center for career counseling and placement services. Counselors offer information regarding 
opportunities available to minority students for graduate study. This resource includes financial aid 
information, application filing, recruitment sessions and personal contacts with those involved with 
graduate programs on other campuses. 

Minority Relations counselors work cooperatively with other staff specialists to help minority stu- 
dents utilize the various services of the center. 

TESTING AND RESEARCH 

Universitywide testing programs are coordinated and administered by the Testing Center. These 
include university admissions tests and general tests for graduate school admission. In addition, the 
Testing Center provides advice arni consulting services to instructional departments In the develop- 
ment and administration of admission, selection, and placement tests for use by a specific depart- 
ment or program. 

The Testing Center conducts ongoing research on the validity and appropriateness of tests used in 
university testing programs. It also designs and conducts surveys of student needs, attitudes, and 
other characteristics. 

Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions section of this 
catalog. Information about testing requirements for specific instructional programs is available in the 
appropriate instructional division or the Testing Center. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

The university recognizes the important role of extracurricular and cocurricular activities. An exten- 
sive organization of clubs, interest groups and committees exists within the student body and 
university structure. Opportunities for Involvement are available to every student according to 
interest, ability and available time. In addition, each academic departrrwnt has a student department 
association which provides informal contact with faculty, and opportunities for cocurricular acitivites 
related to majors or career interests. 

University Activities Center 

The University Activities Center provides opportunities to participate in and explore educaticmal, 
cultural and social activities at the university. 

The center provides programs to develop and strengthen management, leadership and organization- 
al skills. A professional staff offers advice in planning, budgeting and publicizing programs such as 


Student Activities 33 


lectures, culture weeks, symposia, special events and projects. The center also advises students and 
organizations on university policies and procedures and assists in arranging for the use of campus 
facilities. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations are vital to the total educational process. Organizations are recognized by the 
university in order to facilitate use of campus resources. The university supports and encourages 
student organizations. They are a vital part of our campus community. Any group of students may 
become a chartered organization, provided the goals and activities are consistent with university 
rules and regulations, by applying through the University Activities Center. Organizations are classi- 
fied under the following headings: (1 ) Academic (organizations which share learning goals with a 
specific department); (2) Religious; (3) Professional; and (4) Special Interest. 

More than 160 organizations are now recognized including several national social fraternities, 
national social sororities, a number of departmental associations and numerous special interest 
groups. 

Associated Students 

All students are members of the Associated Students, Inc., and are represented by the Associated 
Students Board of Directors and executive officers, who develop and maintain extracurricular 
programs of every type. Each year a budget is adopted in the spring which allocates anticipated 
activity fees and all other income to be derived from all programs during the following year. Directors 
are elected from various academic disciplines. The Departmental Associations Council is assigned 
a certain portion of the budget by the Board of Directors. The many departmental associations are 
established to promote closer relationships anrK>ng students and faculty of their departments and 
bring programs to the departments that might not be possible without such funding. Most depart- 
ments have established active associations. 

Student Government 

The Associated Students, Inc., is governed through the executive, legislative, and judicial branches 
of the Associated Students organization. The president and commissioners constitute the executive 
branch which has the responsibility for the development and administration of the program, includ- 
ing such activities as publications, intercollegiate athletics, intramural athletics, forensics, and music. 
The Associated Students Board of Directors has full responsibility for legislation by which this 
program is directed and for the allocation of student funds for the program. The judicial branch 
serves as a legal body for interpretation of the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student 
policies. 

Student Publications 

The university newspaper, the Daily Titan, is pHjblished as a product of communications classes. 

Men's Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams in baseball, basketball, football, golf, gymnas- 
tics, soccer, tennis, fecKing, water polo, cross<ountry, track and wrestling. A year-round program 
of intramural activities includes basketball, badminton, flag football, handball, softball, tennis and 
wrestling, swimming and weight lifting. 

The university is a member of the Pacific Q>ast Athletic Association (PCAA). All nrien's athletic 
tean>s compete under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA). 

Women's Athletics 

Major division athletic programs for women provide for participation in volleyball, basketball, 
softball, tennis, gymnastics, fencing, cross-country, track and field, and golf. The women's athletic 
program is a member of the Collegiate Athletic Association and Division I of the National Collegiate 
Athletic Association (NCAA). 

University Recreation Program 

Personal recreation and team and individual intramural activities are organized and administered by 
the University Recreation Program. The excellent physical education facilities of the university are 

2—76604 


34 Housing and Transportation 

made available to this program so that students have access to them seven days a week. Students 
have free use of these facilities. Students' family dependents also use them on purchase of a family 
membership. Intramural competition is provided in flag football, basketball, softball, wrestling, tennis 
and other sports. Many coed competitions are held each year. The University Recreation Program 
office is located in the Physical Education Building. 

Associated Students Productions 

Entertainment programs, lectures, films, and dance-concerts are produced by a committee of stu- 
dents appointed by the president of the Associated Students. Known as Associated Students Produc- 
tions, the committee selects, publicizes, produces and staffs outdoor concerts, concerts with major 
headline acts, intimate acts in the Pub, a film series with recent major releases, and a lecture program. 
Each activity is assigned to a subcommittee. Participation by any student interested in any phase of 
production is invited. 

Child Care Center 

Sponsored by the Associated Students, Inc., the Children's Center provides daytime nursery care for 
children of Cal State Fullerton students for a nominal fee. The professionally staffed center, located 
on the campus, is licensed by the State of California. 

Legal Information and Referral 

The Associated Students contracts with the College Legal Clinic, a Fullerton-based corporation to 
provide information on legal procedures and initial consultation on all types of legal matters. If 
desired, students are referred to Orange County attorneys for reduced fee services. A 24-hour 
"hotline" is maintained by the College Legal Clinic. 

Mutual Ticket Agency 

The Associated Students, through its business office, operates a ticket agency for the benefit of all 
students. Purchases for drama, music, shows and sporting events may be made during regular office 
hours. The agency is located in the University Center. 

Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized in 1%0 to provide the outside press with news of student 
activities on the campus. 

University Center 

Funded and operated entirely by student fees, the University Center offers a broad range of services 
and programs to the university community. Specific facilities include an eight-lane bowling center, 
craft center, main lounge, secondary lounge, games lounge, billiard parlor, meeting rooms, television 
room, organizational work space, multipurpose room, small theater, music-listening room, informa- 
tion center, three retail shops. Associated Students offices, sunken plaza, courtyard and food serv- 
ices. 

Departmental Association Council 

The Departmental Association Council represents academic /departmental student organizations on 
campus, the DAC supports student initiated programs such as symposia, films, lectures and student 
research. It operates from funds granted from the Associated Students and the university. 

Camp Titan 

Camp Titan is a camp for disadvantaged and underprivileged children of Orange County. Funded 
by the Associated Students and private donations, the student volunteers take between 75-125 
children for a week of camping in the mountains. 

HOUSING AND TRANSPORTATION 

The Housing Office is concerned with helping students locate housing accommodations suitable to 
their life styles. 

Services include: 

• Summer orientations to find housing in advarKe of the fall semester. 


Financial Aid 35 


• Lists of off-campus rooms, apartments and houses. 

• Information about the two off<ampus, privately owned and operated residence halls. 

• Bulletin boards for students seeking roommates. 

• A model rental agreement which represents the university's best recommendation to students. 

• Information about tenant rights and responsibilities. 

• Landlord /tenant mediation. 

• Community referrals. 

• A computerized car pool program. 

• Information and schedules for the Orange County Transit District. 

HEALTH AND COUNSELING CENTER 

The Student Health and Counseling Center is located on Gymnasium Campus Drive and is open from 
7:30 a.m. to 6 p.m., Mondays through Thursdays, and 7:30 a.m. to noon on Fridays. 

Doctors arKi nurses, laboratory and x-ray technologists, pharmacists, a physical therapist and aides 
are on duty. No one has access to a patient's medical records unless the patient gives permission 
for the transfer of records, or in the rare case, by a court subpoena. 

Most of the doctors are primary care physicians. In addition, there are gynecologists, an orthopedist, 
a dermatologist, an allergist and a podiatrist. The center has a pharmacy (not for outside prescrip- 
tions), a laboratory, an x-ray service, physical therapy, birth control counseling and nutritional 
counseling. 

The cost of care given in the Health Center, except for a few specific fees, has been paid through 
student fees and by the State of California. Every registered student is eligible for care. However, 
the Health and Counseling Center cannot meet all medical needs. Students are urged to obtain health 
insurance if they do not already have adequate private insurance. A good, inexpensive policy is 
offered through the Associated Students office. 

Students with emotional or personal problems may come to the Counseling and Mental Health 
Department where five psychological counselors and psychiatrists are available for consultations 
ar>d treatment when needed. There is no charge for service and all information is confidential and 
will not be released without the written consent of the students. 


FINANCIAL AID 

The following information concerning student financial assistance may be obtained from the Office 
of Financial Aid. 

Student financial assistance programs available are: 

National Direct Student Loan 
Guaranteed Student Loan 
Pell Grant 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant 

Bureau of Indian Affairs Grant 

College Work-Study Program 

Educational Opportunity Program Grant 

State University Grant Program 

State Scholarship 

College Opportunity Grant 

Graduate Fellowship 

Private Scholarship 

EmergefKy Loan Fund 

Following are the methods by which assistance is distributed amor^ student recipients. In order to 
receive financial aid the student must: 

1 . be a national of the United States, or be in the United States for other than a temporary purpose 
and interxi to become a permanent resident thereof, or be a permanent resident of the Trust 
Territory of the Pacific Islands (holders of student visas are rK)t eligible for aid); 

2. be accepted for enrollment as at least a half-time student, or in the case of a student already 
attending the institution, be enrolled and in good standing as at least a half-time student; 

3. maintain satisfactory progress in the course of study according to the standards and practices 


36 


Financial Aid 


of the institution; 

4. not be in default on any loan made from a student loan fund and not owe a refund on grants 
previously received; and 

5. be in ne^ of financial assistance in order to pursue a course of study at California State 
University, Fullerton. 

Eligibility is determined by a procedure called "'need analysis." When an application for aid is made, 
students provide information which is used to determine the financial situation. When all the 
Information is received, a budget is assigned to fit the student's particular situation. 

The information forms submitted are used to compute the financial strength of the family and/or 
student. A nationally accepted need analysis system, approved by the U. S. commissioner of 
education, is used. 

This analysis yields the amount the student and/or family is expected to contribute toward yearly 
costs. The family contribution is based upon the need analysis computation rather than the statement 
by the parents of ability to contribute. All students are expected to contribute toward their own 
expenses. 

The last step in the need analysis is to subtract from the budget the student /parent contribution. The 
remainder, if any, is known as "financial aid eligibility" or "financial need." Aid may not exceed 
this amount. 

In case the number of applications for NDSL or College Work-Study positions exceed the money 
available, preference will be given to those with the greatest financial aid eligibility. 

The means, including forms, by which application for student financial assistance is made and 
requirements for accurately preparing such application are: 

1 . Dependent Students, defined as those carried on their parents' income tax form last year, must 
submit: 

a. Student Aid Application for California; 

b. copy of parents' current 1040 income tax return form; 

c. processed Pell Grant application (if undergraduate); and 

d. if receiving social security, veterans' benefits, welfare, etc., a letter from the agency 
showing amounts payable. 

2. Independent Students, defined as those who have received no financial support from parents 
during the past year and who are not carried on the parents' income tax form, must submit: 

a. Student Aid Application for California; 

b. copy of student 1040 income tax return form; and 

c. processed Pell Grant form (if undergraduate). 

3. Application periods for general financial aid: 

from January 1 to March 1 for next academic year; 
from November 1 to November 1 5 for spring semester only; 
from March 1 to April 1 for summer sessions. 

4. Application for Pell Grants: 

Students obtain the application form from the Financial Aid Office and submit it to the 
address shown on the form itself, or check the appropriate item on the Student Aid Applica- 
tion for California. The response to the application, called the "Student Aid Report" (SAR), 
will be returned to the student. Bring all three copies of the SAR to the Financial Aid Office. 

5. Application for Guaranteed Student Loan: 

Applications are accepted after June 1 for the fall semester and academic year and December 
7 for the spring semester. 

6. Emergency loan applications are accepted when the emergency arises. 

7. Filling out the aid forms: 

a. Income figures for last year and the current year will need to be provided. Therefore, it 
is suggested that the student/parent gather together in one place both the current year's 
and last year's income tax returns. The student/parent will need to submit a copy of the 
current year's return. 

b. To complete the Student Aid Application for California use "0" where zero is meant, and 
enter "N/A" when a question is not applicable. 

Rights and Responsibilities of Students Receiving Aid 
Rights: 

1. All students are entitled to and are guaranteed fair and equitable treatment in the awarding of 


Handicapped Student Services 37 


financial aid. In addition, there shall be no discrimination of any kind. Appeals procedures exist 
for anyone who feels that a violation has occurred. Consult the director of financial aid. 

2. All students have the right to receive full and open information about various financial aid 
programs and their eligibility therefor, fn addition, they have the right to know the selection 
and review processes used in awarding financial aid. 

3. All students have the right to know the costs of attending the Institution, the refund policies 
in case of withdrawal, the academic programs offered by the university, the faculty and 
physical facilities of the institution and data regarding student retention at the university. 

Responsibilities: 

1. All financial aid recipients agree to carry and complete a specific number of units each 
semester, report graduation or withdrawal, and notify the Financial Aid Office of any changes 
in their financial or marital status, or unit load. 

2. Recipients of financial aid must use the funds only to meet education costs. Any other use of 
the funds is prohibited by law. 

3. Students receiving aid must maintain satisfactory academic progress. 

All students receiving financial aid are expected to maintain certain standards. A student Is consid- 
ered to be In good standing and maintaining satisfactory progress when enrolled In and successfully 
completing the number of units for which financial assistance Is being received. 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

The Office of International Education and Exchange is the principal office for information and 
assistance for all foreign nationals and those students who plan to study overseas. 

Foreign Students 

Each year the university attracts applications from persons In foreign countries and currently more 
than 50 nations are represented. Special services are provided for these students and include 
orientation to the university; assistance with the resolution of academic and personal problems; help 
to comply with governmental regulations; and initiation of cocurricular activities. The office prepares 
documents for entering the United States, applications for extensions of stay and change of status. 
Requested letters of standing for foreign consulates and Institutions are also provided. 

All foreign students are required to have proficiency in the use of the English language necessary 
for successful academic work and sufficient funds to cover all expenses of the first year at the 
university, including adequate health insurance coverage. An English placement examination is held 
before registration for all new students. (See section on admission of foreign students.) 

Study Overseas 

Information about opportunities to study in foreign universities is available in the Office. The director 
of international education and exchange coordinates the selection of students applying for admission 
to one of the foreign university programs operated by The California State University and Colleges. 
(See also section on International Programs.) 

A library of current programs sponsored by other institutions is maintained for student reference. 

HANDICAPPED STUDENT SERVICES 

Located In a custom designed Handicapped Student Center on the first floor of the Library, this office 
provides assistance and offers services to all handicapped /disabled students. The goal of this 
program is to make full educational, cultural, social and physical facilities of the university available 
to students with orthopedic and/or perceptual handicaps/disabilities. 

A full range of services is available in cooperation with other university departments — a learning 
resource center and lounge, priority registration, orientation, interpreters, attendant/ reader/ note- 
taker referral services, counseling, career planning, academic advisement, housing, transportation, 
handicapped parking and job placement. The purpose is to provide necessary services and assist- 
ance that will eliminate or significantly reduce barriers resulting from the mobility and perceptual 
problems encountered by most handicapped /disabled students. The program serves as a centralized 
source of information and provides Individual attention to students. It is staffed by personnel 
experienced in the particular needs of the handicapped /disabled. 


38 Adult Re-entry Center 

In order to sustain a quality program, this office needs and encourages the involvement and input 
from the students it serves. 

Information regarding special facilities and services available to handicapped students may be 
obtained from the Handicapped Student Center. 

ALUMNI AFFAIRS 

The Alumni Association was established to serve the general interests of the university, its administra- 
tion, faculty, student body and alumni. Anyone graduating from the university is automatically a 
member of the association. The association seeks to promote programs which support lifelong 
learning and good will In the community and to support fund-raising activities. 

The association provides a number of tangible benefits for members, publishes a quarterly newslet- 
ter, The Titan Alumni News, and honors outstanding student, staff, faculty and alumni achievement. 
Further information about membership and programs may be obtained by calling the Office of 
Alumni Affairs. 

OFFICE OF VETERANS' SERVICES 

The Office of Veterans' Services was established to aid and assist all veterans, who are not now 
participating in a postsecondary educational experience. Functioning under an institutional award 
from the U.S. Department of Education, the office is charged with the responsibilities of (1) 
outreach, (2) recruitment, (3) special programs and (4) counseling. In addition, it assists and aids 
veterans in registration, tutoring, benefit advisement, educational opportunities, housing and job 
placement (both on and off campus). 

The program director of veterans' services may be contacted in the Veterans' Services Office. 

WOMEN'S CENTER 

The Women's Center provides support, information and resources to help women explore the many 
options available today. Its goals are to provide: (Da caring, supportive atmosphere to help develop 
meaningful friendships, share experiences, and enhance personal growth; (2) information and 
referrals to community and campus agencies; (3) individual and group counseling; (4) expansion 
of self-competence in making personal, educational and career choices; and (5) programs and 
workshops which reflect the special concerns of women's changing life patterns. Though the 
Women's Center is designed to serve the specific needs of women, it Is open to all Interested men. 
For more information, visit or call the Women's Center. 

ADULT RE-ENTRY CENTER 

The Adult Re-entry Center (ARC) is a contact point for the adult student or prospective student who 
is seeking information about educational and career options. This program is designed to meet the 
special needs of people who have had a break In their education, and are now considering entering 
or re-entering college. ARC offers a variety of programs for the re-entry person, including peer 
counseling, workshops, support groups, and referrals to staff and faculty. Operating through the 
Women's Center ARC invites both women and men to participate In Its programs. Visit or call for 
more Information. 



ADMISSION 
REGISTRAnON 
RECORDS 
AND REGULATIONS 


40 


ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY 


OFFICE OF ADMISSIONS AND RECORDS 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for the administration of the admission, 
registration, records, and relations with schools and colleges programs and services for undergradu- 
ate and graduate students in the regular sessions of California State University, Fullerton. These 
programs and services are to provide preadmission guidance to prospective students; to provide 
current information about the university's curricula and requirements to school and college counsel- 
ors; to admit and readmit students within enrollment categories and priorities; to evaluate the 
applicability of undergraduate transfer credit toward all-university requirements of the curriculum; 
to provide liaison in the identification and resolution of articulation problems of transfer students; 
to register student programs of study, including enrollment into classes; to maintain academic 
records; to administer academic probation and disqualification policies; to provide enrollment 
certifications on student request, including transcripts of academic records, to the Veterans Adminis- 
tration and for other purposes; to certify the completion of degree and credential requirements; to 
receive petitions for exceptions to academic regulations; and to provide information about these 
programs and services. 

ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES AND POLICIES 

Requirements for admission to California State University, Fullerton are in accordance with Title 5, 
Chapter 1 , Subchapter 3, of the California Administrative Code. If you are unsure of your status under 
these requirements please consult a high school or college counselor or our admissions office. 
Applications may be obtained from the admissions office at any of the campuses of The California 
State University or at any California high school or community college. 

Undergraduate Application Procedures 

All prosp)ective students must file an application form, with fee, as described in the application 
booklet. This is true for all students: part-time, full-time, in day or evening classes. The $30 application 
fee, which cannot be refunded, should be in the form of a check or money order payable to The 
California State University (CSU) and cannot be used to apply to another term. 

You may file an application at your first-choice campus of the CSU only. You may list an alternative 
major and an alternative campus, or both, on your application form. But you should list only 
alternatives in the CSU that you will accept if your first choice campus cannot accommodate you. 
Usually, you will be considered by your first-choice campus in an alternative major before we send 
your application to an alternative campus. Such consideration is automatic. 

Postbaccalaureate and Graduate Application Procedures 

All applicants for any type of postbaccalaureate or graduate status (e.g., master's degree applicants, 
those seeking credentials, and those interested in taking courses for personal or professional growth) 
must file, within the appropriate filing period, a complete application including all of the required 
forms and fees described in the application booklet. Those who completed undergraduate degree 
requirements and graduated the preceding term must also complete and submit an application and 
the $30 nonrefundable fee. Since applicants for postbaccalaureate programs may be limited to the 
choice of a single campus on each application, redirection to alternative campuses or later changes 
of campus choice will be minimal. Applicants who wish to be assured of initial consideration by more 
than one campus, should submit a separate application (including fee) to each. 
Postbaccalaureate applicants seeking second baccalaureates are considered undergraduate appli- 
cants for purposes of application and admission procedures. 

Application materials may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and Records or the Graduate 
Studies Office of any of the campuses of The California State University. 

Admission Categories; Impacted Programs 

Admission categories and program limits have been established by some campuses, in some majors, 
where the number of applicants is expected to exceed campus resources. At Fullerton, categories 
have been established for students who are: first-time freshmen; freshmen and sophomore under- 


Admissions Procedures 41 


graduate transfer applicants; junior and senior undergraduate transfer applicants; impacted program 
applicants; special program applicants; hardship applicants; and foreign students. Also, there are 
program limits in some graduate programs. 

After admission and enrollment, requests for change to a different (I.e., a new) academic objective 
Involving established admission categories will be evaluated following policies and procedures 
parallel to those for new students. 

Impacted programs are those In which applications received in the first month of the filing period 
exceed the total spaces available, either locally (at an individual campus) or systemwide. You must 
make application for an impacted program during the first month of the filing period and may file 
more than one application and fee. Nonresidents, foreign or domestic, usually are not considered 
for admission to impacted programs. 

High school and community college counselors are advised before the opening of the fall filing 
period which programs will be impacted. 

Supplementary Admission Criteria 

Each campus with Impacted programs uses supplementary admission criteria in screening applicants. 
Campuses are authorized to use a freshman applicant's ranking on the eligibility Index, the transfer 
applicant's overall grade-point average, or a combination of campus-developed supplementary 
criteria in selecting those to be admitted. If you are a freshman applicant and plan to apply to an 
impacted program, you should take the ACT or SAT test at the earliest date. Your test scores and 
your grades earned In the final three years of high school may be used in determining admission 
to the program. The supplementary admission criteria used by the individual campuses to screen 
applicants appear periodically In the CSU School and College Review are sent by the campuses 
to all applicants seeking admission to an impacted program. 

Unlike unaccommodated applicants to locally impacted programs, who may be redirected to 
another campus in the same major, unaccommodated applicants to systemwide impacted programs 
may not be redirected In the same major but may choose an alternative major either at the first 
choice campus or another campus. 

At the time of the preparation of this catalog, the undergraduate majors in business administration 
(all concentrations) and In computer science at Fullerton were declared impacted as defined In this 
section. 

How to Apply 

1 . Submit a completed application for admission within the announced filing period accompanied 
by the required application fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. Request required transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from each school or 
college attended when asked to do so by the admissions office. The transcripts required at 
Fullerton are: 

— for undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 transferable semester units — 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended. 

— for undergraduates with 56 or more transferable semester units — 

(a) a transcript from each college or university attended. 

— for graduates — 

(a) applicants for unclassified postbaccalaureate standing with no degree or credential 
objective must submit a transcript from the college or university where the baccalaure- 
ate was earned. Further, one transcript from other institutions attended is required as 
necessary so that the university has a complete record of the last 60 semester units 
attempted prior to enrollment at Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master's degree or teaching credential, or both, must submit two copies 
of the transcript from each college or university attended. 

Note: In addition, all students should have a personal set of college transcripts for advising purposes. 
All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institutions and become official 
records of the university; such transcripts therefore cannot be returned or reissued. Foreign 
language transcripts must be accompanied by certified English translations. 


42 Admission of First-Time Freshmen 

3. All undergraduate students who have completed fewer than 56 semester or 84 quarter units 
of transferable work are required to submit scores from either one of two national testing 
programs before eligibility for admission to the university can be determined. This requirement 
does not affect undergraduate students who have previously attended Fullerton and who have 
submitted ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Registration forms and test dates for either test may be obtained from school or college 
counselors, from the address below, or from campus testing offices. For either test, submit the 
registration form and fee at least one month prior to the test date. 

ACT Address SAT Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. College Entrance Examination Board 

Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 P.O. Box 592 

Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Princeton, New Jersey 08541 

Applicants to classified graduate curricula must submit the scores of any qualifying examina- 
tions required in their prospective programs of study. 

Application Filing Periods 

Terms Filing Period Begins 

Fall The previous November 

Spring The previous August 

Applicants who file by June 1 for fall terms, or by November 
early registration (by mail) for classes. 

Space Reservations 

Applicants who can be accommodated will receive letters acknowledging their application. The 
letters are not statements of admission but are commitments by Cal State Fullerton to admit the 
applicants who establish their eligibility for admission. The acknowledgment letters direct applicants 
to arrange to have appropriate records forwarded promptly to the admissions office. Applicants 
should not request that any records be forwarded until they have received a space reservation 
notice. Space reservation notices are mailed by the university to those who apply In November for 
fall terms in December, and to those who apply in August for spring terms in September. Applicants 
filing after initial filing periods will normally receive their acknowledgments within two weeks of the 
receipt of their applications. 

Space reservations may not be transferred to other terms or campuses. 

Hardship Petitions 

Fullerton has established procedures to consider qualified applicants who would be faced with an 
extreme hardship if not admitted. Prospective hardship petitioners should write to the director of 
admissions regarding specific policies governing hardship admission. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRST-TIME FRESHMEN 

We need to know two things about you to learn If you are eligible to enroll as a freshman: ( 1 ) your 
high school grade-point average (for the final three years of high school, not counting physical 
education or military science) and (2) either your composite score from the American College Test 
(ACT) or your total score from the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). We use these to figure an 
eligibility Index. You can calculate your index by multiplying your grade-point average by 200 and 
adding 10 times your ACT composite. Or, if you took the SAT, multiply your grade-point average 
by 800 and add your SAT total score. 

Residents — If you graduated from a California high school or are a legal resident of California for 
tuition purposes, you need a minimum eligibility Index of 741 using the ACT or 3072 using the SAT. 
The following table shows examples of grade-point averages and test scores needed to qualify. 

If your high school grade-point average as defined above Is better than 3.2 you are not required to 
submit test scores for admission purposes. 


Filing Period Duration 

Until application 

categories are filled 

1 for spring terms, may participate in 


Admission of First-Time Freshmen 43 


Nonresidents — If you are neither a graduate of a California high school nor a resident for tuition 
purposes, you need a minimum eligibility index of 826 (ACT) or 3402 (SAT). 

If your high school grade-point average as defined above is better than 3.6 you are not required to 
submit test scores for admission purposes. 

Eligibility Index Alternative — an alternative to calculating an eligibility index, California resi- 
dents (or graduates of California high schools) may use the following table to determine their 
eligibility. 


ADMISSIONS TABLE FOR CALIFORNIA HIGH SCHOOL GRADUATES 
OR CALIFORNIA LEGAL RESIDENTS 



ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

(— ) • 



2.80 

19 

832 

2.39 

27 

1160 

3.20 

11 

512 

2.79 

19 

840 

2.38 

27 

1168 

3.19 

11 

520 

2.78 

19 

848 

2.37 

27 

1176 

3.18 

11 

528 

2.77 

19 

856 

2.36 

27 

1184 

3.17 

11 

536 

2.76 

19 

864 

2.35 

28 

1193 

3.16 

11 

544 

2.75 

20 

872 

2.34 

28 

1200 

3.15 

12 

552 

2.74 

20 

880 

2.33 

28 

1208 

3.14 

12 

560 

2.73 

20 

888 

2.32 

28 

1216 

3.13 

12 

568 

2.72 

20 

8% 

2.31 

28 

1224 

3.12 

12 

576 

2.71 

20 

904 

2.30 

29 

1232 

3.11 

12 

584 

2.70 

21 

912 

2.29 

29 

1240 

3.10 

13 

592 

2.69 

21 

920 

2.28 

29 

1248 

3.09 

13 

600 

2.68 

21 

928 

2.27 

29 

1256 

3.08 

13 

608 

2.67 

21 

936 

2.26 

29 

1264 

3.07 

13 

616 

2.66 

21 

944 

2.25 

30 

1272 

3.06 

13 

624 ^ 

2.65 

22 

952 

2.24 

30 

1280 

3.05 

14 

632 

2.64 

22 

960 

2.23 

30 

1288 

3.04 

14 

640 

2.63 

22 

968 

2.22 

30 

12% 

3.03 

14 

648 

2.62 

22 

976 

2.21 

30 

1304 

3.02 

14 

656 

2.61 

22 

984 

2.20 

31 

1312 

3.01 

14 

664 

2.60 

23 

992 

2.19 

31 

1320 

3.00 

15 

672 

2.59 

23 

1000 

2.18 

31 

1328 

2.99 

15 

680 

2.58 

23 

1008 

2.17 

31 

1336 

2.98 

15 

688 

2.57 

23 

1016 

2.16 

31 

1344 

2.97 

15 

6% 

2.56 

23 

1024 

2.15 

32 

1352 

2.% 

15 

704 

2.55 

24 

1032 

2.14 

32 

1360 

2.95 

16 

712 

2.54 

24 

1040 

2.13 

32 

1368 

2.94 

16 

720 

2.53 

24 

1048 

2.12 

32 

1376 

2.93 

16 

728 

2.52 

24 

1056 

2.11 

33 

1384 

2.92 

16 

736 

2.51 

24 

1064 

2.10 

33 

1392 

2.91 

16 

744 

2.50 

25 

1072 

2.09 

33 

1400 

2.90 

17 

752 

2.49 

25 

1080 

2.08 

33 

1408 

2.89 

17 

760 

2.48 

25 

1088 

2.07 

33 

1416 

2.88 

17 

768 

2.47 

25 

10% 

2.06 

33 

1424 

2.87 

17 

776 

2.46 

25 

1104 

2.05 

34 

1432 

2.86 

17 

784 

2.45 

26 

1112 

2.04 

34 

1440 

2.85 

18 

792 

2.44 

26 

1120 

2.03 

34 

1448 

2.84 

18 

800 

2.43 

26 

1128 

2.02 

34 

1456 

2.83 

18 

808 

2.42 

26 

1136 

2.01 

34 

1464 

2.82 

18 

816 

2.41 

26 

1144 

2.00 

35 

1472 

2.81 

18 

824 

2.40 

27 

1152 

(-) t 




• Above 3 JO eligible with any score, 
t Below 2.0 not eligible 


Early Admission 

California State University, Fullerton will authorize an early admission commitment to students 
whose grade-point average in the 10th and 1 1th grades of high school is 3.75 or better in all course 
work, except military science and physical education. Students given an early admission commit- 
ment notice are assured admission upon graduation from high school. Interested high school stu- 
dents may inquire about the program at the Office of Admissions and Records. 


44 Admission of First-Time Freshmen 


Graduates of Secondary Schools in Foreign Countries 

Applicants who are graduates of foreign secondary schools must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The university will carefully review the previous 
record of all such applicants and only those with promise of academic success equivalent to that 
of eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. 

Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 18 years of age, but who have not graduated from high school, will be considered 
for admission as first-time freshmen only when preparation in all other ways is such that the 
university believes promise of academic success Is equivalent to that of eligible California high school 
graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for enrollment in certain special programs, 
including summer session, if recommended by their principal and if in the judgment of the appropri- 
ate academic department and the Office of Admissions and Records their preparation is equivalent 
to that required of eligible California high school graduates. Such admission is only for a given course 
or program; students must apply for admission as freshmen to enroll after high school graduation. 


NEW ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS EFFECTIVE FALL 1984 

Additional admission requirements become effective for first-time freshman applicants for 
fall 1984 and later. In addition to the grade-point average and test score requirements 
described above, the first-time freshman applicant must complete eight semesters of 
college preparatory English and four semesters of college preparatory mathematics (in- 
cluding algebra and geometry) during secondary school. 

A few applicants may not have had the opportunity to take all of the required courses 
by 1984. The CSU will make some exceptions tp the subject requirements during 1984-85 
and 1985-86 for those who cannot complete all of them in the time remaining in high 
school. 


Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and a test score giving evidence of 
academic potential provide the best bases for predicting success at Cal State Fullerton. While no 
specific course pattern is required until fall 1984, all prospective freshmen are strongly encouraged 
to Include the following subjects in their preparation for work at Cal State Fullerton: college prepara- 
tory English; another language; mathematics, including algebra and geometry; laboratory science; 
history or social science (or both); and study in speech, music, art and other subjects contributing 
to a well-rounded academic background. 

In addition to the foregoing general recommendations for preparation for university studies, the 
members of the faculty In certain departments have made further specific recommendations for 
those considering majoring in the following fields of study. 

Business Administration: A minimum of three years of mathematics including a second course in 
algebra; four years strongly encouraged. 

ElemenUry Credential Candidates: Algebra, geometry, one year of natural science 
recommended. 

Engineering: Algebra (two years), geometry, trigonometry, and one year of chemistry. One year 
of physics, and additional mathematics are desirable. Also, foreign languages are desirable, but not 
required. 

English: A minimum of four years of English courses, each course emphasizing basic elements of 
essay writing, two courses joining composition work to the analysis and Interpretation of literature. 


Admission of Undergraduate Transfer Students 45 

Foreign Language: Up to five years in the proposed language of study. 

Mathematics: Four years of mathematics including geometry, trigonometry, and two years of 
algebra. 

Religious Studies: A minimum of three years of English, four years strongly encouraged. Compara- 
tive religion or the Bible as English literature if offered. 

Science: Four years of mathematics, three years of foreign language, and a year of chemistry are 
strongly recommended. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGRADUATE 
TRANSFER STUDENTS 

If you are in good standing at the last college or university attended, you are eligible for admission 
if you meet either of the following provisions: 

1. you are eligible as a freshman (see freshman requirements) and have a grade-point average 
of C (2.0 where A equals 4.0) or better In all transferable college units attempted, or 

2. you have completed at least 56 transferable semester units, or 84 transferable quarter units, with 
a grade-point average of C or better if a California resident; nonresidents must have a grade- 
point average of 2.40 or better. 

If you are transferring from a California community college you should ask your counselor about 
transferability of courses. 

Visitor Enrollment 

Students enrolled at other campuses of The California State University may enroll at Fullerton while 
concurrently enrolled at their home campus or as visitors. Information about eligibility requirements, 
enrollment conditions, and application forms are available from the office of admissions and records 
at the home campus. 

Other Applicants 

Applicants not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll In a community college 
or other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual circumstances, and then only by 
special action, will such applicants be permitted to enroll In the university. 


SPECIAL NOTICE TO ALL FRESHMAN AND SOPHOMORE APPLICANTS 

All entering freshman and sophomore students must complete the CSU English Placement 
Test. The test requirement applies to all lower division students (those who enroll with 
fewer than 56 transferable semester units) with the exception of students who present: 

• satisfactory scores on the CSU English Equivalency Examination (such students are 
notified by mail). 

• scores of 3, 4 or 5 on the English Composition Examination of the College Board 
Advance Placement Program. 

• a score of 600 or above on the College Board Achievement test in English Composi- 
tion with essay. 

• a score of 510 or above on the Verbal section of the College Board Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT-Verbal). 

• a score of 23 or above on the ACT English Usage Test. 

• completion of an acceptable college course in English composition of three semester 
units with a grade of C or better. 

The results of this test do not affect admissions eligibility. For those who are required to 
take the examination, it is a prerequisite to English 99, English 101 and Communications 
103. The results will be used, however, to provide information to the university and to 
students to aid in the selection of courses in writing skills and to prepare for the graduation 
requirement in writing. The Office of Admissions and Records will mail announcements 
about the test to eligible freshmen and sophomores. 


46 Admission of Students from Other Countries 


SPECIAL NOTICE TO ALL UNDERGRADUATE APPLICANTS 

All undergraduate students entering Cal State Fullerton in the fall semester 1983 and later 
must demonstrate basic competence in mathematics. New freshmen and transfer students 
may do so by completing successfully the CSU Entry-level Mathematics Examination 
( ELM ) . They may do so by either completing with a grade of C or better a certified general 
education course in mathematics (intermediate algebra or above) or by successfully 
completing the ELM Examination or an approved alternative examination. 

Information bulletins about the ELM Examination will be mailed to all students subject to 
the requirement. Those required to take the examination should do so as soon as possible 
after admission (the results do not affect eligibility for admission). Students who do not 
demonstrate basic competence in mathematics on the examination are required to take 
steps to overcome deficiencies early in their university enrollment and need to know that 
course work undertaken to acquire the required competence will not apply to bachelor's 
degrees. 


ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR POSTBACCALAUREATE 
AND GRADUATE STUDENTS 

Postb^ccaUureate Uncljssitted~~\ou qualify for admission as an unclassified postbaccalaureate 
student if you ( 1 ) hold an acceptable bachelor's degree from a regionally accredited institution or 
have equivalent preparation as determined by the appropriate campus authority; (2) have a grade- 
point average of at least 2.50 (A equals 4.0) in your last 60 semester (90 quarter) units; and (3) 
are in good standing at the last college you attended. In unusual circumstances, the campus may 
make exceptions to these criteria. 

Admission to California State University, Fullerton with postbaccalaureate unclassified standing does 
not constitute admission to graduate degree curricula. 

Postbjccjihurejte CUssif/ed—\i eligible in unclassified standing, you may qualify for classified 
postbaccalaureate standing to enroll in a credential or certificate program, provided you satisfy the 
additional professional, personal, scholastic, and other standards, including qualifying examinations, 
as the appropriate campus authority may prescribe. 

Crddudte Conditiondty CUssified^i eligible for admission in postbaccalaureate unclassified 
standing, but with deficiencies that in the opinion of the appropriate campus authority you can meet 
by additional preparation, you may qualify for admission to a graduate degree curriculum as a 
conditionally classified graduate. 

Crjdujte Classified — If eligible for admission in postbaccalaureate unclassified standing, you may 
qualify for a graduate degree curriculum as a classified graduate student if you satisfactorily meet 
the professional, personal, scholastic and other standards for admission, including qualifying exami- 
nations, as the appropriate campus authority may prescribe.Only those applicants who show prom- 
ise of success and fitness will be admitted to graduate degree curricula, and only those who continue 
to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic comp)etence and fitness shall be eligible to proceed 
In such curricula. 

Second Master's Degree — ^A graduate student desiring to work for a second master's degree or 
second concentration must request permission before applying for admission. See the "Graduate 
Regulations" section of this catalog. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR STUDENTS FROM OTHER 
COUNTRIES 

Normally, the university accepts for consideration only two categories of applicants with foreign 
student visas; 

1 . those who have completed, with a good academic record, a two-year program in an accredited 
institution of higher education; or 

2. those who have completed a bachelor's degree or its equivalent, with a good academic record, 
in an accredited institution and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

Persons applying from their home countries are normally considered for admission to the fall 
semester only. Those transferring from U.S. institutions may apply to the fall or spring semesters. 


Genera! Information About Admission 47 


All applicants whose native language is other than English are required to present a satisfactory score 
on the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin 
of Information and registration forms well in advance. Copies of this bulletin and registration forms 
are often available at American embassies and consulates, offices of the United States Information 
Service, United States educational commissions and foundations abroad, bi-national centers, and 
several private organizations. Those who cannot obtain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information 
should write to: Test of English as a Foreign Language, Box 899, Princeton, New jersey, U.S.A. 08541 . 
Application procedures In other respects are the same as for other students, except that transcripts 
of educational documents in languages other than English must be accompanied by translations into 
English certified by independent agencies. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR SUMMER SESSION 
STUDENTS 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as In the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses In the summer session. Students normally must be high school graduates, 
however, and are expected to have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses In which they register. 
In addition, students are expected to file a request to register In the summer session. Admission to 
summer session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A Student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return after an absence of more than one 
semester, must file a new application for admission. A student absent for one semester, and who 
enrolls elsewhere In the interim, must also file an application for readmission. Unless a leave of 
absence was granted, catalog requirements at the time of readmisslon will apply. Please see the 
"Stop-Out Policy" section in the regulations subchapter of this catalog for further information on 
applications for readmission. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be readmitted provided any academic work 
attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change his or her scholastic status. Tran- 
scripts of the record of any work attempted in the interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of the last enrollment will be readmitted on probation provided 
he or she is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken during 
the absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. Ordinarily the univer- 
sity will consider an application for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent for a 
minimum of one year following disqualification and has fulfilled all recommended conditions. In 
every instance, readmission is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed else- 
where after disqualification, that in the judgment of the university warrants such action. If readmitted, 
the student is placed on scholastic probation. 

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ADMISSION AND 
EVALUATIONS OF ACADEMIC RECORDS 

Records Retention 

The university retains the admissions materials for those who apply but who for whatever reason 
do not enroll for two years. For those who do enroll the university will retain the materials in student 
folders, including transcripts of the record of work completed elsewhere, for five years beyond the 
date of last attendance. 

Records of academic performance at California State University, Fullerton, including individual 
student records, faculty grade lists, and graduation lists are kept permanently. 


48 Genera! Information About Admission 


Determination of Residence for Nonresident Tuition Purposes 
New and returning students of The California State University are classified for the purpose of 
determining the residence of each student for nonresident tuition purposes. Responses to items on 
the Application for Admission and, if necessary, other evidence furnished by the student are used 
in making this determination. A student may not register and enroll in classes until responses to these 
items have been received by the admissions office. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determination for nonresident tuition 
purposes is not a complete discussion of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their 
exceptions. The law governing residence determination for tuition purposes by The California State 
University is found in the Education Code, Sections 68000-68090, 90403, 89705-89707.5, 68123 
68124, and 68121, and in Title 5 of the California Administrative Code, Article 4 (commencing with 
Section 419(X)) of Subchapter 5 of Chapter 1, Part V. A copy of the statutes and regulations is 
available for inspection at the campus admissions office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who is physically present in the state while, at the 
same time, intending to make California his or her permanent home. Steps must be taken at least 
one year prior to the residence determination date to evidence the intent to make California the 
permanent home with concurrent relinquishment of the prior legal residence. An intention to 
establish and maintain California residence can be shown by registering to vote and voting in 
elections in California; satisfying resident California state income tax obligations on total income; 
ownership of residential property or continuous occupancy or letting of an apartment on a lease basis 
where one's permanent belongings are kept; maintaining active resident memberships in California 
professional or social organizations; maintaining California vehicle plates and operator's license; 
maintaining active savings and checking accounts in California banks; maintaining permanent mili- 
tary address and home of record in California if one is in the military service, etc. 

The student within the state for educational purposes only does not gain the status of resident 
regardless of the length of the stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years of age) derives legal residence from his 
or her parents, or, in the case of permanent separation of the parents, from the parent with whom 
the minor maintains the place of abode. The residence of a minor cannot be changed by act of the 
minor or that of the minor's guardian, so long as the minor's parents are living. 

A man or a woman may establish his or her residence; marriage Is not a governing factor. 
Nonresident students seeking reclassification are required by law to complete a supplemental 
questionnaire concerning financial Independence. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California resident for at least one year 
immediately preceding the residence determination date in order to qualify as a resident student for 
tuition purposes. At the Fullerton campus, the residence determination date for fall terms is Septem- 
ber 20, and for spring terms Is January 25. 

There are several exceptions for nonresident tuition. Some of the exceptions provide for: 

1 . Persons below the age of 1 9 whose parents were residents of California but who left the state 
while the student was still a minor. When the minor reaches age 18, the exception continues 
for one year to enable the student to qualify as a resident student. 

2. Persons who have been present In California with the Intent of acquiring residence for more 
than a year before the residence determination date, and entirely self-supporting for that 
period of time. 

3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and been under the continuous direct care 
and control of an adult not a parent for the two years Immediately preceding the residence 
determination date. Such adult must have been a California resident for the most recent year. 

4. Dep)endent children and spouses of persons in active military service stationed in California 
on the residence determination date. This exception applies only for the minimum time 
required for the student to obtain California residence and maintain that residence for a year. 
The exception, once attained, is not affected by transfer of the military person directly to a 
post outside the state. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in California on the residence determination date 
for purposes other than education at state-supported institutions of higher education. This 
exception applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California 
residence and maintain that residence for a year. 

6. A student who is an adult alien is entitled to residence classification if the student has been 


Genera! Information About Admission 49 


lawfully admitted to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applica- 
ble provisions of the laws of the United States; provided, however, that the student has had 
residence in California for more than one year after such admission prior to the residence 
determination date. A student who is a minor alien shall be entitled to residence classification 
if both the student and the parent from whom residence is derived have been lawfully 
admitted to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applicable laws 
of the United States, provided that the parent has had residence in California for more than 
one year after acquiring such permanent residence prior to the residence determination date 
of the term for which the student proposes to attend the university. 

7. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of California school districts. 

8. Full-time California State University employees and their children and spouses. This exception 
applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California residence and 
maintain that residence for a year. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

10. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were 
California residents, and who were killed In the course of law enforcement or fire suppression 
duties. 

Any student, following a decision on the residence classification, may request a review of the 
decision by the dean of admissions and records. Following a final decision on the Fullerton campus, 
the student may make written apF>eal to: 

The California State University 
Office of the General Counsel 
400 Golden Shore 
Long Beach, California 90802 

within 1 20 calendar days of notification of the final decision on campus of the classification. The 
Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the Issue, or it may send the matter back to 
Fullerton with instructions for further review. Students classified irKorrectly as residents or incorrect- 
ly granted an exception from nonresident tuition are subject to reclassification as nonresidents and 
payment of nonresident tuition in arrears. If incorrect classification results from false or concealed 
facts, the student is subject to discipline pursuant to Section 41301 of Title 5 of the California 
Administrative Code. Resident students who become nonresidents, and nonresident students quali- 
fying for exceptions whose basis for so qualifying changes, must immediately notify the admissions 
office. Applications for a change in classification with respect to a previous term are not accepted. 
The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding residency determination is by no 
means a complete explanation of their meaning. Changes may have been made in the rate of 
nonresident tuition, in the statutes, and in the regulations between the time this catalog is published 
and the relevant residence determination date. 

Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the university as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching credential 
program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must apply to the Division of 
Teacher Education following procedures available from the division. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student admitted to the university for a given semester but who does not register in the specified 
semester will have the admission canceled. The student must file a new application form when again 
seeking admission and must follow the complete application procedure and meet the then current 
admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer students who have demonstrated 
outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time freshmen with no previous college 
units earned, a grade point of 3.5 on a five-point scale must be earned in the course work considered 
for admission to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 56 transferable semester 
units of credit must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also have 
earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all college work attempted. Students who have completed 56 
or more transferable semester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3.5 is earned in all college 
work completed. 


50 Genera! Information About Admission 


Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions and Records will evaluate previous college work In relation to the require- 
ments of Fullerton. All degree candidates will be issued a credit summary during the first semester 
of attendance which serves as a basis for determining remaining requirements for the student's 
specific objectives. The admissions office will convert quarter units of credit transferred to the 
university to semester units by multiplying quarter-unit totals by two-thirds. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student enrolls at the date 
specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student will 
not be held to additional graduation requirements unless such requirements become mandatory as 
a result of changes in the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been granted a formal 
leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmisslon will specify the remaining requirements 
for the student's objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office of Admissions and Records 
immediately of a change in the objective specified in the evaluation. While the evaluation for a 
student remains valid, the student Is held responsible for complying with ail changes in regulations 
and procedures which may appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than course work identified by such 
institutions as remedial or in other ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the 
satisfaction of baccalaureate degree and credential requirements at the university within limitations 
of residence requirements and community college transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a Community College 

Upper division credit Is not allowed for courses taken In a community college. Credential credit is 
not allowed for courses In professional education taken in a community college. This does not 
Invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a community college, such as introduction to 
education, art or design, arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 
70 units of college credit at a community college, no further community college units may be 
accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Noncollegiate Instruction 

Students who have been in active military service for at least one year may be granted six or 12 units 
of undergraduate credit. Courses taken in military service schools and other noncollegiate institutions 
may be given credit on the basis of an evaluation which determines that they are of university level 
as recommended by the Commission on Educational Credit and Credentials of the American Council 
on Education. Any credit for such experience will be given only upon request. Records verifying such 
experience must be filed with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses which may be 
allowed toward the bachelor's degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses In the advanced placement program of the 
College Entrance Examination Board (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit 
for each advanced placement course toward graduation, advanced placement In the university's 
sequence of courses, and credit for curriculum requirements. 


Advanced Placement 
Course 


Equivalent 
Course: CSUF 


Semester 

Units 


American History 
Art History 


Studio Art 


History 170AB 
Art 201 B 
Art 103 or 104 


6 

3-6* 


* Consuh the Department of Art for appIkabiiitY of advanced placement examination credit 


Genera! Information About Admission 51 


Art 107A or 107B 


Biology 

Biological Science 101 

4** *** 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 120A,B 
(lecture) 


English 

English 101 

3 


English no. 111, or 112 

3 

European History 

History 11 OB 

3 

French 

French 101, 102 

10 

German 

German 101, 102 

10 

Latin 4 

Utin 101 

3 

Latin 5 

Utin 101, 102 

6 

Mathematics A & B 

Mathematics 150A 

4 

Mathematics B & C 

Mathematics 150A,B 

8 

Physics 

Physics 211A.B 

6 

Spanish 

Spanish 101, 102 

10 


College Level Examination Program 

The university shall accept three semester units of credit for each of the following College Level 
Examination Program (CLEP) examinations, subject to achievement of the scores indicated, pro- 
vided the examination was not taken previously within one calendar year and that degree credit has 
not been granted for previous course work at the equivalent or at a more advanced level than for 
the examination in question. 


Examination 

Mathematics General Exam (1975 edition) 
College Algebra-Trigonometry 
Introductory Calculus and Analytic Geometry 
Statistics 

General Chemistry 


Passing score 

50 (on both parts of the examination) 
49 

48 

49 
48 


Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced standing based upon CLEP examination results 
using as minimum standards: 


General Examinations 

1 . That the student achieve a score at or above the 5(Xh percentile, college sophomore norms. 

2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general examinations, but that up to six units 
of general education requirements be waived for each test completed with the appropriate 
score. 


Subject Examinations 

1 . That the student submit a score at or above the 5(Xh percentile of those in the norming group 
who earned a mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Fullerton courses be determined by the appropriate academic department 
in conjunction with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned In the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count toward residence credit. 


English Equivalency Examination 

Students passing the California State University English Equivalency Examination shall be awarded 
six semester units of credit provided credit has not been granted previously at the equivalent or at 
more advanced levels. Further, those who pass this optional examination are exempt from the 
requirement to take the English Placement Test. 

Science/ Mathematics Equivalency Examinations 

Students may receive credit by examination In general mathematics, calculus-analytic geometry, 
statistics, chemistry, biology, and calculus by passing California State University-approved examlna- 

** Consult the Department of Biological Sciences for applicability of advanced placement examination credit 

***To conxilete the requirement for Chemistry 120A B, the student must successfully complete four units of Chemistry 120A and 
120B lakmratory at Cal State FuMerton. 


52 Genera! Information About Admission 

tions. Each test offers those who pass three semester unite of credit, provided credit has not 
previously been granted at the equivalent or at ntore advanced levels. 

Semester 

Examination Equivalent Course Units 

General Biology Biolog;ical Science 101 3 

General Chemistry Chemistry 100 3 

Statistics Mathematics 120 3 

Calculus Mathematics 130,150A 3 

General Mathematics Elective credit in 3 

mathematics 

Further, students completing the American Chemical Society Cooperative Examination with a score 
at the 50th percentile or above will receive three units of credit equivalent to the lecture portion 
of Chemistry 1 1 5. 


53 


REGISTRATION 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain information relating to academic 
programs, student services and activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs will be published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule: A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the class schedule published 
prior to the start of each semester. This publication, which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore, 
also states detailed information pertaining to the semester including class enrollment and fee pay- 
ment procedures. 

It is important that students familiarize themselves not only with the academic policies stated in this 
catalog but also with the requirements and procedures in the class schedule as both are used In the 
selection of classes for the semester. 

Registration: Registration is made up of two steps — class enrollment and fee payment, and may be 
accomplished through early registration by mail, walk-through registration in the week preceding the 
first day of Instruction, or through late registration during the first two weeks of Instruction. Most 
students should find early registration by mail advantageous. 

At registration, every student is required to file a study program with the Office of Admissions and 
Records. The filing of a program by the student and Its acceptance by the university obligates the 
student to perform the designated work to the best of his or her ability. It is emphasized that 
registration does not become official until all fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registration process, uses the computer. It is a fact of life 
in a large institution such as Fullerton that use of the computer is essential. Thus, there are require- 
ments for data cards, code numbers, student file numbers and for meeting precise criteria for 
recording data, which Introduce impersonal elements in the student records system. Despite these 
conditions, every effort is made to provide courteous, efficient and personalized service to students 
and the entire university community. To assist In providing this service, students are urged to be 
careful and accurate in preparing forms, especially the official program and change of program 
forms. Accurate preparation of information will assure each student of error-free records. 

Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed In the semester class schedule shall be available to all matriculated 
students except for appropriate academic restrictions as stated In the schedule and the catalog. These 
restrictions, including special qualifications and other academic limitations, on class entry shall be 
published in the class schedule as appropriate footnotes to the designated class or class section and 
shall be consistent with the catalog. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced In the class schedule. Late registrants 
will find themselves handicapped In arranging their programs and must pay a $25 late registration 
fee in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program After Registration 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses listed at registration. Changes may be made 
thereafter only by filing of a change of program form In the Office of Admissions and Records 
following procedures announced in the class schedule. 

Students may add classes to their programs of study during the first two weeks of instruction. They 
may drop classes without record of enrollment through the first four weeks. After the 20th day of 
instruction the university expects students to complete all courses in which they are enrolled. If after 
the 20th day students must withdraw, they are subject to the "Withdrawal" policy contained in the 
"Records and Regulations" subchapter of this catalog. In all Instances, dropped classes must be 


54 Fee Schedule 


reported to the Office of Admissions and Records; students not attending class are not dropped 
automatically. 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for additional courses at another 
institution only with advance written approval from the student's academic adviser on official forms 
obtained from the Office of Admissions and Records. Permission will not be granted when the study 
load in the proposed combined program of study exceeds the units authorized at this university. 

Enrollment at Other CSU Campuses 

Fullerton students may enroll at other campuses of The California State University either while 
concurrently enrolled at Fullerton or as visitors. There are certain eligibility requirements and enroll- 
ment conditions that must be met, including completion of at least one semester at Fullerton and 
being in good academic standing. Information and application forms may be obtained from the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. The student must meet the regular 
university admission requirements and must pay the same fees as other students. See the description 
of Audit in the "Administrative Symbols" section of this catalog. 

Handicapped Students 

Students physically handicapped who require assistance should consult the Handicapp)ed Student 
Services Center prior to the announced semester registration period so that special arrangements for 
them can be made. 


VETERANS 

California State University, Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of School Approvals, State Depart- 
ment of Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal legislation. 
All students seeking veterans' benefits must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the semester in which the veteran plans 
to use these benefits to have the authorization at the time of registration. 

RESERVE OFFICER TRAINING CORPS 

California State University, Fullerton does not have a Reserve Officer Training Corps program. 
However, through arrangements with Loyola Marymount University; the University of California, 
Los Angeles; and the University of Southern California, two-, three- and four-year Air Force Reserve 
Officer Training Corps (AFROTC) programs and scholarships are available to all qualified under- 
graduate students of the university. 

Further, in cooperation with the University of California, Los Angeles; California State University, 
Long Beach; and The Claremont Colleges, Army ROTC programs and scholarships are available to 
Fullerton students at these three institutions. Academic units earned in these programs are counted 
as elective credit towards the baccalaureate. Additional information may be obtained from the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 

SCHEDULE OF FEES, 1983-84 

Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The 1983-84 and 1984-85 schedule of fees 
will be published in the class schedules for those years. The following are the fees and nonresident 
tuition assessed at the time of preparing this catalog. 


All Students 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time application is made $30 

Student services fee $108 

State University fee Semester 

0 to 5.9 units $45 


Fee Schedule 55 


6.0 or more units 139 

Facilities fee 3 

Associated Students fee 13 

University Union fee 18 

Instructionally related activity fee 5 

Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees charged all students) 

Per unit SI 05 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit see current bulletin 

Associated Students fee S3 

University Union fee 5 

Extension Fees 

Per unit see current bulletin 


Other Fees or Charges 

Campus service card S3 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) 25 

Check returned from bank for any cause 10 

Transcript fee 4 

Graduation and diploma fee 15 

Failure to meet administratively required appointment or time limit 2 


Miscellaneous course fee A few courses require fees for registration 

Consult the current class schedule for further information. 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The California State University without advance notice. 

Alan Pattee Scholarships 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were California 
residents and who were killed In the course of law enforcement or fire suppression duties, are not 
charged fees or tuition of any kind, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act, Education Code 
Section 68121. Students qualifying for these benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further 
information, consult the dean of admissions and records, who determines eligibility. 


Waiver of Fees 

Section 32320 of the California Education Code provides for the waiver of certain fees other than 
nonresident tuition, for certain veterans' dependents. Those who meet one or more of the following 
criteria should present to the university registrar a certificate of eligibility obtained from the Division 
of Educational Assistance, California Department of Veterans Affairs, on or before the date of 
registration. 

A. Children of veterans who have service-connected disabilities and whose annual income not 
Including governmental compensation for such service-connected disability does not exceed 
$5,000. 

B. Children of veterans killed in action or because of a service-connected disability, where the 
annual Income of such children, including the value of any support received from parents and 
the annual income of surviving parents, does not exceed S5,(XX). No limitations on age or length 
of residency. 

Refund of Fees 

Details concerning the fees which may be refunded, and the circumstances under which fees may 
be refunded, may be obtained by consulting Section 41803 (parking fees), 41913 (nonresident 
tuition), and 41802 (all other fees) of Title 5, California Administrative Code. In all cases It is 
important to act quickly in applying for a refund. 

Information concerning the policy and appropriate procedure to be followed in seeking a refund may 
be obtained from the office of the registrar. 


56 Average Annual Costs and Sources of Funds 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (non reserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students (4-wheeled vehicle) $22.50 

Regular and limited students (2-wheeled vehicle) 5.65 

Coin operated gate per exit 50 

Summer session (4-wheeled vehicle) 15.(X) 

Summer session (2-wheeled vehicle) 3.75 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at home or making other housing arrange- 
ments will vary widely. It is estimated that, including a $3,3(X) yearly allowance for room and board, 
and $400 for books and supplies, the total cost will approximate $5,300 for an unmarried person. 
Nonresident students must also allow for nonresident tuition. 

The Student Services Fee 

The student services fee provides financing for the following student services not covered by state 
funding. 

1 . Social and Cultural Development Activities. Provides for the coordination of various student 
activities, student organizations, student government and cultural programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors' salaries and clerical support, plus operating 
expenses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psychometrists, clerical support, operating expenses, 
and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career Information to students and faculty for academic program plan- 
ning and employment information to graduates and students. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost of the counseling and business services 
provided In connection with the financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to students and covers the cost of salaries of 
medical officers and nurses and related clerical and technical personnel, as well as operating 
expenses and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide housing information and monitor housing services 
available to students. 

8. Student Services Administration. Covers 50 percent of the cost of the office of the dean of 
student services, which has responsibility for the overall administration of student services. 

Procedure for the Establishment and Abolishment of the Associated Students Fee 
The law governing The California State University provides that a student body fee may be estab- 
lished by student referendum with the approval of two-thirds of those students voting. The Associat- 
ed Students fee was established at California State University, Fullerton by student referendum In 
December 1959. The same fee can be abolished by a similar two-thirds approval of students voting 
on a referendum called for by a petition signed by 10 percent of the regularly enrolled students 
{Education Code, Section 89300). The level of the fee Is set by the chancellor who may approve 
a fee increase only following a referendum approved by a majority of the students. The Associated 
Students fee supports a variety of cultural and recreational programs, child care centers and special 
student support programs. 

AVERAGE ANNUAL COSTS AND SOURCES OF FUNDS 

PER FULL-TIME EQUIVALENT STUDENT 

The 19 campuses and the CharKellor's Office of The California State University are financed 
primarily through funding provided by the taxpayers of California. Including capital outlay, the CSU 
1982-83 budget totals approximately $1.2 billion. Approximately $1.18 billion of the total has been 
budgeted to provide support for a projected 239,9(X) full-time equivalent (FTE*) students. Thus, 
excluding costs which relate to capital outlay and the Energy and Resources Fund (e.g., building 
amortization), the average cost per FTE student is $4,974 per year. Of this amount, the average 
student pays $710. Included In this average student payment calculation is the amount paid by 
nonresident students. The remaining $4,237 in costs is funded by state and federal taxes. 


A verage Annual Costs and Sources of Funds 57 


Averages do not fit all students alike or even any specific student. To arrive at an average figure that 
is meaningful, the costs outlined above exclude "'user fees" for living expenses, housing and parking 
as well as costs for extension and summer session work. Computations are based on full-time 
equivalent students, not individuals, and costs are prorated by system totals, not by campus. The 
average costs for a full-time equivalent student In the system are shown in the following chart: 


TOTAL 1982-83 CSU BUDGET 
(PROJECTED ENROLLMENT: 239,900 FTE) 


Funding Source 

Amount 

Average 

Cost Per 
Student (RE)* ** *** 

Percentage 

State Approp. (Support) 

$970,118,453 

$4,044 

81.7% 

Student charges 

170,233,339 

710 •• 

14.4% 

Federal (Financial Aids) 

46,337,429 

193 

3.9% 

State Funding (Capital 

Outlay and Energy 
and Resources Fund) 

18,803,000 

• •• 

• •• 

Total 

$1,205,492,221 

$4,947 

100.0% 


* For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates individual enrollment ir>to total academic student load. The term 
assumes that a full-time student in The California Stote Universitv is enrolled for 1 5 units of academic credit. Some students enroll 
for more than 15 units; some students enroll for fewer than 15 units. 

** The average costs paid by a student include the student services fee, heaKh facilities fee, college union fee, student body fee, 
application fee, catalog fee. State Urtiversity EmergerKy Fee, and the norvresident tuition. This amount is derived by taking the 
total of aM student fees and dividing by the total full-time equivalent student enrollment. Individual students may pay more or 
less than $710 depending on whether they are part-time, full-time, resident or non-resident students. 

*** Average Cost Per Student (FTE) and Percentage columns are not calculated for this funding source. The estinuted replacement 
cost of all the system's permanent facilities and equipment on the 19 campuses is currently valued at $4.1 billion, excluding the 
cost of land. 


58 


RECORDS AND REGULATIONS 


STUDENT RESPONSIBILITY 

Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements printed in the university catalog and all 
published regulations of the university. 

The university establishes certain academic policies and requirements which must be met before a 
degree is granted. These include major and unit requirements and prerequisites. While advisers, 
directors, deans and faculty will provide a student with information and advice, responsibility for 
meeting these requirements rests with the student. Since failure to satisfy these requirements may 
result in the degree being withheld, it is important for each student to become thoroughly acquainted 
with all regulations. The catalog and the semester class schedule, available in the Titan Bookstore, 
are the best sources of Information on current policy and regulations. 

The student also has the responsibility for securing the consent of the instructor before enrolling in 
a course with prerequisites that the student has not completed. 

To Insure receipt of timely Information and accurate grade reports from the university, each student 
must keep the Office of Admission and Records informed of changes in personal data, including 
changes in name, address and program of study. Each student is mailed a student data verification 
each semester during the third week of classes to ensure the accuracy of official enrollment for that 
term; corrections must be reported to the registrar by the 20th day of classes, using the Change of 
Program form. Corrections should be reported on the form and returned to the Office of Admissions 
and Records. 

ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per week for one semester. Courses 
are of three types: 

( 1 ) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All required courses carry unit credit. 

Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 semester units of work are classified as freshmen, 
30-59 semester units as sophomores, 60-89 semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Maximum Number of Course Units 

Undergraduate students' requests to enroll for more than 19 units must be approved by the student's 
adviser and the department chair of the major. If such requests are denied, appeals may be made 
to the appropriate school dean. (Undeclared majors must receive the approval of the director of 
academic advisement.) The minimum full-time program is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of the normal may request to be 
allowed to enroll for extra units. Request forms may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and 
Records. In general, only students with superior academic records are allowed to enroll for more 
than the maximum. In addition, the need to enroll for the extra study must be established. Factors 
such as time sp)ent in employment or commuting, the nature of the academic program, extracurricu- 
lar activities and the student's health should be considered in planning a study program. Students 
who are employed or have outside responsibilities are advised to reduce their program of study. 
The minimum and maximum units of a full-time program of study for graduate students are defined 
In the "Graduate Programs" section of this catalog. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. Undergraduate students 
may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level course If: 

1 . they are within nine units of completion of graduation requirements, or 


Grading Policies 59 

2. they are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the related field or fields 
has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and whose cumulative overall grade-point 
average is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the instructor and also the chair of the department or 
dean of the school in which the course is offered and by the chair or dean of the student's major 
department or school. 

Graduate level courses taken under 1 above may be applied to a graduate program if approved under 
graduate studies policies. 

Graduate level courses taken under 2 above may be applied to the undergraduate program only. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the university, regular attendance in class is often 
essential to success in a course. The policy on class attendance is within the discretion of the 
individual faculty member and shall be announced by the faculty member at the first class meeting 
of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It is especially important that students attend the first meeting of a class. Students absent from the 
first meeting and who fail to notify the instructor or departmental office no later than 24 hours after 
the class meeting may be denied admission to the class. Instructors may deny admission to absentees 
to admit persons on waiting lists. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name appears on the first day-of-class list should attend 
all class meetings in the first week. If the student is absent without notifying the Instructor or 
departmental office within 24 hours after any meeting missed during that week, the student may then 
be dropped administratively from the class by the instructor. An instructor may also administratively 
drop a student who does not meet prerequisites for the course. These administrative withdrawals 
shall be without penalty and must be filed by the Instructor with the registrar no later than the 20th 
day of instruction. 

GRADING POLICIES 

Grading System 

Every student of the university will have all course work evaluated and reported by the faculty using 
letter grades or administrative symbols. 

The university uses a combination of traditional and nontraditional grading options as follows: 
Traditional 

Option 1 . Letter grades, defined as: 

A — outstanding performance 
B — above average performance 
C — average performance 
D — below average performance, though passing 
F — failure 
l^ontraditional 

Option 2. CR (Credit) for satisfactory (equivalent to C or better in undergraduate courses; 
B or better in graduate courses.) and NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory work. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not complete a particular course, or withdraws, 
certain administrative symbols may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in the 
chart below together with grade-point values. The chart also illustrates the academic bookkeeping 
involved for all grades and symbols used. 

Selection of Grading Option 

Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is the responsibility of the student. Graduate 
students must use option 1 for courses that are on study plans leading to master's degrees. Under- 
graduates must use option 1 for major, minor and general education requirements. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to be graded solely on an option 2 basis. 


60 Grading Policies 

These courses will be so designated in the class schedule (and shall not be changed by the faculty 
after publication of the class schedule) for each semester and may be included in major, core, or 
special program requirements. 

Students shall Inform the registrar up to the end of the fourth week of classes regarding the selection 
of grading options in designated courses. If a student does not do so, option 1 will be used. 

The faculty shall grade all students using the traditional A, B, C, D, or F grades except In Credit/ No 
Credit courses, and the registrar shall make the necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, converting 
A, B, C to Credit, and D and F to No Credit In undergraduate courses and A, B to Credit, and C, 
D, and F to No Credit In graduate courses. In those courses offered only on a Credit/ No Credit basis, 
the instructor shall assign grades of CR or NC or appropriate administrative symbols. 

Nontraditional Grade Option 

A nontraditional grading option is available to undergraduate students, nonobjective graduate stu- 
dents, and to classified graduate students for courses not Included In the approved study plan. Any 
student attempting a course using the nontraditional grading option must meet the prerequisites for 
that course. Each student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outsidfe of the major, minor, 
and general education requlrerr>ents for enrollment on a CredIt/No Credit basis (grading option 2). 
The phrase "major requirements" shall be taken to include core plus concentration (or option) 
requirements in departments using such terms, and professional course requirements In teacher 
education curricula. A student in any one term may take one course under option 2. In addition, 
he or she may enroll In a required course offered only under option 2; however, a maximum of 36 
units of Credit/ No Credit courses including those transferred from other institutions may be counted 
toward the baccalaureate. 

Under option 2 the term "Credit" signifies that the student's academic performance was such that 
he or she was awarded full credit in undergraduate courses with a quality level of achievement 
equivalent to a C grade or better. In all graduate level courses Credit signifies academic performance 
equivalents to B or A grades. No Credit signifies that the student attempted the course but that the 
performance did not warrant credit toward the objective. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one nonmajor course per term using this option, exclusive 
of courses offered only on a Credit/ No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his or her major field of study to one where he or she has 
completed courses with CR grades, such lower division courses shall be included in major require- 
ments. Upper division courses may be Included at the option of the department upon petition by 
the student. 





Grade 


Grade or Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 

Anempted 

Earned 

Value 

Credit 

A 

... Yes 

Yes 

4 

Yes 

B 

.... Yes 

Yes 

3 

Yes 

C 

.... Yes 

Yes 

2 

Yes 

D 

.... Yes 

Yes 

1 

No 

F 

.... Yes 

No 

0 

No 

Option 2 





CR 

• 

Yes 

None 

Yes 

NC 


No 

None 

No 

Administrative Symboh 





1 (Incomplete authorized) 

t 

No 



U (Unauthorized incom- 




plete) 

.... Yes 

No 

0 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

WF (Withdrawal) 

.... Yes 

No 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

SP (Satisfactory progress).. 

.... No 

No 

None 

No 

RD (Report delayed) 

.... No 

No 

None 

No 

TOTALS 


Counted 

Used 



In 

in 

Toward 



CPA 

Objective 

CPA 



• Credit/No Credit course urwts are rK)l irKkided m grade-point computations, 
t If not completed within one calendar year the I will be changed to an F (or NC). 


Administrative Symbols 61 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students who plan to pursue graduate or profes- 
sional studies later are advised to be selective in opting for courses on a credit/ no credit 
basis. As a general rule (advisory only), course work that is preparatory or prerequisite 
to advanced specialized study should be completed and evaluated on a letter grade basis 
and not Credit/ No Credit. 


ADMINISTRATIVE SYMBOLS 

Incomplete Authorized (!) 

The symbol I signifies that a portion of required course work has not been completed and evaluated 
in the prescribed time period owing to unforeseen but fully justified reasons and that there is still 
a possibility of earning credit. It is the responsibility of the student to bring pertinent information to 
the instructor and to reach agreement on the means by which the remaining course requirements 
will be satisfied. A final grade is assigned when the work agreed upon has been completed and 
evaluated. 

An Incomplete must be made up within one calendar year immediately following the end of the term 
in which it was assigned. This limitation prevails whether or not the student maintains continuous 
enrollment. Failure to complete the assigned work will result in an Incomplete being changed to an 
F or an NC. 

A grade of Incomplete may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a student cannot 
complete a course during the semester of enrollment for reasons beyond the student's control. Such 
reasons are assumed to include: illness of the student or of members of the student's immediate 
family, extraordinary financial problems, loss of outside p>osition, and other exigencies. In assigning 
a grade of I, the instructor shall file with the department for future reference and student access a 
Statement of Requirements for Completion of Course Work. The requirements shall not include 
retaking the course. The instructor will also designate a time limit (up to one year) for completing 
requirements. Upon request, a copy of the document will be furnished to the student. The student 
should review this statement at the earliest opportunity. 

The statement of requirements will include an indication of the quality of the student's work to date. 
This not only provides an interim evaluation for the student but assists the department chair in 
assigning a final grade in those instances where the instructor is no longer available. 

When the specific requirements are completed, the instructor will report a change of grade. The 
responsibility for changing the incomplete grade rests with the instructor. 

Withdrawal (W,WF) 

Students may withdraw from class during the first 20 days of instruction without record of enroll- 
ment. After the first 20 days of classes, students should complete all courses in which they are 
enrolled. 

The university authorizes withdrawal after the census date and prior to the last three weeks of 
instruction only with the approval of the instructor and the department chair or school dean. All 
requests for permission to withdraw and all approvals shall be made in writing on the Change of 
Program form and shall be filed at the Office of Admissions and Records by students or their proxies. 
The student withdrawing from class after the census date shall receive a grading symbol of W or 
WF. The symbol W signifies that the student dropped the course after the 20th day of instruction 
and that the quality of performance at the time of withdrawal was C or better. The symbol WF 
signifies that the student dropped the course after the 20th day of instruction and that the quality 
of performance at the time of withdrawal was below C. W's are not counted in grade point average 
calculations; WF's are counted in the same way as F grades. When signing the Change of Program 
form, the instructor shall indicate to the student whether W or WF will be given. 

Students may not withdraw during the final three weeks of instruction except in cases, appropriately 
documented, such as accident or serious illness, where the assignment of an Incomplete Is not 
practicable. Ordinarily, withdrawals of this nature will Involve withdrawal from all classes except 
that Credit or Incomplete Authorized (I) may be assigned for courses in which students have 
completed sufficient work to permit an evaluation to be made. Requests for permission to withdraw 


62 Grading Records 

from all classes under these circumstances, with authorizations as described above, shall be made 
on the Change of Program form and shall be filed by the students (or their proxies) with the Office 
of Admissions and Records. 

Unauthorized Incomplete (U) 

The symbol U indicates that an enrolled student did not withdraw from the course but failed to 
complete course requirements. It is used when, in the opinion of the instructor, completed assign- 
ments or course activities or both were insufficient to make normal evaluation of academic perform- 
ance possible. For purposes of grade-point average computations this symbol is equivalent to an F. 
A student may petition for a retroactive withdrawal provided the student can document both the 
serious and compelling reason or circumstances that required the withdrawal and the date of such 
withdrawal. Such a petition must be filed within 30 days after the first class day of the following 
semester. 

Petitions for retroactive withdrawal may be submitted for withdrawal in individual courses. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially withdraw and who are receiving financial 
aid or benefits which are dep>endent on completion of specified course units are advised 
that they may have such benefits suspended and may be subject to repayment of allow- 
ances received after date of unofficial withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol AU is used by the registrar in those instances where a student has enrolled in a course 
either for information or other purposes not related to the student's formal academic objective. 
Enrollment as an auditor is subject to the permission of the instructor, provided that enrollment in 
any course as an auditor shall be permitted only after students otherwise eligible to enroll In the 
course on a credit basis have had an opportunity to do so. Auditors are subject to the same fees 
as credit students and regular class attendance is expected. Once enrolled as an auditor, a student 
may not change to credit status unless such a change Is requested prior to the last day to add classes. 
A student who is enrolled for credit may not change to audit after the fourth week of instruction. 
An auditor is not permitted to take examinations in the course; therefore, there is no basis for 
evaluation nor a formal grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The SP symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or similar courses that extend beyond one 
academic term. It indicates that work is in progress, and has been evaluated and found to be 
satisfactory to date, but that assignment of a final grade must await completion of additional course 
work. Cumulative enrollment In units attempted may not exceed the total number applicable to the 
student's educational objective. Work is to be completed within a stipulated period which may not 
exceed one year except for graduate degree theses or projects for which the time may be longer, 
but may not exceed the overall limit for completion of all master's degree requirements. Any 
extension of time must receive prior authorization by the dean of the school (or the dean's designee) 
in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The RD symbol Is used where a delay in the reporting of a final grade is due to circumstances beyond 
the control of the student. The symbol is assigned by the registrar and will be replaced as soon as 
possible. An RD shall not be included in calculation of a grade-point average. 

GRADING RECORDS 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned In classes is sent to each student at the end of each semester. 
Many students also leave self-addressed post cards for instructors of specific courses to send them 
earlier reports. 


Grading Records 63 


Class Grade-Point A verages 

Beginning with the fall semester 1978, information is included on student grade reports and perma- 
nent academic records that is intended to depict the level of achievement of students in relation to 
other students in a particular class. The information is displayed In parentheses before each course 
grade. The first set of figures indicates the number of students officially completing the course and 
the second set is the class grade-point average. In making the computations, marks of W, I, CR, NC, 
and SP are excluded. This same information is displayed for summer session classes, but not for 
extension or intersession classes sponsored by the Office of Extended Education. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at times scheduled by the university. 
Once established, the final examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by the dean 
of the school. No makeup final examination will be given except for reason of illness or other verified 
emergencies. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit toward the baccalaureate and to meet curriculum requirements in 
certain designated courses by the satisfactory completion of challenge examinations in the courses. 
The examinations are to be comprehensive and administered by the sponsoring departments. Well 
in advance of the semester in which a challenge examination Is to be administered, the student, using 
the appropriate university form, will secure written approval of his or her major adviser and the chair 
of the department in which the course is offered. In general, prior work or academic experience will 
be required. 

Courses to be offered as challenge examinations will be determined by the academic departments. 
Matriculated students may either enroll in these courses during registration or add them during the 
first two weeks of the semester. The examination must be administered not later than the end of 
the third week of instruction. 

Upon successful completion of the examination, the instructor will report the grade of CR. Students 
who fail the challenge examination may elect to continue the course for credit or may officially 
withdraw from the course through the normal class withdrawal procedure. The challenge examina- 
tion for any course may be administered only once. 

A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge examination, including those earned by 
advanced placement. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirements. 

Grade- Point Averages 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system chart are intended to give an exact determi- 
nation of a student's scholastic standing. To compute the grade-point average for course work at 
Fullerton, the grade-point value of each grade, with the exception noted In the "Repetition of 
Courses" section, is multiplied first by the unit value of each course to obtain a total of all grade 
points earned. The total is then divided by the total units attempted in all courses in which grades 
of A, B, C, D or F were received. The resulting figure is the grade-point average. 

Repetition of Courses 

Undergraduate students may repeat courses at California State University, Fullerton for which D or 
failing grades were earned either at Cal State Fullerton or at other institutions; in repeating such 
courses, the traditional grading system shall be used. In computing the grade point average of a 
student who repeats courses in which he or she received D or failing grades, only the most recently 
earned grades and grade pK)ints shall be used for the first 16 units repeated. Nevertheless, the original 
grade on the academic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In exercising this option, an undergraduate student must repeat the course at Cal State Fullerton and 
may request application of this policy when a course has been repeated. This should be accom- 
plished using the appropriate petition form, immediately following the term in which the course has 
been completed, so that the student's grade-point average can be revised. In the absence of student 
petitions, courses successfully repeated are routinely credited by the Office of Admissions and 
Records during degree requirement reviews at the time of graduation. 

In the case of any repetition beyond the 16-unit limit or in courses for which a C or better grade 
was awarded, both grades are considered in computing grade-point averages. Successful rejjetition 


64 Grading Records 

of a course originally passed carries no additional unit credit toward a degree or credential except 
for certain courses such as independent study, practicum, or other courses specified in this catalog 
as "may be repeated for credit." 

Students transferring from other colleges where courses were taken and repeated may be eligible 
for consideration under this policy. In general, the policy of the college where the course was 
repeated shall be followed; however, units for the courses taken and repeated at the transfer 
institution are included in the 16-unit limitation. 

Grade Changes 

The university recognizes the long-standing prerogatives of faculty to set standards of performance 
and to apply them to individual students. The university will seek to correct injustices to students 
but at the same time believes that the instructor's judgment at the time the original grade is assigned 
is better than a later reconsideration of an individual case. Equity to all students is of fundamental 
concern. The following policies apply to changes of grades except for changes of Incomplete 
Authorized and Unauthorized Incomplete symbols. 

1 . In general, all course grades are final when filed by the instructor in the end-of-term course grade 
report. Each student is notified by mail of the grades earned during the term, and these grades 
become a part of the official record. 

2. A change of grade may occur only In cases of clerical error, administrative error, or where the 
instructor reevaluates the original course assignments of a student and discovers an error in the 
original evaluation. A clerical error is an error made by the instructor or an assistant In calculating 
or recording the grade. A change of grade shall not occur as a consequence of the acceptance 
of additional work or reexamination beyond the specified course requirements. 

3. A request for a change of grade shall be Initiated by the student affected and shall be directed 
to the Instructor within 60 calendar days of the first day of classes of the regular semester following 
the award of the original grade. If the instructor determines that there is a valid basis for the 
change, a Change of Grade form shall be used to notify the Office of Admissions and Records. 
These forms are available in department offices. If the Instructor determines that there Is not a 
valid basis for the change, and denies the student's request, the instructor's decision Is final. The 
student may file a petition with the Academic Appeals Board on the basis of capricious or 
prejudicial treatment by the instructor. 

4. The Change of Grade form completed and signed by the instructor, noting the basis for the 
change, shall not be accepted by the registrar unless approved separately by the department chair 
and school dean. 

5. If a request for change of grade is initiated after 60 calendar days Into the following semester, 
it will be approved only in extraordinary circumstances. An explanation of such circumstances 
must accompany the request and must be approved separately by the instructor, department 
chair, and the dean before the acceptance by the registrar. 

Academic Dishonesty 

Academic dishonesty (usually cheating or plagiarism) almost always Involves an attempt by a 
student to show possession of a level of knowledge or skill which he or she does not possess. 
Cheating is defined as the act of obtaining or attempting to obtain credit for work by the use of any 
dishonest, deceptive, or fraudulent means. Examples of cheating include, but are not limited to: using 
notes or aids or the help of other students on tests and examinations in ways other than those 
expressly permitted by the Instructor, plagiarism as defined below, and tampering with the grading 
procedures. 

Plagiarism Is defined as the act of taking the specific substance of another and offering it as one's 
own without giving credit to the source. When sources are used, acknowledgment of the original 
author or source must be made following standard scholarly practice. 

The initial responsibility for detecting and dealing with academic dishonesty lies with the instructor 
concerned. An instructor who believes that an act of academic dishonesty has occurred is obligated 
to discuss the matter with the student involved. The instructor should possess reasonable evidence, 
such as documents or p)ersonal observation. However, if circumstances prevent consultation with 
the student, the Instructor may take whatever action, subject to student appeal, the Instructor deems 
appropriate. 


Academic Renewal 65 


An instructor who is convinced by the evidence that a student is guilty of academic dishonesty shall: 

1 . Assign an appropriate academic penalty. This may range from an oral reprimand to an F in the 
course. To the extent that the faculty member considers the academic dishonesty to manifest the 
student's lack of scholarship and to reflect on the student's academic performance and academic 
integrity in a course, the student's grade should be adversely affected. Suggested guidelines for 
appropriate actions are an oral reprimand in cases where there is reasonable doubt that the 
student knew that his or her action constituted academic dishonesty; an F on the particular paper, 
project or examination where the act of dishonesty was unpremeditated, or where there was 
significant mitigating circumstances, or an F in the course where the dishonesty was premeditated 
or planned. 

2. Report to the student involved, to the department chair, and to the dean of student services the 
alleged incident of academic dishonesty, including relevant documentation, and make recom- 
mendations for action that he or she deems appropriate. 

The dean of student services shall maintain an academic dishonesty file of all cases of academic 
dishonesty with the appropriate documentation. Students shall be informed when their names are 
inserted into the file and provided with copies of any appeals or disciplinary procedures in which 
they may become involved. The dean of student services or his or her designees may initiate 
disciplinary proceedings under Title 5, California Administrative Code, Section 41301, and Chancel- 
lor's Executive Order 148; when two or more incidents involving the same student occur, he or she 
shall do so. Opportunities for appeal regarding sanctions resulting from disciplinary proceedings are 
provided by Executive Order 148. 

A student may appeal any action taken on a charge of academic dishonesty under the University 
Policy Statement 300.030, "Academic Appeals." If the Academic Appeals Board decides that a 
student is innocent of academic dishonesty, then no entry shall be made in the academic dishonesty 
file. 

If the Academic Appeals Board decides either that a student is innocent of academic dishonesty, 
or that a faculty member has acted arbitrarily or capriciously towards a student, it shall instruct the 
faculty member to meet with his or her department chair and, if appropriate, the dean of the school 
for the purpose of reassessing the student's performance. If the faculty member refuses to do so, 
the matter shall be referred to an ad hoc committee, to be established by the department, which 
shall have ultimate authority to act in the case. 

ACADEMIC RENEWAL 

Under certain circumstances, the university may disregard up to two semesters or three quarters of 
previous undergraduate course work taken at any college or university from all considerations 
associated with requirements for the baccalaureate. These circumstances are 

1 . that the student has requested the action formally and has presented evidence that work com- 
pleted in the terms under consideration is substandard and not representative of present scholas- 
tic ability and level of performance; and 

2. that the level of performance represented by the terms under consideration was due to extenuat- 
ing circumstances; and 

3. that there is every evidence that the student would find it necessary to complete additional terms 
to qualify for the baccalaureate if the request were not approved. 

Final determination that one or more terms shall be disregarded in the determination of eligibility 
for graduation shall be based upon a careful review of evidence by the Review Committee for 
Academic Renewal and shall be made only when: 

1 . five years have elapsed since the most recent work to be disregarded was completed; and 

2. the student has completed at Fullerton, since the most recent work to be disregarded was 
completed, 15 semester units with at least a 3.0 grade-point average, or 30 semester units with 
at least a 2.5 CPA, or 45 semester units with at least a 2.0 CPA. Work completed at another 
institution cannot be used to satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student's permanent academic record shall be annotated so that it 
is readily evident to all users of the record that no work taken during the disregarded terms, even 
if satisfactory, may apply toward baccalaureate requirements. All work must remain legible on the 
record ensuring a true and complete academic history. 


3—76604 


66 Continuous Residency Regulations 


TRANSCRIPTS 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are issued only with the written permission of 
the student concerned. Partial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $4 for each transcript issued must 
be received before the transcript can be issued. 

Normally, transcripts are available within three working days, except at the end of the semester when 
the student should allow about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented for admission or evaluation, become 
a part of the student's permanent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribution. 
Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted elsewhere should request them from the 
institutions concerned. 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

Good standing indicates that a student is eligible to continue and Is free from financial obligation 
to the university. A student under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disciplinary 
expulsion Is not eligible to receive a statement of good standing on transcripts issued by the university 
or on other documents. 

Choice of Catalog Regulations for Meeting Degree Requirements 

A student remaining In continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing in the same 
curriculum at any campus of the California community colleges or in any combination of California 
community colleges and campuses of The California State University may, for purposes of meeting 
graduation requirements, elect to meet the graduation requirements of such campuses from which 
he or she will graduate in effect either at the time of entering the curriculum or at the time of 
graduation therefrom, except that substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or 
required by the proper university authorities. 

Stop-Out Policy 

With certain exceptions, undergraduate students and postbaccalaureate unclassified students may 
be absent for one semester and maintain their continuing student status. This Includes election of 
catalog requirements for graduation and eligibility to register for the next semester. The exceptions 
are as follows: 

Disqualified Students — Students who are disqualified at the end of a semester and have not been 
reinstated will not receive registration materials; they must apply for readmission, and if admitted, 
may be subject to new catalog requirements. 

Foreign-Visa Students — Students with foreign visas are required to maintain continuous enroll- 
ment. The stop-out policy is not applicable. 

Students absent for more than one semester, as well as those who attend another institution while 
absent for any p>eriod, must apply for readmission should they wish to return to Fullerton. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may F)etltion for a leave of absence and, if approved, may upon return continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to the enrollment prior to the absence. A leave of absence 
may be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness is the only routinely approved reason for a leave 
of absence. Students should realize that an approved leave of absence does not reserve a place for 
them in the university; they must reapply. 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the university during a semester must complete a Change 
of Program form. See the section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student may withdraw 
after the date shown on the university calendar as the last day of Instruction. Complete withdrawal 
from the university Is accomplished by following the procedures for dropping classes. 


Retention, Probation and Disqualification 67 


STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list of undergraduate 
students whose grade-point averages for the previous term were 3.5 or better. Students are notified 
in writing when they have earned this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 12 units of 
graded course work. 

Honors Programs 

The general education honors program offers students the opportunity to earn recognition for 
distinguished academic performance in the specified honors curriculum. In order to graduate with 
honors in general education, a student must complete the university's general education require- 
ments (including 33 units of courses with the honors (H) designation) and maintain a grade-point 
average of 3.0 in all honors classes and In the major. 

Certain departments sponsor departmental honors programs within their disciplines. These programs 
require successful work in specific courses as well as some form of culminating project. 

Upon graduation. Honors students receive a certificate of honors from the university president and 
an appropriate notation is made on both the student's diploma and permanent record. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation for baccalaureate recipients are based on overall performance and have been 
defined by the Faculty Council in three classifications: 


With honors CPA 3.5 

With high honors CPA 3.85 

With highest honors CPA 4.0 


RETENTION, PROBATION AND DISQUALIFICATION 

For purposes of determining a student's ability to remain in the university both quality of perform- 
ance and progress towards the educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic probation If in any semester the cumulative 
grade-point average or the grade-point average at Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on a five-point 
scale). The student shall be advised of probation status promptly and, except in unusual Instances, 
before the start of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academic probation and restored to clear standing 
upon achieving a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 in all academic work attempted. In all such 
work attempted at Fullerton, and is making satisfactory progress towards his or her educational 
objective. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified, or undeclared status [but not second bacca- 
laureate degree students]) shall be subject to academic probation if after completing 12 or more units 
his or her postbaccalaureate cumulative grade point average for units attempted at California State 
University, Fullerton falls below a 2.50 average. The CPA will determine whether a student is subject 
to probation only after the student has completed 1 2 semester units. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in either conditionally classified or 
classified standing shall be subject to academic probation if he or she fails to maintain a cumulative 
grade point average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a five-point scale) In all units attempted after 
admission to the program. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification if: 

1. as a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of college work completed) he or 
she falls 1 5 or more grade points below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or In all 
units attempted at this institution; or 

2. as a junior (60 to 89 semester hours of college work completed) he or she falls nine or more 
grade points below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution; or 


68 Retention, Probation and Disqualification 

3. as a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he or she falls six or more 
grade points below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution. 

A graduate student enrolled In a graduate degree program shall be subject to disqualification if while 
on probation sufficient grade points are not achieved to remove probationary status. Disqualification 
may be either from further registration In a particular program or from further enrollment in the 
university, as determined by appropriate campus authority. 

A postbaccalaureate student who is on probation shall be subject to disqualification if he or she falls 
to earn at least a 2.50 grade-point average each term after the completion of 12 units at California 
State University, Fullerton In postbaccalaureate status. Disqualification may be either from further 
registration as a postbaccalaureate, credential, or certificate program or from enrollment at California 
State University, Fullerton, as determined by the vice president for academic affairs or designee. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound education and 
that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compliance with 
all regulations of the university is therefore expected. If, however, on any occasion a student or an 
organization is alleged to have compromised accepted university standards, appropriate judiciary 
procedures shall be initiated through the established university process. Every effort will be made 
to encourage and support the development of self-discipline and control by students and student 
organizations. The dean of student services, aided by members of the faculty, is responsible to the 
president of the university for the behavior of students In their relationships to the university. The 
president in turn is responsible to the chancellor and the trustees of The California State University 
and Colleges who themselves are governed by specific laws of the State of California. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal rights and procedures have been carefully 
detailed to provide maximum protection to both the individual charged and the university commu- 
nity. 

If the issue cannot be resolved informally, students should consult with the coordinator of academic 
appeals. 

Inappropriate conduct by students or by applicants for admission is subject to discipline as provided 
in Sections 41301 through 41304 of Title 5, California Administrative Code. These sections are as 
follows: 

Article 1.1, Title 5, California Administrative Code. 

41301. Expulsion, Suspension and Probation of Students. Following procedures consonant with due process 
established pursuant to Section 41304, any student of a campus may be expelled, suspended, placed on probation 
or given a lesser sanction for one or more of tlie following causes which must be campus related: 

(a) Cheating or plagiarsim in connection with an academic program at a campus. 

(b) Forgery, alteration or misuse of campus documents, records, or identification of knowingly furnishing false 
information to a campus. 

(c) Misrepresentation of oneself or of an organization to be an agent of a campus. 

(d) Obstruction or disruption, on or off campus property, of the campus educational process, administrative 
process, or other campus function. 

(e) Physical abuse on or off campus property of the person or property of any member of the campus 
community or of numbers of his or her family or the threat of such physical abuse. 

(f) Theft, of, or non-accidental damage to, campus property, or property in the possession of, or owned by, 
a nf>ember erf the campus community. 

(g) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or misuse of campus property. 

(h) On campus property, the sale or knowing possession of dangerous drugs, restricted dangerous drugs, or 
narcotics as those terms are used in California statutes, except when lawfully prescribed pursuant to medical 
or dental care, or when lawfully permitted for the purpose of research, instruction or analysis. 

(i) Knowing possession or use of explosives, dangerous chemicals or deadly weapons on campus property or 
at a campus function without prior authorization of the campus president. 

(j) Engaging In lewd, Indecent, or obscene behavior on campus property or at a campus function. 

(k) Abusive behavior directed toward, or hazing of, a member of the campus community. 

(l) Violation of any order of a campus president, notice of which had been given prior to such violation and 
during the academic term in which the violation occurs, either by publication in the campus r>ewspaper, 
or by posting on an official bulletin board designated for this purpose, and which order is not irKonsistent 
with any of the other provisions of this Section. 

(m) Soliciting or assisting another to do any act which would subject a student to expulsion, suspension or 


Retention, Probation and Disqualification 69 


probation pursuant to this Section. 

(n) For purposes of this Article, the following terms are defined: 

(1) The term “member of the campus community" is defined as meaning California State University 
trustees, academic, non-academic and administrative personnel, students, and other persons while 
such other persons are on campus property or at a campus function. 

(2) The term “campus property" includes: 

(A) Real or personal property in the possession of, or under the control of, the Board of Trustees of 
The California State University, and 

(B) All campus feeding, retail, or residence facilities whether operated by a campus or by a campus 
auxiliary organization. 

(3) The term “deadly weapons" includes any instrument or weapon of the kind commonly known as a 
blackjack, sling shot, billy, sandclub, sandbag, metal knuckles, any dirk, dagger, switchblade knife, 
pistol, revolver, or any other firearm, any knife having a blade longer than five inches, any razor with 
an unguarded blade, and any metal pipe or bar used or intended to be used as a club. 

(4) The term “behavior" includes conduct and expression. 

(5) The term “hazing" means any method of initiation into a student organization or any pastime or 
amusement engaged in with regard to such an organization which causes, or is likely to cause, bodily 
danger, or physical or emotional harm, to any member of the campus community; but the term 
“hazing" does not include customary athletic events or other similar contests or competitions. 

(o) This Section is not adopted pursuant to Education Code Section 89031. 

(p) Notwithstanding any amendment or repeal pursuant to the resolution by which any provision of this Article 
is amended, all acts and omissions occurring prior to that effective date shall be subject to the provisions 
of this Article as In effect immediately prior to such effective date. 

41302. Disposition of Fees: Campus Emergency; Interim Suspension. The President of the campus may 
place on probation, suspend, or expel a student for one or more of the causes enumerated in Section 41301, No 
fees or tuition paid by or for such student for the semester, quarter, or summer session in which he or she is 
suspended or expelled shall be refunded. If the student is readmitted before the close of the semester, quarter, 
or summer session in which he or she is suspended, no additional tuition or fees shall be required of the student 
on account of the suspension. 

During periods of campus emergency, as determined by the President of the individual campus, the President may, 
after consultation with the Chancellor, place into immediate effect any emergency regulations, procedures, and 
other measures deemed necessary or appropriate to meet the emergency, safeguard persons and property, and 
maintain educational activities. 

41303. Conduct by Applicants for Admission. Notwithstanding any provision in this Chapter 1 to the con- 
trary, admission or readmission may be qualified or denied to any person who, while not enrolled as a student, 
commits arts which, were he enrolled as a student, would be the basis for disciplinary proceedings pursuant to 
Sections 41 301 or 41 302. Admission or readmission may be qualified or denied to any person who, while a student, 
commits acts which are subject to disciplinary action pursuant to Section 41301 or Section 41302. Qualified 
admission or denial of admission in such cases shall be determined under procedures adopted pursuant to Section 
41304. 

The President may immediately impose an interim suspension in all cases in which there is reasonable cause to 
believe that such an immediate suspension is required in order to protect lives or property and to Insure the 
maintenance of order. A student so placed on interim suspension shall be given prompt rnHice of charges and the 
opportunity for a hearing within 10 days of the imposition of interim suspension. During the period of interim 
suspension, the student shall not, without prior written permission of the President or designated representative, 
enter any campus of the California State University other than to attend the hearing. Violation of any condition 
of interim suspension shall be grounds for expulsion. 

41304. Student Disciplinary Procedures for The California State University. The Chancellor shall prescribe, 
and may from time to time revise, a code of student disciplinary procedures for The California State University. 
Subject to other applicable law, this code shall provide for determinations of fact and sanctions to be applied for 
condua which is a ground of discipline under Sections 41301 or 41302, and for qualified admission or denial of 
admission under Section 41303; the authority of the campus president in such matters; conduct related determina- 
tions on financial aid eligibility and termination; alternative kinds of proceedings, includir^g proceedings conducted 
by a hearing officer; time limitations; notice; conduct of hearings, including provisions governing evIderKe, a 
record, and review; and such other related matters as may be appropriate. The charKellor shall report to the board 
his actions taken urnler this section. 

Debts Owed to the University 

Should a student or former student fail to pay a debt owed to the university, the university may 
"withhold permission to register, to use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to 
receive services, materials, food or merchandise or any combination of the above from any person 
owing a debt" until the debt is paid (see Title 5, California Administrative Code, Sections 42380 and 
42381 ). For example, the institution may withhold such a service as furnishing copies of a student's 
transcript. If a student believes that he or she does not owe all or part of an unpaid obligation, the 


70 Privacy Rights 

student should consult the business office. The business office, or another office to which the student 
may be referred, will review the pertinent information, including information the student may wish 
to present, and will advise the student of its conclusions with respect to the debt. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic regulations when unusual circum- 
stances exist. It should be noted, however, that academic regulations v/hen they are contained in 
Title 5, California Administrative Code, are not subject for petition. 

Petition forms are available In the Office of Admissions and Records and must first be reviewed and 
signed by appropriate officers before being reviewed by the university petitions committee. This 
committee will take action on the petition and the student will be notified of the decision. Results 
of the action will be placed in the student's folder in the Office of Admissions and Records. 

The petitions committee members shall consist of the associate dean of each school, or equivalent, 
a professional staff member appointed by the dean of admissions and records, and the assistant 
registrar, who will serve as the secretary. 

RIGHT OF NONCOMPLIANCE, RISK ACTIVITIES 

Certain university activities either within or outside of the classroom may Involve varying degrees 
of risk to the participants. It is university policy that the Instructor directing such activities divulge 
fully to all potential participants the specific nature of such risks and obtain from them their expressed 
or implied consent prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that the risks, whether physical or psychological, are 
excessive has the responsibility to withdraw from participation at the time and to inquire of the 
instructor If there are alternative means of fulfilling the requirements without penalty. If there is none, 
the student may fjetition for withdrawal from the course without penalty or appeal for an appropriate 
modification of the activity. The appeal may be made either to the chair of the department con- 
cerned, or to the chair of the Committee on Activities Involving Human Subjects, or both. 

RIGHT OF ACADEMIC APPEAL 

The right of due process, appeal and peer judgment is established by the Student Bill of Rights and 
Responsibilities for students who feel they have been treated capriciously or with prejudice by 
faculty or administrators. Students should make every effort to resolve the issue informally by 
consulting the Individual concerned, and if necessary the department chair and dean of the school. 
Students who still believe the problem has not been resolved should consult with the coordinator 
of academic appeals. Upon the student's request, the coordinator will convene the Academic 
Appeals Board to hear the student's complaint. Students must Initiate the appeals process within one 
month after they could reasonably be expected to be aware of the action in question. 

Copies of the governing documents are available in the Academic Appeals Office. 

PRIVACY RIGHTS OF STUDENTS 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (20 U.S.C. 1232g) and regulations 
adopted thereunder (45 C.F.R. 99), set out requirements designed to protect the privacy of parents 
and students concerning education records maintained by the institution. Specifically, the statute and 
regulations govern access to records maintained by the university, and the release of such records. 
In brief, the law provides that the university must provide students access to official records directly 
related to them and an opportunity for a hearing to challenge such records on the grounds that they 
are inaccurate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate; the right to a hearing under the law does not 
include any right to challenge the appropriateness of a grade as determined by the professor. The 
law generally requires that written consent of the student be received before releasing personally 
identifiable data about the student from records to other than a specified list of exceptions. The 
institution has adopted a set of policies and procedures concerning implementation of the Act and 
the regulations on the campus. Copies of these policies and procedures may be obtained from the 
dean of student services. Among the types of information included in the campus statement of 
policies and procedures is: (1 ) the types of student records and the information contained therein; 
(2) the official responsible for the maintenance of each type of record; (3) the location of access 
lists which indicate persons requesting or receiving information from the record; (4) policies for 


Social Security Number 71 


reviewing and expunging records; (5) the access rights of students; (6) the procedures for challeng- 
ing the content of student records; (7) the cost which will be charged for reproducing copies of 
records, and (8) the right of the student to file a complaint with the Department of Education. An 
office and review board have been established by the Department to investigate and adjudicate 
violations and complaints. The office designated for this purpose is: The Family Educational Rights 
and Privacy Act Office (FERPA), U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare, 330 C Street, 
Room 4511, Washington, D.C. 20202. 

The campus is authorized under the act to release directory information concerning students. 
Directory information may include the student's name, address, telephone listing, date and place 
of birth, major field of study, participation in officially recognized activities and sports, weight and 
height of members of athletic teams, dates of attendance, degrees and awards received, and the most 
recent previous educational agency or institution attended by the student. Directory information is 
subject to release by the university at any time unless it has received prior written objection from 
the student specifying information that the student requests not be released. Written objections 
should be sent to the dean of student services. Further details are published each semester in the 
class schedule. 

The campus is authorized to provide access to student records to campus officials and employees 
who have legitimate educational Interests in such access. These persons are those who have 
responsibilities In connection with the university's academic, administrative or service functions and 
who have reason for using student records connected with university or other related academic 
responsibilities. 

USE OF SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER 

Applicants are requested, but not required, to include their social security number in designated 
places on applications for admission pursuant to the authority contained in Title 5, California 
Administrative Code, Section 41 201 . The social security number is used on many campuses as a 
means of identifying records pertaining to the student as well as identifying the student for purposes 
of financial aid eligibility and disbursement and the repayment of financial aid and other debts 
payable to the institution. At Fullerton, student records are identified by a university-assigned student 
file number, not the social security number, though the latter is used in financial aids administration 
and in student payroll records. 




, • ’ . . t . ^ 

. -, ; ,■ . ■ ■ • ■ 

i '. ' ' :vi>:'*l. f> 't ■ ■ 

•• '' '■'4: 

i\ fi<: »f!f^ s»ip^^P«F:;p'>i •• i' . ; ^ i^;.^ •; 

* > >,f .'■ '. ■' ■ ' ••' (;*.' •■ ■ 

I'^vO'kj^ir'j-i V . <'‘\.- ,710 c* /n'.bife':i<'. ''.i'^^.;•'-f - ■ ■ •- 

U tv Jif -1 -•j:''<<b.iV'.;>.' V» ^v; t • : .; i; '• f ./ ^.' • 'i 

r/Tft-i’ '.H • '•• v'ri'i'^'-'. •'■ miW ir»ir 

.'^f^ 

i>*> e v‘'t yj6 #b>o'.!n Kv#b»;ii» jt.w 

■ ' ' ' i.-.^t'' ^};r ■• ; *->; *>'•'. '^ .. v. i;.._ 

V ? ,'’ 7 -^ ■ , ?,• ■• \ '^ ■■'•’'} './■»<■- ’ -v-i .: ,; v' ■> i-' ; 

S''-'.' .. c*!': ': ,'■ i^,*' ,?i:- '.t. .'‘•;V'- VfCi^' ^•^■'■>.''. ’ ‘•>^>' ^v. 

r . r'f' ; :^ , ■<< ' a'^’ ' • J' -,• ' y ^ ■ .’ fr''* V’;?- ^.i <“».Vu- >'/->’ ■• '■‘■^ ■s>!:.' v'^‘':*-^''V^^.' 

.-■ -^ ■:’*.• ■;•.■- ';. ...^■’' ■<?/.•'< ^ 

' '^ -J •( : ,.-...■ '.• »• ’■{ ■.j->t'A4 .f, *'•- 

v-'X " ■' '^' •-•' ' ' '<"•'■■ ^ :;y.'.f:V o/ \ 




&- 


:> ^ = •' 

M'* 


'>Ji' ■ 



DEGREE 

REQUIREMENTS 


74 


GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


1. Genera! Education Requirements 

The faculty of California State University, Fullerton has designed a general education program to 
provide broad knowledge within the traditional areas of learning. It is strongly recommended that 
students expecting to complete their general education requirements at Fullerton include at least one 
year of high school algebra as part of their preparation. The California Administrative Code, Section 
40404, requires course work to provide a further understanding of American government. The basic 
subjects are university level non-remedial courses designed to impart skills necessary to facilitate the 
acquisition and utilization of knowledge in the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities. 
The other required courses in arts, humanities, natural science and social sciences, provide an 
opportunity to develop an appreciation for the development of Western civilization, an awareness 
of the content, approaches, and methods of the various disciplines, an understanding of one's culture 
and of other cultures, and an appreciation of the arts. 

To be eligible for a baccalaureate from the university, the student shall have completed a minimum 
of 48 semester units of general education courses selected in accordance with the pattern designated 
below. 

No more than nine units from Sections III through V, and no more than 12 units overall, from any 
single department may be used to satisfy the general education requirements. Courses offered by 
a student's major department may not be used to fulfill the unit requirements of Sections III through 
V of general education except where the same course is required both in the major and in general 
education and no alternative from any other department is available. 

All students, irrespective of catalog of entry, must take general education courses on a grade Option 
1 basis (A,B,C,D,F). Option 2 (Credit/No Credit) courses may be used If that is the only grade 
option for a general education course. Students who began their studies fall 1981 and later must 
complete at least nine units of upper-division course work no earlier than the semester in which they 
achieved junior standing. Further, at least nine units of general education must be earned in resi- 
dence. 

/. Statutory Requirements in American Institutions and Values: six units 
The requirement is that each student "demonstrate competence in the Constitution of the United 
States, and in American history including the study of American institutions and ideals, and of 
the principles of state and local government established under the Constitution of this 
state. . . The following alternatives meet this requirement. ( 1 ) pass Political Science 100 and 
either (a) History 180, or (b) History 170A and 170B, or (c) American Studies 201, or (2) pass 
comprehensive examinations offered by each of the relevant departments for their respective 
courses. Transfers from outside the State of California who have already completed a basic 
course in American government may substitute Political Science 300 for Political Science 100. 
These units cannot be used to satisfy any other general education requirement. 

//. Basic Subjects: nine units minimum 

Basic subjects are university level non-remedial courses designed to Impart skills necessary to 
facilitate the acquisition and use of knowledge in the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and 
humanities. Each student shall demonstrate competence by completing (with a grade of C or 
better) no fewer than three units of work from each category below: 

A. Writing Skills in English (three units) 

Basic subjects writing skills courses are designed to impart skills in organizing, analyzing, and 
expressing thoughts and concepts in standard written English: 

Communications 103 Applied Writing (3) 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 


Bachelor's Degree 75 


B. Logical and Mathematical Skills (three units) 

Basic subjects mathematical and logical skills courses are designed to provide content and 
methodology needed for more advanced work In logic and/or mathematics or for application 
of these subjects in other disciplines. 

Computer Science 112 Introduction to Computer Programming (3) 

Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 

Management Science 264 Introduction to Computer Programming (2) 

Management Science 289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

Mathematics 100 Precalculus Mathematics (4) 

Mathematics 110 Mathematics for Liberal Arts Students (3) 

Mathematics 120 Introduction to Probability and Statistics (3) 

Mathematics 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Philosophy 210 Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course In Symbolic Logic (3) 

C Language Skills (three units) 

Basic subjects language skills courses are designed to impart skills in the use, interpretation, 
and analysis of spoken or written language. 

English 201 Intermediate College Writing (3) 

Foreign Languages 101* Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 

Foreign Languages 102* Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 

Foreign Languages 203* Intermediate Foreign Languages (3) 

Foreign Languages 204* Intermediate Foreign Languages (3) 

French 230 Intermediate Diction and Phonetics (2) 

French 240 Intermediate Conversation and Composition (2) 

German 100 A-j Personalized Instructions in Individualized German (3-10) 

German 213 Intermediate Reading (2) 

German 214 Intermedidate Reading (2) 

Library 300 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

Linguistics 301 Sanskrit (3) 

Philosophy 200 Argument and Reasoning (3) 

Reading 201 Academic Reading: Analyses and Strategies (3) 

Reading 202 Vocabulary Comprehension: Cognitive Processes (3) 

Religious Studies 301 Sanskrit (3) 

Spanish 103 Intensive Review of Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Spanish 213 Intermediate Conversation (2) 

Spanish 214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Speech Communication 100 Introduction to Human Communication (3) 

Speech Communication 102 Public Speaking (3) 

Theater 110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 


///. Foundations: 24 units minimum 
A. Western Civilization (nine units) 

The required courses In Western civilization give a holistic view of the development of 
Western society — its values, traditions and institutions. The complementary courses included 
in the arts or humanities are chronologically organized and cover a period of centuries or 
millennia. They trace the development of a single major aspect of Western civilization In the 
arts or humanities. 

/. The History of Western Civilization (six units) 

History 11 0A,B Western Civilization (6) 

2. Arts and Humanities (three units) 

Anthropology 110 Non-Western Cultures and the Western Tradition (3) 

Art 201 A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

* The fundamental or intermediate courses in any language offered by the Foreign Languages and Literatures Department will fulfill 
this requirement 


76 Bachelor's Degree 

Comparative Literature 110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient Through 
Medieval Times (3) 

Comparative Literature 1 1 1 Literature of the Western World from Renaissance through 
the 19th Century (3) 

English 1 10 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
English 1 1 1 Literature of the Western World from Renaissance through the 1 9th Century 
(3) 

Music 100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Philosophy 115A The Western Tradition: Philosophy (3) 

Philosophy 115B The Western Tradition: Philosophy (3) 

Religious Studies 345 A History and Development of 

Christian Thought: The Beginning to 1274 (3) 

Religious Studies 345B History and Development of Christian Thought: 1275 to Present 
(3) 

Religious Studies 346A History and Development of Jewish Thought: The Beginning to 
Moses Maimonides (3) 

Religious Studies 346B History and Development Jewish Thought: From Ben Cerson to 
the Present (3) 

Theatre 175 History of Western Theatre (3) 

B. Fundamentals of Natural Science (six or seven units) 

The courses included provide the content and methodology that form the bases for studies 
in all other areas of natural science. A solid foundation in this area will allow students to 
develop their interests in related areas or to go into depth in one particular field. 

Students must complete a total of nine units in natural science. A laboratory course must be 
included in the nine units. Students completing six or seven units in 1 1 IB must take an additional 
two or three units in IV. 

/. Physical Science (three or four units) 

Chemistry 100 Introductory Chemistry (3) 

Chemistry 100L t Introductory Chemistry Laboratory (1) 

Chemistry IlSf Introductory Chemistry (4) 

Chemistry 120A t General Chemistry (5) 

Earth Science 101 Physical Geology (3) 

Earth Science 101L t Physical Geology Laboratory (1) 

Physics 123 Perspectives of Man's Physical Universe (3) 

Physics 123L t Perspectives of Man's Physical Universe Laboratory (1) 

Physics 211A • Elementary Physics (3) 

Physics 212A t * Elementary Physics Laboratory (1) 

Physics 225A Fundamental Physics: Mechanics (3) 

Physics 226A t Fundamental Physics: Mechanics Laboratory (1) 

Science 112 # Our Physical Earth (4) 

Science 112L t Our Physical Earth Laboratory (1) 

2. Biological Science (three or four units) 

Biological Science 101 Elements of Biology (3) 

Biological Science 101L t Elements of Biology Laboratory (1) 

Biological Science 141 Principles of Botany (4) 

Biological ScierKe 141 L f Principles of Botany Laboratory (2) 

Biological Science 161 Principles of Zoology (2) 

Biological Science 161L t Principles of Zoology Laboratory (2) 

Science 113 The Chemical Basis of Life: The Interface of Biology and Chemistry (4) 
Science 113Lt The Chemical Basis of Life: The Interface of Biology and Chemistry 
Laboratory (1) 


t Laboratory 

• Physics 21 1A and 212A must be Uken corKurrentiy. 

# lip fulfill this requirement students must lake both Science 1 12 aiKi 113 in addition to one of the laboratory sections (112L or 

113L) 


Bachelor's Degree 77 


C. Fundamentals of Social Science (three units) 

Included are the introductory general courses in the fundamental social sciences whose con- 
tent and methodology form the bases for more specialized and interdisciplinary work. 
American Studies 101 Introduction to Culture Studies: American Studies as Interdiscipli- 
nary Social Science (3) 

Anthropology 102 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Economics 100 The Economic Environment (3) 

Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Geography 100 World Habitats (3) 

Political Science 200 Introduction to the Study of Politics (3) 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

Sociology 101 Introduction to Sociology (3) 


D. Introduction to the Arts and Humanities (six units) 

Included are Introductory general courses in the arts and humanities whose content and 
methodology form the bases for more specialized and Interdisciplinary work. They provide 
comprehensive surveys of the disciplines, with emphasis on both content and method. 

/. Arts (three units) 

Art 101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Music 101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Music 203 Ethnic Music (3) 

Theatre 100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 101 Introduction to Dance (3) 


2. Humanities (three units) 

English 200 Introduction to Literature (3) 

English 311 Masters of British Literature to 1760 (3) 

English 312 Masters of British Literature from 1760 (3) 

English 321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

English 322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

English 354 Linguistics and Literature (3) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 

German 375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Linguistics 106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 354 Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Philosophy 100 Introduction to Philosophy (3) 

Philosophy 110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) 
Philosophy 290 History of Philosophy: Greek Philosophy (3) 

Philosophy 310 Ethnics (3) 

Portuguese 315 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 
Religious Studies 110 Comparative Studies of the World's Great Religions (3) 
Spanish 315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 

Spanish 375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 


IV. Alternatives Within Natural Science: two or four units minimum 

These courses have a substantial scientific content. In addition, they are either introductory 
to the major subdisciplines in the natural sciences or they relate science to significant social 
problems. 

Students who complete only seven units in natural science under Section IIIB must take two 
additional units from Section IV, Alternatives to Natural Science. If a laboratory course was 
not taken in Section IIIB, one must be taken from Section IV. 

Courses listed in IIIB or the following: 

Anthropology 101 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

Biological Science 102 Issues in Environmental Biology (3) 

Biological Science 306 Biology of Aging (3) 

Biological Science 313 Human Genetics (3) 


78 Bachelor's Degree 


Biological Science 314 Human Issues in Genetics (1) 

Biological Science 319 Marine Biolc^y (3) 

Biological Science 319L t Marine Biology Laboratory (1) 

Biological Science 323 Biology of Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STD) (1) 

Biological Science 353 Principles of Horticulture (2) 

Biological ScierKe 360 Biology of Human Sexuality (1) 

Chemistry 107 Air and Water Pollution (3) 

Chemistry 107D t Experiments in Air and Water Pollution (1) 

Chemistry 1 1 1 Nutrition and Drugs 

Earth Science 120 Introduction to Earth Science (3) 

Earth Science 121 t Earth Science Laboratory (1) 

Earth Science 140 Earth's Atmosphere (3) 

Earth Science 201 Earth History (4) 

Earth Science 310 Directed Readings in Earth Science (1-2) 

Geography 110 Principles of Physical Geography (3) 

Geography 120 Environment and Change (3) 

History 231 Ascent of Man (3) 

Philosophy 384 Philosophy of the Physical Sciences (3) 

Physical Science 100 Man and His Physical Environment (4) 

Physics 100 Man and His Physical Environment (4) 

Physics 105 Fads and Fallacies in the Name of Science (1) 

Physics 107 Nuclear Energy and Its Impact on Society (1) 

Physics 200 Introduction to Astronomy (4) 

Physics 384 Philosophy of Physical Sciences (3) 

V. Explorations: six units minimum 

Six units must be chosen from among two of the following categories: 

A. Arts, Humanities, Social Sciences 

Courses may be chosen from those listed in IIIA, C or D. 

B. African, Asian, Latin American or Modern Middle Eastern Civilization 
The courses included are continental surveys which provide an introduction to Asia, Africa, 
Latin America or the modern Middle East. 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 346 The African Experience (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 352 African Literature (3) 

Anthropology 104 Traditional Cultures of the World (3) 

Peoples of South An>erlca (3) 

Archaeology of South America (3) 

Peoples of Africa (3) 

People of Asia (3) 

Peoples of the Middle East and North Africa (3) 

Peoples of the Pacific (3) 

Chicano Studies 336 Main Trends in Spanish- American Literature (3) 

Comparative Literature 352 African Literature (3) 

Economics 332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

English 352 African Literature (3) 

Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Geography 344 Africa (3) 

Geography 346 Australia and the Pacific (3) 

History 350 History of Latin American Civilization (3) 

History 360 Modern Asia: Nationalism and Revolutionary Change (3) 

Philosophy 350 Oriental Philosophy (3) 

Religious Studies 250 The Religion of Islam (3) 

Religious Studies 270 Introduction to the Oriental Religions (3) 


Anthropology 325 
Anthropology 326 
Anthropology 328 
Anthropology 340 
Anthropology 345 
Anthropology 347 


t Laboratory 


Bachelor's Degree 79 


C Cultural Pluralism in the United States 

Included are introductory survey courses emphasizing the interaction of cultures in the 
United States. 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 220 The Indian in American History (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 240A Afro-American History to 1865 (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 240B Afro-American History from 1865 to Present (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 422 Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

American Studies 301 The American Character (3) 

American Studies 411 The White Ethnic in America (3) 

Anthropology 321 The American Indian (3) 

Chicano Studies 106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

Chicano Studies 220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

History 488 Black American Since 1890 (3) 

Human Services 311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

Linguistics 108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

Sociology 431 Minority Croup Relations (3) 

Sociology 436 Social Stratification (3) 

Speech Communication 320 Intercultural Communication (3) 

D. Interdisciplinary Studies 

Included are those courses in which the contributions of two or more disciplines are clearly 
noted and in which the integration of these disciplines is a conscious and explicit part of the 
presentation. The purpose of this integration is to analyze a contemporary problem, issue or 
topic. 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

American Studies 300 Introduction to American Popular Culture (3) 

American Studies 345 The American Dream (3) 

American Studies 386A American Social History, 1750-1860 (3) 

American Studies 386B American Social History, 1865-1930 (3) 

Communications 233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

. Geography 160 Culture and Environment (3) 

Geography 170 Introduction to the City (3) 

History 370 American Sex Reformers (3) 

History 386A American Social History, 1750-1860 ( 3) 

History 386B American Social History, 1865-1930 (3) 

Music 350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Philosophy 341 Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 

Physical Education 381 Human Movement in Cultural Perspective (3) 

£ Participatory Experience 

Courses involving an individual participatory experience have been selected from one of the 
arts — art, dance, music, theatre — for the purpose of enhancing esthetic appreciation through 
creative engagement. They include theory as well as an oppK>rtunity to manipulate or perform. 
Afro-Ethnic Studies 314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

Art loo Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Music 183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1 ) 

Music 184A Piano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Music 361 a-h Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Music 362A jazz Band (1) 

Music 362C Chamber Singers ( 1 ) 


80 Bachelor's Degree 


Music 362D Percussion Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Music 362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

Music 362C String Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Music 362H Chamber Orchestra (1) 

Music 362L Jazz Laboratory Band ( 1 ) 

Music 362P Choral Laboratory (1) 

Music 362X Beginning Opera Techniques (1 ) 

Music 362Z Advanced Opera Techniques (1) 

Music 363b-x Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Music 3651 Instrumental Workshop (1)- 
Music 365K Keyboard Workshop (1) 

Music 365V Vocal Workshop (1 ) 

Music 400 Concert Music (1) 

Theatre 112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

Theatre 122A Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Theatre 126 Improvisation (2) 

Theatre 163 Beginning Acting (3) 

Theatre 206A Mime and Pantomime (3) 

Theatre 241 Voice Production for the Performer (2) 
Theatre 251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Theatre 411 Oral Interpretation of Children's Literature (3) 
Theatre 436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (3,3) 


Under provisions of Executive Orders 338 and 342, accredited colleges and universities may certify 
the completion of part of the 48 units required in general education. Within the policy of the Board 
of Trustees, Cal State Fullerton will accept such certification of general education up to a maximum 
of 39 semester units, but may accept no more in general education than the number of units required 
in each area (A through E below) and no more than 30 units in areas B through D combined. 
Fullerton will require the completion of the remainder of the units in those areas in which the student 
has not been certified. Students will not be expected to complete more units than the difference 
between the amount accepted by certification and the 48 semester units required. 

Complete Remainder from 


Certified Areas 


Fullerton Sections 

A. Communication 

9 

IIA; lie 

B. Natural Sciences/ Mathematics 

12 

IIB; NIB, IV 

C. Arts and Humanities 

12 

IIIA(2); IIID(l), IIID(2) 

D. Social Sciences 

12 

1, IIIA(l), MIC, VB, VC, VD 

E. Self-development 

3 

VB, C, D, E 


2. Upper-Division Baccalaureate Writing Requirement 

The university requires that every person completing bachelor's degrees under 1980-81 and later 
catalog requirements demonstrate writing ability acceptable for graduation. The upper-division 
writing requirement has two parts; students must satisfy each: 

An upper-division course. Each major requires that students pass a specially designated upper- 
division course of at least three semester units. 

The University Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). The university faculty requires that 
students pass the EWP, which has been especially designed to measure writing ability. 

The university requires that students complete both p)arts of the requirement before achieving senior 
standing (90 units). Students who have not passed the requirement before becoming seniors may 
not enroll for courses other than those to meet the requirement. Senior transfer students must 
complete the requirement during their first semester at Fullerton. 

Students may apply for a waiver from the requirement if they ( 1 ) have published expository prose, 
(2) are candidates for second bachelor's degrees and demonstrate writing ability equivalent to that 
required by Fullerton, or (3) as transfer students present evidence of equivalent proficiency in 
writing at the upper division. 


Bachelor's Degree 81 


The Course — ^The University Board on Writing Proficiency must certify the course or courses that 
each major department designates to fulfill the requirement. A current list of certified courses app>ears 
in the class schedule each semester. To be certified by the board, a course shall include instruction 
in composition, include writing assignments relevant to the major discipline of varying length and 
functions, include timely evaluations of writing, and have students' final course grades include 
assessment of writing competence. 

The Examination — The University Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) is in two parts, 
approximately evenly divided between objective and essay sections. Information about registration 
for the EWP and testing dates is published in the class schedule each semester. 

3. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, and a specific major (and possibly a minor), 
each student is free to choose the rest of the courses needed to complete the semester units required 
for graduation. Different majors vary considerably in both the number of units they require in their 
own and related fields. They also vary considerably in the amount of latitude or choice they permit 
in selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The general education requirement encourages 
freedom of choice within the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic 
subjects. Students at the university use their electives to broaden their general education, deepen 
some aspect of their specialties, pursue work in related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms 
for particular subjects or areas of interest. 

Advisement on general education and electives is provided by the Academic Advisement Center. 

4. Units 

(a) Total units 

A minimum of 1 24 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor of arts degree. 
Bachelor of science degree requires 124 to 132 semester units. The bachelor of music degree 
requires 132 semester units. 

(b) Upper-division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper-division credit is required. 

(c) Completion of a minimum of 30 semester units in residence is required. At least 24 of these 
units must be earned in upper-division courses and 12 must be in the major. Extension credit 
or credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirement, 
except that the chancellor may designate specified extension courses that may be offered for 
residence credit and may establish policies and procedures by which residence credit may 
be earned by evaluation. When individual circumstances warrant an exception, the university 
petitions committee may authorize the substitution of credit earned elsewhere for residence 
credit. 

5. Scholarship 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, including those 
accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major. 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at Fullerton. 

6. Major 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate university authority is 
required. In bachelor of arts programs at least 24 units, including 12 at the upper-division level, must 
be applied exclusively to the major requirements and may not be used to meet the requirements 
of general education. In bachelor of science programs, a minimum of 36 units, including 18 at the 
upper-division level, must be applied exclusively to the major. The bachelor of music degree requires 
a maximum of 70 semester units. 

7. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a student to complete the require- 
ments for more than one major within a degree program when the additional major is within the 
degree of the first major. At least 24 units, including 12 at the upper-division level, in each bachelor 
of arts major, or 36 units, including 18 at the upper-division level, in each bachelor of science major. 


82 Bachelor's Degree 


must be applied exclusively to the respective major and may not be used to meet requirements in 
other majors or in general education. The student shall declare the additional major with the 
appropriate department not later than the beginning of the student's final year of study. The comple- 
tion of additional majors will be noted at the time of graduation by appropriate entries on the 
academic record and in the commencement program. 

It is also possible for a student to complete a major in one degree program and an additional major 
from a different program, provided the minimum units described in the preceding paragraph are 
applied exclusively to the respective major and are not used in other majors or in general education. 
In this instance, the student has the option of which degree he or she will receive with the major 
appropriate to that degree. The completion of the additional major will be noted on the student's 
academic record. The university does not award two degrees to the individual who completes 
multiple majors in a four-year degree program. 

Second baccalaureate 

(a) First degree completed elsewhere, second at Fullerton 

Students seeking a bachelor's degree from Fullerton after having received a baccalaureate 
from another institution may qualify for graduation with the approval and recommendation 
of the faculty upon completion of the following: 

( 1 ) general education requirements 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

(b) Two baccalaureates from Fullerton 

With the approval and recommendation of the faculty, a student may qualify for a second 
baccalaureate under the following circumstances: 

(1) The second field of study is offered In a different degree (e.g., bachelor of arts to 
bachelor of science) 

(2) At least 30 units, including 24 upper-division units and 12 In the major, are earned in 
residence after the conferral of the first degree 

(3) All requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply to graduate degrees or credential 
programs. 

8. Minor 

A minor is not required for the baccalaureate, however, students may elect to complete one or more 
minors from those available and have that noted on their records. A minor consists of an academic 
program specified by the academic departments in the catalog. No courses required in the major 
may be counted toward the minor and also toward requirements for the major. General education 
courses, however, may be used to meet minor requirements. 

9. Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must file an application for a graduation requirements check during 
registration week for the semester prior to the semester in which the student expects to graduate. 
The graduation and diploma fee is required when the application is filed. Application forms are 
available at the admissions and records information desk and in the registration center. 
Candidates for the baccalaureate should refer to the semester class schedule for application filing 
dates. A senior should have completed at least 100 units (irKluding the current work in progress) 
and a substantial portion of the major requirements before requesting a graduation check. If the 
candidate does not complete the requirements in the semester indicated, a change of graduation 
date must be filed in the Office of Admissions and Records. 

10. Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the University 

Under provisions of the Faculty Council, the Office of Admissions and Records publishes a list of 
degree candidates twice a year: in the fall and In the spring (for both spring and summer graduates). 
After review and approval by the faculty, and upon verification of the completion of requirements, 
diplomas are Issued with the last day of the respective term as the official date of graduation. 
Annual commencement exercises are held at the end of the spring semester for those who com- 
pleted degree requirements mid-year and for those completing degree requirements in the spring 
semester or summer session. The president of the university, with the authority of the Board of 
Trustees, confers all degrees, subject to the completion of remaining requirements. 

Note: Students completing bachelor degree requirements who wish to continue their studies at the 
university for postbaccalaureate or graduate degree objectives must apply for admission declaring 
their new objective. 



ACADEMC 

ADVISEMH^ 


84 


ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


The Academic Advisement Center provides guidance information in the choice of an undergraduate 
major and selection of elective and general education courses. It is the administrative center for 
undeclared undergraduate majors. All problems encountered by the undeclared major and requests, 
which normally require the assistance of a department chair, are handled by the director of the 
Academic Advisement Center. 

For choosing general education courses and help in choosing an undergraduate major, students 
should seek the advice of the director or of an adviser in the Academic Advisement Center. 

No appointment is necessary to engage the assistance of an adviser about various aspects of the 
academic life at the university. For more specific Information about the office, the student should 
consult the class schedule. 

Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary educational or vocational goals may 
enroll as undeclared majors. However, they must select a school which reflects their general interests , 

and consult the office of the school dean for academic advisement. During their freshman and 
sophomore years, such students should explore their interests and potential by enrolling in a set of 
courses recommended by a school adviser. 

Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student should choose a major by the beginning of the junior year so that he or she may 
complete major requirements in an orderly way. Most major requirements allow students the 
freedom to take a number of courses in fields other than in the majors. 

To help students, the university has available a number of useful resources: the academic advisement 
information sessions conducted in May, July, August and December; the information about majors 
available from the Academic Advisement Center; a variety of counseling and testing services pro- 
vided by the Career Development Center; and the department and school offices for information 
and advice on particular fields, departmental brochures and manuals describing their programs of 
study and later work opportunities. There are student organizations with disciplinary and profes- 
sional interests and the Career Development Center has information on vocations and work oppor- 
tunities which may help in the selection of a major. 

The task of selecting a major (and often a minor or other complenr>entary specialization) becomes 
one of crystallizing ideas on the basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other 
students, faculty, the staff of the Academic Advisement Center, etc. The option of taking a limited 
number of courses on a Credit/ No Credit basis often will be helpful in exploring new interests. 
Students must plan freshman or sophomore programs which will permit their entering or taking 
advanced courses in fields they may want to be their majors. They should check such major 
requirements as mathematics, chemistry and foreign language which must be taken before the junior 
year or perhaps even begun during the freshman year. Students anticipating graduate or professional 
study should exercise special care in planning undergraduate programs, and they should seek faculty 
counseling in the fields concerned. Advance examination of the possibilities of graduate or profes- 
sional study will be helpful to students who have clear educational and vocational objectives. 

Those whose goals and objectives have not yet crystallized will have opportunities to take courses 
in various fields and make up their minds during their lower division work. They should, however, 
take full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and outside the campus to learn more about 
available fields of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should study all the requirements which are 
specified In this catalog under their chosen degree program. Then they should make a tentative 
semester by semester plan for completing the requirements, with regard for prerequisites. They 
should discuss this plan with their major advisers. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in other fields and supporting courses 
in basic skills may be required. These should be included in the tentative semester by semester plan. 


Preprofessional Programs 85 

Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to classes. The time and place for such 
tests are given in the class schedule. Students should purchase a copy of the class schedule at the 
Titan Bookstore well before registration for classes begins. 

Choosing General Education Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires its graduates to have sampled a 
variety of disciplines as part of their general education. The broad categories of general education 
courses are presented in the catalog section on ''Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor's 
Degree." 

All students are strongly encouraged to consult with faculty members or the Academic Advisement 
Center about choice of general education and elective courses. 

Change of Major, Degree or Credential Objective 

To change major, degree, or credential objective, obtain the required form in the Office of Admis- 
sions and Records or the Academic Advisement Center. Such a change is not official until the form 
has been signed and filed in the Registrar's Office. 

DEPARTMENTAL ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

Each department follows the advisement system which it finds the most appropriate for its majors. 
It is the responsibility of the student to obtain the assistance of a faculty adviser. 

The adviser is a resource person who can provide information and suggestions and who can assist 
the student to find the most desirable ways to meet the requirements for graduation and for the major 
or credential. The final choice of courses and the responsibility for the program lies with the student. 
Undergraduate students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared majors) or who are 
not seeking a degree will be advised in the Academic Advisement Center. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice if students provide lists of courses they 
have taken and their own copies of transcripts from colleges previously attended (if students are 
new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Undergraduate advisement coordinators are appointed by each department (for the School of 
Business Administration and Economics see below) in order to facilitate communication between 
students and faculty. They coordinate advisement in each department and act as resource persons 
for the students and the faculty of the department in all matters of advisement. Their names, room, 
telephone numbers and office hours are available each semester from the Academic Advisement 
Center on an updated list. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics provides advisement in the advisement center 
of the school. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields of specialization, except in educa- 
tion where all will have a professional adviser from the School of Human Development and 
Community Service. Those students seeking a credential for teaching in secondary schools will be 
assigned both a professional and a major adviser. 

PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate preparation for graduate work in a 
variety of fields. Students who have made tentative decisions about institutions in which they may 
wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of those graduate schools as they plan 
their undergraduate programs. Students planning to undertake graduate work should supplement 
their undergraduate programs by anticipating requirements at major graduate schools. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through the master's degree. These include 
programs in the fine arts, business administration, communications, education, engineering, health 
education and physical education and recreation, public administration, and speech pathology- 
audiology. Students interested in preparing for professional careers in these areas, either here or in 
other educational institutions, are encouraged to seek assistance and guidance from our faculty 
members in these fields. 


86 Health Professions 


Prelegal Preparation 

It is recommended that prospective law students prepare themselves in such fields as English, 
American history, economics, political science (particularly the history and development of English 
and American political institutions) and such undergraduate courses as judicial process, administra- 
tive law, constitutional law and International law, philosophy (particularly ethics and logic), business 
administration, anthropology, psychology and sociology. 

A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the natural sciences and the humani- 
ties Is desirable. Students with interest In becoming lawyers should contact the Prelaw Society. Some 
faculty members in the School of Business Administration and Economics and Departments of 
American Studies, History and Pollticlal Science, also can provide advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested In pursuing careers in counseling, social work, the teaching of 
religion, and the ministry and associated fields should take some courses in religion, psychology, 
anthropology, sociology, philosophy, education, communications, history, English, speech com- 
munication and a foreign language. Students desiring assistance and counseling regarding advanced 
work or professional careers may seek help from the faculty in the Department of Religious Studies. 

Social Welfare 

Students who plan to seek employment in social work or social welfare should prepare themselves 
in the fields of human services, psychology (particularly child and adolescent psychology), sociolo- 
gy, anthropology, political science, economics and research methods in social science. 

Students who Intend to enter a professional school following undergraduate training should learn 
about the specific prerequisites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordinarily a 
major In one of the social sciences, and some additional work In at least several other social sciences, 
is recommended. Students with Interests in pursuing careers in the fields of social welfare should 
contact the Department of Sociology for advice and assistance. 

HEALTH PROFESSIONS 

All health professions programs are seeking the best qualified applicants with a good command of 
communication skills, rigorous basic science preparation and as broad a general education base as 
possible. 

The Health Professions Committee assists students to prepare the best academic programs consistent 
with their former educational experience, interests and professional objectives. 

Student Responsibility 

All new students, both first-time freshmen and transfer students, interested in preparing to enter one 
of the following health professions, or related health professions, should register with the secretary 
of the committee, in the Health Professions Office. These health professions are medicine, os- 
teopathic medicine, (xxJiatric medicine, veterinary medicine, chiropractic, clinical pharmacy, clini- 
cal pharmacology, dentistry, optometry. 

The related health professions include anatomist, dental hygienist, histologist, medical technologist, 
nutritionist, occupational therapist, orthotist-prosthetlst, pharmacologist, physical therapist, pharma- 
cist, physiologist, public health. 

Health Professions Committee. 

The committee assists the student to (a) gain some "'preceptorship" experience with a practicing 
professional In the area appropriate to the field of interest; (b) select a list of professional schools 
to which there is a likelihood of admission; (c) prepare professional school applications; (d) prepare 
for an admissions interview. 

The committee prepares recommendation letters for approved applicants. 


UNIVERSITY 

CURRICULA 


88 


UNIVERSITY CURRICULA 


DECREE PROGRAMS 


California State University, Fullerton offers the 


described on the pages listed: 

Page 

B.A. American Studies 201 

B.A. Anthropology 204 

B.A. Art 94 

B.A. Biological Science 301 

B.A. Business Administration 133 

B.A. Chemistry 311 

B.S. Chemistry 310 

B.S. Child Development 158 

B.A. Communications 213 

B.A. Communicative Disorders 292 

B.A. Comparative Literature 223 

B.S. Computer Science 318 

B.A. Criminal Justice 221 

B.S. Earth Science 322 

B.A. Economics 138 

B.S. Engineering 328 

B.A. English 224 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (with 
concentrations in Afro-American studies 

and Chicano studies) 198, 209 

B.A. French 231 

B.A. Geography 244 

B.A. German 231 

B.A. History 249 


baccalaureate degree programs which are 

Page 


B.S. Human Services 174 

B.A. Latin American Studies 256 

B.A. Liberal Studies 258 

B.A. Linguistics 260 

B.A. Mathematics 347 

B.A. Music 105 

B.M. Music 108 

B.S. Nursing 176 

B.A. Philosophy 263 

B.S. Physical Education 164 

B.A. Physics 355 

B.A. Political Science (including 

concentration in 

public administration) 268 

B.A. Psychology 274 

B.A. Religious Studies 280 

B.A. Russian and East European 

Area Studies 284 

B.A. Sociology 285 

B.A. Spanish 231 

B.A. Special Major 92 

B.A. Speech Communication 292 

B.A. Theatre Arts 119 


The following master's degree programs are offered: 


Page 


M.A. American Studies 364 

M.A. Anthropology 365 

M.A. Art 366 

M.A. Biology 368 

M.B.A. Business Administration 369 

M.A. Chemistry 372 

M.A. Communications 374 

M.A. Communicative Disorders 408 

M.A. Comparative Literature 375 

M.S. Computer Science 376 

M.S. Counseling 377 

M.A. Economics 377 


M.S. Education (with concentrations in 
bilingual /bicultural education [Spanish- 
English], elementary curriculum and 
instruction, higher education, reading, 
school administration, 
special education and teaching English 
to speakers of other languages) .... 379-385 


M.S. Engineering 386 

M.A. English 388 

M.S. Environmental Studies 389 

M.A. French 389 

M.A. Geography 390 


Page 

M.A. German 391 

M.A. History 392 

M.A. Linguistics 392 

M.S. Management Science 394 

M.A. Mathematics 3% 

M.A. Music 398 

M.M. Music 398 

M.S. Physical Education 399 

M.A. Political Science 400 

M.A. Psychology 401 

M.S. Psychology (Clinical/Community) .. 402 

M.P.A. Public Administration 403 

M.A.T. Science 405 

M.A. Social Sciences 405 

M.A. Sociology 406 

M.A. Spanish (including emphasis in 

bilingual studies) 407 

M.A. Special Major 92 

M.A. Speech Communication 408 

M.S. Taxation 409 

M.A. Theatre Arts 411 

M.F.A. Theatre Arts (Technical 
Theatre and Design) 412 


Within some of the degree programs listed above, areas of concentration (including emphases, 
options or sequences of courses) in addition to those shown, are possible. Students should consult 
the appropriate program, department, division or school. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 89 


OTHER CURRICULA 

Programs also are offered which lead to the award of a minor for the baccalaureate degree. In 
addition, programs leading to credentials and certificates are available. More specific information 
may be found in the appropriate curricular sections of this catalog. For further information, students 
should consult the particular program, department, division or school. 

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter to be covered and provide 
additional information on units of credit, the level of instruction (see general course numbering 
code), prerequisites and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, seminar and individually 
supervised work). 

GENERAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

l(X)-299 Lower-division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but op)en also to upper-division 
students. 

300-399 Upp)er-division courses of junior and senior level, which do /?o/give graduate credit unless 
included on an approved graduate study plan (such as a credential or graduate degree 
program) for a specific graduate student. 

400-499 Upper-division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate credit when taken 
by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduate students. 

7(X)-701 Course numbers which provide opportunity for graduate and postbaccalaureate students 
who are not enrolled in regular courses to maintain continuous enrollment during a particu- 
lar semester. These classes do not carry credit. 

SPECIAL COURSE NUMBERS 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all departments and schools with the 
same numbers: 499 and 599 are used for undergraduate and graduate "independent study"; 1% or 
4% for "student-to-student tutorials"; 597 for a graduate "project"; and 596 for a graduate "thesis." 

EXPLANATION OF COURSE NOTATIONS 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descriptions in this catalog. 

1 . The figure in parentheses following the course title indicates the number of semester units for the 
course. Courses offered for varying units are indicated as (1-3) or (3-^). 

2. A course listing such as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 (3) (Same as Linguistics 108) indicates that a 
student taking the course may choose to count it in either of those two disciplines. 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title and the number of units indicates 
the same course previously was numbered 433. 

STUDENT-TO-STUDENT TUTORIALS 

The "student-to-student tutorial" provides a formal way to encourage students to learn through 
teaching. It also provides tutoring to all students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

In those departments which choose to offer such courses, the courses are numbered 1% or 4% and 
carry one to three units of credit. The prerequisites include a grade-point average of at least 3.0 
and/or consent of the instructor plus simultaneous enrollment in the course or previous enrollment 
in a similar course or its equivalent. The tutor and his/her tutee or tutees will work in mutually 
advantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve more carefully and thoroughly into the materi- 
als presented in this specific course. One to three students may be tutored by the tutor unless the 
instructor decides that special circumstances warrant increasing the usual maximum of three tutees. 
Three hours of work per week are expected for each semester unit of credit, and this work may 
include, apart from contact hours with tutees, such other activities as: tutorial preparations; consult- 
ing with instructors; reporting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial experiences; and participation 
in an all-university orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A maximum of three units may 
be taken each semester. No more than three units of any combination of tutorial courses (1% or 
4%) may count toward an undergraduate degree program. The course must be taken as an elective 
and not counted toward general education, major or minor requirements. The course can be taken 


90 International Study Courses 

on a credit /no credit basis by the tutor. Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be 
initiated up until the official university census date. Tutors electing to respond to such requests will 
receive credits at the end of the semester and can register In the course until the official university 
census date. Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses and evaluations of their 
shared tutorial experience to the instructor, and both must participate in an all-university orientation 
program as well as in any conference or critique that the instructor of the course may require. 
Further information can be obtained from the department in which the student is interested in a 
"student-to-student tutorial.'' 


INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the independent study program, the student may pursue topics or problems of special interest 
beyond the scope of a regular course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a 
research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examina- 
tion, or performance. Before registering, the student must get his topic approved by the instructor 
who will be sup)ervising independent study and by the department chair. 

A student may take no more than six units of independent study at the undergraduate level (299 
and 499 numbered courses) In a given semester. No more than nine units of independent study may 
be applied toward completion of the baccalaureate degree. A graduate student may apply no more 
than six units of independent study (499 or 599 numbered courses) toward completion of a master's 
degree, unless written approval Is obtained from the appropriate school dean. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

The California State University (CSU) International Programs offers students the opportunity to 
continue their studies overseas for a full academic year while they remain enrolled at their home 
CSU campus. The International Programs' primary purposes are to enable selected students to gain 
a firsthand understanding of other areas of the world and to advance their knowledge and skills 
within specific academic disciplines in pursuit of established degree objectives. 

A wide variety of academic majors may be accommodated by the 25 foreign universities cooperating 
with the International Programs in 15 countries around the globe. The affiliated institutions are: the 
University of SSo Paulo (Brazil); the universities of the Province of Quebec (Canada); the University 
of Copenhagen (through Denmark's International Student Committee's Study Division); the Univer- 
sity of Provence (France); the Universities of Hamburg, Heidelberg, and Tubingen (Germany); the 
Hebrew University of Jerusalem (Israel); the University of Florence (Italy); Waseda University 
(japan); the Ibero-Americana University (Mexico); Massey University and Lincoln University Col- 
lege (New Zealand); the Catholic University of Lima (Peru); National Chengchi University (Repub- 
lic of China/Taiwan); the Universities of Granada and Madrid (Spain); the University of Uppsala 
(Sweden); and Bradford University (the United Kingdom). Information on academic course offer- 
ings available at these locations Is in the International Programs Bulletin which may be obtained from 
the International Programs representative on campus. 

Eligibility for application Is limited to those students who will have upper-division or graduate 
standing at a CSU campus by September 1984, who possess a cumulative grade-point average of 
2.75 for all college level work completed at the time of application (some programs require a 3.0 
cumulative grade-point average), and who will have completed required language study where 
applicable. Selection is competitive and is based on home campus recommendations and the 
applicant's academic record. Final selection is made by the Office of International Programs in 
consultation with a statewide faculty selection committee. 

The International Programs supports all tuition and administrative costs overseas for each of its 
participants to the same extent that such funds would be expended to support similar costs in 
California. Students assume responsibility for all personal costs, such as transportation, room arni 
board, and living exponses, as well as for home camp>us fees. Because they remain enrolled at their 
home CSU campus while studying overseas. International Programs students earn full resident credit 
for all academic work completed while abroad and remain eligible to receive any form of finarKial 
aid (other than work-study) for which they can individually qualify. 

Information and ap>plication materials may be obtained from the Office of International Education 
and Exchange or by writing to The California State University International Programs, 4(X) Golden 
Shore, Suite 3(X), Long Beach, California 90802. Applications for the 1984-85 academic year overseas 
must be submitted by February 9, 1984 (except for the New Zealand program where applications 
are due by May 15, 1984). 


Bilingual/Cross-cultural Studies 91 


INTERNATIONAL STUDY COURSES 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State University International Study Programs 
register concurrently at Cal State Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits assigned 
to the student which are equivalent to courses offered at Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate students 
who discover appropriate study opportunities at the host Institution but no equivalent course at Cal 
State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and International Study 292 or 492. Graduate students 
may use Independent Graduate Research 599 and International Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower-division units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University International Programs. Study undertaken 
In a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper-division units) 

Open to students enrolled In California State University International Programs. Study undertaken 
in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University International Programs. Study undertaken 
In a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University. 

LIBRARY COURSES 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and methods enabling undergraduate students to locate 
information for course-related, as well as independent study and research. 

300 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

A survey of important information sources in various subject fields and the application of research 
methods which will enable students to become effective library users. Particular attention is 
given to the assembling of material for term papers and reports, including the preparation of 
bibliographies. 

302 Library Research Methods for Specific Majors (1) 

Library research methodology in special subjects such as business, education and science. 

CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY PROGRAMS 

A joint degree program is an endeavor involving two or more existing academic departments which 
need not be within the same school. Such programs are administered by program councils com- 
posed of representatives elected by participating departments. The joint degree programs are housed 
in administration units as follows: 

School of Human Development and Community Service 
Child Development, B.S. 

Ffuman Services, B.S. 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 
Latin American Studies, B.A. 

Liberal Studies, B.A. 

Russian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 

Social SclerKes, M.A. 

School of Mathematics, Science and Engineering 
Environmental Studies, M.S. 

degree descriptions are located within the appropriate school section of this catalog. 

bilingual/cross-cultural studies 

Students may pursue a course of study with a bilingual /cross-cultural emphasis. 

Complete course listings and details are available from the Department of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures, the Department of Chicano Studies, Division of Teacher Education and Educational 
Opportunity Program advisers. 


92 Special Major Program 


SPECIAL MAJOR PROGRAM 

From the total curriculum of the university, students may wish to plan a specially designed program 
of study that does not duplicate significantly any existing major or concentration. The special major 
provides opportunities for selected students to pursue individualized programs of study leading to 
a degree when legitimate academic and professional goals can be satisfied by a judicious selection 
of courses from two or more fields, and when these aims cannot be satisfied by the authorized 
standard degree majors or double majors that are available on the campus (e.g., liberal studies, social 
sciences). This major, designed for exceptional cases of Individual students only, provides an 
opportunity to develop concentration or specializations outside the framework of existing majors. 
at is not intended as a means of bypassing normal graduation requirements or as a means by which 
students may graduate who fail to complete the degree major in which they are enrolled.) 

B.A. SPECIAL MAJOR 

Students desiring to work for a bachelor's degree with a special major should consult with the Office 
of Academic Advisement. 

1. Entrance to the special major program is normally at the beginning of the junior year (60 units 
remaining for graduation). 

2. The minimum requirement for the major is 48 units. A minimum of 36 upp>er-division units must 
be included in the major. 

3. Although students may Include on their study plans course work In progress and a maximum 
of 1 2 units of course work completed prior to the time of filing, approval of these courses is not 
automatic. 

4. No more than six units of 499 (Independent Study) and/or Internship course work may be 
Included in the major. 

5. Neither lower- nor upper-division courses applied to general education breadth requirements 
will be applicable toward the major. 

6. At least three units of appropriate course work in methodology shall be included in the student's 
study plan. Where appropriate this requirement may be waived by the University Curriculum 
Committee. 

7. All courses in the major must be taken under Grade Option 1. A CPA of 3.0 in the major is 
required for graduation. 

8. Prior to taking any substitute course work a petition for change of the study plan must be 
approved by the student's adviser and the University Curriculum Committee. 

9. A senior thesis shall be written by the student in this program during the semester preceding 
graduation. This thesis should show scholarly evidence of the merit In the student's choice of 
an interdisciplinary program. This paper shall be written under the direction of the student's 
special major adviser and approved by the faculty designated by the departments represented 
on the student's study plan. 

M.A. SPECIAL MAJOR 

A graduate student desiring to work for a master's degree with a special major should consult with 
the Office of Graduate Affairs and fill out an initial request form available at that office. 

1. Entrance to the special major program requires a grade-point average (CPA) of 3.0 in the 
undergraduate major and a CPA of 3.0 in the last 60 units of course work. 

2. The minimum requirement of units in the special major program is 30 units of which at least 
half must be graduate courses (500 level). 

3. Although students may include on their prop)osed study plan course work in progress or com- 
pleted prior to the time of filing, approval of these courses is not automatic. No more than nine 
units of course work taken prior to classified standing can be approved on the program. 

4. The program may contain no more than six units of Independent Study, Project or Thesis. 

5. All courses on the study plan must be taken under Grade Option 1. A CPA of 3.0 is required 
on all work on the study plan. 

6. Prior to taking any substitute course work, a petition for change of the study plan must be 
approved by the student's graduate adviser and graduate committee. 

7. A thesis or project shall be required for the completion of the program. The completed thesis 
will be filed with the Library; whereas the project shall be filed with the Office of Graduate 
Affairs. 



THE ARTS 


94 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Dean: Jerry Samuelson 

Associate Dean: Frank Cummings, III 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

FACULTY 
George James 
Department Chair 

Robert Caddes, Alvin Ching, Eileen Cowin, Frank Cummings, III, Darryl Curran, Robert Ewing, Dextra 
Frankel, Maurice Cray, Raymond Hein, Thomas Holste, Dorian Hunter, Jimmie Jenkins, Lawrence 
Johnson, C. Ray Kerciu, Ruth Kline, Naomi Knox, Donald Lagerberg, Clinton MacKenzie, Bryn 
Manley, Theodore Phillips, Robert Partin, Albert Porter, Leo Robinson, Jerry Rothman, Jerry Samuel- 
son,* Victor Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Vincent Suez 

The Department of Art offers a program which Includes the scholarly fields of art history, theory, 
analysis and criticism; the studio fields of drawing and painting, printmaking, sculpture, crafts 
(including fibers, jewelry, wood and metal), ceramics (including glass), graphic design. Illustration, 
environmental design, exhibition design, and creative photography; and the single subject teaching 
field of art education. 

The general objective of the art program is to provide a comprehensive learning environment which 
contributes technically and conceptually to the development of the creative artist, the art scholar, 
and the art teacher. More specifically, the art program provides opportunities for students: ( 1 ) to 
develop a knowledge and understanding of fundamental visual experiences and concepts basic to 
many forms and fields of art; (2) to develop a critical appreciation of historical and contemporary 
art forms as they relate to individual and social needs and values; (3) to express creatively one's 
personal experience and thought with skill and clarity in visual terms; and (4) to develop those 
understandings and skills necessary to pursue graduate studies in the field, to qualify for a position 
in business and industry as an art specialist, or to teach art in the schools. 

Although the art program is oriented primarily toward the art professional, the department also offers 
courses for the non-art major and the art minor which enrich visual experiences and understandings. 
Art department advisers will recommend courses which provide skills and concepts for the non- 
professional and which relate the visual arts humanistically to culture, environment, consciousness 
and perception. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

Three different program plans meet the individual Interest and needs of students working for the 
bachelor of arts degree In art. In the development of specific course offerings which make up these 
different program plans, it is the concern of the art faculty that each plan contains: ( 1 ) basic courses 
in art history, theory, analysis, criticism and studio practice which have as their primary focus the 
study of broad, fundamental concepts and skills underlying many fields of art; (2) specialized 
courses which provide concentration preparation in depth in a single field of art. The teaching of 
art history, theory, and criticism is not confined to courses bearing that title. Rather, each studio 
course involves theory and analysis as well as the practice of art, includes as part of its content the 
study of related art-historical concepts and form, and has as part of its purpose the development 
of critical abilities necessary to understanding and evaluating art. 

Plan I is for students specializing in art history, theory analysis and criticism and is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate studies In art history or museology. 
Plan II is for students specializing in studio performance with a preprofessional orientation an area 
of specialization selected from: (1 ) drawing and painting; (2) printmaking; (3) sculpture; (4) crafts 
(including emphases in fibers, jewelry, wood or metal); (5) ceramics (including emphasis in glass); 
(6) graphic design; (7) illustration; (8) environmental design; and (9) creative photography. 
Plan III is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan 
Act) for teaching art in grades K-12. 


University administrative officer 


Art 95 


Plan I requires a minimum of 60 units in art or approved related courses with a minimum of 36 units 
of upper division in art. Plan II requires a minimum of 60 units In art with a minimum of 33 units 
of upper division in art. Plan III requires a minimum of 54 units of art including a minimum of 27 
units of upper-division art. 

Students must pass Art 300 and the Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency before 
achieving senior standing (90 units). 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following Plan III must meet any specific 
requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section In catalog for School of Human 
Development and Community Service). 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major In art, students must have a C or better in all 
courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major 
courses in which a grade of D is obtained. 

PLAN I: ART HISTORY Units 

Preparation for the Major: 201 A, B; 6 units of studio courses; approved electives (12 
units) In art, American studies, anthropology, foreign languages, history, literature, 

music, philosophy, or theater 24 

The Major: 24 units of upper-division art history to be taken from the following: 3(X), 

301, 302, 321, 411, 412, 431, 432, 460A, 460B, 461A, 461B; 481; and 6 units of 
approved upper-division electives 36 

PLAN II: STUDIO 
Drawing and Painting 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107A,B; 117 (3 units); 201 A, B and 207A,B 27 

The Major: Art 307A,B; 317A,B; 487 A,B or C (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art 

history; Art 300; and 6 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Printmaking 

Preparation for the Major: 103; 104; 107 A,B; 117 (3 units); 201A,B; 247; and 3 units 

of art electives 27 

The Major: 307 A; 31 7A; Art 347 A,B; 487D (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art 

history; Art 300; and 6 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Sculpture 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107A,B; 117 (3 units); 201 A,B; 216A,B 27 

The Major: Art 316A,B; 336A,B; 486A or B (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art 

history; Art 300; and 6 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Crafts 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107 A,B; 201 A,B; 205A,B, and 3 units selected 

from 106A, 117 (3 units), 123B, 213A or 216A 27 

The Major— Cenera! Crafts: Art 305 A; 315A, 325A; 330 or 355A or 365A; 12 units 
selected from 305B, 31 5B, 325B, 485A, 485B, 485C, 485D, 485E or 485F; 6 units 

of upper-division art history; and Art 3(X) 33 

The Major— Jewelry /Metalsmithing: Art 305A; 315A,B; 325A,B; 9 units selected from 

485A and/or 485C; 6 units of upper-division art history; and Art 300 33 

The Major— Fibers: Art 330; 355A,B; 365A,B; 6 units selected from 485D, 485E or 485F; 

6 units of upper-division art history; Art 300; and 3 units of upper-division art 

electives 33 

The Major — Wood: Art 305A,B; 31 5A; 325A; 9 units of 485B; 6 units of upper-division 

art history; Art 300; and 3 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Ceramics 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 106A,B; 107A,B; 117 (3 units); 201 A,B 27 

The Major: Art 306A,B; 326A,B or 426A,B; 484A or B (6 units); 6 units of upper-division 

art history; Art 300; and 6 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Graphic Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107 A,B; 117 (3 units); 201 A,B; 223A,B 27 

The Major: Art 323 A, B; 338A; 363A; 483 A (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art history; 

Art 300; and 6 units of upper-division art electives 33 


% Art 


Illustration 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107 A, B; 117 (3 units); 123A; 201 A, B; and 3 

units of art electives 27 

The Major: Art 317A,B; 323A; 363A,B; 483C (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art 

history; Art 300; and 3 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Environmental Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 107A,B; 123B; 201 A, B; 213A; and 3 units of 

art electives 27 

The Major: 313A,B; 333A,B; 453A; 483B (6 units); 6 units of upper-division art history; 

Art 300; and 3 units of upper-division art electives 33 

Creative Photography 

Preparation for the Major: 103; 104; 107A,B; 117 (3 units); 201 A, B; 247; and 3 units 

of art electives 27 

The Major: 338A,B; 347A; 489 ( 6 units); 6 units of upper division art history; 6 units 
selected from 307 A, 323A, 347B, 363A; Art 300; and 3 units of upper-division art 
electives 33 

PLAN III: TEACHING 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

(Qualifies for teaching art in grades K-12) 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103; 104; 106A; 107 A, B; 117 (3 units); 201 A, B; 205A 30 

The Major: (Select one of the following areas) 

Drawing and Painting: 300 and 307 A, B; 310A; 31 7A; 338A; 347 A; 402, or 411 or 412; 

and 441 A,B 30 

Crafts: 300 and 305A; 306A,B; 307A or 310A; 31 5A; 330; 402 or 41 1 or 412; and 441 A, B 30 

Graphic Design and Photography: 300; 307 A or 310A; 323 A, B; 338A,B; 363 A; 402 or 

411 or 412; and 441 A, B 27 

Professional Preparation 

Art Ed 442 3 

Education course work 9 

Student teaching (one semester full time) 12 

Program Requirements: 

1. Assignment by the Art Department chair to a faculty adviser in art education. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in this catalog within the School of Human 
Development and Community Service for the curriculum pertinent to the Ryan 
Act provisions. 


3. Meet the requirements listed under Plan III, Teaching for the bachelor's degree 
in art. 

4. Completion of the major requirements prior to enrolling in the teacher education 
program. 

5. Admission to teacher education through the School of Human Development and 
Community Service is required prior to enrollment in Art Ed 442 and student 
teaching. 

6. Acceptance for teacher education and student teaching is based on candidate 
quotas, a review of a candidate's portfolio of art work, and evidence of success 
in completed university course work. 

7. Recommendation by the faculty adviser in art education. 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts degree, the student 
is eligible for a partial credential, which meets state requirements for teaching in grades 
K-1 2. Within a specified period of time from the beginning of a teaching assignment, 

30 units of course work must be completed at an accredited college or university to 
qualify for a full credential. Credentials are issued from the institution where this unit 
requirement has been completed. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in 
the elementary schools in multiple subject classrooms: 

Units 


Art 380 3 

Music 333 3 

Theatre 402A 3 


9 


Art 97 


The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who 
wishes to expand his/her knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 106A, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 330, 380, 441A,B 
Music 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281P,B,S,W, 283, 381 

Theatre 100, 101, 112, 122, 132, 142, 162, 206A,B, 263, 276A, 277, 323A,B, 370A,B, 402A,B, 403A,B, 
422 

MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts degree of which a 
minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. Included in the program must be a basic 
course in each of the following areas: (1 ) art history, theory, analysis and criticism; (2) design; (3) 
drawing and painting; and (4) crafts. Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching 
credential with specialization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain 
approval from the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements 
for a minor in art. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

See "Graduate Programs." 


ART COURSES 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. Field trips required. Not open to art majors 
for credit except by permission of Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Historical and contemporary art forms of painting, sculpture, architecture, and design. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts, and elements of two-dimensional visual organization (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts, and elements of three-dimensional visual organization (6 hours activity) 

106A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Form as related to ceramic materials, tools, processes. Kiln loading and firing, hand building, wheel 
throwing and raku. (9 hours laboratory) 

1%B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A. Form as related to ceramics. Glaze batching, and its application, and the 
presentation of ceramic technique. (9 hours laboratory) 

107 A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3^) 

The traditional and contemporary use of drawing and painting materials integrated with visual 
experiences and concepts. 107A emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes painting. (6 hours 
activity) 

117 Life Drawing (1) 

The live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. (3 hours activity for each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (3,3) 

Traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theories. 123 A, representation of nature 
forms; 123B, manmade and mechanical forms including linear perspective. (6 hours activity) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

The ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they developed in various cultures from prehistoric 
time to the present. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. Craft concepts, processes and 
materials and the development of esthetic forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

205B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. Woodworking concepts and 
processes and the development of wood Into esthetic form based on function. (9 hours 
laboratory) 


4—76604 


98 Art 


207 A, B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and Materials) (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 1 17, 107 A,B or equivalents. Traditional and contemporary methods and materials. 
(6 hours activity) 

213A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Design methodology and communication skills in the environmental 
design field. (6 hours activity) 

213B Interior Space Planning and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 21 3A or consent of instructor. The planning and organization of residen- 
tial and commercial interior space. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. sculpture: The creative use of wood and metal, power equipment and hand 
tools. (9 hours laboratory) 

223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. The history, design and use of letter forms; techniques for rough and compre- 
hensive layouts; the use of hand-lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

226 Beginning Class Forming (3) 

Hot glass laboratory equipment and techniques. Handling hot glass. (9 hours laboratory) 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107 A,B. Printmaking forms; litho, etching, woodcut and serigraphy. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts (3) 

Principles, practices and objectives of writing in the visual arts. Includes descriptive, analytical and 
expressive essays; project and grant proposals; artist's statements; resumes; and professional 
correspondence. 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

The developments in art from the Paleolithic to late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

The developments in art from the late antiquity through the Gothic. 

305 A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205A. Craft concepts, processes, and materials and the development of esthetic 
forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

305B Advanced Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205B. Craft concepts and processes and the development of wood into utilitarian 
and esthetic form. (9 hours laboratory) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 and 106A,B. Forms and the creative use of ceramic concepts and materials; 

design, forming, glazing and firing. (9 hours laboratory) 

307A,B Drawing and Painting (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A, B, 117, 207 A, B or equivalents. The concepts, materials and activities of 
drawing and painting, emphasizing individual growth, plan and craft. (6 hours activity) 
310A,B Watercolor (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B or equivalents. An exploration of watercolor media related to varied subject 
matter and design applications. Includes field trip activity. Provides skills and concepts useful 
for school art programs. (6 hours activity) 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design projects and the study of unit concepts. 
(6 hours activity) 

313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3A. Environmental design projects and systems concepts. (6 hours activity) 
315A,B Jewelry (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Design and creation of 
jewelry. (9 hours laboratory) 

316A,B Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 2 ISA. Sculptural materials and processes. (9 hours laboratory) 


Art 99 


317 Life Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing, painting and sculpture from the live 
model. (9 hours laboratory) 

317A Drawing and Painting 
31 7B Drawing and Painting 
317C Sculpting 

318 Drawing and Painting: the Human Head and Hands (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B and 3 units of lower division life drawing. Construction, anatomy and 
pictorial use of the human head and hands. (9 hours laboratory) 

320 History of Architecture Before the Modern Era (3) 

A study of selected monuments from Stonehenge through the late Baroque. Interrelationship 
between patronage, style, function, structural principles and technological developments. 

321 The Art of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 201 A, B or consent of instructor. An introduction to the art of the major civilization 
of Asia — India, Southeast Asia, China, Japan — from earliest times to the present. Emphasis on 
esthetic achievement within historical, religious and cultural contexts. 

323A,B Graphic Design (3^) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projection of ideas in relation to the technical, 
esthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours activity) 

325A,B Metalsmithing (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Metalsmithing concepts, 
processes and materials; utilitarian forms, raising, silversoldering, forging, casting, engraving, 
chasing and repousse. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A3 Ceramic Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 117 or consent of instructor. Development of ceramic technology into 
individual sculptural forms and techniques. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Papers (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or consent of Instructor. The use of fibers and papers as an art form. 

(9 hours laboratory) 

333A Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3B. Materials and structural concepts as design determinants. (6 hours activity) 
333B Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Change and growth as design determinants; experimental design concepts 
and methods. (6 hours activity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 6A. Waxing, molding and metal casing techniques. Aluminum and bronze and 
the lost wax process. (9 hours laboratory) 

338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. The photographic media in personal expression. Historical 
attitudes and processes; new materials and contemporary esthetic trends. Field trips required. 
(9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. The photographic medium in personal expression. Historical and new proc- 
esses. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

339 Photo-Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 338A. The use of specialized photographic techniques such as lighting, 
camera position, color and motion for solutions to illustration problems of narration, visual 
description, juxtaposition and imagery. (9 hours laboratory) 

347A Printmaking — Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A,B, 117, and 247. Concept development, exploration and materials Involved 
in printmaking techniques. Includes etching, aquatint. (9 hours laboratory) 

^7B Printmaking — Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, and 247. Concept development, exploration and materials involved 
in lithography. (9 hours laboratory) 

352 The Theory of Video Art (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 201 B. Theory and history of the development of video and performance art. 
Includes technical development, esthetics, personalities, and the relationships to other visual 
and p)erforming fine arts and the popular arts. 


100 Art 


355A,B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. Design concepts and printing and dyeing 
processes as applied to fabrics. (9 hours laboratory) 

363A,B Illustration (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,B and 117. Story, book, magazine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 
364A,B Stained Glass (33) 

Lead^ and stained glass; individual exploration, growth, planning and craftsmanship. (6 hours 
activity) 

3b5A,B Fibers: Weaving (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or 205A,B or consent of instructor. The use of the loom and weaving 
processes to design and create fiber and fabric art forms. (9 hours laboratory) 

373 Methods in Exhibit Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 123B. Exhibition Design: spatial concepts, modular systems, traffic pat- 
terns, and object visual criteria. Drawings, working and finished models, and material specifica- 
tions. 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Art concepts, materials, and processes as they relate to child development. (6 hours activity) 

402 Contemporary Art (3) 

Perspectives and esthetics in specific works of art and the relationship between art and society. 

411 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Painting and sculpture of the realism, impressionism, post-impressionism periods. 

412 Art of the 20th Century — 1900 to Present (3) 

Fundamentals of modern painting, graphics and architecture. 

420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Development of modern architecture. The interrelationship among architecture, technology and 
society, from the industrial and political revolutions of the 18th century to the present. Explora- 
tion of national differences and various approaches to city planning. 

421 The Art of India (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A, B or 321 or consent of instructor. A survey of the art and architecture of India 
from Neolithic times to the decline of Muslim rule in the 18th century. Emphasis on esthetic 
achievement within historical, religious, and cultural contexts. 

423A,B Film Animation (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107 A,B and 117. Esthetic and technical considerations of animation in 
the production of film. (6 hours activity) 

426A,B Class Forming (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 206A,B, 306A, and consent of Instructor. The chemistry, handling and manipulation 
of glass and its tools and equipment for the ceramic artist. (9 hours laboratory) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance period. Lectures, discussion and field trips. 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and Rococo period. Lectures, discussion and field 
trips. 

438A,B Creative Color Photography (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 338A,B. Concepts and techniques in creative color photography. Historical atti- 
tudes and contemporary trends. Personal Involvement with the medium. (9 hours laboratory) 
441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205A or consent of instructor. Exploring the art media used in 
secondary school art programs today. Materials for secondary art curriculum. Two and three 
dimensional media in subject matter applications. (6 hours activity) 

443 Studio Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 223A,B and 323A,B. Admission by Interview and portfolio review. Studio produc- 
tion of graphics for the School of the Arts, including printed mailers, posters, booklets, catalogs, 
advertisements. Students experience designer/client relationships and translate concepts into 
production. (9 hours activity) 


Art 101 


453A,B Exhibition Design (3^) 

Technical and esthetic experience In problem-solving exhibition design concepts, evaluation, and 
design analysis. The production of exhibitions in the University Art Gallery, their selection, 
design, installation, lighting, and supportive interpretive material. (More than 9 hours labora- 
tory) 

460A Native North American Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A,B or consent of instructor. A study of prehistoric and ethnographic Indian 
and Eskimo arts. Emphasis on esthetic achievement of masks, dress, sculpture, painting, archi- 
tecture, pottery, and basketry within varying contexts of Native American culture. 

460B Pre«Columbian Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A,B or consent of Instructor. An introduction to the art and architecture of Meso 
and South America from the early formative stage to the Spanish Conquest. Emphasis on 
esthetic achievement with varying contexts of Pre-Columbian culture. 

461A American Art: Colonial Period to 1900 (3) 

The historical development of painting and sculpture in America from the Colonial Period until 1900. 
The role of the visual arts in helping to define, reflect and challenge American values and 
institutions. 

461 B American Art: 20th Century (3) 

Painting and sculpture in America during the 20th century. The role of the visual arts in helping to 
define, reflect and challenge American values and institutions. 

463 Museum Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 453A, six units of art history or anthropology, and consent of instructor. Museums, 
their structure, function and operation. Museum governance, ethics, grant proposal preparation, 
conservation and educational programming. 

470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A,B. Photography from ancient optical observations through 19th century Inven- 
tion to 20th-century acceptance as an art form. Esthetic movement and influential Innovators. 
Lectures, slides and class discussion. 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and evaluation in one area of art history and appreciation. 
May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but no more than 3 units in any one area 
in a single semester. 

483A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

483B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

483C Design and Composition (6 hours activity) 

483D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

484A Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in ceramics. Maximum of 1 2 units, but not more 
than three units in any one area in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

484B Special Studies in Glass (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in glass. Maximum of 1 2 units, but not more than 
three units In any one area in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units In designated area or consent of instructor. 
Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any one area in a single semester. (9 
hours laboratory) 

485A Jewelry 

485B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

485D Fibers — Weaving 

485E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485F Fibers and Fabrics 


102 Art 


486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three 
units in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

486A Modeling and Fabrication 
486B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper-division units in drawing and painting and consent of instruc- 
tor. Maximum of 1 2 units, but no more than three units in any one area in a single semester. 
487A Painting (6 hours activity) 

487B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

487C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

487D Printmaking (9 hours lakxjratory) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Photography as personal expression. Maximum of 12 units but no more 
than three units may be obtained in a single semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

490 Professional Seminar (3) 

Guest speakers from professions In the visual arts. A lecture/discussion seminar relevant to current 
issues and concepts in making and experiencing art. Topics will differ each semester. For the 
senior and graduate art major. 

498 Internship in Art (3) 

Work in a specific art field in business or industry. Must be senior standing. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Problems and issues in art. Intellectual clarification and verbal 
articulation of individual intent as an artist. Oral and written material in support of the master's 
project. 

5(M)B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of major emphasis. Oral and written material 
on historical backgrounds and developments in art as they relate to individual intent as an artist 
(stated in Art 500A) and in support of the master's project. 

501 Curatorship (3) 

Prerequisites: B.A. in art, anthropology or other major by special permission, and Art 481 and 463. 
The curator who collects, cares for and studies objects. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects 
listed below. Maximum of 1 2 units in each area, but no more than three units in any one area 
in a single semester. 

503 A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

503B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

503C Design and Composition (6 hours activity) 

503D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours latx)ratory) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and evaluation of individual projects In 
ceramics. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single semester. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects 
listed below. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single semester. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

505A Jewelry 

505 B General Crafts 

505D Fibers — Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 


Music 103 


506 Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects In 
sculpture. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single semester. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing, Painting and Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper-division drawing and painting. Planning, development and evaluation 
of individual projects listed below. Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units In a single 
semester. 

507A Painting (6 hours activity) 

507B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

507C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

507D Printmaking (9 hours laboratory) 

511 Seminar on the Content and Method of Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 481. Methods of research, bibliography, and theories and philosophies of art 
historical scholarship. May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: appropriate upper^ivision Art course approved by instructor and Art 51 1 or consent 
of Instructor. Analysis and evaluation of specific historical significance including cultural, social 
and economic circumstances. May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's gradu- 
ate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentation of a creative project In the concentration beyond regularly 
offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 511, 512, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's 
graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate student in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 


ART EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovis- 
ual instruction for teaching art in secondary school. Required before student teaching of majors 
In art for the standard teaching credential. 

449A Student Teaching Secondary School, Art (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. See description and prerequisites 
under Division of Teacher Education. Concurrent enrollment In Art Education 449B required. 

449B Seminar in Secondary School Student Teaching, Art (2) 

Seminar for student teachers in art. The practical aspects of art instruction in secondary schools. 
Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 449A is required. 

department of music 

faculty 

David Thorsen 
Department Chair 

Charles Baker, Martha Baker, David Berfield, Carole Chadwick, Andrew Charlton, Keith Clark, 
Harold Decker, M'lou Dietzer, Rita Fuszek, Burgess Gardner, Kathleen Gjerdingen, Su Harmon, 
Nors Josephson, Burton Karson, Leo Kreter, Michael Kurkjian, Dimitrie Lelvici, Cary Maas, Todd 
Miller, Benton Minor, William NIcholls, Cordon Paine, jane Paul, Lloyd Rodgers, Preston 
Stedman, Robert Stewart, David Thorsen, Laurence Timm, Rodger Vaughan, Mary Mark Zeyen 

part time 

john Barcellona (flute), Kalman Bloch (clarinet), Kay Brightman (bassoon), Marjorie Call (harp), 
Stan Friedman (trumpet), Patricia Carside (flute), Pam Goldsmith (viola), Burt Goldstein 
(composition), David Grimes (guitar), Esther Jones (organ), Teresa Perry (piano), James 
Rotter (saxophone), Mary Ellen Trefry (flute), Bertram Turetsky (string bass), Leigh Unger 


104 Music 


(piano), Earle Voorhies (piano), Hanan Yaqub (choir), Scott Zeidel (guitar) 

The Department of Music offers courses for both music and non-music majors. The fundamental 
purpose of the music curriculum is threefold: ( 1 ) to promote excellence in all aspects of music and 
academic course work; (2) to provide basic preparation for careers in music; and (3) to promote 
interest in all musical and artistic endeavors in the university and the surrounding community. 

REQUIREMENTS OF THE MUSIC DEPARTMENT 

1 . All entering music majors must register in the Bachelor of Arts degree program for at least the 
first semester of residence. Students may change the degree objective to the Bachelor of Music 
upon completion of at least one semester of course work at the university, successful comple- 
tion of an audition for the program, and recommendation of the coordinator in the appropriate 
area of concentration. Enrollment In the Bachelor of Music program is limited. 

2. Upon entering the university as a new music major or upon officially changing to a major in 
music, each student will present an audition in the appropriate principal performance area 
(instrument or voice) and a placement audition in piano. Transfer students will also take a 
proficiency examination in music theory. 

3. All students must pass proficiency examinations in music theory (sight-singing, dictation, 
keyboard and paperwork) and piano before being approved for graduation. Transfer students 
may fulfill the theory requirement by passing the entrance examination in theory; first-time 
students and transfers with insufficient preparation at entrance will normally take the examina- 
tion in Mu 21 1 . The piano-proficiency requirement may be met by completion of Mu 282B with 
a passing grade. Students whose principal performance area is piano satisfy the piano proficien- 
cy requirement upon reaching 300 level in performance. 

4. Each music major must declare a single principal performance area, which must be approved 
by the coordinator of that area upon completion of the entrance audition. In order to be 
approved for graduation, each student must achieve at least the 300 level of proficiency in the 
principal performance area. B.A. LIberal-Arts-option students who elect project option 2 (Mu 
497: Project) need reach only the 200 level. 

5. Each music major is required to present one or more recitals or a project appropriate to the 
degree program before being approved for graduation. The project option is available only In 
the Liberal-Arts and MusIc-History-and-Theory options of the Bachelor of Arts degree. Recitals 
at the 300 level of performance are designated Mu 398, recitals at the 400 level of performance 
are designated Mu 498. See the sections below on the Liberal-Arts and Music-History-and- 
Theory options for recital /project Information applicable to those degrees. 

6. Undergraduate music majors are required to participate in a major (performance ensemble ( Mu 
361 ) and complete it with a passing grade each semester of residence as follows: 

a. Students who declare wind or percussion as the principal performance area must register 
for band (or orchestra, if designated by the instrumental area coordinator); students who 
declare a string Instrument as principal performance area must register for orchestra; stu- 
dents who declare voice as the principal performance area must register for chorus. ( Bache- 
lor of Music students in voice who have reached the 400 level may elect to substitute 361 d. 
Opera Theatre.) A student whose principal performance area is keyboard or classical guitar 
must register for one of the above major performance ensembles, according to the student's 
qualifications and subject to audition. 

b. A music major admitted Into the Bachelor of Music program, whose principal (Performance 
area is keyboard or classical guitar, and who has (Participated in a major (performance 
ensemble for at least five semesters (a minimum of two semesters at Cal State Fullerton) 
is thereafter exempt from the major (performance ensemble requirement. 

c. The educational purpose of the requirement that all music majors participate in an appropri- 
ate major (performance ensemble during each semester of residence is to (Permit each 
student to ex(perience the highest level of ensemble music-making commensurate with the 
student's skill. To this end, the band /orchestra and choir programs at Cal State Fullerton are 
of the traditional graded structure. University Singers (361e), Wind Ensemble (361f) and 
Symphony Orchestra (361a) are for the most advanced students; University Choir (361b) 
and Symphonic Band (361c) are for students of less skill or ex(perlence; and Men's and 
Women's Choirs (361m and w, res(pectively) and University Concert Band (361c) are for 
those of the least skill or ex(perience. Placement in bands, orchestra and choirs will be based 
on student ability as determined by the directors of those ensembles. Music majors will be 
assigned to the ensemble for which they are best qualified. A student does not have the 
option of satisfying the requirements for (participation in a major (performance ensemble by 


Music 105 


enrolling in an ensemble intended for those of less ability or experience. 

7. Applied-music study in the principal p>erformance area is required as stipulated under the 
requirements for each degree program. The following conditions apply: 

a. If a student pursuing the Bachelor of Arts degree (Music History and Theory) or the 
Bachelor of Music degree (Composition) reaches the 3(X) level in the principal performance 
area before the required units in applied music are completed, Music Department electives 
may be substituted for the remaining applied music units. 

b. In addition to the four units of applied music required in the principal performance area, 
Bachelor of Music students in the Composition option must complete six units of applied 
composition (including the 498 recital) after taking Mu 422a. The 498 recital will consist of 
a presentation of the student's own compositions. 

c. Students pursuing the Bachelor of Music degree in any option except composition must 
achieve the 300 level in performance before giving the 398 recital and 400 level in perform- 
ance before giving the 498 recital. Specific information on jury-level criteria is available from 
the Music Department office. 

d. In order to receive state-funded lessons in applied music, an undergraduate student (with 
the exception of a student who is within six units of completing all degree requirements) 
must be currently enrolled for a minimum of six units of music classes (including applied 
music), at least two units of which must be In an academic area of music (any course other 
than performing ensembles and applied music). In addition, the student must maintain a 
CPA of at least 2.0 in academic music classes, must be making satisfactory progress toward 
a degree, and must be currently enrolled in the appropriate major performance ensemble, 
as stipulated in section 6 above. If the student fails to complete with a passing grade either 
the required six units of music classes or the major performance ensemble, state-funded 
lessons will be withheld In a subsequent semester. Students are eligible for a maximum of 
three semesters of state-funded lessons at a given level of performance. 

e. Students in the B.A. program are eligible for a maximum of eight units of state-funded applied 
music (398 and 497 included). B.M. students are eligible for a maximum of 14 units (398 
and 498 included) . Regardless of whether or not the student has reached the above maxima, 
eligibility for state-funded lessons ceases upon completion of the final recital or project 
appropriate to the degree plan. Students who have completed the final recital or project and 
still have further units of applied music required under their degree plan will thereafter 
substitute electives In music. 

8. Senior transfer students entering Cal State Fullerton with a major in music, or graduate students 
in music entering to satisfy the legal waiver for teaching credentials, are expected to complete 
a minimum of one semester of upper-division course work in music with a CPA of at least 3.0 
before they may be approved for admittance to teacher education. Required courses and 
competencies must be satisfied before the faculty committee will consider endorsing the 
student's acceptance Into the credential program. 

9. A music major must maintain a 2.5 CPA in music course work at the university in order to be 
approved for graduation. 

10. All requests for exceptions to departmental or curricular requirements must be directed by 
petition to the department chair. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses that lead to baccalaureate and graduate degrees 
in teaching and the professions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned In either of two degree 
programs (Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Music). Within these programs, a student will pursue 
an emphasis in liberal arts, music history and theory, music education, performance, composition 
or accompanying. 

bachelor of arts in music 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 50 units of music, of which at least 29 
shall be upper division (300 level and above). All Bachelor of Arts students must complete the basic 
requirements listed immediately below and must select and complete the requirements listed in one 
of three options: Liberal Arts, Music History and Theory or Music Education. 


Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts in Music Units 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B; 211; 319A; 320A)* 14 


* In the Music History and Theory option. Mu 3206 or 319C rrwy be substituted for Mu 320A. 


106 Music 


Music history and literature (Mu 251; 351A,B,C) 12 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Major performance ensemble (Mu 361A,B,CE,F,H,M,W) _4 

34 

Liberal Arts Option 


This option allows a student to take an academic major in music without being involved in a program 
of professional preparation. The degree emphasis is historically the oldest such study plan in music 
in higher education and represents a liberal-arts res|X)nse to the highly professional program of the 
Bachelor of Music degree. 

Units 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree 34 

Additional upper-division units in music 

Music theory (Mu 316 or 318, 323A or 422A) 4 

Conducting (Mu 391 A or 392A) 2 

Senior project (Mu 398 or 497) 1 

Music literature (Mu 451-460) 2 

Electives (minimum of 6 upper division; no more than 2 units of Mu 171-471 ).... 7 

Senior Project 


Two options are available to the student, each with a different focus and prerequisite: 

Option 1 (Mu 398: Recital): Prerequisite is achievement of 300 level in the area of principal 
performance one semester before the semester in which the student plans to present the recital. 
The student will present a brief recital in a regular recital time or in the appropriate workshop (at 
faculty discretion). 

Option 2 ( Mu 497: Project) : Prerequisite is achievement of 200 level two semesters before the 
semester in which the student plans to present the project. The student will prepare a special 
project in the senior year which will culminate in a lecture, lecture-recital or other form of public 
presentation. To the greatest extent possible, this project should be an independent investigation 
into an area of special interest and should Involve minimal faculty guidance. The public presenta- 
tion will be evaluated by a faculty committee, as Is the case with senior recitals, and must be 
approved by that committee prior to graduation. 

In the case of both options, the recital or project will be included when calculating the student's 
quota of state-funded private lessons. 


Music History and Theory Option 


This option is designed as a balanced program in music history and theory and provides suitable 
preparation for advanced degrees in theory, literature or musicology. It also provides basic prepara- 
tion for advanced study in other fields, such as musical acoustics, music therapy, eth nomusicology, 
library science in music, and music In industry and recreation. 

Students seeking the option In Music History and Theory must submit a paper to the music-history 
or theory coordinator not later than the beginning of their junior year. Acceptance Into the degree 
program is contingent on the submission of a satisfactory paper. 

Allied requirements for the Music History and Theory Option: 

1. An academic minor (20 units), approved in writing by the history or theory coordinator. 

2. Foreign-language proficiency, preferably German, to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. Four years of study at the secondary-school level, 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing with a passing grade the second semester of the beginning university sequence 
of a foreign language. 


Units 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music theory (Mu 316, 31 9B or C) 4 

Conducting or composition (Mu 391 A or 392A or 422A) 2 

Project-proposal preparation (Mu 499) 1 

Music-history or theory project (Mu 497) 1 

Electives In music (conducting, history, and/or theory)* _8 

50 


• A Music History and Theory major may use applied-nuisic units to satisfy elective requirements only with the consent of the 
coordinator erf the music history or theory area (as appropriate) , the coordinator of the appropriate principal performance area, 
and the coordinator of applied musk. 


Music 107 


Music Education Option 

This option is designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the California public schools 
under the provisions of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281B,P,S and W) 4 

Music theory (Mu 323A and 320B, 323B or 324) 4 

Conducting (Mu 392A,B) ^ 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 

Electives _3 

50 


Vocal-Choral Emphasis: 

Core requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Diction for singers (Mu 390) 1 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Mu 391 A, B) 4 

Literature and interpretation (Mu 453A or B and 457A or B or 468A) 4 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 

Electives _2 

50 


34 

3 

4 
4 
3 
1 

50 

TEACHING-CREDENTIAL PREPARATION 

Students desiring a California teaching credential in music must complete the following courses prior 
to enrolling in the professional education program as required by the Division of Teacher Education. 


Units 

Instrumental emphasis: Mu Ed 342, 3991, Mu 391 A, Mu Ed 444, and Mu 281C,T,X .. 11 

Choral-vocal emphasis: Mu Ed 342, Mu 354, Mu Ed 399V, Mu 392A, 361 D 9 

Ceneral-music emphasis:* Mu 381, Mu Ed 342, 399V, 441 8 

Students who wish to earn a teaching credential In addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a music 
education option must complete the following: 

Units 

Mu Ed 442 (3) and professional education courses Ed-TE 440F and 440S 9 

Stydent teaching, full-time 12 

21 


Ceneral-Music Emphasis: 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts .. 
Music and child development (Mu 333) 

Conducting (Mu 391 A, B) 

Orchestral instruments (Mu 281B,P,S,W) 

Music in the classroom (Mu Ed 435) 

Recital (Mu 398) 

Electives in music 


Prior to admission to teacher education, the student must reach 300 level in the principal perform- 
ance area and pass functional examinations in keyboard and voice. The functional-examination 
requirements may also be met by completing Mu 282B (piano) and Mu 283 (voice) with 
minimum grade of B. 

Multiple-Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for ail students intending to teach in the elementary 
schools in multiple-subject classrooms: 


Units 


Art 380 3 

Mu 333 or 433 3 

Theatre 402A 3 


9 


* In addition to the above. Mu Ed 436 (c) is recommended for the eien^entary emphasis. 


108 Music 


The following additional courses are strongly recommended for any student who wishes to 
expand his knowledge of the arts: 

Art 100; 101; 103; 107A; 201A,B; 310A,B; and 380 

Mu 100; 101; 111A,B; 184A,B; 251; 281B,P,S,W; 283; 381; Mu Ed 435 

Theatre 100; 110; 112; 122; 132; 142; 162; 163; 206A,B; 276A; 277; 323A,B; 370A,B; 

402A,B; 403A,B; 410C; and 422 
BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for the highly gifted students who show promise 
and capability of becoming professional performers and composers. 

The degree consists of 1 32 semester units. A minimum of 70 semester units in music are required, 
at least 32 of which must be upper division. 

Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Music Units 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B; 211) 9 

Music history and literature (Mu 251; 351A,B,C) 12 

Principal performance area (Mu 171) 2 

Major performance ensemble (Mu 361) 4 

Recital (Mu 498) 

28 

Composition Specialization 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 28 

Music theory (Mu 316; 318; 319A; 319B or 319C; 320A,B; 323A; 422A) 17 

Conducting (Mu 391 A or 392 A) 2 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Applied composition 5 

Electives in music 14 

70 

Instrumental Specialization 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 28 

Music theory (Mu 316, 319A, 320A or B, 323A, 422A) 11 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 10 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 

Conducting (Mu 392A,B) 4 

Chamber music (Mu 362 and 365) 6 

Electives in music 10 

70 

Keyboard Specialization 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 28 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 31 9A, 422A) 9 

Music literature (Mu 454A,B) 4 

Conducting (Mu 391 A or 392A) 2 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 10 

Chamber music (Mu 362 or 363) 3 

Accompanying (Mu 386) 1 

Pedagogy (Mu 467A,B,C) 6 

Harpsichord or organ class (Mu 372 or 373) 1 

Electives in music 5 

70 

Voice Specialization 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 28 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 319A, 422A) 9 

Music literature (Mu 456; 457A,B) 7 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 


Music 109 


Principal performance area (Applied Music) 10 

Opera theatre (Mu 361 D) 2 

Diction (Mu 390A,B,C) 3 

Conducting (Mu 391 A) 2 

Pedagogy (Mu 468A,B) 4 

Electives in music 

70 


Allied requirement for voice specialization: 

Proficiency in two foreign languages, each to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. Four years study of foreign language at the secondary-school level, or 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing the second semester of the beginning university sequence of a foreign language. 


Accompanying Specialization 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 28 

Music theory (Mu 316, 318, 319A, 320A or B, 422A) 11 

Music literature (Mu 455, 457A) 5 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 10 

Chamber music (Mu 363) 2 

Harpsichord class (Mu 372) 1 

Organ class (Mu 373) 1 

Sight reading (Mu 385) 2 

Accompanying (Mu 386) 2 

Conducting (Mu 391 A) 2 

Diction (Mu 390A,B,C) 3 

Recital (Mu 398) 1 

Electives in music _2 

70 


Minor in Music 

The minor in music may be used by persons whose majors are in other fields. A 
maximum of 12 lower-division units may be included In work counted toward the 
music minor. The music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 

Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division Units 

Theory of music (selected from Mu 101; 11 1A,B; 21 1; or any 300- or 400-level theory 

classes for which the student Is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Mu 1(X); 251; 350 or 351A,B,C; or courses at the 400- or 

500-level for which the student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (selected from Mu 183, 184A,B; 281B,P,S,W; 283 or any course In 
ensemble, conducting, pjano, voice or orchestral instruments at the 300- or 400-level 

for which the student is qualified B-9 

20 


master of arts, master of music 

See ''Graduate Programs." 


MUSIC COURSES 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Musical enjoyment and understanding through a general survey of musical literature representative 
of styles and performance media. Music will be related to other arts through lectures, recordings 
and concerts. For non-music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non*Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to improve music performance and listening skills. Includes 
sightsinging and relationship to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. For non-music ma- 
jors. 


110 Music 


102 History of Jazz (3) 

Historical study of jazz music in America; chronological development and stylistic evolution with 
consideration of peripheral trends. Emphasis on listening. For non-music majors. 

103 History of Rock (3) 

Rock music around the world; its origins and the development of national styles. Emphasis on 
listening. For non-music majors. 

111A,B Diatonic Harmony (34) 

Diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and intervals, triads and their inversions, 
harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modulation and dominant seventh chords. Includes sight- 
singing, dictation and keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with approved instructor. Emphasis on tech- 
nique and repertoire. Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should register for two units per 
semester, jury examination required. May be repeated for credit. 

172 Piano Class for Piano Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Group instruction in basic pianistic technique and repertoire. 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

182 Piano Class for Music Majors (2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance instrument is not piano. (3 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non-music major. May be repeated for credit. 
(2 hours activity) 

184A Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary piano techniques for the non-music major. (2 hours activity) 

184B Piano Class for Non-majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 184A or consent of instructor. Continuation of 184A. 

1% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
"University Curricula" In this catalog for more complete course description. 

203 Ethnic Music (3) 

Survey of music from Asia, Africa, Australia, Oceania, and Indigenous Indian music from North and 
South America. Emphasis on musical styles and forms, and religious and ritualistic functions of 
music in various cultural frameworks. 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 111B. Continuation of Mu 111A,B; the chromatic practice of the 19th century. 
Secondary dominants; ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords; sequence, and chromatically 
altered chords. Includes sightsinging, melodic and harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. 
Required of all music majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Literature of music In Western civilization. Open to minors and qualified students by consent of 
instructor. Students should be able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and 
style. Required of majors. (3 hours lecture) 

281B,C,P4XW4 Orchestral Instruments (1,1,1,1,1,1,1) 

Techniques and materials for teaching orchestral instruments. Required for music education empha- 
sis. Instrumental majors required to fulfill competency requirements for instruments listed In 
each course description except that of their major performance instrument. May be repeated 
for credit. (3 hours activity) 

281 B Brass Instruments (1) 

Trumpet and French Horn. 

281C Brass Instruments (1) 

Trombone, Baritone and Tuba. 

281 P Percussion Instruments (1) 

Snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work on other standard percussion Instru- 
ments. 


Music 111 


281S String Instruments (1) 

Violin and Viola. 

281T String Instruments (1) 

Cello and String Bass. 

281 W Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Flute, Clarinet and Saxophone. 

281X Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Oboe and Bassoon. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (2,2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance field is not piano. A — Prerequisite: Mu 182 
or placement by instructor. B — Prerequisite: Mu 282A or placement by Instructor. Meets mini- 
mum piano proficiency requirements for degree. (3 hours activity) 

283 Voice Class (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Recommended for credential candidates. Not required for 
voice majors. (2 hours activity) 

312 Commercial Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Harmonic practices in commercial music; stage band and jazz writing 
techniques. 

314 Special Projects in Commercial Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 312 or consent of instructor. Scoring for commercial bands including the stage 
band. May be repeated for credit. (1 hour lecture, one hour activity) 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering motet, canon, double counterpoint. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth-century counterpoint In two, three and four 
parts, covering Invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

319A,B,C Form and Analysis (3,2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis of structural elements of music such as 
motive phrase and period: binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. Required of all music majors. B — Continuation of A; larger 
musical works. C — Continuation of A and B; literature of the 20th century. 

320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 31 9A. Compositional practices of the 20th century; emphasis on written examples 
in the various styles, includes sightsinging, keyboard practice and dictation. A — Compositional 
techniques from 1 890 to 1 945. B — Compositional techniques since 1 945, to include the synthesis 
of sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

323A,B Orchestration (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 31 9A, 320 or consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of orchestral music. 

324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323A or consent of instructor. Devices, techniques, and skills required to produce 
complete transcriptions for the contemporary public school wind band. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. The relationship of 
music to child growth and development for the child from 5 to 12. Teaching-learning strategies. 
Field work in a neighboring public school. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of Instructor. Music in its relationship to general culture. A sociologi- 
cal approach; musical criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology and the 
political /religious /business aspects of the American musical scene. 

351A History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Mu 21 1 and 251 or consent of Instructor. A study of the history and literature of music 
from early Creek beginnings through the Renaissance area. 

351 B History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A. A study of the history and literature of music of the Baroque and Classic eras. 
Fulfills the course requirement of the university upper division baccalaureate writing require- 
ment for music majors. 


112 Music 


351C History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 B. A study of the history and literature of music from the Romantic era to the 
present. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 A. Examination and analysis of choral repertoire suitable for junior and senior 
high choruses. 

361a-w Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of standard and contemporary music literature. Public concerts on campus 
and in the community each semester and participation is required. A concert tour may be 
included by some groups. (More than 3 hours major production) May be rep)eated for credit. 

361a Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. 

361b University Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

361c University Concert Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

361d Opera Theatre (1) 

Roles and representative excerpts from standard and contemporary operas and the musical 
dramatic and language techniques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic excerpts and 
complete operas. Also open to non-vocal majors. 

361e University Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced voice students or those accepted by audition. 

361f University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced wind and percussion students accepted by audition. 

361 h Symphonic Band (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. 

361m Men's Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral litrature. 

361w Women's Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral literature. 

362A Jazz Band (1) 

Open by audition or consent of instructor. Public p)erformances on campus and in the community. 
May be repeated for credit. 

362B Pep Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The Pep Band provides music for Titan football and basketball 
games, and, occasionally, other related activities. May be repeated for credit. 

362C Chamber Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: audition. Study and performance of choral literature of the Renaissance and baroque 
periods. Public performance required. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362D Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of music written for the Percussion 
Ensemble. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of music written for large brass choir/ 
ensemble. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362G String Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: auditon or consent of Instructor. Study and performance of string orchestra literature 
covering all periods of musical style. May be repeated for credit. 

362H Chamber Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Study and performance of representative chamber orchestra 
literature. Open to university students and qualified adults in the community. May be repeated 
for credit. 

362L Jazz Laboratory Band (1) 

Prerequisite: ability to read music. The commercial as well as artistic aspects of composing, arranging 
and improvisation. Melodizing harmony, the 32 bar song, composing and recording jingles, and 
the mechanics of jazz improvisation. May be repeated for credit. 


Music 113 


362P Choral Laboratory (1) 

Open by audition or with consent of instructor. Performance of choral literature for small vocal 
ensembles using student conductors. May be repeated for credit. 

362X Beginning Opera Techniques (1) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of voice faculty. Arias for the beginning opera student, and fundamen- 
tals of stage movement. May be repeated for credit. 

362Z Advanced Opera Techniques (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Aria preparation, role study and character analysis. Musical style 
of contrasting arias; orchestral techniques; language and transliterations of libretti. May be 
repeated for credit. 

363b-x Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. Ensembles will study, read and perform 
representative chamber literature of all periods. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 
363b Brass 
363g Guitar 
363k Keyboard 
363r Renaissance 
363s Strings 
363w Woodwind 
363x Saxophone 

365C Composition Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop presentation by student composers, faculty and guests. May be repeated for 
credit. 

3651 Instrumental Workshop (1) 

Application of Instrumental technique to performance practices through lecture, demonstrations, 
master classes and ancillary recitals. Recommended for Instrumental major each semester. May 
be repeated for credit. 

365K Keyboard Workshop (1) ; 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty and guests. Recommended for keyboard major 
each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

365V Vocal Workshop (1) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices through lecture — demonstration, master 
classes and ancillary recitals. Recommended for vocal major each semester. May be repeated 
for credit. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of Instructor. The harpsichord as an 
instrument, the application of baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudiments of 
continuo playing in ensemble with voices and instruments. (2 hours activity) 

373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or consent of instructor. The organ as an instrument, the playing 
techniques, and repertoire. The differences between piano and organ techniques. (2 hours 
activity) 

381 Survey of Recreational Instruments (1) 

Recreational instrument practices for credential candidates. Emphasis on recorder and guitar. (2 
hours activity) 

385 Keyboard Sight-reading (2) 

Prerequisite: 200-jury level In piano or organ or consent of Instructor. Sightreading skills and proce- 
dures. Development of ability to read solo, ensemble and scores without hesitation at first sight. 
(4 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. Plano accompaniments for Instrumentalists, vocalists and ensembles. 
Participation in rehearsals, recitals and concerts required. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours 
activity) 

390A,B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Proper singing diction; may not be 
considered a substitute for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal literature 
explained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. A — Italian. B — German. 
C — French. 


114 Music 


391A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques and 
methods of conducting choral groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activ- 
ity) B — Continuation of 391 A including lakx)ratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using 
standard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281 B,P,S,W or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques and 
methods of conducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education majors. 
(4 hours activity) B — Continuation of 392A, including laboratory experience in conducting 
instrumental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity) 

393 Music Instrument Care and Repair (2) 

The care and repair of band and orchestra instruments. Experience in the preventative maintenance 
of music instruments, and basic repairs which require a minimal amount of equipment, skill and 
time. 

3% Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) 

Fieldwork in music under supervision of resident faculty and professionals in the field. Requires 
minimum six hours fieldwork per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of six units. Op)en to all music students by consent of instructor. 

398 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 3(X) level in the principal performance area and consent of Instructor. Corequisite: 
Enrollment in Mu 365C,I,K or V. Preparation and presentation of representative works In the 
principal performance area. In the semester of recital presentation. Mu 398 will substitute for 
one unit of Mu 371. 

400 Concert Music (1) 

Open to all students. Weekly performances by university students, faculty and performing organiza- 
tions, with lectures and discussions relative to the performing arts. Attendance required at 
additional concerts during the semester. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

411 Theory Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all lower division theory requirements, and at least senior standing or 
equivalent. A survey of the theoretical basis of music from 1 500 to the present through analysis, 
readings and discussion. 

422A,B Composition (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 316, 31 9A and 320A or B or consent of instructor. A — Ear-training analysis of 
smaller forms, simple composition of two- and three-part song form styles. B — Analysis and 
writing of more complex musical forms. 

424 Practicum: Electronic Music Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 320B, 471 level in applied music composition and consent of instructor. Individ- 
ual and group Instruction in electronic music composition. May be repeated once for credit. 
(3 hours laboratory) 

433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: ability to read and perform simple songs and games for young children. Songs, games, 
creative activities and materials suitable for young children In nursery school and early child- 
hood education (approximately 3-6 years). Teaching-learning strategies. Field work is con- 
ducted in a neighboring public school. 

450 History of Musical Style (3) 

Prerequisites: Mu 351 A,B,C, or equivalent, or consent of Instructor. An intensive investigation of the 
principal musical styles in Western music from Ancient Greece to the present, with an analyti- 
cal/philosophical examination of reasons for stylistic changes. 

451 Composer Survey (1) 

Prerequisite: Completion of all lower-division theory courses. The life, times and compositions of 
a selected composer. May be repeated for credit with different content. 

452 Symphonic Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 320A and 351 A,B,C or consent of instructor. Historical survey of the symphony 
from Baroque antecedents through contemporary examples. (3 hours lecture) 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

A — Prerequisites: Mu 391 A or equivalent and 351 A,B. Choral literature from the Medieval, Renais- 
sance and Baroque eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate performance practices. 
B — Prerequisites: Mu 391 A or equivalent and 351 C. Continuation of A with representative 
examples from the Classic, Romantic and Contemporary eras. 


Music 115 


454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Performance of representative styles and schools of piano literature; solo and ensemble repertoire. 
A — Prerequisites: Mu 351 A, B and junior level piano standing or consent of instructor. B — 
Prerequisites: Mu 351 C and junior level piano standing or consent of instructor. Concerti, 
character pieces, fantasies, suites and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instructor. The class will be grouped into 
ensembles for demonstration purposes. The stylistic differences required in performing works 
of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. All periods and nationalities, including stylistic 
and historical connotations. 

457A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 31 9A, 390B or consent of instructor. Study and performance of German Lieder with 
representative examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390C or consent of instructor. Study and performance of French art songs with 
representative examples of periods and styles. 

459 Guitar Literature, Interpretation and Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in guitar or consent of instructor. The literature available to guitarists. 
Works for lute, vihuela and baroque guitar and the compositions and transcriptions for the 
modern guitar. Materials and methods essential for the guitar instructor. 

460 Interpretation of Early Music (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level In principal performance area. The stylistic Interpretations of vocal and 
Instrumental literature from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries. For the senior or graduate student 
majoring in performance. (2 hours lecture) 

465 Observation in Applied Piano (1) (Formerly 267) 

Prerequisite: piano major, sophomore standing. Observation of specialists in private music teaching, 
teaching techniques, materials, development of student and preparation for beginners, adult 
beginners, intermediate and early advanced students under the specialist in these areas. Re- 
quires written reports of activity in these areas. Coenrollment in Mu 467A or 467C required. 

466 Pedagogy Internship (1) (Formerly 367) 

Prerequisites: Mu 465 and 467A. Coenrollment in Mu 467B required. Supervised Internship in private 
piano teaching. 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of Instructor. Fundamentals of piano p>edagogy for 
individual and group instruction. A — Materials and methods for beginning and elementary 
students. Coenrollment in Mu 465 recommended. B — Materials and methods of intermediate 
and early advanced students. Physiology and psychology for studio teachers. Coenrollment in 
Mu 466 recommended. C — Prerequisite: 467A or consent of instructor. Observation and prac- 
tice teaching while learning organizational procedures, teaching techniques and course litera- 
ture for class piano. 

46BA,B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy for studio 
and public school teaching; physiology and acoustics as they apply to singing. B — Application 
of the fundamentals discussed in A. Seminar discussions and actual studio teaching. The diagno- 
sis and cure of specific vocal problems. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
"Student-to-Student Tutorials" in this catalog for more complete course description. 

497 Senior Project (1) 

Independent investigation of an area of special interest in music culminating in a public performance, 
lecture, lecture-recital or other suitable demonstration. 

498 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 400 level in the principal performance area (4(X) level In composition for composition 
majors) and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Coenrollment in Mu 365C,I,K or V. Preparation 
and presentation of representative works in the principal performance area. In the semester of 
recital presentation. Mu 498 will substitute for one unit of Mu 471. 


116 Music 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

A special topic in music selected in consultation with and supervised by the instructor. May be 
repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (3) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Basic bibliography, literature, and research techniques and 
materials useful in graduate music study. 

524 Seminar in Music Theory (2) 

Theoretical subjects (form/style analysis, history of music theory, etc.) to be chosen by instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 

551 Seminar in Music of the Medieval Period (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The music forms, structures and styles from 500 to 1450. Analysis 
of representative works and the contributions of individual composers and theoretical writers. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The forms, styles, and development characteristics of music 
between 1450 and 1600. Analysis of works by representative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Musical forms, styles, and performance practices 
of the baroque period. Analysis of representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. The history and literature of music from approxi- 
mately 1750 to 1825. Analysis of representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The structure and development of music In the 19th century. 
Analysis of representative works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of western Europe 
and the western hemisphere since 1890. Contemporary music and Its structure. 

557 Seminar in Musicology (3) 

Prerequisites: at least two courses from Mu 551-556 and consent of Instructor. Detailed investigation 
and systematic analysis of specific developments in musicology. 

558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced studies In the performance of rare and old music, 
which may Include notation, transcription, arranging, research, and performance. May be 
repeated for credit. 

559 Composer Studies (2) 

The life, times and musical style of a selected composer. A seminar for graduate students In music; 
lectures, discussion sessions and analytical projects. Open to seniors In music by consent of 
^instructor. May be repeated for credit with different content. 

567 Seminar in Piano Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisites: Mu 467A,B,C, or consent of instructor. In-depth study of a topic specifically dealing 
with a pedagogical aspect of studio teaching through lectures, discussion and demonstrations 
concerning applied music Instruction. 

568 Advanced Studies in Croup/Class Piano Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisite: 467C or consent of instructor. Graduate level study of the advanced learning theories, 
musical issues, and pedagogical methods involved in teaching group/class piano through lec- 
tures, discussions, and student presentations. 

570 Seminar in Piano Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 500 or consent of Instructor. Advanced study of piano literature, with performances 
and analyses by class members and lectures by the instructor. Requirements can be met by 
performance and/or analysis. May be repeated for credit. 

571 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual instruction with approved Instructor. Emphasis on 
performance techniques and repertoire. Required of all graduate students whose terminal 
project is the graduate recital. May be repeated for credit. 


Music Education 117 


591 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 B, conducting experience or consent of instructor. Choral conducting tech- 
niques. Laboratory work with student groups and concert conducting. May be repeated for 
cr^it when offered with different course content. 

592 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 392 B, keyboard facility for score reading and consent of instructor. Conducting 

techniques. Interpretive problems of each period covered in lectures. May be repeated for 
credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the area of musical composition, musical 
performance, or other related creative activity. A written critical evaluation of the work or 
activity will be required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by candidates for the M.A. 
degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and consent of instructor. Research and study projects in 
areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written reports required. 


MUSIC EDUCATION COURSES 

299 Clinical Practice in Instrumental/Choral Techniques (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental /choral techniques classes, as in public and 
private schools. Coenrollment in Mu 391 B or 392B recommended. (3 hours weekly to be 
arranged in nearby school) 

342 Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (3) 

Corequisite: Mu Ed 3991 or 399V. For the music education major. Experience in the use of musical 
materials, conducting, organization and management. Observation and application of rehearsal 
and classroom techniques. 

3991 Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 299. Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials and procedures 
as applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu Ed 342. 

399V Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 299. Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials and procedures 
as applied to field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu Ed 342. 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 20th-century materials and techniques of 
recordings for creative movement to music, and of choral materials and techniques appropriate 
for the elementary school choir. Adaptation of materials for use in classroom music. 

436 Orff Techniques for Children (3) 

Methods and techniques influenced by Carl Orff in teaching music for children. Rhythmic speech, 
song and movement. (2 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior standing or consent of instructor. Objectives, 
methods and materials for teaching general music or allied art-humanities classes in secondary 
schools, including their relationship to specialized instrumental and choral programs. Practical 
problems and field work are included. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, principles of public education, grades K-12, 
with emphasis on music. Philosophy, methods, materials and procedures for organizing and 
teaching music in elementary and secondary schools. Must be taken concurrently with Ed-TE 
440F and 440S. 

444 Administration, Materials for the Marching Band (2) 

Prer^uisite. consent of instructor. Techniques, materials, administration for marching band. Chart- 
ing for the football field; parade activities. The needs of school bands. 


118 Theatre 


449A Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. See description and prerequisite 
under Division of Teacher Education. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with Mu Ed 449A. For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act 
credential. See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Education. 

530 Practicum of Research in Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and completion of Mu 500. Research techniques and 
procedures in music education. Research paper required. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 5(X). Philosophical and historical bases which have influenced music education. 
Philosophic frames of leading educators. Contemporary trends. Prerequisite for all graduate 
music education courses. 

532 Seminar in Music Education (2) 

The trends and application of educational theory In relation to the teaching of music in the public 
schools. 

545 Leadership in Music Education (2) 

Open to music ^ucatlon majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, principles and practices of 
leadership in music in the public elementary and secondary schools. Modern principles of 
leadership, types of services, organization, management and evaluation of programs of instruc- 
tion. Requlr^ for all graduate students specializing in supervisory-leadership roles in music 
education. 

DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE 

FACULTY 
Alvin Keller 

Department Chair 

Barbara Arms, Joseph Arnold, Bob Christianson, Don Finn, Chris Frandsen, Susan Hallman, Donald 
Henry, Dean Hess, Larry jasper, Robin Johnson, Cretchen Kanne, Gladys Kares, Araminta Little, 
Alex MacKenzie, Sallle Mitchell, S. Todd Muffatti, Jerry Pickering, Lee Scanlon, Deborah Slate, 
Ron Wood, James Young, Allen Zeltzer 

The Department of Theatre program includes the several fields of playwriting, oral interpretation, 
acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, television, and dance. Specifically, the 
course work is arranged to provide opportunities for students ( 1 ) to develop an appreciation for 
theatre arts; (2) to become aware, as audience or participants, of the shaping force of theatre arts 
in society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the theatrical arts as 
a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue graduate studies. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in theatre, students must have a C or better in 
all Theatre courses required for the degree. In addition to course requirement, all theatre majors will 
enroll for two units of Theatre 478B each semester. 

Students who wish to transfer, for credit in the major, courses equivalent to Theatre 200, 276A,B, 
277 and 285 must pass a transfer equivalency examination in the specific courses. These examina- 
tions are administered at the beginning of each semester. Contact the Theatre Department office for 
the times at which the examinations will be administered. Theatre 200, or Its equivalent, is a 
prerequisite for all upper-division theatre courses taken for the major with the exception of Theatre 
478A,B. Transfer students may take Theatre 200 concurrently with their first semester of upper- 
division courses. 

In addition to its on-campus productions, the Department of Theatre offers additional exp)erience 
for actors, directors, dancers, choreographers, designers, and technicians In its adjunct professional 
theatre companies: Cabaret Repertory Theatre and Dance Repertory Theatre. Both are made up of 
carefully selected Cal State Fullerton graduates and advanced theatre students, chosen on the basis 
of demonstrated excellence in their work at the university. Cabaret performs 20 weeks throughout 
the year off campus, and Dance Repertory performs on tour. 

Prior to entering their junior year, or upon transferring to Cal State Fullerton, all students electing 
Plan II concentration in acting or dance will be evaluated and advised as to p>otential for advance- 
ment in the emphasis. Students in acting or dance who are admitted to the following Intermediate 
and advanced level technique classes are required to audition and be available for casting in all 
Department of Theatre major productions appropriate to their emphasis: Theatre 212, 222, 312, 


Theatre 119 


363A,B, 422 and 463A,B. A minimum of one Department of Theatre major production performance 
appropriate to the emphasis is required at both the junior level and the senior level of the acting 
and dance programs. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

Course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students working 
for the Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts. 

Plan I is for those who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish to pursue graduate 
degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and theory. It is strongly recommended that 
students electing this plan support the major with approved electives from art, music, foreign 
languages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

Plan II is designed to develop competency for pursuing the theatrical arts as a profession, or for 
pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an area of concentration other than history 
of the theatre. Areas of concentration are: playwriting; acting; directing; oral interpretation; televi- 
sion; technical theatre; and dance. 

Plan III meets the requirements of the teaching credential with specialization in secondary teaching. 
In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following Plan III must meet any specific 
requirements for the desired teaching credential. See description of secondary school teaching 
credential program under Division of Teacher Education. In addition. Plan III students should see 
the department's secondary education adviser regarding course sequence required for the single 
subject waiver. Those students who plan to work on the M.A. degree as well as the credential should 


see the chair of the Department of Theatre. 

PLAN I; THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS Units 

Lower Division: 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3), Theatre 200, Art 

of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Beginning Stagecraft 
(6); Theatre 111, Costume Fundamentals (3) or Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup 

(3) 18 

Upper Division: Theatre 310, Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3); Theatre 370A, 

Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D,E, World Theatre (15); 

Theatre 477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6); electives (3 units).. 30 

PLAN II: PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION Units 

Playwriting — 

Lower Division: JhedXxe 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 200, Art 
of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Beginning Stagecraft 
(6); Theatre 111, Costume Fundamentals (3) or Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup 
(3); Theatre 284, Introduction to Television Production (3) 21 


Upper Division: Theatre 364, Seminar in Playwriting (3,3), or Theatre 364 (3) and 
Theatre 365, Television/Film Writing (3); Theatre 370A,B, Fundamentals of Di- 
recting (6); Theatre 384, Television Production and Direction (3); Theatre 470A, 

Advanced Directing (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); Theatre 

477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 36 

Oral Interpretation — 

Lower Division: JhedXre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 200, Art 
of the Theatre (3); Theatre 241, Voice Production for the Performer (2,2); Theatre 
251, Body Movement for the Actor (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A, 

Beginning Stagecraft (3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3) or Theatre 285, 

Theatrical Makeup (3) 22 

Upper Division: Theatre 310, Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3); Theatre 370A, 
Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 410A,B,C, Oral Interpretation of Prose, 

Poetry and Drama (9); Theatre 411, Oral Interpretation of Children's Literature 
(3); Theatre 414, Readers Theatre (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12) 33 

Acting — 

Lower D/V/s/b/?.- Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 200, Art 
of the Theatre ( 3 ) ; Theatre 241 , Voice Production for the Performer ( 2,2 ) ; Theatre 
251, Body Movement for the Actor (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A, 

Beginning Stagecraft (3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, 

Theatrical Makeup (3) 25 

Mqper D/V/s/br?; Theatre 310, Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3); Theatre 363AB, 


120 Theatre 


Intermediate Acting (6); Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 
463A,B, Advanced Acting (6); Theatre 475A,B,CD, World Theatre (12); Theatre 

482, Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Television — 

Lower Division: Theatre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 184, 

Introduction to Radio and Television (3); Theatre 2(X), Art of the Theatre (3); 

Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Beginning Stagecraft (6); Theatre 284, 

Introduction to Television Production (3) 21 

Upper Division:l\\e^Ue 365, Television /Film Writing (3); Theatre 370A, Fundamentals 
of Directing (3); Theatre 384, Television Production and Direction (3); Theatre 
386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D or E, World Theatre (6); Theatre 
484, Television Dramatic Techniques (3); Theatre 490, Television/Film Aesthetics 

and Criticism (3) 24 

Electives: 9 units selected from Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, 

Theatrical Makeup (3); Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3); Theatre 387, 

Audio Techniques (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (3) 9 

Directing — 

Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 
276A,B, Beginning Stagecraft (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); 

Theatre 284, Introduction to TV Production (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup 

(3); Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3) 24 

Upper Division: 350, Organization for Production (2); Theatre 370A,B, Funda- 

mentals of Directing (6); Theatre 384, Television Production and Direction (3); 

Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 450, Theatre Management (3); 

Theatre 470A,B, Advanced Directing (6); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre 

(12) 34 

All theatre majors with an area emphasis in directing must assistant stage manage a 
mainstage production either prior to or concurrently with Theatre 470A, Ad- 
vanced Directing, and must stage manage a mainstage production prior to gradua- 
tion. 

Technical Production/ Design — 

Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3); Theatre 276A,B, Beginning Stage- 
craft (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Make- 
up (3); Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3) 18 

Upper Division: Theatre 350, Organization for Production (2); Theatre 370A, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (3); Theatre 377, Stage Costuming (3); Theatre 379, Render- 
ing for the Theatre (3); Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 388, 

Historical Styles for Scene Design (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); 

Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (3) Th^tre 488, Advanced Design and Technol- 


ogy (3) 35 

Electives: 6 units selected from Theatre 284, Introduction to Television Production (3); 

Theatre 385, Advanced Theatre Makeup (3); Theatre 387, Audio Techniques (3) 6 

Dance — 


Lower Division: Beginning Classical Ballet (2); Theatre 122A,B, Beginning 

Modern Dance (4); Theatre 126, Dance Improvisation (2); Theatre 200, Art of 
the Theatre (3); Theatre 212, Intermediate Classical Ballet (2); Theatre 222, 
Intermediate Modern Dance (3); Theatre 226, Rhythmic Analysis (3); Theatre 

277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3) 25 

Upper Division: Theatre 323A,B, Dance Composition (6); Theatre 372, Dance Kinesi- 
ology (3); Theatre 374, Dance in Cultural Perspective (3); Theatre 386, Beginning 
Lighting (3); Theatre 422, Advanced Modern Dance (3); Theatre 423, Advanced 
Dance Composition (3); Theatre 424, Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3); 

Theatre 474, Forces and Figures In 20th Century Dance (3); 6 units selected from 
Theatre 387, Audio Techniques (3); Theatre 414, Readers Theatre (3), Theatre 

450, Theatre Management (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (3) 33 

Musical Theatre — 

Lower Division: Theatre 200, Art of the Theatre (3 ); Theatre 21 2, Intermediate Classical 
Ballet (2); Theatre 232, Intermediate Jazz Dance (2); Theatre 241, Voice Produc- 
tion (2); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (3); Music 
1 1 1 A,B, Diatonic Harmony (6); Music 183,* Voice Class (1 ); Music 184A,*, Plano 
Class (1) 23 


* Or equivalem. 


Theatre 121 


Upper Division: IhedXxe 332, Advanced Jazz Dance (3); Theatre 336A,B, Dance for 
Musical Theatre (6); Theatre 363A, Intermediate Acting (3); Theatre 436A,B, 

Musical Theatre Workshop (6); Theatre 475, World Theatre (Select from A,B,C 
or D) (9); Theatre 475E, World Theatre (3); Music 361d, Opera Theatre (1); 

Music 365V, Vocal Workshop ( 1 -h 1 ) 33 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS (Single Subject) Units 

Lower Division: JhedXre 110, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 200, Art 
of the Theatre (3); Theatre 263, Acting (3); Theatre 276A, Beginning Stagecraft 
(3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup 

(3); Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3) 21 

Upper DivisiomJhe^We 350, Organization for Production (2); Theatre 370A,B, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (6); Theatre 386, Beginning Lighting (3); Theatre 402B, 

Dramatic Activities for Children (3); Theatre 403 A, Theatre for Children (3); 

Theatre 414, Readers Theatre (3); Theatre 450, Theatre Management (3); Theatre 

470A, Advanced Directing (3); Theatre 475A,D,E, World Theatre (9) 35 


Theatre Education majors are required to complete the following courses before the 
preliminary single-subject teaching credential will be awarded: English 101, 300, 
301 and 303. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

See '"Graduate Programs." 


THEATRE COURSES 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

For the general student leading to an appreciation and understanding of the theatre as an entertain- 
ment medium and as an art form. Recommended for non-majors. 

101 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Historical and contemporary dance forms. Experiences in various dance forms such as ballet, 
modern, jazz, folk, Afro, mime. Recommended for non-majors. 

102 Theatre in Performance (3) 

The theatregoing experience. Attendance at stage plays, films and other theatrical productions both 
on and off campus; discussions with directors, actors and designers. Recommended for non- 
majors. 

110 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

The analysis and performance of literature by the interpreter. 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

The fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. (4 hours activity) 

122A,B Beginning Modern Dance (2,2) 

Prerequisites: A is prerequisite to B. A — Exploration and manipulation of the instrument and 
n^aterials of dance; development of aesthetic judgment. (4 hours activity) B — Expansion of A, via 
f^ore complex technique and composition studies; development of performance quality. (4 hours 
activity) 

^26 Dance Improvisation (2) 

^—Improvisation in movement to overcome inhibitions, to move freely and naturally and to impro- 
vise imaginatively. B — Improvisation in expressing imagery and experience in movement, de- 
veloping choreographic concepts and enhancing performance. (4 hours activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

^^odern jazz dance techniques and basic jazz choreography. (4 hours activity) 

142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Slruaure and technique of tap dance and tap choreography. (4 hours activity) 

Beginning Acting (3) 

^ form and content of acting: improvisation, action, motivation, and behavior. Recommended for 
non-majors. (6 hours activity) 


122 Theatre 


175 History of Western Theatre (3) 

A survey of theatre and Western civilization from the classical Creeks to the moderns. Recommend- 
ed for non-majors. 

180 Great Moments in Radio and TV (3) 

Presentation and analysis of radio and television programs from 1926 to the present, including guest 
artists from the radio and television industry. 

184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our society. Broadcasting practices, 
audiences, production and programming. 

200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes of playwriting, directing, acting, design 
and theatre management. Study of current plays, films and television with emphasis on dramatic 
analysis and cultural significance. Required of all theatre majors. 

206A,B Mime and Pantomime (3^) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 206A is prerequisite for 206B. Individual development of creative skill in mime 
and pantomime. (6 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 112 and audition. Intermediate level technique of classical ballet. (4 hours 
activity) 

222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 122 and audition. Intermediate modern dance and movement vocabulary In 
terms of composition and communication. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Musical form and structure; musically notating dance rhythms and percussion accompaniment. 
232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 132 and consent of instructor. Intermediate level skills In jazz technique and 
choreography. (4 hours activity) 

241 Voice Production for the Performer (2) 

Use of voice in the theatre. Correction of speech faults and regional accents. Study of basic 
Interpretive material. May be reF)eated for credit. (4 hours activity) 

242 Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 142 or consent of Instructor. Intermediate skills in tap technique and choreogra- 
phy. (4 hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

The body as an expressive instrument; acquiring of strength, flexibility, relaxation, control. The 
relationship of the body to the creative project. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 
263 Acting (3) 

Improvisations, exercises, and techniques of acting for the stage. Motivation and behavior In charac- 
terization. (6 hours activity) 

276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 276A is prerequisite to B. Planning and construction of stage and television scenery. 
Use of tools, stage equipment; reading of technical drawings. Work In the scene shop for 
department productions. (6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Costuming theatrical and television productions. Construction techniques, organization and duties 
of the costume crew. (6 hours activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

The fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Makeup for stage and television. Individual skill In character analysis, application in pigment, plastic, 
hair makeup, and selection and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Scene design, including script analysis, formation of visual concepts, floor plan development and 
model building for stage and television. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre 123 


310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Development of techniques for oral interpretation of Shakespeare with special emphasis on the 
problems of verse. 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 212, and audition. Stylization and performance of classical ballet. (6 hours 
activity) 

322 Partnering Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites; Intermediate level In dance technique and consent of the instructor. The application 
of professional theories and principles of Interrelationships in modern dance and ballet, includ- 
ing concepts of balance, counterweight and lifting. (6 hours activity) 

323A,B Dance Composition (33) 

A— Prerequisites: Theatre 122, 126A, or equivalents. Study of basic elements and forms of dance 
composition. B — Prerequisite: Theatre 323 A or consent of instructor. Problem solving studies 
in space, time, and energy, using choreographic devices In solo and group situations. Final 
project required. (6 hours activity) 

332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 232 and consent of Instructor. Advanced jazz techniques and choreography 
through grade three of professional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other forms of dance. 
(6 hours activity) 

336A,B Dance for Musical Theatre (33) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 112, 132, and audition, or consent of Instructor. 336A is prerequisite to 336B. 
Dance utilized in musical theatre. A — Ensemble and individual approaches to the style. B — 
Choreography for musical theatre. (6 hours activity) 

343 Dialects for Actors (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 241 or consent of instructor. Dialects and accents for theatrical performance. 
Source materials, analysis, and application to scripted material. (6 hours activity) 

350 Organization for Production (2) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 370A. Backstage management. Including Interrelationships of production per- 
sonnel for stage and television. 

363A,B Intermediate Acting and Characterization (33) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241, 251, 263 and audition. Characterization; roles, special problems, and 
application of acting techniques through exercises and two-character scenes from the contem- 
porary theatre. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of Interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. Study of superior 
models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of Independent work, as it 
relates to playwriting. May be repeated for credit. 

365 Television/Film Writing (3) 

The writing of scripts and other forms of continuity for television /film. May be repeated for credit. 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (33) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263, or consent of instructor. 370A is prerequisite to B. Prerehearsal problems 
and procedures, structural analysis of plays, composition, picturization, pantomimic dramatiza- 
tion, movement and rhythm on stage and In television. Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours 
activity) 

372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect movement in dance. 

374 Dance in Cultural Perspective (3) 

History of dance from primitive times to the 20th century. Dance in Europe, the Orient, Asia, America 
in its general relation to culture. 

^77 Stage Costuming (3) 

Fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of research; interpretation and communi- 
cation of historical dress for theatrical statement. 

^ Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

^enic and costume sketching and rendering for communication between production director and 
designers. Full scale costume and scenic painting required. Theoretical and actual production 
idea presentation and execution. (6 hours activity) 


124 Theatre 


381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 110. Control room operation, including practice in microphone and camera 
techniques. (6 hours activity). 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the production of television programs and an- 
nouncements: the planning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and editing 
of television programs and announcements. (6 hours activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Problems in makeup including special techniques and materials: prosthet- 
ics, hairpieces, and masks for stage and television productions. (6 hours activity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theories of lighting for stage and television productions. (6 hours activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Practice necessary to integrate live and recorded sound into performing arts productions. Recording, 
reproduction and studio techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 

Visual survey through lecture and slides of architecture, interior design and furniture from ancient 
to modern times. Provides necessary basis for advanced design course. 

400 Theatre Internship (3) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Supervised work experience in all areas of theatre to 
expand the dimensions of the classroom by integrating the formal academic training with direct 
application. Periodic seminar meetings to discuss work. 

402A,B Dramatic Activities for Children (33) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Creative dramatics as a tool for building and developing creative 
and socialized processes in children. A — Sense memory, movement/ mime, dialogue, charac- 
terization, dramatization. B — Teaching techniques including concentration, imagination, dra- 
matization, and improvisation for older children. (6 hours activity) 

403A,B Theatre for Children (33) 

Prerequisite: 403A prerequisite for 403B or consent of instructor. Theatrical production for an 
audience of children. A — Philosophy, theory and practice; B — Application of production princi- 
ples. (6 hours activity) 

410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Criticism and performance in the oral interpretation of prose literature. 

410B Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Criticism and performance in the oral interpretation of poetry. 

410C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Criticism and performance in the oral interpretation of drama. 

411 Oral Interpretation of Children's Literature (3) (Formerly 203) 

Oral presentation of children's literature in classroom, recreation, and home situations including 
individual and group performance of fiction, non-fiction, fantasy, and poetry. 

412 Classical Pointe (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 312 and consent of instructor. Techniques for performance of classical pointe. 
(6 hours activity) 

414 Readers Theatre (3) 

The interpretation of literature in the medium of readers theatre. May be repeated for credit. 

422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 222 and audition. Advanced level skills in modern dance. Emphasis on individ- 
ual techniques. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 323A, B or equivalent. Elements and forms in dance composition. The choreo- 
graphing of dances of concert quality. (6 hours activity) 

424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 112, 122, 132, 162 and consent of instructor. Philosophies, techniques, and 
methods for developing progressions in dance instruction. 


Theatre 125 


436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (3, 3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A, 336A,B, and audition. Theatre 436A prerequisite to B. Roles and excerpts 
from musical theatre: the musical, dramatic, language and dance techniques. Scenes and 
musical numbers In workshop. A — Large group and solo work. B — Small group and audition 
material preparation. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Organizational principles of front-of-house and box office operation. Participation In School of the 
Arts public presentations. (3 hours lecture, 6 hours activity) 

463A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 310, Theatre 363A,B and audition. Historical theories and techniques of styles 
of acting. A — Creek through renaissance periods. B — The neoclassic periods to contemporary 
styles. (6 hours activity) 

470A,B Advanced Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 288, 350, and 370A,B, or consent of Instructor. Readings in theory, analysis 
of scripts and practice in directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — Each 
student directs a one-act play. B — Each student directs two one-act plays or equivalent. (6 hours 
activity) 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Methods and materials for teaching creative dance/ movement to children. Interrelated arts tech- 
niques (movement, music, drama, visual art) for teaching in the classroom and the dance class. 
(6 hours activity) 

474 Forces and Figures in 20th-Century Dance (3) 

Development of forms (ballet, social, modern) from 1900 to the present; their general relation to 
culture. 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3,3,33,3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The historical and dramatic evolution of world theatre. A — 
Ancient Greece and Rome, Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B — England from 1558-1790; 16th- 
and 17th-century Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century 
England; D — 18th- and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modern world; E — Historical 
background and contemporary view of the musical theatre. 

477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (33) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to B. A — Major critical theories in theatre. 
B — Application of critical theories to local dramatic productions. Theatre 477B fulfills the course 
requirement of the university upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement for theatre arts 
majors. 

478A,B Production and Performance (2,2) 

^—Acting in stage or television performances. B — Technical crew work on stage or television 
performances. One section of 478B per semester required of all theatre majors as well as 
non-majors cast in theatre department productions. (More than 6 hours activity) 

4B2 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A,B. The adaptation of stage techniques for the camera; audition, rehearsal, 
and final performance, utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours activity) 

4®3 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B and audition. Extensive scene study, based on particular needs and 
problem areas of the advanced acting student. Rotating study with three instructors in acting, 
culminating In joint monthly workshop sessions and final semester workshop presentation. (6 
hours activity) 

^ Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Techniques of production for the director, actor 
and designer in televised drama. (6 hours activity) 

Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. Design and technology of lighting for the stage 
and television. (6 hours activity) 

J®® Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

rerequisites: Theatre 276A,B, 277, 288 and consent of instructor. Advanced design, coordination 
of scenery and/or costume design projects for various types of theatres and television. 


126 Theatre 


490 Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 290A,B, 384 or consent of instructor. The nature of film and television; 
aesthetic and theoretical and critical bases for film and television evaluation and understanding. 

493 Dance Repertory and Performance (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 212 and 322. Learning and rehearsing choreography of established and/or new 
dance works with performance intent. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

494 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of television production and consent of Instructor. Practical experience in the 
creation of full-length television dramatic productions for cable broadcasting. (6 hours activity) 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Theatre (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; application form with appropriate 
signatures must be on file in department office prior to registration. Projects which culminate 
In production or performance. May be repeated once for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; application form with appropriate 
signatures must be on file in department office prior to registration. Undergraduate research 
projects. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Methodological problems In graduate research. Location of source materials, including library and 
original data; interpretation of research and practice in scholarly writing. Must be taken the first 
semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar. Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research; the relationship between historical backgrounds and 
developments In the theatre and the student's area of concentration. 

503 Graduate Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 403A or consent of Instructor. Philosophies, theories, techniques and trends of 
the art of theatre for children. Problems related to the use of materials In educational, commu- 
nity and professional children's theatres. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Oral Interpretation (3) 

Historical and philosophical development of oral interpretation and its relationship to contemporary 
theory and practice. 

523 Graduate Projects in Choreography (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 423 or consent of instructor. Experiments in choreography using improvisation 
and innovative composition techniques. Environmental and sensorial experiences and studies 
in creativity and perception. 

550 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) 

Production problems in theatre arts. Planning the production within the limitations of budgets and 
physical facilities. 

566 Graduate Seminar. Stagecraft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theories In the preparation and Installation of scenery 
for theatrical production; engineering drawings, exploration of materials, and research Into new 
methods of theatre technology. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

570 Styles of Directing (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 470A,B and 475A,B,C,D, or consent of instructor. Research in theories of 
directing styles and practice In directing period plays. Each student will direct scenes for 
workshop performance In Creek tragedy and comedy, Roman comedy, Elizabethan and Jaco- 
bean tragedy and comedy. Restoration and 18th-century comedy, French neo-classical com- 
edy, melodrama, or drama of language/ idea. 

573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of contributions of major dramatists or dramatic 
genres. Emphasis on dramatic analysis. Topic will vary from semester to semester. May be 
repeated for credit. 

575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of a significant historical period or movement 
In theatre history. Topic will vary from semester to semester. May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre 127 


577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Costume production problems and their solutions. Examination 
of specific designers, past and present. Research in practical methods of interpreting the de- 
signer's sketch. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Scenic design projects involving in-depth production style and 
scheme development. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

580 Seminar in Play Directing in Secondary Schools (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370A,B, 470A,B or consent of instructor. An exploration of the problems 
unique to staging dramatic productions on the secondary level. Includes such topics as time 
restrictions, appropriate scripts, disciplinary problems, faculty and administrative support. 

583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B. Investigation and delineation of current acting methods as techniques 
for solving problems presented by propular dramatic literature. Development of a personal 
acting philosophy and methodology. May be repeated once for credit. 

586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theoretical lighting design projects. Production prob- 
lems and their solutions. Examination of specific designers, past and present. May be repeated 
for credit up to six units. 

588 Graduate Projects in Design and Technical Theatre (6) 

Theoretical projects and designs for productions prior to final projects. Faculty and student critiques. 
Tailored to individual student needs. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student's graduate committee arid department executive com- 
mittee. Development and presentation of a creative project beyond regularly offered course- 
work. May be repeated for credit up to six units. Student must complete course application form 
by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding that in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee; application form with appropriate signatures 
must be on file in department office prior to registration. Development and presentation of a 
thesis in the student's area of concentration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee and Instructor; application form with appro- 
priate signatures must be on file in department office prior to registration. Research in theatre. 
May be repeated for credit. 


theatre education courses 

^2 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods and materials for teaching in the 
secondary school. 

Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School (10) 

^ description under Division of Teacher Education. 

^98 Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

^ description under Division of Teacher Education. 


, jj\ r - /> j ■ ,V ’ , 1? ir 


•i . 


:^ r : 


V .;•■'< '?J^'5f,-;'';-^ of/. 

r-. 

■ ;..' ’V)! 

j': ^ 

:'% ■ ' 'I . _,' V u'N^,i*qOtv . ;- ■ >.r.-: 

, - .\ . ■' .ij'' >’ . ■:■ 

'■:• : ■ i'-.^ . I . >V'^ ; 

, /' !, ^i'*;.- T', OJ’vy' Vi fQU'' ^••v. Si} ^hi 

. ,;■ . :-v: , v 

I -7 • : ,^rnvij<y5i>^ llOt 

i ■i^.ryvtkyiT hrit 


i 1 1f 


■; 






• \»oby'/iijo> ol h»> v 1 : 


rn.'f '• •:•'*■ ■ 


■ • . 'ir i ^..; :li- 

; V i' *-.-'fV> r^ytf 




' \ -;vi 

-'?, i' ^ r •/'ijj'-j 

.. Mlt 

■’-.'l -ti¥. 40 'V 


'7 -ey J( .Cht/ 3'M'n 

: v^Xvtix? -/■^r^-rKi -"/•;.■ n, ^l't&'!f^:•>^ 

.*>;».• .. .7 1 K. .y’ r,;;;i<jh. 

../!• V ',r;:i-7’.- ^. 1 ;. ruiifyv.:. ivu 4,nr';ain 



BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRAHON 
AND ECONOMICS 


130 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Henry Anderson 
Associate Dean: Ken Goldin 


FACULTY 

Department of Accounting; Trini Melcher, Chair 

Steven Anderman, Henry Anderson,* Dale Bandy, Jack Coleman, Eugene Corman, Orapin 
Duangploy, Mary Fleming, Clyde Hardman, A. Jay Hirsch, Kara Johan, Norbert Maler, Robert 
Miller, Nona Mooers, Shirish Seth, Randy Swad, William Todd, Anita Tyra, Robert Vanasse, 
Dorsey Wiseman, Monsie Wolcott, John Woo 
Department of Economics: Eric Solberg, Chair 

Robert Ayanlan, Kwang-wen Chu, James Dietz, Peter Formuzis, Ken Goldin,* Levern Craves, 
Dante Cumucio, Jane Hall, Thomas Hazlett, Lionel Kalish, Sidney Klein, John Lafky, Maryanna 
Lanier, Stewart Long, Farhad Mahloudji, Robert Michaels, Gary Pickersgill, Joyce PIckersgill, 
Jack Pontney, Anil Puri, Guy Schick, Raymond Sfeir, Adil Talaysum, Johannes van Llerop, David 
Wong 

Department of Finance: Marco Tonietti, Chair 

Albert Bueso, Donald Crane, John Erickson, Albert J. Fredman, Peter Mlynaryk, Dennis O'Con- 
nor, Paul Sarmas, Radha Sharma, P. James Stickels, Frank Taylor, B. E. Tsagris, Wallace Weaver 
Department of Management: Dorothy Heide, Chair 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Michael Ames, Thomas Apke, Mei Liang Bickner, Kenneth Bobele, Robert 
Chapman, James Conant, Richard Gilman, CaminI Gunawardane, Leo Guolo, Chasem Haj- 
Manoochehri, Granville Hough, Richard Houston, Thomas Johnson, Geoffrey King, Brian Klein- 
er, Elliot Kushell, Thomas Maher, Mitchell Marks, Richard McCarty, Leland McCloud, Kent 
McKee, Tai Oh, Janis Pasquali, Edgar Wiley, Edward Zilbert 
Department of Management Science: John Lawrence, Chair 

Sihu-Jen Chen, Angela Cheng, Wen Chow, Roger Dear, Ben Edmondson, Nicholas Farnum, 
William Heitzman, Mabel Kung, Ram Lai, William Lau, F. Walter Mueller, Barry Pasternack, 
Kenneth Poertner, Herbert Rutemiller, Sohan SIhota, Ram Singhania, LaVerne Stanton, David 
Stoller, Ronald Sulch, Vishist Vaid-Raizada 
Department of Marketing: Irene Lange, Chair 

Robert Barath, William Bell, Grady Bruce, Scott Greene, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, Robert 
Olsen, Frank Roberts, James Taylor, Robert Zimmer 
The School of Business Administration and Economics offers the only programs in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. Accreditation assures a 
rigorous course of study covering the full spectrum of business administration. It also indicates a 
well-qualified faculty, high standards for students, and access to an extensive library system. 

The school offers a broad exposure to business administration and economics. Behavioral and 
quantitative sciences are studied within both theoretical and applied contexts. Mathematics is used 
as an integral tool in the analysis of complex problems and in the Interpretation of data. Emphasis 
is placed on effective communication, both oral and written. Students are made aware of the need 
for imaginative, innovative solutions to business problems, which encompass human needs and 
ethical objectives. 

The school also offers the opportunity to develop technical expertise In a chosen discipline at a 
beginning professional level acceptable to prospective employers. Seven concentrations are offered 
within the business administration major as well as an economics major and a business education 
credential program. 


University Administrative Officer 


Business Administration 131 


UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 
Academic Advising 

The Business Advising Center on the seventh floor of Langsdorf Hall serves both business administra- 
tion and economics majors. (Economics students should also consult a faculty adviser in the 
Economics Department. ) Transfer students should see an adviser immediately regarding transfer 
credit. For information on general education, consult the Academic Advisement Center in the 
Humanities Building. 

Accounting Concentration 

The accounting concentration covers financial, cost, governmental and tax accounting. Specialized 
courses are offered in auditing, advanced taxation, managerial accounting and information systems. 
The accounting concentration prepares students for management level accounting positions in 
business, government or public accounting, and is an excellent preparation for graduate study in 
accounting. In general, a master's degree is preferred for a career in accounting. For information on 
master's programs contact the Accounting Department. 

Business Administration Major 

The curriculum for a business administration degree includes courses surveying all of the fields of 
business, as well as a series of courses in one area of concentration. 

Business Education 

With a teaching credential in business, there are job opportunities in business and in junior and senior 
high schools. To qualify for the credential, it is necessary to complete a// of the requirements for a 
B.A. in Business Administration (including one of the concentrations). Additional courses in office 
administration may be required. Interested students should see the business education adviser in the 
Division of Teacher Education. Office administration courses are not offered at the University, but 
may be taken at nearby colleges. Up to 12 units of such courses may be counted as lower division 
business electives. The credential program also involves 30 units of teacher education courses. 

Economics Concentration Economics Major 

Students of economics find employment in national and multinational corporations, financial institu- 
tions, unions, all levels of government and agribusiness. Economists participate in strategic pricing, 
cost analysis, marketing research, statistical forecasting and the evaluation of social programs. The 
economics concentration leads to a Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration. Alternatively, the 
Bachelor of Arts in Economics requires fewer business courses, allowing greater opportunity to study 
economics as a social science. Both degrees provide a good foundation for advanced studies in law, 
business or economics. 


English Proficiency Requirement 

Proficiency in English writing is required of all business administration and economics 
majors for award of the baccalaureate degree. Students are required to pass both Business 
Administration 301, Business Writing, and the Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing 
Proficiency (EWP). 

Business Administration 301 must be passed before the student achieves senior standing 
(90 units). 

The Examination in Writing Proficiency must be passed before the student achieves senior 
standing (90 units) and is also a prerequisite to Management 340 ( required of all business 
administration majors). The EWP stresses written English and is given approximately four 
times each year. For the schedule of test dates, consult the current class schedule. Register 
in the Testing Center (fee charged). 

A student may apply for a waiver from the English proficiency requirement if the student 
(1) has publish^ expository prose, (2) is a candidate for a second bachelor's degree 
and demonstrates writing ability equivalent to that required by Fullerton, or (3) as a 
transfer student presents evidence of equivalent proficiency in writing at the upper- 
division level. 


132 Business Adntinistration 


Finance Concentration 

There are four areas of emphasis within the finance concentration. Students with a financial manage- 
ment emphasis may qualify for jobs as financial analyst for banks, public utilities and other large 
companies. With a real estate administration emphasis, employment possibilities include financial 
analyst for a developer, or real estate broker. The securities and investments emphasis can lead to 
positions as account executive or securities analyst for a stock broker or bank. And the insurance 
emphasis offers preparation for Insurance sales and estate and pension planning. 

Internships and Cooperative Education 

Students may earn academic credit, first-hand work experience and financial remuneration as well. 
Opportunities exist in accounting and auditing; cost-benefit analysis and econometrics; finance and 
real estate; insurance and banking; management and industrial relations; marketing, sales and 
advertising; and business data systems. For more information, consult the Internship adviser in your 
department or in the Center for Internships and Cooperative Education. 

Management Concentration 

There are job opportunities In large businesses, hospitals, labor unions and government agencies. 
By managing human and material resources, useful goods and services are produced in a satisfactory 
work environment. Management students learn the ethical, psychological and sociological founda- 
tions for human behavior and examine the Impact of group dynamics, information organization and 
interpersonal relationships on the administrative process. The management concentration offers 
three emphases: administrative management, operations management and human resources. 

Management Information Systems Concentration 

The management information systems concentration offers preparation for careers in the fields of 
electronic data processing and decision support systems. Included are the design. Implementation, 
operation and management of information systems. The design emphasis focuses on computing 
technology for handling large amounts of data. The management emphasis stresses the manner In 
which information and information systems are developed and utilized in support of management 
decision-making and control in organizations. With a degree in business administration and experi- 
ence as a programmer or systems analyst, advancement is possible to positions such as data 
processing manager or director of information systems. 

Management Science Concentration 

Management science integrates the computer with mathematics and business to model complex 
business situations. This program prepares the student to utilize effectively management science 
techniques to evaluate alternatives and to make optimal decisions. Employment opportunities in 
statistics include insurance, government, market research and business forecasting. Operations 
research can lead to careers in business analysis, inventory control, or urban planning. Openings in 
data processing and information systems are available in all fields of business. 

Marketing Concentration 

Marketing is useful for sales and many other careers. With a marketing concentration and suitable 
experience, possible jobs include department store manager or product line manager, as well as jobs 
In market research, advertising, physical distribution or sales management. The concentration offers 
emphases In international marketing, marketing research, advertising management, sales manage 
ment, retailing, physical distribution and marketing management. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have been established on campus with member- 
ship open to qualified students: Beta Alpha Psi (accounting), Beta Gamma Sigma (business), 
Financial Management Association Honor Society (finance), Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics) 
Phi Kappa Phi (all campus). Pi Sigma Epsilon (marketing). In addition there are the following 
departmentally affiliated clubs which students are encouraged to join: the Accounting Society, Circle 
K (management). Data Processing Management Association, Economics Association, Finance As- 
sociation, Marketing Club, Personnel and Industrial Relations Association, Personnel Management 
Association of Aztian, Rho Epsilon (real estate-finance). Securities and Investment Association and 
Society for the Advancement of Management. 


Business Administration 133 


Student Awards 

Awards are presented each year to the outstanding student in the school and to the outstanding 
student in each of the six departments. Other awards include the Theodore H. Smith Outstanding 
Graduate Student Award and the Stephen J. Barres Leadership Award. 

Transfer Credit for Business and Economics Courses 

Students should see an adviser immediately regarding transfer credit. Lower-division courses taken 
at four-year institutions and all courses taken at two-year colleges may be used to satisfy only 
lower-division (i.e., 100 and 200 level) requirements at the university. Upper-division courses taken 
at four-year institutions may be used to satisfy upper division (i.e., 300 and 400 level) requirements 
at the university. Lists of approved courses are available in the Business Advising Center; other 
courses are subject to approval by the department chair concerned. In all cases, courses must be 
transferred from an appropriately accredited institution. In most cases, courses taken in the extension 
division of a university, or by correspondence, are not acceptable. If the institution is located outside 
the Southern California area, the student should supply catalog descriptions, course outlines and 
textbook titles. 

PREPARATION FOR BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS DEGREE PROGRAMS 

Algebra and geometry are necessary for many required business courses. The equivalent of three 
years of high school mathematics, including a second course in algebra. Is the prerequisite for the 
required Math 135, Business Calculus. Students without the necessary background should enroll in 
Math 100, Precalculus Mathematics. 

A passing score on the Cal State Fullerton Examination In Writing Proficiency ( EWP) is a prerequisite 
to the required Management 340. Students without adequate writing skills should enroll In Communi- 
cations 103, Applied Writing; English 101, Beginning College Writing; English 106, Writing for ESL 
Students; Foreign Language Education 105A,B, English as a Second Language; or Business Administra- 
tion 301, Business Writing. 

Business students are encouraged to take courses in sociology, psychology, anthropology, speech 
communication, political science, history, philosophy, geography and foreign languages. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
Degree Requirements 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. For assistance in Interpreting these 
requirements contact the Business Advising Center. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 100 The Economic Environment (3) 

Economics 200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be substituted for Economics 100 
and Economics 200. Students who have taken one semester of Principles of Economics 
(micro, macro or general) should enroll in Economics 200. 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 

Note: The management science concentration requires both Math 150A and 150B. 
Accounting 201 A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Management Science 265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer Programming 
(3) 

Note: Management Science 264, Computer Programming (2), aocf Management Science 263, 
Introduction to Information Systems (1 ), may be substituted for Management Science 265. 
English Proficiency Requirement 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Note: Both parts of this English proficiency requirement must be passed before the student 
achieves senior standing (90 units). A passing score on the EWP Is a prerequisite to 
Management 340. 


134 Business Administration 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory (3) 

or Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory (3) 

Note: The management concentration requires Economics 310. 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations and Organizations (3) 

Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) . ^ • jr • />,x 

Management Science 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (4) 
Management Science 362 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics (3) 
or Management Science 363 Management Science (3) 

Required Concentration Courses 

A minimum of 18 units of course work is required in one concentration. See listing of concentration 
requirements below. 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower and upper-division core courses, take: 

Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Requirements in Other Subjects, Grades and Residence 

Other subjects. Complete at least 50 units of courses in subjects other than business administration 
or economics. Complete all university requirements for the bachelor's degree. 

Grade-Point Average (CPA). Attain at least a 2.0 CPA (C average) in all university courses, in all 
required business administration cone courses, and in all required business administration concentra- 
tion courses. 

Grade option. Take all required core courses and all required concentration courses in the School 
of Business Administration and Economics for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The Credit/No Credit 
grading option may not be used for these courses, and a grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the 
requirements for the degree. Exception: Courses in calculus may be taken under the Credit/ No Credit 
grading option. 

Residence. At least nine units of courses in the area of concentration and at least 1 5 of the last 24 
units of courses must be taken in residence at the School of Business Administration and Economics. 
Students also must fulfill university residence requirements. 


Concentration Requirements for Majors in Business Administration 

Business administration majors must complete the requirements of one concentration in addition to 
the degree requirements shown above. 


Accounting Concentration (21 units required) 

All students with an accounting concentration are required to take: 

Accounting 301 A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 308 Federal Income Tax (3) 

Accounting 402 Auditing (3) 
and two of the following courses: 

Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Accounting 403 Accounting for Governmental and Nonprofit Entities (3) 
Accounting 407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 


Economics Concentration (18 units required) 

All students with an economics concentration are required to take: 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory (3) 
as part of their business administration core requirements. In addition, the concentration requires: 
Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory (3) 

Economics 410 Government and Business (3) 

andU units of upper-division economics electives, 3 units of which must be 400-level. (Manage- 
ment 446, Managerial Economics, will be accepted as an economics elective) 


Business Administration 135 


Students interested in economics should also consider the B.A. in Economics. 

Finance Concentration (18 units required) 

All students with a finance concentration are required to take: 

Finance 331 Financial Analysis (3) or 
Finance 332 Financial Administration (3) 
and ys units of upper-division finance electives (other than Finance 310) 

Students may choose all of their courses from one of the following emphases, or may sample several 
emphases. 

Financial Management Emphasis (18 units including both Finance 331 and Finance 332) 

Finance 331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Finance 332 Financial Administration (3) 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 

Finance 425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Finance 432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Finance 433 Problems In Business Finance (3) 

Finance 440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Rea! Estate Emphasis (18 units including either Finance 331 or Finance 332) 

Courses marked (*) partially satisfy the California State Real Estate Brokers License Examination 
requirements. Contact the Finance Department for further details. 

Finance 331 Financial Analysis (3) or 
Finance 332 Financial Administration (3) 

Finance 351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis *(3) 

Finance 451 Real Estate/ Land Use Law — Case Studies * (3) 

Finance 452 Real Estate Finance * (3) 

Finance 453 Real Estate Valuation * (3) 

Finance 454 Real Estate and Urban Development * (3) 

Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis * (3) 

Finance 456 Property Development and Real Estate Policy Analysis * (3) 

Finance 459 Real Estate Research (3) 

Securities-Investments Emphasis (18 units Including either Finance 331 or Finance 332) 

Finance 331 Financial Analysis (3) or 
Finance 332 Financial Administration (3) 

Finance 340 Security Investments (3) 

Finance 440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Finance 442 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management (3) 

Finance 443 Portfolio Analysis (3) 

andZ units upper-division finance electives (other than Finance 310) 

Insurance Emphasis (18 units including either Finance 331 or Finance 332) 

Finance 331 Financial Analysis (3) or 
Finance 332 Financial Administration (3) 

Finance 360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Finance 461 Business Risk Management (3) 

Finance 462 Life and Health Insurance (3) 

and ^ units upper-division finance electives (other than Finance 310) 

Management Concentration (18 units required) 

All students with a management concentration are required to take: 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory (3) 
as part of their business administration core requirements. In addition, students must choose one 
of the following emphases. 

'Administrative Management Emphasis (18 units required) General supervision of organized activity. 
Management 342 Production Operations (3) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 

Management 446 Managerial Economics (3) or 
Management 447 Management Decision Games [Z) or 
Management 448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 
and 6 units of upper-division management electives. 


136 Business Administration 


Operations Management Emphasis ( 1 8 units required ) Management of new projects and production 
operations. 

Management 342 Production Operations (3) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 445 Advanced Production Operations (3) 

Management 446 Managerial Economics (3) or 
Management 447 Management Decision Games or 
Management 448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 
anc/ 6 units of upper-division management electives. 

Human Resources Management Emphasis (18 units required) Interpersonal relations and group 
leadership. 


Management 343 
Management 441 
Management 443 
Management 444 


Personnel Management (3) 

Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Individual, Interpersonal, and Croup Dynamics for Management (3) 
Project Management (3) 


Management 444 project Management u; 
and 6 units of upper-division management electives. 


Management Information Systems Concentration (18 units plus 6 elective units required.) 

All students with a management information systems concentration must choose one of the follow- 
ing emphases. In addition, six units of electives are required. See below. 

Design Emphasis (18 units required. See note.) 

Management 244 Introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Management ScierKe 300 Elements of Information Systems Design and Data Communication 
(3) 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Management Science 404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 

Management Science 408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Management Emphasis (18 units required. See note.) 

Management 244 Introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Management Science 300 Elements of Information Systems Design and Data Communication 
(3) 

Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 

Management 494 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 

Note; AH students with a management information systems concentration are also required to take: 
6 units of upper-division electives in business administration or economics. 


These electives should be chosen In consultation with the faculty coordinator of the management 
information systems concentration, and should be chosen from among the following courses: 
Accounting 407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Computer Science 302 * Information Structures (3) 

Systems Programming (3) 

Mini-Computer Software Systems (3) 

Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Data Processing with Minicomputers (3) 

Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 

Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 


Computer Science 310 * 
Computer Science 414 ^ 
Management Science 310 
Management Science 409 
Management Science 41 1 
Management Science 416 
Management Science 418 
Management Science 420 
Management Science 448 


Management Science Concentration (18 units required) 

All students with a management science concentration are required to take: 

Math 1^A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4,4) (Note: Math 150A,B may be taken with 
the credit/ no credit option.) 


• These computer science courses will be counted 
systems concentration. 


as business administration electives for students with a management information 


Business Administration 137 


As part of their business administration core requirements. In addition, the concentration 
requires: 

Management Science 461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Management Science 465 Linear Programming (3) 
and 1 2 units of upper-division management science electives, to be approved by the chair of 
the Management Science Department. 

Students may choose all of their courses from one of the following emphases, or may sample several 
emphases. 

Information Systems Emphasis (18 units including Management Science 461 and 465) 

Management Science 300 Elements of Information System Design and Data Communications 
(3) 

Management Science 310 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Management Science 404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 

Management Science 408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Management Science 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Management Science 411 Data Processing with Minicomputers (3) 

Management Science 416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

Management Science 418 Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 

Management Science 461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Management Science 465 Linear Programming (3) 

Operations Research Emphasis (18 units including Management Science 461 and 465) 
Management Science 448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 
Management Science 461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Management Science 465 Linear Programming (3) 

Management Science 466 Mathematical Programming (3) 

Management Science 480 Inventory and Production Analysis in Business and Economics (3) 
Management Science 490 Queueing and Other Stochastic Process Models in Business and 
Economics (3) 


Statistics Emphasis (18 units including Management Science 461 and 465) 


Management Science 420 
Management Science 422 
Management Science 430 
Management Science 461 
Management Science 465 
Management Science 467 
Management Science 468 
Management Science 475 


Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 
Nonparametric Statistics (3) 

Advanced Statistics (3) 

Linear Programming (3) 

Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Design of Experiments (3) 

Multivariate Analysis (3) 


Marketing Concentration (18 units required) 

All students with a marketing concentration must choose one of the following emphases: 
Advertising Management Emphasis (18 units required) 

Marketing 354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Marketing 454 Advertising Management (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 

^nd 3 unit upper-division marketing elective 
Idarketing Management Emphasis (18 units required) 

3 unit behavioral course (Marketing 354, 356 or 370. See note.) 

Marketing 359 Industrial Marketing (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) or 
Marketing 457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 

^nd 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 


Note: BEHA VIORAL COURSES IN MARKETING 
Marketing 354 Principles of Advertising (3 units) 

Marketing 356 Professional Selling (3 units) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3 units) 


138 Business Administration 


Marketing Research Emphasis (18 units required) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Marketing 479 Research Problems in Marketing (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 
Physical Distribution Emphasis (18 units required) 

Marketing 358 Physical Distribution (3) 

3 unit behavioral course (Marketing 354, 356 or 370. See note.) 
Marketing 457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 6 units of upper-division marketing electives. 

Retailing Emphasis (18 units required) 

Marketing 352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Marketing 456 Retailing Management (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 3-unit upper-division marketing elective 
Sales Management Emphasis (18 units required) 

Marketing 356 Professional Selling (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Marketing 455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
and 3-unit upper-division marketing elective 


International Marketing Emphasis (18 units required) 

3-unit behavioral course (Marketing 354, 356 or 170. See note.) 
Marketing 379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Marketing 458 International Marketing (3) 

Marketing 459 Marketing Problems (3) 
arKi 6 units of upper-division marketing electives 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 
Degree Requirements 

AH of the foHowir^ requirements must be met for the degree. For assistance in interpreting these 
requirements contact the Business Advising Center on the seventh floor of Langsdorf Hall. Students 
should also contact their faculty adviser in the Economics Department prior to or during their first 
semester. 


Required Lower-Division Courses 
Economics 1(X) The Economic Environment (3 units) 

Economics 200 Principles of Economics (3 units) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5 units), may be substituted for Economics 1(X) 
and 200. Students who have taken one semester of Principles of Economics (micro, macro or 
general) should enroll in Economics 200. 

Accounting 201 A, B Elementary Accounting (3,3 units) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3 units) or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4 units) 

Note: Accounting 201A, Elementary Accounting (3 units), ancyMath 150A,B, Analytic Geome- 
try and Calculus (4,4 units), may be substituted for Accounting 201A,B and Math 135. 
Management Science 265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer Programming 

^ience 264, Computer Programming (2 units), and Management Science 
2W, Introduction to Information Systems (1 unit) may be substituted for Management Science 
265. 


Business Administration 139 


English Proficiency Requirement 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3 units) 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Note: Both parts of this English proficiency requirement must be passed before the student 
achieves senior standing (90 units). 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory (3) 

Management Science 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (4) 
and 1 8 units of upper-division economics electives, 6 units of which must be 400 level. 

Requirements in Other Subjects, Grades and Residence 

Other subjects. Complete at least 50 units of courses outside the School of Business Administration 
and Economics. The department recommends that these courses be from the social sciences, 
mathematics and management science. Students planning to do graduate work in economics are 
advised to take Math 150A,B; Economics 440 and Economics 441. Complete all university require- 
ments for the bachelor's degree. 

Grade- Point Average (CPA). Attain at least a 2.0 CPA (C average) In all university courses; in all 
required courses In economics, accounting and management science and in a// courses in econom- 
ics. 

Grade Option. Take all required courses in economics, accounting and management science for a 
letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The credIt/no credit grading option may not be used for these courses, 
and a grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for the degree. Exception: Courses in 
calculus may be taken under the credit/no credit grading option. 

Residence. At least 15 units of courses must be taken In residence at the School of Business 
Administration and Economics at Cal State Fullerton. Also fulfill university residence requirements. 

MINORS IN THE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

A minor in business administration or in economics covers the role of business in society and the 
methods used by business. The minor in management Information systems applies modern computer 
methods to the development of Information systems to aid management decision making. Both the 
diploma and the transcript mention the minor. A working knowledge of algebra Is necessary for 
several of the courses, but calculus is not required. See an adviser in the Business Advising Center. 

MINOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
Requirements • 

Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 100 The Economic Environment (3) 

Economics 200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be substituted for Economics 1(X) and 
Economics 200. Students who have taken one semester of Principles of Economics (micro, 
macro or general) should enroll In Economics 200. 

Accounting 201 A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Management Science 289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

Note: Management Science 265, Introduction to Information Systems and Computer Program- 
ming (3 units) may be substituted for Management Science 289. This substitution Is recom- 
mended for students planning to take additional electives, many of which require Management 
Science 265 as a prerequisite. 

English Proficiency Requirement 
Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Note: A passing score on the EWP is a prerequisite to Management 340. 

* Students with a major in economics, who wish to minor in business administration, must take Economics 100 and 200 (or 210), 
Accounting 201 A and B, and Management Science 265 as part of their major. For such students, the corresponding courses in 
the minor will be waived (note that Management ScierKe 265 substitutes for Management ScierKe 289) and the minor will consist 
of Management 246, Management 339 or 340, Finance 320 and Marketing 351 . 


140 Business Administration 


Upper-Division Courses 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations and Organizations (3) or 
Management 340 Behavioral Science for Business (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 
Requirements * 

Lower-Division Courses 
Economics 100 The Economic Environment (3) 

Economics 200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be substituted for Economics 100 and 
Economics 200. Students who have taken one semester of Principles of Economics (micro, 
macro or general) should enroll in Economics 2(X). 

English Proficiency Requirement 
Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory (3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory (3) 
and 9 units of upper division economics electives 


MINOR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS 
Requirements •• 

Twenty-one units of course work are required for the minor. Some of the courses listed below have 
prerequisites. In particular, students should be familiar with BASIC or FORTRAN programming 
(equivalent to Management Science 264 or 265) as a prerequisite to Management Science 270. 
Required courses (6 units): 

Accounting 201 A Elementary Accounting (3) 

Note: Accounting 201 A will be waived for students with a major in economics. 

Management 244 Introduction to Systems concepts (3) 
and 6 units from: 

Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Management Science 3(X) Elements of Information System Design and Data Communication (3) 
Management Science 404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 
and 6 units from: 


Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Computer Science 310 Systems Programming (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 

Management Science 310 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Data Base Management Systems (3) 
Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Data Processing with Mini/ Micro Computers 
Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 
Digital Simulation in Business and Economics 


Management Science 408 
Management Science 409 
Management Science 41 1 
Management Science 416 
Management Science 418 
Management Science 448 


and, in addition, 3 units from the lists above. 


(3) 

(3) 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN TAXATION 

See "Graduate Programs." 


•• Students with a major business administration 


may not minor in management information systems. 


Accounting 141 


ACCOUNTING COURSES 

201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before 201 B. Accounting concepts and techniques 
essential to the administration of a business enterprise; measuring and communicating econom- 
ic information; analyzing and recording financial transactions; preparation, analysis and inter- 
pretation of financial statements; introduction to managerial accounting; product costing; analy- 
sis and techniques for aiding management decisions; management control; interaction with 
finance, management science, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information sys- 
tems. (Not open to freshmen) 

301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B; 301 A must be taken before 301 B. Accounting theory; preparation 
of income statements, balance sheets, and statements of changes in financial position; present 
value and amount concepts; assets, liabilities and stockholders equity; price-level accounting; 
pensions; leases; earnings per share; financial statement analysis; accounting changes and error 
analysis. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Accounting information for management of manufacturing enter- 
prises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; product costing and inventory valuation; 
flexible budgeting; standard costs; responsibility accounting; cost planning and control; and 
operating decision analysis. 

308 Federal Income Tax (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Provisions, legislative history and implications of the federal in- 
come tax. The individual taxpayer. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B. Business combinations; meaning, usefulness and methodology of 
consolidated financial statements; Investments in non-subsidiary affiliates and corporate joint 
ventures; consolidated financial statements for overseas units of U.S.-based multinational com- 
panies; translations of foreign currencies. 

402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B and 302. The auditing standards and procedures used by financial 
and operational auditors. Management information and computer systems, internal control, 
audit evidence, professional responsibilities and legal liabilities, standards of reporting financial 
information. 

403 Accounting for Governmental and Nonprofit Entities (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 51 1 . Fund accounting as applied to governmental and nonprofit 
entities; state and federal governments, municipalities, hospitals, and universities. Budgets, tax 
levies, revenues and appropriations, expenditures and encumbrances, various types of funds, 
and accounting statements. 

407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 and Management Science 265 or equivalent. Alternative 
accounting systems used for the collection, organization and presentation of information. 
Theory and practice of Information processing, organizational, behavioral, and mechanical. 

W Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Federal income tax as It applies to corporations, partnerships, fiduci- 
aries, international operations, securities and fringe benefits including retirement plans, federal 
estate and gift taxes as they apply to taxable transfers. 

^70 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. The methodology of tax research Including case studies; the manage- 
ment of a tax practice; administration procedures governing tax controversies; rights and 
obligations of taxpayers and tax practitioners. 

^95 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B (may be taken concurrently). Accounting 302, a major In account- 
ing, consent of the department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 CPA and one 
semester in residence at the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
ref)eated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/ No Credit only. 


142 Accounting 

499 Independent Study (1-3) , . ^ j * 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval of department chair. Open to qualified uridergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open 
to students on academic probation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) . // / 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified SBAE sUtus and consent of instructor. The effects of 

professional, governmental, business, and social forces on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M S. in Accounting status or consent of instructor. Current issues in financial 
reporting including pronouncements by the Financial Accounting Standards Board and the 
Securities and Exchange Commission. Coverage of topics will change as new issues in account- 
ing emerge. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified SBAE status. Auditing theory and practices; professional 
ethics; auditing standards; Securities and Exchange Commission and stock exchange regula- 
tions; auditor's legal liability; statement trends and techniques. 

506 Seminar in Professional Accounting Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent of Instructor. Compilation and composi- 
tion of accounting reports and client presentations relating to accountants' working papers, 
client engagement letters, management advisory reports and prospectl. 

507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 407 or equivalent with consent of Instructor. Case studies of computer- 
based accounting systems used by organizations such as universities, banks, industrial corpora- 
tions and CPA firms. Emphasis on accounting information, reports and internal controls. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Substantive provi- 
sions of federal tax law; tax planning from a corporate viewpoint; case studies of the effect of 
federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Accumulation, organization, and interpretation of financial and 
quantitative data relevant to the activities of the corporate business enterprise. The Interaction 
of accounting with finance. Interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information systems. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 510, consent of Instructor and classified SBAE status. Accounting 
information for management decisions; elements of manufacturing, distribution and service 
costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 51 1 and classified SBAE status. Comparative analysis of accounting 
principles and practices outside the United States; international financial accounting standards; 
current problems of international financial reporting, accounting planning and control for inter- 
national operations; multinational companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302 or 511; classified SBAE status and consent of instructor. Integrative 
aspects of accounting, financial, and quantitative data for managerial decision-making; long- 
term, short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis; financial analysis and plan- 
ning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and Shareholders (3) 

PrerequisHes: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Federal taxation 
relating to corporations; organizing distributions, liquidations and reorganizations. 

573 Seminar in Taxation of Property Transactions (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Federal taxation 
relating to sales, exchanges and other transfers. 

574 Seminar in Taxation of International Business Operations (3) 

Prerequisites. Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of Instructor. Federal taxation 
relating to U.S. citizens and corporations with foreign source Income and of foreign persons with 
U.S. source income; planning for foreign operations. 


Economics 143 


575 Seminar in Estate, Gift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Federal and 
California death taxes and the planning of personal estates. 

576 Seminar in State and Local Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Application of 
interstate income allocations; multi-state tax compact; separate v. apportionment accounting; 
foreign country sourced income. Also, California taxes as applied to businesses and individuals. 

577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee Compensation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or consent of Instructor. Federal taxation 
relating to employee compensation including pensions and profit sharing, stock options, ESOP's, 
IRA's, Keogh's, maximum tax 10-year averaging, death benefits, group term life, etc. 

578 Seminar in Taxation of Partnerships (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classlfi^ SBAE status, or consent of instructor. Federal taxation 
relating to partnerships, estates, trusts and other special entities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inquiry. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor, and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

301 Business Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or Communications 103 or equivalent (with a grade of C or better) and 
a satisfactory score on the course pretest. Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practices in various forms of business writing. Case studies. Satisfies the classroom portion of 
the upper-division writing requirement for business and economics majors. 

5% M.B.A. Management Game (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status and within six units of completion of the M.B.A. study plan. This 
serves as the required terminal evaluation for M.B.A. candidates. Policy decisions using the 
principles and practices of the several disciplines In the M.B.A. program. Teams plan and 
execute strategies and analyze the impacts of their decisions under uncertainty. Not open to 
students on academic probation. 


ECONOMICS COURSES 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

The application of economics to the problems of unemployment and Inflation, the distribution of 
Income, competition and monopoly, the role of government in the economy, and other policy 
issues. 

200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100. Basic economic theory. The central problem of allocating scarce 
resources in a market economy and the determination of the level of output, employment, and 
prices, and international applications. 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 100 and 200.) Economic analysis and policy. 
The central problem of scarcity, economic institutions of the United States, resource allocation 
and Income distribution, economic stability and growth, the role of public policy, and interna- 
tional applications. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. Rational decision-making behavior of consumers and firms and 
price and output determination in markets. 


144 Economics 


320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. The determinants of the level of national income, employment 
and prices, and monetary and fiscal policies. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) • i / j • 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Alternative economic systems; their theoretical foundations, 

actual economic institutions, and achievements and failures. Contrast between socialist and 
capitalist systems. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The structure and performance of the Soviet economy; the 
problems of allocating scarce resources and sustaining economic growth in a planned economy. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The natural resources, population, agricultural, industrial, trans- 
portation, communications, monetary, banking, etc. problems of Asia, (i.e., China, Japan, and 
the Asian subcontinent). The relation of non-economic problems to the economy. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite. Economics 100 or 210. The processes of economic growth with references to develop- 
ing areas. Capital formation, resource allocation, relation to the world economy, economic 
planning and institutional factors, with case studies. 

335 The International Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The theory, practice and Institutions of the international econ- 
omy. International trade and investment; European economic community; balance of payments; 
foreign exchange rates; multinational enterprise; trade with developing countries; East-West 
trade; international economic policy. 

340 The Economics of Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The laws pertaining to regulation and the implications for each 
regulated industry. Industry studies; the effects of regulation on price, output, innovations, etc. 

350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The development of American economic institutions; economic 
problems, economic growth, and economic welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The evolution of European economic institutions and their 
relation to the development of industry, commerce, transportation and finance In the principal 
European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Theory and analysis of the urban economy, urban economic 
problems and policy. 

362 Environmental Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210, or consent of instructor. Economic analysis of environmental 
problems. Externalities, property rights, social costs and benefits, and policy alternatives as these 
relate to the environment. 

363 The Economics of Energy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Economic theory applied to energy problems, the impact of 
energy development on economic structure, and the role of government in allocating energy 
resources and influerKing their use. 

364 Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: EcorK>mics 100 or consent of instructor. Evaluation of benefit-cost studies prepared for 
government programs; educational and water resources. Methods of estimating environmental, 
cultural, life-saving, and macroeconomic benefits and costs; handling future benefits and costs. 

365 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. Government finance at the federal, state, and local levels; the 
impact of taxation and spending on resource allocation, income distribution, stabilization and 
growth. 

370 Economics of Research, Development and Technological Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Ecorwmics 100 or 210. Research and development and technological change in the 
ecorwmy; concepts, issues, and major figures in the study of the economics of technology; the 
assessment of technological change; the impacts of technological change. 


Economics 145 


410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. Business organization, conduct and performance; the rationale and 
impact of public policy on business and business activities, including the regulated industries, 
sick industries and antitrust policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. The theory of international trade and the means and significance of 
balance of payments adjustments; past and present developments in international, commercial 
and monetary policy. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. Labor supply and demand, labor force participation, employment, 
unemployment, human capital, wage differentials, disadvantaged labor market groups, discrimi- 
nation and wage-related income transfers. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. The money supply process and the impact of monetary policy on 
economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. The techniques of monetary and fiscal policy; of their relative roles in 
promoting economic stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210 or 301 Management Science 361. The theory and applica- 
tion of econometrics, economic measurement; the specification and estimation of econometric 
models; statistical methods in economic research. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210 and\\^dX\\ 135 or equivalent. Economic theory, from microeco- 
nomics and macroeconomics. Content varies; constrained optimization problems and rational 
decision-making. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 320. Major schools of thought and of leading individual economists 
as they influenced economic thought and policy. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 (may be taken concurrently), Economics 310 or 320, a 
major In economics, consent of the department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 
2.5 CPA and one semester in residence at the university. Planned and supervised work experi- 
ence. May be repeated to a total of six units credit. Credit/ No Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Economics major or concentration, senior standing and approval by the department 
chair. Open to undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent Inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and classified SBAE status or consent of instructor. The determination 
of prices and outputs in a market system. Demand, cost, production, theories and programming 
models of the firm, probabilistic and Investment models of the firm, game theoretic and 
behavioral models of the firm. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or consent of instructor. The determination 
of employment, fluctuations of real and money income, and the forces underlying economic 
growth. 

505 Economic Models and Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440 or consent of instructor, and classified SBAE status. Statistical methods 
of econometric estimation and forecasting. Practical problems of economic forecasting: model 
specification, multivariate regression, forecasting for firms, and the national economy. 

506 Seminar in Economic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and 505; classified SBAE status or consent of instructor. Students 
select topics and via independent investigation, seminar presentation and critique develop their 
analytical and research abilities, culminating with an acceptable paper. 


146 Finance 


514 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy— Part A (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Micro- and macroeconomic theory and policy within the frame- 
work of a market system. International applications. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy— Part B (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 or 100 and classified SBAE status. Modern microeconomic theory, 
optimization techniques, and microeconomic policy. Mathematical programming, consumer 
choice, production theory, firm and market equilibrium, and government regulation. (Not open 
to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

516 Economics and Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: classified status in SBAE, M.P.A., or the M.S. in Environmental Studies. Economics and 
benefit<ost analysis of public projects. Consumer demand and the estimation of benefits; the 
nature of cost in a market economy; price controls, unemployment and inflation; and criteria 
for choice, for multi-year projects. For elective credit in the M.P.A., M.B.A., or the environmen- 
tal studies M.A. 

517 Economics of Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: classified status in M.P.A. program or consent of instructor. Economics and federal, 
state and local governmental spending, taxation and borrowing. Major taxes, their effects on 
market prices, irKome distribution, employment and inflation and evaluation of reform propos- 
als. (Not open to M.A. Economics or M.B.A. candidates.) 

522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 515 or 310 and classified SBAE status. Analytical and prescriptive ap- 
proaches to economic problems of scarcity, development, fiscal and monetary policy, planning 
and poverty. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

5% Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320; classified SBAE status or consent of instructor. Contemporary 
research and materials such as: resource economics; history of economic thought; international 
monetary systems; economic forecasting; economics of planning; macroeconomics; human 
resource economics. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Not open to students on aca- 
demic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. Open to 
graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open 
to students on academic probation. 


FINANCE COURSES 

310 Personal Firuncial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and planning expenditures. Housing, 
insurance, installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. ( May not be used to fulfill 
the concentration requirement in finance.) 

320 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Financing business enterprises; financial planning and control; analy- 
sis of alternative sources and uses of combinations of short-, intermediate- and long-term debt 
and equity. Cost of capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget analysis and 
valuation; working capital and capital structure management; relative impact on the internation- 
al environment of financial decisions. 

331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Fund statement analysis; cash budgeting and pro forma financial state- 
ments; traditional versus modern financial statement analysis; break-even analysis; cash, 
marketable securities, inventory, and accounts receivable management models; short-term 
borrowing. 

332 Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Financial leverage; debt, common, and preferred stock financing; cost of 
capital and capital structure; leasing; dividend policy; mergers; failure and reorganizations; 
capital budgeting. 


Finance 147 


340 Security Investments (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 320 and Management Science 265, or consent of instructor. The analysis, 
selection and management of securities; characteristics of securities, valuation, trading methods, 
role of mutual funds and other institutions; computerized statement analysis and portfolio 
selection methods. 

351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Real estate principles, practices and Investment 
decisions. Equity investment, finance, legal aspects, practices, principles, property development, 
real estate administration in the public sector, real estate market analysis, valuation. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior status. Life, casualty and liability insurance, individual and group 
Insurance programs; methods of establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of Instructor. Financing problems of International business. The 
international financial environment, taxation of foreign income. International capital and money 
markets, problems of risk in foreign investments, and financial techniques for the operation of 
a multinational firm. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. The solution of financial institution problems. Major financial intermediar- 
ies and the decision-making problems they face. Regulation and its effect on management 
operations. Group problems and case studies. 

432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Forecasting in financial management; construction and interpretation of 
economic forecasts for the economy, industry, and the firm; construction and Interpretation of 
financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisition decisions under certainty and uncertainty 
conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 or 332. Case studies. Croup problems of estimating funds requirements, 
long-term financial planning, controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisitions 
and mergers, capital budgeting, and cost of capital. Croup problems and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Capital and money markets in the American economy; markets for new 
corporate and government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial institutions; 
factors influencing yields and security prices. 

442 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340 or consent of Instructor. Computer applications for statement analysis, 
valuation models, and portfolio selection and management models. Standard and Poor's "com- 
pustat tapes." A simulated portfolio management game at the end of the course. 

443 Portfolio Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340 and Management Science 361. Markowitz and Sharpe models; basic 
statistical, mathematical and economic concepts in portfolio theory; efficient capital markets; 
applications of portfolio theory to assets other than securities; portfolio revisions; survey of 
developments in the field; computer applications. 

450 Real Estate Investment Strategy (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 or consent of Instructor. Background discussion of investment risks, reasons 
for investing in real estate from the viewpoint of the individual investor. Preparation of personal 
real estate Investment portfolio and analytical methods for real estate investment evaluation. 

451 Real Estate/ Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real estate law. Cases provide illustrations of specific legal situations; 
financial institutions, property rights, zoning, land use law, and environmental impact require- 
ments. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Financial institutions and real estate credit. Sources and uses of capital 
(funds) in financing real estate transactions. Money and capital markets and their effect on 
credit availability. Instruments in real estate finance. Investment methods and decisions. Group 
problems and case studies. 


148 Finance 


453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real property value, historical evolution of valuation principles, ap- 
proaches in urban and real property appraisals, alternative methods and techniques for property 
valuation. 

454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 . Factors and influences of urban growth and development. Economic 
factors and real estate supply and demand. Location theory and urban growth patterns. Public 
policy as a factor In real estate development. Analysis of real estate markets. 

455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 . Alternative analytical techniques in evaluating real estate Investments. Tax 
aspects, measurement of Investment returns, application of computer models to Investment 
decisions. Lecture, discussion and case analysis of major investment types — raw land, apart- 
ment houses, commercial and industrial uses. 

456 Property Development and Real Estate Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351 . Decision making process In the property development process — from raw 
land to retail marketing of completed product. Policy formulation and Implementation, project 
feasibility analysis, financial analysis, computer assisted analysis; case studies. 

459 Real Estate Research: Selected Topics (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 351 and 452 or 453. Croup problems, laboratory work as determined by 
computer terminal availability. 

461 Business Risk Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of instructor. Techniques and structures of risk management; 
risk planning, control and financing In the business enterprise. 

462 Life and Health Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 360 or consent of instructor. Life and health insurance coverages, both individ- 
ual and group policies; the operation of insurance companies. Business and estate planning, 
pension plans, and government benefits. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 331 or 332, a major in finance, consent of department Internship adviser, junior 
standing, 2.5 CPA and one semester in residence at the university. Planned and supervised work 
experience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/ No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. Open to undergraduate students 
desiring to pursue directed Independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to 
students on academic probation. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified SBAE status. The methodology of financial management. 
The primary tools for financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, valuation and working 
capital management. International applications. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 and classified SBAE status. The analysis of the financial decision-making 
process through case studies and seminar presentations. Current financial theory and models. 
International applications. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified SBAE status. Optimal financing and asset administration; 
advanced techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the administra- 
tion of the finance function of the business firm. 

540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 440 or consent of instructor and classified SBAE status. Structure and operation 
of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and market behavior; 
analysis of financial Intermediation and interrelation of financial institutions and markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 340 or consent of instructor and classified SBAE status. Problems of investment 
and portfolio management; concepts of risk evaluation and Investment criteria; analysis of 
interest rate movements; investment valuation and timing; regulation and administrative prob- 
lems of the industry. 


Management 149 


551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 351 or consent of instructor and classified SBAE status. Problems of real estate 
investment; concepts of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. Case studies. 

570 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or consent of instructor and classified SBAE status. The financial problems 
of the multinational firm. International financing Instruments, capital investment decisions, and 
constraints on the profitability of multinational businesses. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed Independent inquiry. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


MANAGEMENT COURSES 

244 Introduction to Systems Concepts (3) 

The functions of goal-seeking organizations, basic systems concepts in business and society, and the 
systems approach to problem solving. 

245 Personal Law (3) 

The role of law as It affects the citizen in our society. Case studies relating to a person's role as a 
student, family member, owner of a vehicle, consumer, insured, homeowner, renter, saver. 
Investor, employee and estate planner. 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business and society. Functions of courts and attorneys, 
case studies in areas of contracts, and on the law relating to sale of goods. 

339 Managing Business Operations and Organizations (3) 

Prerequisites: all lower division business core courses or instructor's consent. Administrative proc- 
esses in utility-creating business operations: decision-making; planning; controlling; organizing; 
stafflng; supporting business information systems; measuring and Improving effectiveness; pro- 
duction processes, production operations and institutions in American and worldwide business. 
Uses the Production Lab. Includes taking the Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Profi- 
ciency (fee charged). 

340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: general education In social sciences, and a passing score on the Cal State Fullerton 
Examination In Writing Proficiency. Social and cultural environments of business. Business 
ethics. Communication, leadership, motivation, perception, personality development, group 
dynamics and group growth. Human behavior and organizational design and management 
practice in American and world-wide business. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Management Science 361 . Production systems which combine 
materials, labor, and capital resources to produce goods. Systems, models and methods for 
management of production operations. Product and process development. Utilization of com- 
puter decision models. Uses the Production Lab. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339 or consent of Instructor. The personnel function, its activities, and its 
opportunities. Management's responsibilities for selection, development and effective utiliza- 
tion of personnel. Open to non-business majors. 

Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, Institutions and role of law In business 
relationships. Business ethics. Case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, corporations, bank- 
ruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

^ Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philosophy, institutions and role of law in commer- 
cial and personal transactions: case studies in personal property, bailments, commercial paper, 
secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, community property, wills, estate admin- 
istration and insurance. 


150 Management 


400 Regulatory Law of Business (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 246, Economics 310. Philosophy, institutions and role of law as it regu- 
lates business. Courts, administrative agencies, cases studies relating to securihes, antitrust, 
consumer protection, employment, environment and managerial social responsibility. 

431 Women in Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. (For men and women.) Increasing participation in the management 
of organizations. Employment and earnings, affirmative action, understanding male-female and 
female-female work relationships, dual careers, and learning how to increase one's effectiveness 
in organizations. 

440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or consent of instructor. For upper-division and graduate 
students. Business and management in America. The interrelationships of technological, eco- 
nomic, political and social forces with the business enterprises and their ethical obligations to 
owners, employees, consumers and society at large. Open to non-business majors. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339. Impact of labor-management relations upon labor, management, and 
the public. Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining and settlement of disputes. Uses 
the Behavioral Lab. 

442 Advanced Labor Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 441. Effects of federal and state legislation on union and nonunion 
environments in both private and public sectors. Practicum in collective bargaining procedures. 
Case studies. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

443 Individual, Interpersonal and Group Dynamics for Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 or consent of instructor. Case studies and current literature on 

human problems of work situations. Developing self-knowledge; manager motivation; com- 
municator strengths; Improving interaction skills; and improving interaction processes in groups. 
Uses the Behavioral Lab. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

444 Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management and Management Science core and other 300 level management courses 
in student's concentration. Technology for managing business and other enterprises as cyber- 
netic systems. The design and control of systems appropriate for product, project and program 
levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours laboratory) Uses Production Lab. 

445 Advanced Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and Management Science core. Planning and control methodologies 
for production operations. (Quantitative approaches which integrate cost, schedule and techni- 
cal performarKe criteria. Collection, evaluation and use of real-time information. Individual and 
group projects. Uses the Production Lab. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science core. Economics 310 and Management 339. Management tools 
ap>plied. EcofXMnics and statistics in decision-making process; use of cases and group problems; 
cost, dennand, supply, price, product and competition. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Management 449, or consent of instructor. A simula- 
tion of an oligopolistic irniustry. Statistics and other analytical tools to make managerial deci- 
sions in management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, Management 339, Marketing 351, and senior standing. A seminar. 
Planning and working in a consulting relationship with small local businesses. Lectures, research 
and field work. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours fieldwork) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration and Economics core courses and depart- 
nwntal approval. Integrative cases from top management viewpoint. Administrative processes, 
ethical-legal-economic implications of business decisions, international applications; organiza- 
tion theory, and policy formulation. Individual and team efforts. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

494 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: 30(>-level business core courses, 300-level requirements for concentration in manage- 
ment information systems and Management 444. Senior seminar and applications In the design, 
implementation and use of management decision /Information systems. 


Management Science 151 


495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division management courses, including Management 339, major in 
management, consent of department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA 
and one semester in residence at the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May 
be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/ No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by faculty sponsor and 
department chair of proposed statement of work. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Accounting 510, Economics 514 and Management Science 512. 
Modern organization theory and application in utility-creating operations. Interpersonal behav- 
ior, planning, control, organizing, directing, communication, production and information sys- 
tems, and measures of effectiveness. International applications. Business ethics and relationships 
to society and politics. Graduate discussion and research reports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and Accounting 510. Philosophy, Institutions and role of law In 
business. Legal Implications Inherent in business decisions. Business ethics. Case studies in areas 
of contracts, sale of goods, agency, partnerships and corporations. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518 or equivalent. Human behavior in 
organization, studies in organizational theories, and administrative action. 

542 Seminar in Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518. A seminar that focuses on various 
aspects of the labor management relationship, issues in collective bargaining, the laws governing 
the relationship, contract administration, grievance handling, dispute settlement and arbitration. 
Negotiation simulation and case analyses. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Cases, problems, and 
significant personnel administration literature In personnel administration and human relations. 

547 Comparative Management (3) 

Management practices and processes In five geographical areas; market-structures and management 
characteristics different from those in the United States. Constraints which vary between coun- 
tries because of cultural, legal, economic, and/or political differences. 

548 Seminar in International Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Problems in manageri- 
al qualifications and training, political structure within and without the operations, foreign 
receptivity to United States business, organizing and controlling the international firm. Manage- 
ment In selected countries. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent project. Student will select and have 
approved a project proposal, conduct the project, and prepare a formal analysis and report. 
Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and consent of department chair. May be 
repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


management science courses 

263 Introduction to Information Systems (1) 

Concepts on data and information; modern digital computer and its peripheral equipment; software 
and problem-solving concepts; various computer information systems; examples of business 
applications. Students may not receive credit for both Management Science 263 and 265. 


152 Management Science 

264 Introduction to Computer Progrjimming (2) 

Problem-oriented languages of computers. Using computer programming. May be rep)eated for 
credit for each separate computer language (with departmental approval). 

265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer Programming (3) 

Introduction to information systems; computer organization and problem-solving concepts; com- 
puter programming in the BASIC language, Including file processing; applications to business 
data processing. 

270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 264 or 265 or Computer Science 1 12 or equivalent. Fundamentals 
of structured COBOL; multiple-level table handling, subscripting and indexing; file organization 
documentation; testing and debugging projects in COBOL. (Same as Computer Science 270) 

289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

The history and application of digital computers to problems in the social sciences. Student-written 
programs in a problem-oriented computer language. Computers; law and society; artificial 
Intelligence; and other topics. 

300 Elements of Information System Design and Data Communication (3) 

Prerequisite. Management Science 270. Search, sort; tape and disk; record format layouts, storage 
capacity, I/O timings; indexed sequential and direct files; database and data structure; data 
communications: analog and digital data, coding structure, transmission mode and media, 
telecommunication hardware; COBOL illustrations and project. 

310 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270 or consent of the instructor. Advanced COBOL features: 
Indexed and direct file processing, report writer, sort feature, declarative and linkage sections, 
segmentation. Overlay structure, survey of job control language, libraries. Direct access. Hard- 
ware devices. 

361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135 and Management Science 265 or equivalents. Probability concepts; expecta- 
tions; descriptive statistics; discrete and continuous random variables; sampling; estimation; 
hypothesis testing; simple and multiple regression; time series; forecasting; nonparametric statis- 
tics. 

362 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 (may be taken concurrently). Mathematical methods and 
their application to business and economic problems, e.g., production control, scheduling, 
inventory control, PERT, decision and network analyses, simulation and queueing. Elementary 
mathematical optimization and production models. 

363 Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Managecnent Science 361 or both Math 335 and Computer Science 1 1 2. The basic 
concepts of management science and its relationship to economics and decision theory. Optim- 
ization in continuous models, linear programming, queueing and inventory models, network 
analysis and dynamic programming, and production scheduling and control. 

404 Analysis of Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300 or equivalent. Software feasibility studies; information proc- 
essing systems; data processing project organization; cost effectiveness and system optimiza- 
tion, hardware/software selection; structured systems design; case studies and computer 
projects. 

408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 3(X) or equivalent. Integrated data base systems; logical organiza- 
tion; data description language (DDL); data manipulation language (DML); data independ- 
ence; relational data bases; comparative analysis of hierarchical, network, and relational data 
bases; overview of selected data base management systems (DBMS). 

409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 3(X). Hardware and software developments in transmission tech- 
nology; distributed data bases; network architectures; ISO layered models; interface problems; 
distributed network design and cost analysis; network topology and protocols, tradeoffs among 
distributed and centralized processing systems, interface problems and case studies. 


Management Science 153 


411 Data Processing with Small Computers (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 300. Small computer technology in data processing; selecting 
and designing business oriented small computer systems; implementing, maintaining, supporting 
and evaluating these systems. 

416. Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 416) 

418 Privacy, Security and Data Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300. Security and privacy problems associated with the use of 
computer systems; ways to minimize risks and losses. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 or Math 230. Statistical methods applied to problems in 
business and industry; practical multiple regression models with computer solutions; basic 
techniques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal components; correlation of 
time-series and forecasting with the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 or Math 230. Principles for designing business and economic 
surveys. Applications in accounting, marketing research, economic statistics and the social 
sciences. Sampling: simple random, stratified and multistage design; construction of sampling 
frames; detecting and controlling non-sampling errors. 

430 Nonparametric Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 or Math 230. Nonparametric statistical methods and prob- 
lems in business and economics. Sign tests, rank correlation, contingency tables, order statistics, 
runs. 

448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 264 (or equivalent) and either Management Science 361 or 
Math 435 or Engineering 423. Computer generation of discrete and continuous random varia- 
bles, their use in computer simulation. Applications include queueing, communications, com- 
puter systems, economics, gaming, inventory, scheduling and other management science 
topics. 

461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: both Math 1 SOB and Management Science 361 (or Math 335 or Engineering 423). The 
theory and application of the topics covered in Management Science 361, using calculus. 
Moments, generating functions, point and interval estimation, Neyman-Pearson and Likelihood 
Ratio Hypothesis Tests. 

465 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 362 or 363, or both Math 281 (or 291 ) iJ/7c/ Computer Science 
112 (or equivalent). Theory and applications of linear programming and extensions. Problem 
formulation and solution, simplex method, duality, sensitivity analyses, network, transportation 
and assignment models, and efficient computing techniques for specially structured problems. 

^ Mathematical Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 465 (may be taken concurrently) or consent of instructor. 
Nonlinear, integer and dynamic programming. Unconstrained and constrained non-linear op- 
timization, branch and bound techniques, cutting plane algorithms, and dynamic programming. 

^7 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 or Math 230. Control charts for variables, percent defective, 
and defects. Tolerances, process capacity, special control charts, acceptance sampling, and 
batch processing problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

^ Design of Experiments (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 or Engineering 205 and Math 230. Experimental design. 
Analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested designs, confounding and factorial replica- 
tions. 

^75 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 461 or equivalent. The least squares principle; estimation and 
hypothesis testing in linear regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; discriminant 
analysis; principal components analysis; application of multivariate analysis in business and 
industry. 


154 Management Science 

480 Inventory and Production Analysis in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite; Management Science 361 and either 362 or 363. Inventory and production models 
(deterministic and probablistic). Optimal policy forms and efficient computational methods. 
The specification and control of standards in equipment, jobs, products, and processes. 

490 Queueing and Other Probability Models in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 362 (or 363 ) ar7c/ 361 . Single and multichannel queueing systems 
of Markovian and general arrival and departure streams; birth-death processes, cost models and 
optimization of queues; Markov analyses; Introduction to renewal theory; reliability. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, (or 363) and major in management science, or 
Management Science 300 and major in Management Information Systems, consent of depart- 
ment internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester In residence 
at the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to 
a total of six units. Credit/ No Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and either 362 or 363, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chair. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. 
May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

512 Management Science Techniques for Business and Economics, A (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 130 and Management Science 264 (or equivalents), classified SBAE status. 

Probability and decision analysis; linear programming; inventory; PERT/CPM; queueing; simula- 
tion, computer application and other optional topics. 

513 Management Science Techniques for Business and Economics, B (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 512 or equivalent and classified SBAE status. Descriptive statis- 
tics; sampling techniques; estimation and hypothesis testing; simple and multiple regression; 
correlation analysis; non-parametric statistics; forecasting; time series; analysis of variance; 
computer packages and other optional topics. 

526 Decision Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and classified SBAE status. Techniques from probability, 
statistical decision theory, and computer simulation applied to problems of decisionmaking 
under uncertainty, applications related to managerial decisions. 

560 Operations Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 or equivalent and classified SBAE status. Optimization of 
discrete and continuous models, duality, sensitivity analysis, dynamic and mathematical pro- 
gramming, probablistic models such as queueing, scheduling and inventory models, Markov 
analysis; computer applications. 

565 File Management and Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 300 or consent of instructor. Real-time computer-based informa- 
tion systems in industry and government. 

570 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites; Management Science 526 and 560 and classified SBAE status. Selected advanced 
topics and/or case studies in operations research, statistics, and/or management information 
systems, varying from semester to semester. May be repeated for credit with consent of 
instructor. 

576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513 or equivalent. Theory and application of modeling and 
simulation methodology. Probabilistic concepts in simulation; arrival pattern and service times; 
simulation languages and programming techniques; analysis of output; business applications. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inquiry. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 
Not open to students on academic probation. 


Marketing 155 


MARKETING COURSES 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200. How management markets output of the enterprise and obtains reve- 
nue. Product management, pricing, promotion, distribution channels. Marketing's role in socio- 
economic system from viewpoints of consumer, management, social responsibility and 
government in American and worldwide business. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Structure, scope, and evolution of retail institutions; retail merchandise 
management and pricing; dimensions of retail competition: identifying markets, defining the 
retail mix and positioning the mix components to convey meaning. 

353 Marketing Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Problems facing the marketing executive, including organization, plan- 
ning, and forecasting, market analysis, budgeting, product policy, pricing, advertising and sales 
promotion, administration of the sales force. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function; the role of advertising in 
marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, allocation among media, measurement of effec- 
tiveness, administration and control, and its economic and social implications. Uses the Behav- 
ioral Lab. 

356 Professional Selling (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . Salesmanship as an interpersonal influence process. Selling using princi- 
ples of human behavior. Selling skills and techniques. Uses the behavioral lab. 

358 Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Management Science 265. The physical distribution system and its 
elements — packaging, transportation, warehousing and inventory management. Physical distri- 
bution practices and problems leading to improved system design and effectiveness. 

359 Industrial Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Marketing of business goods and services to other businesses, govern- 
ment agencies, and social Institutions by the manufacturer. Market analysis, sales forecasting, 
product strategy, effective use of sales force, and industrial advertising media. 

370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consumer buying patterns, motivation and search behavior. The con- 
sumer decision-making process. Interdisciplinary concepts from economics, sociology, psy- 
chology, cultural anthropology and mass communications. Case analyses and research projects. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and Management Science 361 and a passing score on the Statistics 
Proficiency Examination (administered by the Marketing Department). Marketing research 
process: problem formulation, identifying data sources, selecting data collection and analysis 
techniques, preparing research reports. Selecting marketing problems for research. Lecture- 
discussion, cases. (3 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

452 Advanced Salesmanship (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 356. Negotiation style selling techniques; videotape, audio-tape, 
structured and unstructured role plays. Sales writing skills. Field case studies. 

454 Advertising Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 354. The interrelationships of product planning, advertising management, 
sales management, financial management and corporate strategy in a competitive environment. 

455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . The sales manager in organization; recruiting and selecting salesmen; 
sales training; formulating compensation and expense plans; supervising and stimulating sales 
activities; morale; sales planning; evaluating salesmen; and distribution cost analysis. Uses the 
Behavioral Lab. 

456 Retailing Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 352. Merchandise management, planning and control; market structures, 
entrepreneurial function and competitive strategies (price and non-price competition); the 
dynamic consumer goods segment and correlates of store patronage: socioeconomic Implica- 
tions, psychographics, changing life styles, and product risk; atmospherics fashion perspectives; 
and trends in the retail sector — a macroeconomic view. 


156 Marketing 


457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, Management Science 361 or consent of instructor. Marketing-manage- 
ment functions; scheduling, evaluating, control. The analysis of marketing processes and sys- 
tems and the development of appropriate action recommendations. 

458 International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and senior standing. Domestic marketing systems. Marketing problems 
across national boundaries and within national markets. U.S. firms involved in international 
marketing operations. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing, two advanced marketing courses. Marketing problems of firm and 
society. Integrative interactions between marketing activities and the interfaces of marketing 
with finance and production. Case method and current readings. 

479 Research Problems in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 379. Marketing research practicum. Matching research methodologies to 
problems of market analysis, product planning, advertising, sales forecasting and other market- 
ing activities. Alternative data collection and analysis techniques. Seminars, research projects. 
(3 hours lecture, 1 hour activity) 

495 Internship (1-3 units) 

Prerequisites: six units of upp>er division marketing courses, including Marketing 351, major in 
marketing, consent of department internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 CPA and 
one semester in residence at the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/ No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department chair. Open 
to undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 514, Management Science 512, 513, Management 516, 518 
(may be taken concurrently) and classified SBAE status. Concepts, principles and techniques 
used in the administration of the marketing variables. The role of marketing within the context 
of society and the business firm, social responsibility of business and international marketing. 

525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified SBAE status. Major marketing problems facing industry: 
definition of and organization for marketing task; demand analysis; decisions concerning prod- 
uct, price, promotion, and trade channels. Use of case method and readings. 

554 Seminar in Promotion (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified SBAE status. The promotion mix as employed by busi- 
nesses to optimize profitable operations. Determination of promotional goals, planning, budget- 
ing, controlling promotional programs, and measuring promotional effectiveness. 

558 Seminar in Interrwitional Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent and classified SBAE status. Comparative international 
marketing systems; managerial techniques and strategies In multinational and domestic firms 
engaged In expert; and the impact of political, legal, social, economic and cultural forces upon 
the decision-making process. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inquiry. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. Mav 
be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 



HUMAN 
DEVHOPMENT 
AND COMMUNITY 

SERVICE 


158 


SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 
AND COMMUNITY SERVICE 

Dean; Peter Facione 
Associate Dean: Judith Ramirez 


The curricular mission of the School of Human Development and Community Service is to provide 
students sound and relevant academic education and preparation for a wide range of professional 
fields whose common purpose is to serve individual and community needs. The school offers 
programs which combine theoretical understandings with practical skills and which emphasize both 
scholarly and professional perspectives. Programs in the school lead to traditional academic degrees 
at the baccalaureate and graduate levels as well as to a variety of specific certificates, credentials 
and licenses authorizing graduates to practice as trained, scholarly professionals. 

The School of Human Development and Community Service is organized Into the following instruc- 
tional units: the Child Development Program; the Department of Counseling; the Department of 
Educational Administration; the Department of Health Education, Physical Education and Recrea- 
tion; the Human Services Program; the Department of Nursing; the Department of Reading; the 
Department of Special Education; and the Division of Teacher Education. 

In addition to these instnjctional units, the school also includes the University Recreation Program 
(Ronald Andris, Director; and Michael Uraine, Associate Director). 

RESEARCH PROGRAMS IN EDUCA TION 

510 Research Design and Aruilysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Graduate standing. Elements of design, instrumentation, treatment of data, hypothwls 
testing and inference and analysis of educational data. Develop a research proposal. Analyzing 
and evaluating research reports. 

CHILD DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM 

Carol Barnes 

Acting Coordinator 

The B.S. in Child Development Is a joint degree program in which faculty in the departments of 
Anthropology, Biology, English, Ethnic Studies, Nursing, Psychology and Sociology and the Division 
of Teacher Education cooperate and combine their expertise. 

This degree Is designed for students interested in child /youth related professions. The objective of 
the program is to expand the degree candidate's understanding of human growth and development 
and ability to work effectively with young people. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHILD DEVELOPMENT 

The major in child development requires the successful completion of a minimum of 50 upper- 
division units which satisfy the pattern Indicated below. Through appropriate selection of elective 
courses by the student and adviser a program is designed to enhance the student's background and 
interests and to form a coherent academic experience. Students are strongly encouraged to enroll 
In upper-division courses In public speaking and are required to demonstrate upper-division writing 
competence. Each course counted for the major must be completed with a grade of C or higher. 
Many upper-division courses require prerequisites. It is the student's responsibility to become 
familiar with all appropriate campus regulations and degree requirements. 

Required (Either of the following): 

Child Development 312, Human Growth and Development (Same as Ed-TE 312) (3) 

Psychology 361, Developmental Psychology (3) 

Required (Minimum of 6 units selected from the following): 

Child Development 385, Infancy and Early Childhood (Same as Ed-TE 385) (3) 

Child Development 390, Middle Childhood (Same as Ed-TE 390) (3) 

Child Development 386, Adolescence (Same as Ed-TE 386) (3) 

Required (Each of the following courses — minimum of 20 units): 

Biological Science 314, Ethics and Genetics (1) 


159 


Biological Science 360, Biology of Human Sexuality (1) 

Child Development 391, Practicum In Child Development (3) or 
Education TE 310, The Teaching Experience: Participation (3) or 
Sociology 400, Sociology Internships (1) or 
Psychology 495, Internship In Psychology (3) 

Child Development 4%, Senior Seminar in Child Development (3) 

Special Education 371, Exceptional Individual (3) 

Psychology 463, Experimental Child Psychology (3) 

Sociology 453, Child In American Society (3) 

English 301, Advanced College Writing (meets course work portion of upper-division writing 
requirement (3) 

Required (Minimum of 6 units selected from the following): 

Afro-ethnic Studies 309, Black Family (3) 

Anthropology 415, Culture and Personality: Psychological Anthropology (3) 

Chicano Studies 431, Chicano Child (3) 

Criminal Justice 330, Crime and Delinquency (3) 

Sociology 413, Juvenile Delinquency (3) 

Sociology 451, Sociology of the Family (3) 

Required (Minimum of 9 units — select from the following): 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 422, Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

American Studies 301, The American Character (3) 

Anthropology 450, Culture and Education (3) 

Art 380, Art and Child Development (3) 

Biological Science 313, Human Genetics (3) 

Chicano Studies 305, The Chicano Family (3) 

Criminal Justice 425, Juvenile Justice Administration (3) 

Education-TE 406, Educational Sociology (3) 

Education-TE 437, Early Childhood Education (3) 

English 433, Children's Literature (3) 

Mathematics 303 A, Fundamental Concepts of Elementary Mathematics (3) 

Music 333, Music and Child Development (3) 

Psychology 311, Educational Psychology (3) 

Psychology 470, Behavior Modification (3) 

Physical Education 372, Movement and the Child (3) 

Science Education 310, Elementary Experimental Science (3) 

Sociology 341, Social Interaction (3) 

Speech Communication 403, Speech /Language Development (3) 

Theatre 402 A, Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Theatre 471, Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Required b units of electives selected with approval of adviser. Units must be upper division, unless 
prior approval of program coordinator is obtained. Electives must be for a letter grade unless course 
is offered only on a credit /no credit basis. 

Note: No more than nine units of practicum/Internship shall be applied to the child development 
major. In addition the student shall not be granted credit in the major for more than six units 
in any one practicum /internship. Each three units of practicum/Internship must average at least 
eight hours per week In the field setting. All practicum/ Internships must have the prior approval 
of the child development coordinator or designee. 

multiple subject credential waiver program 

A carefully selected sequence of courses taken in conjunction with the child development major 
has been approved by the State of California as a waiver for the Commons portion of the National 
l^eachers' Examination. Or7e requirement for a Multiple Subjects (Elementary) Teaching Credential 
IS completion of a waiver program or passing scores on the (NTE) Commons Examination. Contact 
^he Credential Preparation Center for further information. 


160 Counseling 


CHILD DEVELOPMENT COURSES 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 312) 

385 Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 385) 

386 Adolescence (3) 

(Same as Ed-TE 386) 

390 Middle Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: Psychology 361 or Ed-TE 312, or equivalent. Physical growth, personality development 
and social participation during middle childhood. Patterns of cognitive growth and emotional 
adjustment. (Same as Ed-TE 390) 

391 Practicum in Child Development (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of Child Development /Ed-TE 312 or Psychology 361. Supervised experi- 
ence with children or adolescents in community settings. Seminar and field placement. Nine 
units maximum for the major. Six units maximum credit In any one practicum. At least eight 
hours/week in the field required for each three units. 

4% Senior Seminar in Child Development (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of Child Development/ Ed-TE 312 or Psychology 361 and two of the 
following: Ed-TE /Child Development 385, Ed-TE /Child Development 386 or Child Develop- 
ment 390. Topics In child development selected by the faculty and students participating in 
course. Theory, methodology and findings. 

DEPARTMENT OF COUNSELING 

FACULTY 
Michael Parker 
Department Chair 

Keith Golay, Patricia Hannigan, Lisa Hoshmand 
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COUNSELING 
See "'Graduate Programs." 

The counseling program is designed to equip graduates with counseling skills which will make them 
highly effective practitioners in enforcement, correctional, educational and health care Institutions. 
The program has a competency base. Degrees, certificates and credentials are granted when the 
candidate has demonstrated a sufficient repertoire at sufficient proficiency, each competency sepa- 
rately observed and certified by faculty (though credits are given by courses). 

CREDENTIALS 
Counseling Credential 

Employment as a counselor or psychologist by a school district requires a credential issued by the 
State Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. The university's counseling program Is 
authorized by law (Ryan Act) to offer these credentials. Prerequisites for the counseling credential 
objective are: 

1. Possession of the M.S. in Counseling or its equivalent; 

2. 4 level ratings in all competencies listed for the M.S. degree and the Pupil Personnel Services 
Credential. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test (if not previously taken). 

Upon applying for and receiving the credential objective the student becomes eligible for supervised 
fieldwork (Counseling 581 and 582). Upon satisfactory completion of two semesters of fieldwork, 
together with advanced courses, the student is eligible for the counselor credential. 

Counseling Credential Courses 

The Counseling Department has credential programs in pupil personnel services (school counseling) 
and school psychology approved by the California Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licens- 
ing (CTPL). Because the state requirements are currently being revised, students are advised to 
consult with a faculty adviser for current information and requirements. 

Students seeking California Marriage and Family Licensure should contact the Board of Behavioral 
Science Examiners for the requirements and consult their department adviser concerning the curricu- 
lar content areas that meet BBSE requirements. 


Counseling 161 


COUNSELING COURSES 

252 Career Exploration and Life Planning (3) 

Exploration of personal career potentials, employment trends, decision-making, goal-setting, and job 
search methods. 

316 Group Process and Membership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Survey of the variety of counseling group experiences. 

317 Special Group Experiences (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theory of groups. 

380 Theories and Techniques of Counseling (3) 

(Same as Human Services 380) 

452 Exploration in Self Concepts: Temperament and Character (3) 

Temperament and its relationship to career, marriage and parenting. 

480 Case Analysis and Intervention Techniques (3) 

(Same as Human Services 480) 

490 Standard Counseling Models (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor. Analysis of the standard counseling 
models including their procedures, outcomes, rationale and ostensible utility in treating abnor- 
mal or deviant behavior. 

511 Counseling Casework (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. in Counseling program and consent of instructor. Introduction to 
intervention methods. 

512 Counseling Procedures (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 51 1 and consent of instructor. More advanced intervention methods. May 
be rep>eated for credit. 

513 Counseling Procedures Assessment Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 511, 512, 531, 521 (or concurrent) and consent of instructor. Standard 
treatment models. 

514 Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 513 (or concurrent) and consent of Instructor. Croup treatment usable 
with unrelated groups in educational, enforcement, correctional and health care agencies. May 
be repeated for credit. 

515 Paradox Counseling Procedures (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 513, 514 and instructor consent. The double bind methods of Milton 
Erickson and the paradoxical uses of standard treatment methods. 

516 Conjoint Counseling Procedures (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 514 and consent of instructor. Applications of the Interdiction Model of 
Milton Erickson and jay Haley and others to related groups. May be repeated for credit. 

521 Research in Counseling (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. in Counseling program or consent of instructor. Methods of con- 
trolled inquiry in counseling. 

522 Detection Procedure: Formal Experiments (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 521 and consent of Instructor. The phenomenology of test. Inventory, and 
interview methods and their reporting. Must be taken concurrently or prior to fieldwork or 
internship. May be repeated for credit. 

523 Detection Procedure: Ability Tests (3) 

Prerequisites: Admission to school psychology credential program and consent of Instructor. Ap- 
plications of Stanford-Binet and Wechsler exp)eriments In the detection of client resources and 
disturbances of thought and mood. May be repeated for credit. 

524. Detection Procedure: Projective Tests (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to the school psychology credential program and consent of Instructor. 
Application of "'T.A.T.," "Family Drawings," "Draw-A-Man," "House-Tree-Person," Bender- 
Gestalt, and Sentence Completion experiments in detecting client resources and disturbances 
of mood and thought. May be repeated for credit. 

525 Personality Study: Advanced Issues (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 523, 524, and consent of instructor. Application of metric and projective 
detection theory to the understanding of mentation and personality and their application in 
school settings. 

6—76604 


162 Counseling 

531 Pathology: Comparative Etiology (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. in Counseling program or consent of instructor. The spectrum of 
abnormal behaviors and experiences of clients of varying age, sex, culture and ethnicity. May 
be repeated for credit. 

532 Child and Family Dysfunction (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 521 and 531 and consent of instructor. The management of guidance 
programs in child maldevelopment, family and school dysfunctions, including child welfare 
laws. May be repeated for credit. 

533 Career and Occupational Guidance (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 532 and consent of instructor. Consultation with Individuals and organiza- 
tions to prevent mismatch of individuals and their opportunities, and mismatch of organization 
means and goals. Special focus upon institutional iatrogenics. Career guidance background 
recommended. May be repeated for credit. 

534 Sexual Dysfunction (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 532 and consent of instructor. Phenomenology, nosology, demography, 
etiology, prognostics, treatment strategies, and bibliography of sexual disturbance. May be 
repeated for credit. 

535 Pathology: Disorders of Thought and Language (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 532 and consent of instructor. Phenomenology, etiology, demography, and 
bibliography of ''catatonic," "hebephrenic," "epileptic," "paranoid," "obsessive," "compul- 
sive," "phobic," and "aphasic" clients. May be repeated for credit. 

536 Pathology: Affective and Psychosomatic Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 532 and consent of instructor. Phenomenology, etiology, demography, and 
bibliography of "addicts," "defilers," "deprivers," "derelicts," "hypochondriacs," "neuras- 
thenics," "anxieties," and "melancholics." May be repeated for credit. 

581 Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: approval by Academic Review Board and admission to counseling credential program. 
Supervised practice in helping troubled clients in a public school setting. A weekly casework 
consultation seminar. Required for counseling credential. May be rejjeated for credit. 

582 Advanced Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: successful completion of Counseling 581 and approval by the Academic Review 
Board. Supervised practice in helping troubled clients in educational, and related settings. 
Weekly casework consultation seminar. Required for counseling credential. May be repeated 
for credit. 

583 Internship in School Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 51 5, 523, admission to school psychology credential program and approval 
by Academic Review Board. Supervised practice in helping troubled clients in a public school 
setting. Weekly casework consultation seminar Required for school psychology credential. 
May be repeated for credit. 

584 Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: Counseling 516, and approval by Academic Review Board. Supervised practice in 
helping troubled clients in educational, enforcement, correctional, and/or health care agencies. 
Weekly casework consultation seminar. May be repeated for credit. 

595 Competency Certification Seminar (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval by Academic Review Board. Candidates present written, live, videotape, or 
audiotape samples to the Board of Professional Supervisors, to acquire exit skill ratings on the 
competencies required. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Student invents and devises a tool, instrument, or technique and 
reports. May be repeated for credit. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Writing of a thesis. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research and development in counseling pursued independently 
with periodic conference with instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


Educational Administration 163 


DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION 

FACULTY 
Kenneth Preble 
Department Chair 

Edward Beaubier, Walter Beckman, William Callison, Tracy Caffey, Stanley Rothstein 
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
See "Graduate Programs." 

INTERNSHIP IN EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION 

The Department of Educational Administration has a program for Interns in Educational Administra- 
tion which is approved by the California Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. Be- 
cause state regulations governing this program were under review at the time of this publication, 
students should contact the department office for current Information and requirements. 

ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

The Administrative Services Credential program of the Department of Educational Administration 
is approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. Because state regulations 
governing this program were under review at the time of this publication, students should contact 
the department office for current Information and requirements. 


EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Cultures and values to which schools must contribute. Commu- 
nity sociology, tax systems and public administration; the literature of leadership. Screening for 
admission to program. Required of ail students during their first registration in school administra- 
tion. 

505 The Supervision of Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed Adm 566 or 586. Development of a quality program of instruction in elementary and 
secondary schools; appraisal of programs of Instruction; advanced principles of curricular 
review and modification. Evaluation of subject matter competence in supervisory specialization. 

560 Contemporary Problems in School Administration (3) 

Contemporary problems In school organization and administration Including collective bargaining, 
finance, staff and school integration, declining enrollment, pupil achievement and affirmative 
action. 

561 Governance, Systems, School and Community (3) 

Structure, functions, trends, fiscal responsibilities and issues In the government of education at 
federal, state, county and local school district levels. School organization and administration. 
Community involvement; school-community participation and communication. 

563 School Personnel Administration (2) 

Prerequisite: Ed Adm 503 or concurrent enrollment. School personnel management, collective 
negotiations, and role definition. 

564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy. California Education 
Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, and county counsel opinions: administra- 
tion, instruction, and financial management of public schools, legal basis for public education 
in California. 

565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration and Buildings (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School finance, business administration and buildings and the 

effective educational program. Financial principles. School revenues and expenditures, budget- 
ary procedures and processes, cost analysis, business management and salary policies. 

566 Elementary Administration and Supervision (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed Adm 561 and 563. Leadership roles of elementary school principal and supervisor. 
Pupil personnel and instructional program in elementary school; working relations and morale 
among staff, community and pupils; parent education; relations with central district staff; man- 
agement and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 


164 Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 

567 A, B Fieldwork and Project (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Ed Adm 566 or 586 and 510. Fieldwork and project or thesis, as required for Master's 
degree. Directed fieldwork In administrative areas in school systems. Supervised Master's 
Project or Thesis required in problem or area approved by the instructor. (May be repeated 
for credit.) 

586 Secondary Administration and Supervision (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed Adm 561 and 563. Leadership roles of the secondary school principal and supervi- 
sor, pupil personnel and instructional program In secondary schools; development and adminis- 
tration of vocational education; morale among staff, community and pupils; relations with 
central district staff; management functions; teacher evaluation. 

588 Organization Theory and Management (3) 

Public school management; planning and practice in task analysis; planning and practice in setting 
of goals and objectives; implementation of plans related to goals; management tools; social, 
political and economic forces affecting education; decision making. 

593 Administration of Mainstreaming (2) 

The role of the administrator in providing educational programs for exceptional pupils In environ- 
ments that maximize contact with non-exceptlonal pupils. Emphasis will be placed on the 
implementation of the legislative mandates of Public Law 94-142, the Education for All Hand- 
icapped Children Act, and Assembly Bill 1250. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Independent inquiry for qualified students. 

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH EDUCATION, 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION 

FACULTY 
Eula Stovall 
Department Chair 

Gene Adams, C. Ian Bailey, Jean Barrett, Anne Marie Bird, M. William Fulton, Eric Hanauer, 
Alexander Omalev, Paul Pastor, Kenneth Ravizza, Roberta Rikli, Diane Ross, Virginia Scheel, 
Carol Weinmann, Ronald Witchey, Michael Yessis 
The primary mission of the department is to advance and disseminate knowledges created through 
the study of human movement, of leisure needs and interests, and of total health which includes 
physical, mental, social and emotional dimensions. The secondary mission focuses on: ( 1 ) develop- 
ment of knowledges and skills essential for entry into a variety of occupations, (2) development of 
opportunities for participation in internships or cooperative education work experiences related to 
academic study, and (3) development of attitudes and behaviors appropriate for promotion and 
maintenance of personal and environmental health. 

The study of human movement encompasses the mechanisms which influence and are significant 
to participation. These include philosophical, historical, sociological, psychological and biological 
factors. Environmental determinants, including the social context and movement structures In which 
activity occurs are considered. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

See "Graduate Programs." 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The Department of Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation offers the Bachelor of 
Science in Physical Education for students preparing to teach, to pursue graduate work in physical 
education and for careers in business, industry and government service. The degree consists of 1 24 
units with a maximum of 1 2 lower-di vision units and a minimum of 33 upper-division units in physical 
education. Each course counted toward the major must be completed with a grade of C or higher. 
All courses counted toward the major must be taken on an option 1 (letter grade) basis. 
Transfer students must request transcripts of records of all previous scholastic work from each 
university or college attended. These transcripts are in addition to those required for admission to 
the university and must be sent by the issuing institution directly to the chair. Department of Health 
Education, Physical Education and Recreation. 

All transfer students must have transcripts evaluated by the department undergraduate adviser prior 
to registration. 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 165 


MAJOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 
Lower Division (Maximum of 12 units) 

Required Courses: 

PE 260 Movement Anatomy 3 units (General human anatomy courses do not meet this require- 
ment. However, such courses are highly recommended.) 

A minimum of six courses, one from each of the following areas: 

Fitness: PE 100, Physical Conditioning; 102, Jogging; 120, Gymnastics; 144, Exercise Weight Con- 
trol; 146 Body Building; 147 Olympic Power Lifting. 

Aquatics: PE 1 10, Swimming; 111, Life Saving; 112, Water Polo; 114, Skin Diving; 116, Springboard 
Diving; 214, Basic Scuba. 

Combatives: PE 150, Wrestling; 151, Aikido; 152, Karate; 154, Self-Defense; 155, Fencing. 
Individual Sports: PE 104, Horseback Riding; 105, Cycling; 106, Skiing; 107, Ice Figure Skating; 108, 
Roller Skating; 117, Bowling; 118, Archery; 119, Golf; 122, Sailing; 125, Rock Climbing; 246A, Basic 
Hatha Yoga. 

Court/ Racquet Sports: PE 130, Badminton; 131, Tennis; 132, Racquetball; 133, Handball. 

Team Sports: PE 160, Baseball; 161, Softball; 164, Volleyball; 165, Soccer; 166, Team Handball; 
167, Basketball. 

(Intercollegiate sports course may be applied in the appropriate area.) 

A maximum of 12 lower-division units may be counted toward completion of the major. However, 
students may elect to take upper-division work in lieu of further lower-division work excluding 
requirements stated above. All work taken at other institutions as lower-division work must be 
counted as such at Cal State Fullerton. 

Upper Division (Minimum of 33 units) 

Required courses (18 units): 

Units 


PE 3(X) Principles of Movement 3 

PE 352 Physiology of Exercise (352L optional) 3 

PE 371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (371 L optional) 

or 3 

PE 383 Psychological Aspects of Human Movement 

PE 380 History of Physical Education and Sport 

or 3 

PE 382 Philosophical Perspectives of Human Movement 

PE 381 Human Movement in Cultural Perspective 

or 3 

PE 384 Sport Sociology 

three units selected from courses 371, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384 which have not been 

used to meet the above requirements 3 

Flectives: (Minimum 15 units) 

Upper division physical education courses to complete the required 45 units for the 

major. To be selected under advisement. 

Total 45 

TRACKS 


The Department of Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation has identified 10 tracks 
which can help prepare students for careers in the field or for graduate study. These tracks are 
advisory only, but can be valuable in meeting academic and career objectives. Advisers' office hours 
for obtaining information on the various tracks are available in the department office. Students are 
encouraged to contact the adviser in the area of choice. Career opportunities are available in: 
Elementary and Secondary Teaching 
Coaching 
Athletic Training 

Physical Education for the Handicapped 

Sports Careers 

Humanities — Arts 

Sports Medicine 

Human Factors 


166 Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 


Health 

Recreation 

Sport and Exercise Management 
Proficiency Requirements for Major and Minor Students 

Activity courses should be taken to meet the prerequisite requirements for any analysis series course. 
Proficiency screening tests are administered in the analysis classes at the beginning of the semester. 

MINOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

A physical education minor shall consist of 24 units of course work in physical education with a 
minimum of 18 upper-division units. Course work must be completed with a grade of C or higher. 


All courses counted toward the minor must be taken on an option 1 basis. 

Required Courses: Units 

PE 260 Movement Anatomy 3 

PE 300 Principles of Movement 3 

PE 352 Physiology of Exercise 3 

PE 371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 

or 3 

PE 383 Psychological Aspects of Human Movement 

PE 381 Human Movement in Cultural Perspective 

or 3 

PE 384 Sport Sociology 

PE 380 History of Physical Education and Sport 

or 3 

PE 382 Philosophical Perspectives of Human Movement 

Electives: 

A maximum of 3 units lower-division electives (100- and 2(X)-level courses) 3 

A minimum of 3 units upper-division electives (300- and 400-level courses) _3 

Total 24 

REQUIREMENTS FOR PHYSICAL EDUCATION MAJORS SEEKING A 
TEACHING CREDENTIAL 


The university program for meeting the basic requirements for the teaching credential with a 
specialization in physical education (K-12) can be found elsewhere in this catalog (see School of 
Human Development and Community Service, Division of Teacher Education). Additional require- 
ments of the Department of Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation are as follows: 

1. Advisement 

For the credential program see the teacher education adviser in physical education two to three 
semesters before making formal application. This will help students to evaluate qualifications and 
to plan appropriate course work. 

2. Required Course Work 

In addition to, or as part of, the requirements for a major In physical education all candidates 
for the credential must complete the following with a minimum of a C grade: 

PE 3(X) Principles of Movement 

PE 340 Contemporary Movement Environments 

PE 349 Measurement and Evaluation In Physical Education 

PE 371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 

Minimum of two analysis classes and one technique of coaching class. 

3. Completion of the Approved Waiver Program 

All candidates for the credential must adequately demonstrate competency In subject matter 
scope and content of physical education. The major areas of emphasis Identified by the Physical 
Education Advisory Panel of the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing include: (1 ) 
biological foundations, (2) sociological foundations, (3) psychological foundations, (4) histori- 
cal-philosophical foundations, (5) evaluation and measurement, (6) health and safety concepts 
relating to physical activity and (7) Instructional subject matter. 

Copy of the waiver can be obtained from the teacher education adviser In physical education 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 167 

4. Instructional Subject Matter of Physical Education 

Students seeking a credential with a specialization in physical education from this institution must 
be able to demonstrate competency in instructional subject matter which is a part of the regular 
physical education program of the public schools. The Department of Health Education, Physical 
Education and Recreation specifically requires the following: 

a. Ability to perform and analyze basic movement skills common to a large number of instruction- 
al physical activities. 

b. Adequate background and preparation to demonstrate breadth of understanding of the scope 
and content of physical education. 

c. Strong background and preparation in a minimum o/'s/V designated areas of physical education 
to demonstrate "in-depth" understanding and ability to apply understandings to the teaching 
learning situation. At present the areas identified by the Teacher Education Advisory Council 
of the Physical Education Department include: (1 ) team sports, (2) individual sports, (3) dual 
sports, (4) dance, (5) aquatics, (6) recreational (must be instructional in nature), (7) athletic 
training, (8) adaptives. 

Note: Students are urged to consult with the teacher education adviser of the department 
before submitting documents required for establishing subject matter competency. 

5. Experiences 

Students are expected to have been involved in several leadership experiences prior to formal 
application. These experiences could be in coaching, recreation, camping, youth leagues, and 
aiding in public school physical education classes. These experiences can be self-designed or 
designed through PE 4% (off-campus teacher aides), and PE 3% (on-campus teacher aides). 

6. Admission to Teacher Education 

In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in this catalog, the Department of Physical 
Education requires candidates to submit to an extensive review of qualifications for teaching. This 
review includes additional written documentation, and a personal evaluation by a select faculty 
committee. 

Acceptance into the program allows the candidate to enroll In a two semester sequence: 

First semester: Ed-TE 440F, Ed-TE 440S, Ed-TE 440R (optional), PE 442. 

Second semester: PE 449 A, B 

SPECIAL ADAPTED PHYSICAL EDUCATION EMPHASIS CREDENTIAL 

Cal State Fullerton has been granted approval to offer an Adapted Physical Education Emphasis 
Credential as an addition to a Single Subject Physical Education Credential. 

Specific requirements for the emphasis credential include completion of: 

PE 260 Movement Anatomy 

PE 363 Developmental Adaptations of Atypical 

PE 364 Motor Development 

PE 383 Psychological Aspects of Human Movement 

PE 473 Motor Impairment in Children 

One approved 3-unlt upper division course 

The Adapted Physical Education Emphasis Credential may be obtained only in conjunction with (or 
in addition to) a Single Subject Physical Education Credential. 

ATHLETIC TRAINING CERTIFICATION 

Athletic Training Certification accredited by the National Athletic Trainers' Association must be 
earned in conjunction with a major In physical education. Upon successful completion of the 
specific requirements listed below, the student must apply through the department to the National 
Athletic Trainers' Association for the certification examination. 

1- A bachelor's degree with a major in physical education with a CPA of at least 2.5 overall; 3.0 
in the major; and 2.5 In biological science. 

2. CPR card (yearly) and current first aid card. 

3. The following specific course work (or equivalence): 

Biol 361, Human Anatomy, or PE 260, Movement Anatomy 
Biol 362, Human Physiology 
PE 352, Physiology of Exercise 
PE 3(X), Principles of Movement 

Physics 211 A, Elementary Physics, or Chemistry 100, Introductory Chemistry 
PE 383, Psychological Aspects of Human Movement 


168 Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 

PE 371, Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 

Health Education 102, Prevention and First Aid 

Chemistry 111, Nutrition and Drugs 

PE 363, Developmental Adaptations of Atypical 

PE 451, Sports Medicine 

PE 365, Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries 

PE 366, Advanced Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries 

Health Education 101, Personal Health 

PE 4%, Practicum (Clinical Training Internship: six semester units — 800 clock hours) 

5. Recommended in addition to the above: 

Emergency Medical Training 

Advanced First Aid (Health Education 203) 

Principles of Conditioning (PE 351) 

Drugs and Society (Health Education 321) 

CORRECTIVE THERAPY AFFILIATION 

Corrective therapy is the application of the principles, tools, techniques and psychology of medically 
oriented physical education to assist the physician in accomplishment of prescribed objectives. The 
course of study includes undergraduate and graduate programs In physical education. Certification 
requires the following subject areas (for specific courses contact the department office): 
APPLIED SCIENCES: anatomy; kinesiology; physiology; physiology of exercise; neurology; pathol- 
ogy; growth and development; neuroanatomy. 

HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: analysis of human movement; health education and prob- 
lems; principles health-physical education; physical-mental habilitation; tests and measurements; 
evaluation health-physical education; research-health-physical education; skills-applled atypical; 
organization-administration corrective therapy; kinesiotherapy; recreation-rehabilitation; interthera- 
py relations evaluation and research applied to corrective and adapted programs. 

PSYCHOLCXjY: general psychology; abnormal psychology; physiology psychology; developmental 
psychology; mental health; psychotherapy; social psychology. 

An overall CPA of 3.0 and a CPA of 3.0 In all courses taken in the above subject areas are required. 
All required courses must be completed prior to application for admittance to the internship at the 
Veterans Administration Hospital, Long Beach (1,000 hours are required in the one-year internship). 
Upon successful completion, the student must apply to the Corrective Therapy Association for 
examination to obtain certification. Certified Corrective Professionals operate with Veterans Hospi- 
tals throughout the United States. 

MINOR IN HEALTH PROMOTION 

The department offers a minor in health promotion consisting of 21 units, with a minimum of 12 
upper-division units selected in consultation with the minor adviser. The minor in health promotion 
is offered within a conceptual framework of holism, and may be of interest to students preparing 
for careers in teaching and health care or helping professions, as well as to students with a personal 
interest in health enhancement. 

Required Courses (12 units); Units 


Chemistry 1 1 1 Nutrition and Drugs 
or 

Chemistry 480B Topics in Contemporary Chemistry 
or 

Approved nutrition course 3 

Health Education 101 Personal Health 
or 

Health Education 321 Drugs and Society 3 

Health Education 318 Principles of Holistic Health and Wellness 3 

Health Education 410 Health Education for Teachers 3 

Electives (9 units): 


Students rrwv elect to take (up to a maximum of 3 units) experiential courses which emphasize the 
application of basic health promotion principles in the student's own life: PE 100, 102, 103-169, 246A, 
246B; Theatre 122, 126A, 126B, 132, 142, 162, 222, 232. 


Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 169 

Students shall choose additional elective units, with approval of the minor adviser, from approved 


courses of specific relevance to health promotion (list available in department office) 9 

Total 21 


HEALTH EDUCATION COURSES 

101 Personal Health (3) 

Basic concepts relating to health and well being from a holistic perspective. Mental, emotional, 
physical and socio-environmental dimensions of health; sexuality and relationships; nutrition 
and physical fitness; use and abuse of drugs; health care services and current health problems. 

102 Prevention and First Aid (2) 

The hazards In environment. The care and prevention of accidents. Standard first aid certification 
by the American Red Cross granted upon successful completion of requirements. 

203 Advanced First Aid (3) 

A course of training in the application of advanced first aid/emergency care procedures, and medical 
self-help principles, to maintain life support functions In an emergency situation. Red Cross 
certification may be earned. 

318 Principles of Holistic Health and Wellness (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing or consent of instructor. Orientation to holistic concepts of 
health and wellness. Interplay of mind and body in health and Illness. Students explore basic 
dimensions of wellness and develop a personalized wellness profile. 

321 Drugs and Society (3) 

Habit-forming substances such as alcohol, tobacco, narcotics, hallucinogens, and related drugs, 
other stimulants and depressants. Social, historical, and legal aspects of the drug problem are 
considered. For California teaching credential. 

350 Nutrition: Vital Link to Better Health (3) 

(Same as Nursing 350) 

410 Health Education for Teachers (3) 

School health, drug education, family living, community health, teaching philosophy, safety educa- 
tion, and strategy. For California teaching credential. 


PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES 

Only one section of the following activity courses may be taken in the same semester (e.g., PE 
131A,B,C,D are the same activity )\PE 100, 102 through 167, 264A and 246B. 

100 Physical Conditioning (1) 

Designed to improve the individual's overall fitness through an understanding and application of the 
basic principles and techniques of physical conditioning. Emphasizes muscular strength/endur- 
ance, cardiorespiratory endurance, and flexibility components through various forms of exer- 
cise methods. May be repeated for credit. 

101 Athletic Conditioning (specific sport) (1) 

A conditioning program designed to Improve strength, flexibility, agility and cardiovascular condi- 
tioning for a specific sport. Credit/no credit only. May be repeated for a maximum of four units 
of credit. 

102 Jogging (1) 

The basic concepts of aerobic principles of conditioning. Elementary anatomical, physiological, 
biomechanical, and psychological factors associated with jogging are presented in order to 
serve as the basis for practical guidelines in developing or modifying the jogging workout. May 
be repeated for credit. 

184-167 Activity Courses (1) 

104 Horseback Riding; 105 Cycling; 106 Skiing; 107 Ice Figure Skating; 108 Roller Skating; 110 
Swimming; 111 Life Saving; 112 Water Polo; 114 Skin Diving; 116 Springboard Diving; 117 
Bowling; 118 Archery; 119 Golf; 120 Gymnastics; 122 Sailing; 125 Rock Climbing; 130 Badmin- 
ton; 131 Tennis; 132 Racquetball; 133 Handball; 142 Children's Games; 144 Exercise Weight 
Control; 146 Body Building; 147 Olympic and Power Lifting; 150 Wrestling; 151 Aikido; 152 
Karate; 154 Self Defense; 155 Fencing; 160 Baseball; 161 Slow Pitch Softball; 162 Fast Pitch 


170 Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 

Softball; 164 Volleyball; 165 Soccer; 166 Team Handball; 167 Basketball. Activity courses are 
primarily instructional. Beginnings intermediate and advanced sections are offered for most 
activity courses. Students who already possess some proficiency in an activity should consider 
the course chosen from the standpoint of the level of skill development which may be encoun- 
tered, standards of proficiency expected and their own ability level. Initial assessment and 
determination will be made by the course instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

170-189 Intercollegiate Sports (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of coach. An intercollegiate activity in individual or team sports in an educa- 
tional setting under the direction of a coach. PE 170 Gymnastics; 171 Golf; 172 Cross Country; 
173 Water Polo; 174 Track-Field; 175 Tennis; 176 Wrestling; 177 Fencing; 178 Basketball; 179 
Baseball; 180 Soccer; 184 Football; 185 Volleyball; 186 Softball. May be repeated for credit. 

190 Team Management (2) 

Prerequisites: consent of coach, undergraduate studies adviser and department chair. Field experi- 
ence in the management of an intercollegiate sport. May be repeated for maximum of eight units 
of credit. (Credit/ No Credit only) 

201 Introduction to Human Movement (3) 

Human movement as a discipline through an overview of the subdisciplines, and an examination 
of opportunities for personal and professional application. Closed to upp>er division majors. 

210 Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 1 1 1 or equivalent and consent of instructor. Prepares the student to teach swimming 
and life saving and to supervise aquatic programs. Successful completion will qualify the student 
for certification as an ARC Water Safety Instructor. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

214 Basic Scuba (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 114, or ability to swim 400 yards, tread water one minute and swim 25 yards 
underwater. Skin and scuba diving, theory of diving, safety procedures, and ocean environment. 
Open Water Basic Scuba Certification for successful completion. ( 1 hour lecture, 2 hours pool 
activity /ocean dives) 

220 Introduction to Coaching (2) 

Leadership, teaching and personal traits. Motivation, social, medical and physical hazards. The 
novice coach, responsibilities, administration i^pd effects of superstition and myths. Application 
procedures, r^um4 and Interview. (Non-major credit only) 

246A Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 

Basic Yoga postures, breathing and relaxation techniques, and beginning meditation techniques from 
theoretical and experiential perspectives. Awareness, concentration, and breathing patterns that 
accompany the movements of Hatha Yoga. ( 1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) (Same as Religious 
Studies 246A) 

246B Intermedidate Hatha Yoga (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 246A. An intermediate study of the theoretical and experiential aspects of Hatha 
Yoga. Intermediate postures, relaxation, breathing, stretching and concentration techniques are 
examined. The philosophical and psychological components of Hatha Yoga are discussed. An 
integrated approach to the body and movement is investigated. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours 
activity) (Same as Religious Studies 246B) 

260 Movement Anatomy (3) 

The musculo-skeletal system and Its function in human movement. Movement In sports skills and 
the muscles involved. 

300 Principles of Movement (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 260. General movement patterns as applied to sport and human movement. 

302-319 Analysis of Sports (2) 

Prerequisite: prior experience In the specific sport(s) to be studied. Must demonstrate proficiency 
Analysis of specific sport(s), including game play and skill performance. Understanding the 
nature of the activity. 302 Track Events; 303 Field Events; 304 Swimming; 305 Golf; 306 Gymnas- 
tics; 308 Soccer; 309 Badminton /Racquetball; 312 Tennis; 314 Wrestling; 316 Volleyball; 317 
Basketball; 319 Softball. 

320-339 Techniques of Coaching: Selected Sports (2) 

To prepare the student to coach specific individual and team sports. Coaching techniques, condition- 
ing of athletes, budget preparation, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling and design and 
care of facilities. 328 Gymnastics; 330 Softball; 332 Tennis; 334 Baseball; 335 Football; 337 
Basketball; 338 Volleyball. A maximum of 6 units may be applied toward completion of the units 
required for the major. 


Health Education^ Physical Education and Recreation 171 


340 Contemporary Movement Environments (3) 

The acquisition of physical skills in diverse environments; similarities and differences among age 
groups. Useful for those considering teaching careers. Required visits to schools and other sites. 

343 Intermediate Scuba (2) 

Prerequisite: Open Water Scuba Certification. Application of scuba diving, including photography, 
navigation, salvage, game hunting, night diving and others. Advanced Scuba Certification for 
successful completion. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours pool activity /ocean dives). 

345 Underwater Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: Open Water Scuba Certification. Photography In the underwater environment. Equip- 
ment, underwater camera techniques, flash, and macrophotography. ( 1 hour lecture, 2 hours 
pool activity /ocean dives) 

349 Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

Tests and measurements used in the evaluation of human movement. Statistical analysis, domains 
of learning, and the construction, selection and administration of tests. 

351 Principles of Conditioning (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 260 required; 300 and 352 recommended. Conditioning for those who plan to coach 
or supervise fitness programs. Circuit training, nutrition, motivation, weight control and kinesiol- 
ogy factors for women's and men's athletics. 

352 Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Recommended: Biol 362. Physiological processes in physical activities and the effects of training 
up)on performance. (3 hours lecture) 

352L Physiology of Exercise Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: prior completion or concurrent enrollment in PE 352. Laboratory techniques in physiol- 
ogy of exercise. (3 hours laboratory) 

363 Developmental Adaptations of Atypical (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 300, 352, 364, or consent of Instructor. The disabled whose unique needs in motor 
development determine their least restrictive environment in physical activity. Programs of 
games, sports and exercise In diversified settings; legally mandated regulations. 

364 Motor Development (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 260 and 352, or consent of Instructor. Life span motor development: age, sex, 
ethnic, cultural and perceptual components; their implications and the main course of action 
needed in developmental strategies for optimal motor behavior development. 

365 Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing. Health Education 102 or equivalent and consent of Instructor. 
For trainers, coaches, physical education instructors, health educators, YMCA and playground 
personnel, and athletes in the prevention and care of athletic injuries. Practical applications and 
theory. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

366 Advanced Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, PE 365, or consent of instructor. Prevention and care of 
athletic injuries, administrative responsibilities, advanced treatment modalities, preconditioning, 
and rehabilitation. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

371 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) 

Information processing as an explanation of motor learning and motor memory. 

371L Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: prior completion or concurrent enrollment in PE 371. Laboratory techniques in motor 
learning studies. (3 hours laboratory) 

372 Movement and the Child (3) 

Characteristics of the child; physical growth and development; basic mechanical principles underly- 
ing efficient movement; and programs for physical needs of children in the elementary school. 

373 Movement Concepts (3) 

Physical activity: space, force, time, and flow. Observation, participation, analysis, and synthesis of 
movement experiences. 

380 History of Physical Education and Sport (3) 

Historical development of thought and practice in athletics, sport, and physical education beginning 
with the ancient Creeks up to the modern period with special emphasis upon the historical role 
of sport in American life. 


172 Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 

381 Human Movement in Cultural Perspective (3) 

Human movement in the cultural milieu. Historical and contemporary interpretations of the role of 
play, games and sports, dance and recreation in human life. 

382 Philosophical Perspectives of Human Movement (3) 

The meaning and significance of participation in human movement. Human movement relative to 
personal identity, meditation, aesthetics, values, ethics, and the nature of competition. 

383 Psychological Aspects of Human Movement (3) 

Psychological variables and individual performance in human movement settings. Observational 
learning, arousal, anxiety, achievement motivation, causal attributions, aggression, personality, 
and attitudes. 

384 Sport Sociology (3) 

Sport in society. Sport and social institutions and social processes. Understanding sport as a social 
phenomenon. 

390 Principles of Sport and Exercise Management (3) (Formerly 405) 

A broad overview of the sport /exercise management enterprise, including school, facility, profes- 
sional, commercial, industrial, corporate management and specialists in marketing, print/elec- 
tronic media, job descriptions, professional preparation and placement opportunities are 
detailed. Portfolio development. 

396 Tutorial (1) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, tutorial adviser and department chair. Students assist in activity 
classes. May be repeated for six units of credit. A maximum of three units may be applied 
toward the major. 

407 Sport Consumer Packaging (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 or PE 390 or Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Technical 
application of promotions, public relations, marketing, contract negotiations, box office and 
event operations as each applies to packaging sport entertainment. Case methods and applied 
team project. 

442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods and materials of teaching physical 
education K to 12. Required before student teaching. Part of the 12-unit education block and 
may not be taken separately. (Credit/ No Credit only) 

449A Student Teaching Physical Education (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. (Credit/No Credit only) 

4498 Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. (Credit/ No Credit only) 

451 Sports Medicine (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, PE 352 or its equivalent or consent of instructor. Factors 
(environmental, ergogenic, etc.) which alter the typical physiological response to exercise and 
training. 

452 Physical Performance Testing and Counseling (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 352 and 352L required; PE 351 and 451 recommended. Testing and counseling 
techniques used to assess and develop physical performance. 

461 Biomechanics (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 300 or consent of instructor. The application of biomechanics to the analysis of 
human movement. 

471 Motor Control (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 371. The application of behavioral and neurological evidence to the control of 
human movement. Mechanisms subserving movement based on the central and peripheral 
nervous systems are studied in relation to the control of discrete and sequential movements. 

473 Motor Impairment in Children (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 363, 364 or consent of instructor, identification of abnormal motor behavior of 
neurologically handicapped children. Assessment factors, development of educational and/or 
therapeutic models of remediation and action strategies. Disorders of neuromotor, convulsive, 
impulsive and minimal dysfunction child syndrome. 

474 Kinesiotherapy (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 260, 300, 363, or consent of instructor. Kinesiological bases of therap>eutic exercicse. 
The application of kinesiological principles in the selection and design of therapeutic exercise 
activities and programs for various physical disabilities. 


Health Education^ Physical Education and Recreation 173 


475 Behavioral Dimensions of Motor Performance (3) 

Prerequisites: PE 371, 383. An integrated approach to the understanding of psychological processes 
and behavioral variables which affect the acquisition and performance of motor skills. 

4% Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisites: junior or senior standing and consent of faculty sponsor, field supervisors, departmen- 
tal coordinator, and department chair. Planning, preparing, coaching, teaching in public school, 
college, or community physical education or recreation programs. May be repeated for a 
maximum of six units of credit. Credits not applicable toward major. (Credit/ No Credit only) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: completion of a minimum of 15 upper division physical education units. Topics based 
on a study plan prepared In cooperation with a faculty supervisor. Culminates In a paper, 
project, comprehensive examination or performance. Maximum of three units in any one 
semester; may be repeated once. 

508 Statistical Methods in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing and PE 349 or equivalent. Statistical theory, data collection proce- 
dures, techniques for analysis and interpretation of data. 

510 Research in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and PE 508. Research in physical education. The types of research with 
tools of and equipment for the respective research. Selection and development of research 
problems and critique of completed studies. 

516 Advanced Study of the Philosophical Perspective of Human Movement (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 382 or consent of Instructor. Methods of the philosophical process 
and human movement. 

520 International Physical Education and Sport (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. The theory and practice of physical education and sports in selected 
foreign countries. Evaluation of foreign physical education programs in relation to programs in 
the United States. 

532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major or minor in physical education. Curriculum development 
models and factors Influencing curriculum development in physical education. For curriculum 
development and/or improvement of a physical education program. 

550 Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: classified status and consent of graduate adviser. On-the-job training experiences 
supervised by a fully trained practitioner. Requirements include 10 hours per week of on-the-job 
training and 1 hour weekly conference with Instructor. May be repeated once for credit. 

551 Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing, PE 352 or equivalent. Theories of exercise and physiological func- 
tion. 

554 Advanced Study in Human Motor Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 371 or consent of instructor. Current issues In motor behavior. 

555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 351, 352, or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Training: the 
physiological bases for developing the primary fitness components. 

580 Advanced Study in Psychological Aspects of Human Movement (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 383, or consent of instructor. Current issues and research in 
psychology and human movement. 

582 Advanced Study in Sport Sociology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 384, or consent of instructor. The theories and methods of sociolo- 
gy and the study of the sport phenomenon. 

597 Project (1-2) 

Prerequisites: PE 508, 510 and consent of project committee. Directed Independent project. Student 
will select and have approved a project proposal, conduct the project, and prepare a formal 
analysis and report. May be repeated. 

598 Thesis (2-4) 

Prerequisites: PE 508, 510 and consent of thesis committee. Directed independent research. Student 
will select and have approved a research proposal, conduct the research, and prepare a formal 
analysis and report. May be repeated. 


174 Human Services 


599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, PE 508, 510, and consent of the faculty adviser and department chair. 
May be repeated for maximum of 6 units of credit. Student research in a specific area of physical 
education. 


RECREATION COURSE 

384 Leisure in America: A Social History (3) 

(Same as History 384) 

HUMAN SERVICES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Corinne Wood 

Program Coordinator 

Gerald Corey, Rosalie Gilford, Myron Orleans, J. Michael Russell 

The Bachelor of Science in Human Services is a carefully articulated degree program providing both 
an academic and experiential background for the student seeking a career working with people in 
the varied and expanding field of human service. An application-oriented degree, it is based on a 
synthesis of knowledge from several social sciences, together with a methodology of humanistic, 
personal Intervention at both the group and individual levels. Human services graduates are educat- 
ed to respond in an informed way to identifiable human service needs In a variety of settings. The 
program's humanistic orientation and its synthesis of knowledge from many background disciplines, 
as well as its focus on the development of specific methods and practical skills to apply this 
knowledge, give it a perspective that is different from that of any single discipline. 

The Human Services Program is structured around four interrelated components: theoretical founda- 
tions/intervention strategies; client populations/cultural diversity; research /evaluation; and skills 
development /field experience. Students majoring In human services are required to complete a core 
of 36 units (in the above four areas), plus an l^unit package of adviser-approved courses related 
to their anticipated professional specialization. Majors must achieve a grade of C or better in all 
courses included in the core requirements and in the advisement track. 

Courses required for the major total 54 units. The suggested sequence is as follows: 

A. Required Core Curriculum (36 units) 

Sophomore Year: Human Services 201, Introduction to Human Services; Psychology 361, Develop- 
mental Psychology, <x Child Development /Teacher Education 312, Human Growth and Develop- 
ment; an introductory social research course (e.g.. Psychology 202 or 203; Sociology 203 or 302 or 
303). 

funior Year — first Semester Human Services/Counseling 380, Theories and Techniques of Coun- 
seling; Sociology 305, Techniques of Social Welfare; Psychology 341, Abnormal Psychology, or 
Sociology 466, Deviant Behavior. 

funior Yea /^Second Semester Human Services/ Afro-Ethnic Studies 311, Intracultural Socializa- 
tion Patterns; Human Services 385, Program Design and Proposal Writing; Human Services 3%, 
Practicum Seminar (2), and Human Services 3%L, Practicum (1). 

Senior Year^irst Semester Human Services 495, Fieldwork Seminar (2), and Human Services 
495L, Fieldwork (1) 

Senior Year— Second Semester Human Services 470, Evaluation of Human Service Programs; 
Human Services 4%, Internship. 

B. Required Advisement Track (18 units) 

In addition to the 36-unit core, the human services degree program requires each student to select, 
in consultation with an adviser, 18 units of course work in the area of her/his anticipated professional 
specialization. Examples of advisement tracks include: advocacy and community organization, 
adolescence, health services, gerontology, multiple subject (elementary) teacher education, para- 
professional counseling, social rehabilitation, social welfare, or an individual program worked out 
with an academic adviser. Students are expected to consult an adviser during their first semester in 
the Human Services Program. 


Human Services 175 


MULTIPLE SUBJECT CREDENTIAL WAIVER PROGRAM 

A carefully selected sequence of courses taken in conjunction with the human services major has 
been approved by the State of California as a waiver for the Commons portion of the National 
Teachers' Examination. Or7e requirement for a Multiple Subjects (Elementary) Teaching Credential 
is completion of a waiver program or passing scores on the (NTE) Commons Examination. Contact 
the Credential Preparation Center for further information. 


HUMAN SERVICES COURSES 

201 Introduction to the Human Services (3) 

The origin and scope of human services including theoretical frameworks, the functions and activities 
of human services organizations, and the roles and related skills of human services workers. 

300 Character and Conflict (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor at first class meeting. An experiential, theme-oriented class explor- 
ing life choices in the struggle for personal autonomy. Themes include: body image, sex roles, 
love, sexuality, intimacy, marriage, alternative life-styles, loneliness, death, meaning and values. 
Grade option 2. 

311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 311) 

380 Theories and Techniques of Counseling (3) 

Survey of contemporary theories and techniques of counseling. The counseling process, comparison 
of various theoretical approaches, introduction to professional and ethical issues In the helping 
profession of counseling. (Same as Counseling 380) 

385 Program Design and Proposal Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Human Services 201 or consent of Instructor. Programming in public and private 
agencies: program proposal writing; design of empirical research components; analysis and 
critiques of agency task force programming; program-funding agencies and grant writing; pro- 
gram budget. 

3% Practicum Seminar (2) 

Prerequisite: Human Services 201. Corequisite: Human Services 3%L. Functions and structure of 
human services agencies; Interrelationships with community services; the role of the human 
services worker; ethical, legal and professional issues. 

3%L Practicum (1) 

Prerequisite: Human Services 201 . Corequisite: Human Services 3%. Field placement in one or more 
human service agencies for a minimum of six hours per week. Grade option 2. 

470 Evaluation of Human Services Program (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 385 and a basic social research course. Making program objectives 
measurable; determining appropriate methodology and techniques to evaluate effectiveness, 
efficiency and process variables; practical problems of program evaluation. 

480 Case Analysis and Intervention Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 380, 396 and 3%L; Psychology 341. Techniques of counseling; appro- 
priateness in the utilization of theoretical modalities; case writing; various counseling Interven- 
tion methods suitable for a culturally diverse population. Role-playing and videotape 
observations of actual counseling encounters. (Same as Counseling 480) 

485 Program Design and Proposal Writing (3) 

Corequisite: Human Services 470. Programming in public and private agencies; program proposal 
writing; design of empirical research components for innovative programming and accountabili- 
ty; analysis and critiques of agency task force programming for immediate social problems; 
program-funding agencies and grant writing; program budget. 

490 Practicum in Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 300, 380 and consent of instructor. Supervised experience as a group 
leader. Approaches and techniques of group leadership. May be repeated once for credit. 

495 Fieldwork Seminar (2) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 396 and 396L. Corequisite: Human Services 495L. Classroom analysis 
of agency experience focusing on skills and techniques of human service workers and organiza- 
tional analysis. 


176 Nursing 


495L Fieldwork (1) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 3% and 3%L. Corequisite: Human Services 495. Supervised fieldwork 
in one or more human service agencies for a minimum of six hours per week. Grade option 
2 . 

4% Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: Human Services 495 and 495L and at least two courses in approved specialization. 
Supervised internship in a community service agency in area of specialization. A minimum of 
eight hours of supervised fieldwork per week. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: approval of coordinator, consent of instructor, upper-division status. Individual re- 
search project, either library or field, under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated 
for credit. Only three units per semester. 

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING 

FACULTY 
Vera Robinson 
Department Chair 

Arlene Cray, Linda McKeever, Sandra Schwartz, Barbara Talento 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING 

The Department of Nursing offers to the registered nurse with an associate degree in nursing (or 
its equivalent) an upper-division program leading to a bachelor of science degree with a major in 
nursing. Graduates are eligible for certification as public health nurses in the state of California. 
The program is accredited by the National League for Nursing. 

Purpose 

The purpose of the nursing program is to provide registered nurses with knowledge, skills and 
attitudes necessary for the performance of the professional nursing role and characteristic of the 
generally educated person. The program prepares a nursing generalist who can apply the humanistic 
approach within a framework of scientific and professional accountability and who can function 
independently in a variety of health settings. The program provides students with the necessary 
foundation for graduate education and specialization and promotes and fosters commitment to 
lifelong learning for personal and professional growth. 

Admission Requirements 

1 . Meet requirements for admission to the university as a transfer student. 

2. Completion of an associate degree in nursing or its equivalent. 

3. Current licensure as a registered nurse in California. 

4. Completion of one college level course in each of the following: anatomy-physiology (with 
laboratory), chemistry (with laboratory), microbiology, psychology, and sociology or an- 
thropology. A minimum grade of C must be attained in each course. 

5. Completion of one year of satisfactory work experience as a registered nurse is recommended. 

Admission Procedures 

Students are accepted into the nursing program twice each year in the fall and spring semesters. 

1 . Submit a university application and an official transcript of all previous college work to the Office 
of Admissions and Records. 

2. Submit a nursing application form to the Department of Nursing office with a transcript copy of 
all previous college work and two letters of reference from previous employers or instructors. 

3. Croup counseling sessions are available each semester for prospective students. 

4. Entry tests will be required prior to and during the first clinical nursing course. Results will be used 
for counseling purposes. Exit tests will also be required. A fee is charged. 

Departmental Regulations 

1. All required nursing and support courses must be taken in a particular sequence. Check each 
nursing course for prerequisites and corequisites. Students may enroll in only one clinical course 
(Nursing 305L, 355L, 402L and 452L) per semester. 

2. Students must apply for the clinical nursing courses each semester prior to enrollment In the class. 
(November 15 deadline for spring semester and April 15 for fall semester.) Enrollment in the 
seminar and clinical sections is limited to 10-15 students. 


Nursing 177 

3. Students must maintain a cumulative 2.0 grade-point average on all units attempted and attain 
a minimum grade of C in all nursing and support courses. 

4. The student who earns less than a grade of C In nursing or support courses must repeat that course 
prior to being admitted Into the next nursing course in sequence. A nursing course may be 
repeated only one time and requires departmental consent. 

5. Students must have malpractice Insurance and access to transportation in order to be admitted 
into clinical courses. 

6. Students are required to make an app>ointment with advisers at least once each semester. 

7. Professional standards are expected to be maintained. A student who demonstrates unprofession- 
al behavior or behavior which indicates unsafe practice may be denied progression or may be 
dismissed from the program. Refer to department for complete progression and retention policy 
as stated in the Student Handbook. 

SCHOLARSHIPS, AWARDS, FINANCIAL AID 

1 . Financial aid and community scholarships are available. 

2. Outstanding senior student and W.J. Traber Humanism Award are given to graduating seniors. 

Requirements for the Degree 

1. The total number of units required for the Bachelor of Science in Nursing is 128. This consists 
of a spjecific combination of prerequisites, general education, nursing and elective courses. 

2. The following courses are required for the nursing major: Nursing 305, 305L, 307, 355, 355L, 357, 
400, 400L, 402, 402L, 450, 450L, 452, and 452L (34 units); Chemistry 300 and 300L (4 units); 
Biological Science 425 (3 units); an upper-division statistics course (3 units). Total: 44 units. 

3. All students must complete the university upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement, 
which includes the Examination In Writing Proficiency. 

BACCALAUREATE PLAN OF STUDY 

Students may attend full time or part time. Courses must be taken in semester sequence. 


Junior Year: First Semester Units 

Nursing 305/L Professional Nursing I (Laboratory /Clinical) * 3,2 

Nursing 307 Health Promotion: Parent-Child Nursing 3 

Chemistry 300/ L Organic and Physiological Chemistry (Laboratory) 

General Education /Electives 3 

Junior Year: Second Semester 

Nursing 355/L Professional Nursing II (Laboratory /Clinical) * 3,2 

Nursing 357 Health Promotion: Adult-Aged Nursing 3 

Biological Science 425 Pathoblology 3 

Statistics (upper division) or 

General education /electives 3 

Senior Year: First Semester 

Nursing 400/ L Professional Dimensions of Nursing 3 units 3 

Nursing 402/L Community Health Nursing (Clinical) * 2,4 

Electives/general education 6 

Senior Year: Second Semester 

Nursing 450/ L Nursing Research 3 

Nursing 452/L Leadership/ Management in Professional Nursing (Clinical) * 2,4 

Electives/general education 6 


NURSING COURSES 

Note: All nursing courses require (1) admission to the university as a nursing major, (2) current 
California R.N. licensure, (3) an associate degree (junior standing) and (4) consent of instructor. 
305 Professional Nursing I (3) 

Prerequisites: see note above. Corequisite: Nursing 305L. Focuses on professional nursing role, 
nursing process, holistic man, selected blo-psycho-social and nursing theories. Concepts and 


• Clinical courses require malpractice irwurance and access to transportation. 


178 Nursing 

theories of adaptation and communication, with skills in therapeutic and written communica- 
tion emphasized. Meets upper-division writing requirement. 

305L Professional Nursing I: Laboratory/Clinical (2) 

Prerequisites: see note above. Corequisite: Nursing 305. Application of nursing process utilizing 
adaptation framework and concepts presented in Nursing 305 with clients in community settings 
and simulations on campus. Emphasis on psycho-social assessment of clients and problem- 
solving. Examination of student's personal values as aid to professional nursing role socializa- 
tion. (Lab/Clinical 6 hours) 

307 Health Promotion: Parent-Child Nursing (3) 

Theories and issues important in parent-child nursing. Specific nursing interventions useful in pre- 
venting maladaptation relative to developmental change. Topics explored: genetic counseling, 
maternal<hild bonding, sexuality, adaptation patterns from birth through young adulthood, 
cultural determinants. 

350 Nutrition; Vital Link to Better Health (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 1 1 or comparable course. Concepts of nutrition as they relate to nutritional 
needs, practices and problems throughout the life cycle. Emphasis on nutritional counseling and 
education of individuals /groups toward health promotion and disease prevention. 

355 Professional Nursing II (3) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 305, 305L, 307; Chemistry 300 and 300L. Corequisite: Nursing 355L, 357, 
Biological Science 425. Focuses on physical assessment, identification of stressors and health 
education. Techniques in health history-taking and physical examination. Specific common 
stressors are analyzed that influence adaptation and optimal health. 

355L Professional Nursing II: Laboratory/Clinical (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 305, 305L, 307; Chemistry 300 and 300L. Corequisite; Nursing 355, Biological 
Science 425, Nursing 357. On-campus supervised practice of physical assessment and super- 
vised nursing practice with clients in ambulatory and in-patient care settings. Students perform 
total health assessment, utilize decision-making, teaching and evaluation skills. (Lab/Clinical 6 
hours) 

357 Health Promotion: Adult-Aged Nursing (3) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 307. Developmental theories of adulthood and the aging process. Selected 
topics (body image, sexuality, family, retirement, anger, depression, death and dying) examined 
with emphasis on adaptation to developmental and situational stressors and nursing interven- 
tions. 

360 Promoting Health of the Elderly (3) 

Characteristics of aging and concerns of the elderly: multi-dimensional assessment and selected 
therapeutic interventions useful in promoting health of the elderly. Evaluations of health prac- 
tices and determination of appropriate referrals. 

400 Professional Dimensions of Nursing (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355L, 357; Chemistry 3(X) and 300L; Biological Science 425 and 425L. Corequi- 
site: Nursing 400L. Analysis of social trends and issues affecting nursing and health care. 
Bioethics, health care legislation and roles of professional organizations are examined. Nursing 
leadership tasks are explored in relation to group process, values clarification and ethical 
decision-making. 

400L Professional Dimensions of Nursing: Laboratory' (1) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355, 355L, 357; Chemistry 300 and 300L; Biological Science 425 and 425L. 
Corequisite: Nursing 400. Understanding of group process theory by assuming leader, member 
and participant observer roles. Actual and potential stressors are explored and communication 
patterns analyzed. Includes observation of group process In health planning committees, profes- 
sional organizations and community health advocacy groups. 

402 Community Health Nursing (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355L, 357. Corequisite: Nursing 402L. Theories of community health and 
nursing synthesized to help students facilitate the adaptation process of clients, families and 
communities to attain and maintain optimal health. Emphasis on family health care, assessment 
of community health needs, advocacy, collaborative role. 

402L Community Health Nursing: Clinical (4) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 355L, 357. Corequisite: Nursing 402. Application of community health nursing 
concepts to family health care in the community milieu. Students collaborate with families and 
others and use community resources to promote optimal family health and Improve health 
status. (Clinical 12 hours) 


Reading 179 


450 Nursing Research (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L. Corequisite: Nursing 450L. Historical, philosophical, and 
ethical aspects of nursing research. Relationship between nursing research and professional 
accountability. Principles and methods of research process with emphasis on evaluating re- 
search for use in leadership and professional role. 

450L Nursing Research: Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402 L. Corequisite: Nursing 450. Evaluation of specific nursing 
studies to determine significance and applicability to nursing practice. Students have opportuni- 
ties to apply selected research concepts as they develop a research proposal. 

452 Leadership/ Management in Professional Nursing (2) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L. Corequisite: Nursing 452L. Nursing 450 and 450L must 
be taken prior to or concurrently. Theories of leadership/ management; concepts of power, 
motivation, decision-making, change and management skills related to health care system and 
professional nursing role. Barriers and issues relative to change, conflict resolution and change 
strategies. 

452L Leadership/ Management in Professional Nursing: Clinical (4) 

Prerequisites: Nursing 400, 400L, 402, 402L. Corequisite: Nursing 452. Nursing 450 and 450L must 
be taken prior to or concurrently. Application of leadership/ management theories and skills In 
student-selected and faculty approved clinical settings. Students synthesize professional nursing 
role through individualized learning contract. (Clinical 12 hours). 

499 Independent Study in Nursing (1—3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing In nursing and/or consent of Instructor. Individually supervised studies 
and/or projects. 

DEPARTMENT OF READING 

FACULTY 
Norma Inabinette 
Department Chair 

Thomas Bean, Ashley Bishop, Ruth May, joAnn Wells 
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
See "Graduate Programs." 

UNDERGRADUATE READING SKILL DEVELOPMENT SKILLS COURSES 

Lower division courses in reading (Reading 101, 103 minicourses, 201 and 202) and an upper- 
division course (Reading 320) are designed to assist students in developing the critical and creative 
reading skills required for efficient university learning. 

READING SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL 

The Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing has granted approval to the Reading Depart- 
ment to offer a Reading Specialist Credential Program. 

An examination of the course requirements will show overlapping between the Reading Specialist 
Credential and the Master of Science in Education, concentration in Reading degree. By careful 
planning with a graduate adviser in reading, the student can virtually complete the requirements for 
both at the same time. 

Program pre-entry requirements for the Reading Specialist Credential are as follows: 

1 . Methods of teaching reading. Prior to entering this approved program the students will present 
evidence (transcripts) demonstrating satisfactory completion of one of the following: 

A. Ryan Act reading methods courses, such as Ed-TE 433 or Ed-TE 440R, or 

B. Teaching of reading examination adopted by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and 
Licensing (National Teacher Examination No. 20) or 

C. Reading 480, The Teaching of Reading (4 units) or the departmental exam offered in lieu of 
the course. 

D. Entering students who received teacher training from out-of-state institutions since September 
1973, may submit a transcript and catalog course description and petition to have an under- 
graduate course accepted in lieu of the above. 

2. Teaching experience. Prior to entering this approved program, both in-state and out-of-state 
students will present evidence in the form of letters of verification from the district office demon- 
strating satisfactory completion of one of the following: 


180 Reading 


A. Two or more years of successful experience teaching reading for at least one instructional 
period per day in public and/or private elementary and/or secondary schools, this experience 
to include at least a two grade spread, or 

B. Two or more years of successful classroom teaching experience, this experience to include 
at least a two-grade spread, or 

C. Two hundred fifty or more days of successful and extensive substitute teaching experience, 
this experience to include at least a two-grade spread, or 

D. Successful student teaching experience, at least part of which involved the teaching of reading, 
as well as at least 45 hours of successful experience as either a teaching aide in reading or 
a reading tutor, this experience to include at least a two-grade spread. 

Students whose teaching experience on the above covers less than a two-grade span may complete 
this requirement by tutoring students in Reading 581 and 583 at a grade level at least two years 
different from previous experience. 

Top priority for entering the credential program will be given to those students meeting criterion "'A" 
listed above. Other applicants will be admitted, as space permits, in descending order according to 
the remaining criteria. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test (if not previously accomplished). 

4. Assessment of experienced reading specialists. Prior to entering this approved program, the 
applicant who has served as a school or district reading specialist will be assessed according to 
the following criteria and have the program planned around the needs revealed by this assess- 
ment: 

Graduates of master's programs with an emphasis in reading, and applicants functioning as 
reading specialists who have not completed such a degree: evaluation of competencies required 
under this credential to be completed by a faculty member in conjunction with the applicant in 
Reading 5821, Analysis of Reading Practices, Assessment of Reading Specialist Competencies (1 
unit) 

Assessment strategies include: 

( 1 ) Self assessment of progress toward attaining specified program objectives. Students will rate 
themselves on a scale of 1-7 on each of the major program objectives. Students who rate 
themselves 

(a) 1 or 2 on a given objective will be advised to take the appropriate course (s) to meet 
that objective; 

(b) 3, 4 or 5 on a given objective will be given the opportunity to take a department 
prepared exam or write a professional paper under the guidance of an instructor which 
demonstrates that the student has achiev^ this objective to minimally stated standards. 
The student may opt to take course work instead of writing the exam or paper; 

(c) 6 or 7 on the given objective will verify their competency in an oral exam during an 
interview with a faculty member; 

(d) Students who avail themselves of the oral and/or written evaluation procedures and do 
not meet the previously specified standards will be required to take the required course 
work related to these objectives. 

(2) Faculty assessment of progress toward attaining sp>ecified program objectives, this to include 
letters of evaluation from supervisory personnel, direct observation by faculty, and/or 
evaluation of oral or written evaluation. 

At the conclusion of the assessment phase, the faculty member will develop a credential study plan 
which specifies the course work the student must complete before obtaining the credential. 


Program Description Units 

Reading 507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs 3 

Reading 508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School 3 

Reading 516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties i 3 

Reading 517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction 3 

Reading 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties 4 

Reading 5821 Analysis of Reading Practices; Assessment of Reading 

Specialist Competencies 1 

Reading 585 Professional Development in Reading 3 

Reading 584 Linguistics and Reading 4 

Electives and/or support courses _2 

Total 31 


Reading 181 


READING COURSES 

101 Reading Development (1) 

To Improve reading efficiency. May be repeated for a maximum of three units. 

103C Critical Reading (1) 

Critical reading skills. Detecting fact and opinion, author's purpose, tone and bias, making critical 
judgments and drawing inferences. 

201 Academic Reading: Analyses and Strategies (3) 

Analysis of the student's current skills In academic reading. A psycholinguistic approach defining 
reading as a communication, language and thought process In which the reader uses a minimum 
amount of visual cues combined with previous knowledge and experience to predict meaning. 

202 Vocabulary Comprehension: Cognitive Processes (3) 

The dynamic nature of language as revealed by history, etymology, communication theory, critical/ 
analytical reading processes, and specific vocabularies. Selected readings as encountered In the 
academic environment. 

320 Power Reading (3) 

Reading improvement for the upper division student. Improvement of rate and comprehension, 
study skills and critical analysis. Not for student who has taken Reading 201 or has more than 
one unit of credit for Reading 101. 

400 The Teaching of Reading (4) 

Curriculum and methods in the teaching of reading In the elementary and secondary schools. 
Teachers' manuals and guides. Preparing lessons In classroom teaching of reading. 

507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Recent research on the learner, 
the teacher, approaches, materials and facilities in the teaching of reading at secondary and 
college levels. 

508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Current trends in the teaching of 
elementary reading, the teacher as a decision-maker and the reading process for all learners. 

516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or Instructor. Studies of the factors underlying 
learning disabilities in reading In children, adolescents and young adults. 

517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Theory and application of individ- 
ual and group intelligence, achievement and interest tests used with students in a reading 
program. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser In reading or Instructor. Analysis and diagnosis of reading 
difficulties. Techniques and methods of prevention and treatment. Individual remediation of 
student. Primary through secondary. 

582 Analysis of Reading Practices: Contemporary Issues (1) 

Current Issues In reading Instruction, such as the exceptional child in reading, textbook evaluation 
procedures and comparative reading. Can be repeated for credit with different content. 

5821 Analysis of Reading Practices: Assessment of Reading Specialist Competencies (1) 

Assessment of competencies of students entering the Reading program in preparation for the Reading 
Specialist Credential. 

583 Instructional Development in Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Seminar and fieldwork in the development of diagnostic-prescrip- 
tive procedures for working with developmental and corrective students in other than a one-to- 
one clinic setting. 

584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

Prerequisite: consent of graduate adviser in reading or instructor. Linguistics and reading materials 
and instruction. Language development and the acquisition of reading. Teaching reading to 
linguistically different learners. 

585 Professional Development in Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fieldwork in assessment and instruction through casework tech- 
nique. Training In inservice education and communication with teachers, parents, consultants, 
and administrators. Includes grant prop>osal writing and program development techniques. 


182 Special Education 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars in such areas as behavior, teaching strategies, educational technology, program 
development, communication theory and interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Independent inquiry for qualified graduate students. 

DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 

FACULTY 
Calvin Nelson 
Department Chair 

Stephen Aloia, Lester March, Leo Schmidt, Shirl Stark 

The mission of the Department of Special Education is to develop and implement a curriculum which 
prepares persons who work with individuals with exceptional needs. This curriculum Is designed to 
give credential and master's degree candidates a broad background in the physiological, environ- 
mental and social aspects of exceptionality. It also provides them with the opportunity to develop 
skills for managing environmental situations to bring about change and assist exceptional persons 
to be responsible for their own choices and development. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

See "Graduate Programs." 

ADVANCED SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The curriculum In specialist preparation meets the requirements of Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing Act of 1970. The curricula are subject to change pending approval by the Commission 
for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. Students are advised to contact the special education office 
for appropriate publications in the event curricular modifications are introduced by commission 
action. 

Note: Students who have not previously done so must pass the California Basic Education Skills Test 
before they can be recommended for a Special Education Specialist Credential. This requirement 
should be attended to as early in the program as possible. 

Specialist Credentials 

Programs leading to four specialist credentials are available. They are: 

1. Specialist credential to teach the physically handicapped (including the orthopedically hand- 
icapped ) 

2. Specialist credential to teach the learning handicapped (including the learning disabled, behav- 
ior disordered and educationally retarded). 

3. Specialist credential to teach the severely handicapped (including the trainable mentally re- 
tarded, severely-multiply-handicapped, seriously emotionally disturbed and the autistic). 

4. Specialist credential to teach the gifted. 

All sp>ecialist training programs require a generic component and advanced specialist component, 
for the credential. Completion of the generic component is prerequisite to admission to advanced 
specialist component training. 

Persons wishing to earn an advanced Special Education Specialist Credential must make formal 
application to the university Indicating the specific specialist credential objective. In addition, appli- 
cants must meet the following requirements: 

1 . completion of a bachelor's degree; 

2. presentation of a grade-point average of at least 2.75 In the last 60 units earned; and 

3. possession of a preliminary multiple subject or single subject credential or another valid 
California standard teaching credential. 

Advisement is available to any student seeking an advanced specialist credential in the Department 
of Special Education. New students will be assigned an adviser by the Graduate Records Office 
during the first month of the term in which they enter the Department of Special Education. Students 
should meet with their adviser during the first semester of enrollment in the Department of Special 
Education to file a credential study plan. 


Special Education 183 


Generic Specialist Credential Requirements 

All candidates for an advanced Special Education Specialist Credential must satisfactorily complete 
the following generic specialist credential courses: 

1. Sp Ed 370 Personal Quest (3 units) 

2. Sp Ed 479 Observation of Exceptional Children (3 units) 

Advanced Specialist Credential Requirements 

The specific program for each advanced specialist credential requires the same course sequence; 
however, different activity sections are designed to meet the specific needs of each credential. 

Units 


Sp Ed 463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics 3 

Sp Ed 464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics 3 

Sp Ed 465A,B,C or D Curriculum and Methods in Exceptionality 4 

Sp Ed 573A,B,C or D Advanced Practices in Exceptionality 4 

Sp Ed 574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications 3 

Sp Ed 575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research 4 

Total (including 12 prerequisite units) 21 

RESOURCE SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY 


The curriculum for the Resource Specialist Certificate of Competency Is designed to prepare candi- 
dates having approved entry-level skills and professional preparation to assume the role as resource 
specialists in programs serving special education students, their parents and their regular teachers. 
The certificate program meets the competencies set forth by the California Commission for Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing as well as additional standards deemed appropriate by the faculty of the 
Department of Special Education, other university personnel and community advisory board mem- 
bers. Students desiring this certificate without enrolling for a degree or credential should apply for 
admission to the university as undeclared postbaccalaureate majors. 

Prerequisites 

1. A 2.75 CPA. 

2. If not already accomplished, passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test. 

3. Appropriate advanced specialist credential In Special Education. 

4. Verification of three or more years of successful experience with students in regular and special 


education classes. 

Requirements Units 

Sp Ed 421 Working With Parents of Children with Exceptional Needs 3 

Sp Ed 4% Practicum in Special Education 3 

Sp Ed 528 Resource Specialist Seminar: Curriculum, Assessment, and Management 3 

Sp Ed 529 Resource Specialist Seminar: Consulting and Staff Development 3 

Total units 12 


SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES 

370 The Personal Quest (3) 

The factors contributing to personality. Individual needs, how they are met by the individual, other 
individuals, society and society's institutions. Life styles and how they meet the needs of 
individuals. 

371 Exceptional Individual (3) 

Children who deviate from the average In the elementary and the secondary schools; physically 
handicapped, mentally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, and emotionally disturbed. Spe- 
cial educational services, curriculum, procedures, and materials. 

411 Mainstreaming (3) 

A course designed to assist regular and special class teachers, school administrators and parents to 
implement the "Least Restrictive Environment" placement requirement of Public Law 94-142. 
Emphasis will be placed upon techniques to modify regular classrooms in order to accommo- 
date handicapped children. 


184 Special Education 

421 Working With Parents of Children With Exceptional Needs (3) 

Patterns and problems of child rearing in families with exceptional children. Role of teachers and 
other professionals in developing cooperative programs involving parents and/or other family 
members. Community resources. Designing change programs. 

463 Exceptionality: Cognitive- Affective Characteristics (3) 

Individuals who deviate from the norm in cognitive and emotional functioning; the educable mental- 
ly retarded, gifted, slow learner, behavlorally disordered and emotionally disturbed. 

464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics (3) 

Individuals who deviate from the norm in physical-sensory functioning; the visually handicapped, 
multiply handicapped, physically handicapped, and trainable mentally retarded. 

465A Exceptionality: Curriculum and Methods for the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Sp Ed 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the learning 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum. 

465B Exceptionality: Curriculum and Methods for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Sp Ed 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the severely 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum. 

465C Exceptionality: Curriculum and Methods for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Sp Ed 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the physical- 
ly handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum. 

465D Exceptionality: Curriculum and Methods for the Gifted (4) 

Corequisite: Sp Ed 463. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the gifted. 
Lectures, demonstrations and practicum. 

478 Innovations in Special Education (1>3) 

Recent, dynamic and Innovative methodologies and concepts as they relate to special education. 
May be taken for a maximum of six units. 

479 Observation of Exceptional Children (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Participation in a class for exceptional children for greater part 
of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures for 
teaching exceptional children. 

4% Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum with educationally handicapped children. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Individual studies under the 
direction of faculty member. Experimental, library, or creative projects. 

511 Strategies for Integrating the Handicapped (2) 

Corequisite: Ed Adm 593. Designed to assist the administrator to understand the nature of handicaps 
and their implications for program integration and modification as well as attitude modifications 
and resource allocation. 

513 Exceptionality: Application of Contemporary Humanistic and Holistic Research (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A graduate seminar to explore humanistic 
theories and holistic process as a significant contemporary approach to curricular formulation 
for the education of the exceptional individual. 

520 Atypical Children, Fundamentals of Measurement (3) 

Principles of measurement and the evaluation of atypical children. Areas covered; teacher design 
tests; normed tests and exceptional children; and using test for instructional planning. 

522 Behavior Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Sp Ed 371 or consent of instructor. Identification and management of social and 
affective disturbances related to school performance. Early detection, behavioral modification 
techniques, parent counseling. Interagency cooperation. 

528 Resource Specialist Seminar: Curriculum, Assessment and Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 463 and 464. Designed to prepare teachers to p)erform the coordination tasks 

of resource specialists. Focus Is on curriculum, legal requirements of resource specialists pro- 
grams, coordination functions and skills, and direct service to teachers and students. 

529 Resource Specialist Seminar: Consulting and Inservice Skills (3) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 463 and 464. To prepare teachers to perform consultation and staff development 
tasks required of resource specialists. Focus: collaborative consultation with other teachers, 
content and format for inservice activities, skills needed when working with decision-making 
groups. 


Teacher Education 185 


530 Graduate Seminar in Giftedness and Creativity (3) 

Prerequisite: Sp Ed 463 or consent of instructor. An examination of varieties of higher cognitive 
functioning and those characteristics or performances described as creativity. Focus on ways 
to enhance skills in analysis, synthesis, evaluation, creative problem solving and divergent 
productions. 

531 Exceptionality: Seminar in Developmental Disabilities (3) 

Prerequisite; Sp Ed 463 or 464 or consent of instructor. Analysis of selected problems in the field 
of developmental disabilities with major emphasis upon independent investigation into contem- 
porary theoretical and research contributions. 

573A Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 463 and 465A. The application of educational practices with the learning 
handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork at selected sites in the community. 

573B Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 464 and 465B. The application of educational practices working with the severely 
handicapped. Seminar and field work at selected sites in the community. 

573C Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 464 and 465C. The application of educational practices with the physically 
handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork at selected sites in the community. 

573D Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Gifted (4) 

Prerequisites: Sp Ed 463 and 465D. The application of educational practices with the gifted. Seminar 
and fieldwork at selected sites in the community. 

574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to graduate status. Economic and social implications of exceptionality. The 
adjustment of the exceptional individual to society. Society's accommodation to the individual. 

575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to graduate status and consent of instructor. Theories, philosophies and 
evaluation strategies: exceptional individuals, critical evaluation of research on exceptionality 
and the consideration of investigatory models for studying exceptionality. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars to develop professional competencies in behavior, teaching strategies, education- 
al technology, program development, communication theory and interpersonal relations. May 
be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Independent inquiry. For qualified graduate students. 

DIVISION OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

faculty 

lames Cusick 
Chair 

Betty jean Barnes, Carol Barnes, Mildred Donoghue, Manuel Escamilla, Peter Facione,* S. Ana 
Garza, Shirley Hill, Emma Holmes, Paul Kane, Bernard Kravitz, Edith McCullough, Eugene 
McGarry, Robert McLaren, Bryan Moffet, Norma Molina, Fraser Powlison, Judith Ramirez,* 
Nancy Reckinger, Morris Sica, Anthony M-Vega 

SECONDARY EDUCATION TEACHING METHODS FACULTY 

l^mes Alexander (Journalism Education), Martha Baker (Music Education), Jean Barrett (Physical 
Education), Gloria Castellanos (Mathematics Education), John Cooksey (Music Education), 
Gerald Cannon (Mathematics Education), Kay Gjerdingen (Music Education), Mary Hartman 
(Journalism Education), Jacqueline Kiraithe (Foreign Languages Education), William Leonard 
(Mathematics Education), Emmet Long (Speech Education), Edith McCullough (Business Edu- 
cation), Sallie Mitchell (Theatre Education), David Pagni (Mathematics Education), Albert 

University administrative officer 


186 Teacher Education 


Porter (Art Education), Nancy Reckinger (Social Science Education), Morris Sica (Social 
Science Education), Eula Stovall (Physical Education), H. Eric Streitberger (Science Education), 
Marjorie Tussing (Foreign Languages Education), John White (English Education), Charles 
Williams (Science Education), jon Zimmermann (Foreign Languages Education) 

The Division of Teacher Education offers programs leading to: (a) a Multiple Subject (Elementary) 
Teaching Credential, including a bilingual emphasis program; (b) a Single Subject (Secondary) 
Teaching Credential; (c) a specialist credential in Bilingual /Cross-cultural Education (Spanish-Eng- 
lish); (d) a Master of Science in Education with a concentration in elementary curriculum and 
Instruction; (e) a Master of Science in Education with a concentration in bilingual-bicultural educa- 
tion (Spanish-English); (f) a Master of Science in Education with a concentration in higher educa- 
tion; and (g) a Master of Science In Education with a concentration In teaching English to speakers 
of other languages (TESOL). The credential programs are centered In the assignment of students to 
public classrooms so that theory and practice are integrated in the study of educational foundations, 
curriculum and methods, and the teaching of reading. The graduate programs expand on the 
theoretical aspects of the functions of educational specialists who deal with current and persistent 
problems and help bring about effective teaching and learning for all children and youth. 
Information about teacher education programs is available in the Division of Teacher Education 
office and the Credential Preparation Center. 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

See "Graduate Programs." 

CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

Curricula in all basic and advanced specialist credential programs meet present requirements set by 
the California Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing and are subject to change by that 
body. Students are advised to contact the Credential Preparation Center for the latest information 
about requirements for basic teaching credential and advanced specialist credential programs of- 
fered by the Division of Teacher Education. 

MULTIPLE SUBJECT CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

A multiple subject credential authorizes service as a teacher In a classroom where many different 
subjects are taught by a single individual. In California, multiple subject classrooms are most often 
found In elementary schools. Requirements for a c/ear multiple subject credential are: (Students may 
be recommended for a preliminary multiple subject credential upon completion of requirements 1 -5. 
Requirements 6-8 must be completed within five years from the date of issuance of the preliminary 
credential.) 

1. A baccalaureate (or higher) degree, except in professional education, from an Institution 
approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. 

2. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester units of work on the provisions and principles 
of the Constitution of the United States or passage of a satisfactory examination. 

3. An approved program of professional preparation, including student teaching. The approved 
professional preparation program at Cal State Fullerton is described below. 

4. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of teaching reading. This requirement 
may be met by passage of a commission-approved reading examination or completion of an 
approved program of study. Ed-TE 433 (Reading Instruction in Public Schools) meets this 
requirement at Fullerton. 

5. Demonstration of competence to teach multiple subjects In one of the following ways: 

a. Passage of the Comnwn Examination of the National Teachers Examination. (Information 
about the NTE is available in the Credential Preparation Center); or 

b. Completion of a program of study approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing as a waiver of the examination. All programs approved as waivers of the 
National Teachers Examination for the multiple subject credential Include a minimum of 84 
semester units of specified course work equally distributed among the following four areas: 
English (including grammar, composition, literature and speech); humanities and the fine 
arts (Including foreign languages); mathematics and the physical or life sciences; and the 
social sciences, other than education and education methodology. 

The following departments and programs at Cal State Fullerton have approved waiver 
programs: American studies, Chicano studies, child development, English, French, German, 


Teacher Education 187 

history, human services, Latin American studies, liberal studies, psychology, sociology, 
Spanish. 

Other departments and programs submit waiver programs for approval on a continuing 
basis. Students should contact the elementary coordinator for Information about additional 
waiver programs. 

6. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper-division or 
graduate level. 

7. Satisfactory completion of a unit requirement in health education (including, but not limited 
to, emphasis on the psychological and sociological effects of abuse of alcohol, narcotics, and 
drugs and of the use of tobacco). At Cal State Fullerton, Ed-TE 314, Health Education 321, or 
Health Education 410 meets this requirement. The health education requirement may be 
completed concurrently with the professional preparation program described below. 

8. Satisfactory completion of training in the needs of, and methods of providing educational 
opportunities to, individuals with exceptional needs. At Cal State Fullerton, Ed-TE 41 1 or Sp Ed 
41 1 meets this requirement. Ed-TE 41 1 may be completed concurrently with the professional 
preparation program described below. 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teaching credential candidates are also 
encouraged to take courses in the Chicano studies, Afro-ethnic studies and American Indian studies 
programs. 

MULTIPLE SUBJECT (ELEMENTARY) PROFESSIONAL PREPARATION PROGRAM 

The multiple subject professional preparation program is a two-semester sequence as follows: 
First Semester: 

Ed-TE 430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (1) 

Ed-TE 430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (3) 

Ed-TE 433 Reading Instruction in the Public Schools (3) 

Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (4) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching (1) 

Second Semester; 

Ed-TE 429 Individualized Instruction (3) 

Ed-TE 430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (2) 

Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (8) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching (2) 

Both semesters of the program entail a commitment from 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. Monday 
through Friday, plus additional time for preparation. 

ADMISSION PROCEDURES AND CRITERIA: Admission to the university does not include admis- 
sion to the multiple subject professional preparation program. Students must apply for admission into 
the multiple subject credential program the semester prior to anticipated enrollment in the program. 
Filing deadlines are February 28 (to begin the program the following fall) and September 30 (to begin 
the program the following spring). 

Applications for admission into the multiple subject professional preparation program are evaluated 
according to the following criteria: 

1. Scholarship (minimum grade-point average of 2.5 in all university and college work). 

2. Breadth of understanding of subject matter relevant to multiple subject instruction. 

3. Proficiency in mathematics, reading comprehension and written and spoken English expres- 
sion. 

4. Specified personality and character traits relevant to teaching. 

5. Experience in working with young people. 

6. Good mental and physical health. 

7. Certificate of clearance with respect to absence of criminal record. 

8. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test. 

Details concerning admission procedures and criteria are available in the Credential Preparation 
Center. 

Admission to the second semester of student teaching is based on continuous and satisfactory 
progress in the program. 


188 Teacher Education 


BILINCUAL-BICULTURAL EMPHASIS PROGRAM 

A multiple subject professional preparation program with a bilingual-bicultural (Spanish-English) 
emphasis is available. Information about this program is available in the Credential Preparation 
Center. 

SINGLE SUBJECT (SECONDARY) CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

A single subject credential authorizes service as a teacher in a classroom in which a single subject 
is taught. 

For purposes of public school planning and staffing, the Commission for Teacher Preparation and 
Licensing has identified fifteen general categories or single subject areas within which subjects 
commonly taught in junior and senior high schools are considered to be subsumed. 

The single subject areas are intended to encompass broad areas of preparation as well as providing 
opportunity for specialization in specific subjects in order to meet the needs of California school 
districts. Assignment of teachers to specific classes depends upon the amount of course work In 
specific subjects as well as the single subject credential held. 

Cal State Fullerton offers professional preparation for the following single subject credentials: art, 
business, English, foreign languages (French, Spanish and German), history, life sciences, mathemat- 
ics, music, physical education, physical science, and social science. 

Requirements for a dear single subject credential are: (Students may be recommended for a 
preliminary s\x\%\e subject credential upon completion of requirements 1-5. Requirements 6-8 must 
be completed within five years from the date of issuance of the preliminary credential.) 

1. A baccalaureate (or higher) degree, except In professional education, from an institution 
approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing. 

2. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester units of work on the provisions and principles 
of the Constitution of the United States or passage of a satisfactory examination. 

3. An approved program of professional preparation, including student teaching. The approved 
professional preparation program at Cal State Fullerton is described below. 

4. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of teaching reading. This requirement 
may be met by passage of a commission-approved reading examination or completion of an 
approved program of study. Ed-TE 440R (Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teach- 
ing) meets this requirement at Cal State Fullerton. This requirement Is optional for candidates 
in art, music, and physical education. 

5. Demonstration of subject matter competence in one of the following ways: 

a. Successful passage of a commission-approved subject matter examination. (Information 
about approved examinations is available in the Credential Preparation Center.) 

b. Completion of a program of study approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing as a waiver of the examination. The following degree programs have options 
which have been approved as waiver programs for the specified single subject credential. 

This approval Is In effect through December 31, 1983. Students wishing to pursue a single 
subject credential after that date should contact the Credential Preparation Center for current 
program listings. 

Degrees with approved waiver program options: 

B.A. in Art (Art Credential) 

B.A. in Business Administration (Business Credential) 

B.A. in Communication (Journalism emphasis; English Credential) 

B.A. in Drama/Theatre (English Credential) 

B.A. in English (English Credential) 

B.A. in Speech (English Credential) 

B.A. in French (Foreign Languages — French Credential) 

B.A. in German (Foreign Languages — German Credential) 

B.A. in Spanish (Foreign Languages — Spanish Credential) 

B.A. in American Studies (History Credential) 

B.A. in History (History Credential) 

B.A. in Biological SciecKe (Life Sciences Credential) 

B.A. in Mathematics (Mathematics Credential) 

B.A. in Music (Music Credential) 

B.S. in Physical Education (Physical Education Credential) 

B.A. in Biological Science (Physical Science Credential) 


Teacher Education 189 


B.A. in Chemistry (Physical Science Credential) 

B.S. in Earth Science (Physical Science Credential) 

B.A. in Physics (Physical Science Credential) 

B.A. In American Studies (Social Science Credential) 

B.A. In Ethnic Studies (Chicano Studies Option) (Social Science Credential) 

B.A. In History (Social Science Credential) 

B.A. in Psychology (Social Science Credential) 

Candidates enrolled prior to June 30, 1975, should consult the Secondary Coordinator concern- 
ing the waiver status of their degree program. AH candidates should consult with departmental 
advisers concerning the waiver program under their degree program. 

6. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper division or 
graduate level. 

7. Satisfactory completion of a unit requirement in health education (including, but not limited 
to, emphasis on the psychological and sociological effects of abuse of alcohol, narcotics, and 
drugs and the use of tobacco). At Cal State Fullerton, Ed-TE 314, Health Education 321 or 
Health Education 410 meets this requirement. The health education requirement may be 
completed concurrently with the professional preparation program described below. 

8. Satisfactory completion of training in the needs of, and methods of providing educational 
opportunities to, individuals with exceptional needs. At Cal State Fullerton, Ed-TE 41 1 or Sp Ed 
41 1 meets this requirement. Ed-TE 41 1 may be completed concurrently with the professional 
preparation program described below. 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teaching credential candidates are also 
encouraged to take courses in the Chicano Studies, Afro-ethnic Studies, and American Indian Studies 
Programs. 

SINGLE SUBJECT (SECONDARY) PROFESSIONAL PREPARATION PROGRAM 

The single subject professional preparation program is a two-semester sequence as follows: 

First Semester 

Ed-TE 440F Supervised Fieldwork In Secondary Schools (2) 

Ed-TE 440R Instruction In Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) (Optional for candi- 
dates In art, music and physical education) 

Ed-TE 440S Foundations of Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Ed-TE 442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) ( Methods class is offered by either the 

major department; e.g., English Education 442; or in the Division of Teacher 
Education: Ed-TE 442.) 

Second Semester 

Ed-TE 449A Student Teaching in the Secondary School (10) 

Ed-TE 449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

(Student teaching and the seminar courses are offered by either the major department; e.g., 
English Education 449A and 449B; or the Division of Teacher Education: Ed-TE 449A and 449B.) 
Both semesters of the program entail a commitment from 8 a.m. to 3 p.m., Monday through 
Friday, plus additional time for preparation. 

The curriculum for the first semester Is a block of courses integrated with fieldwork. Students 
are assigned to specific learning centers, but arrangements can be made for work with master 
teachers outside of the learning center districts. The second semester is a semester of full-time 
student teaching. 

admission procedures AND CRITERIA 

Admission to the university does not Include admission to the single subject professional preparation 
program. Students must apply for admission into the single subject credential program the semester 
prior to anticipated enrollment In the program. Filing deadlines are February 28 (to begin the 
program the following fall) and September 30 (to begin the program the following spring). 
Applications for admission Into the single subject professional preparation program are evaluated 
according to the following criteria: 

1 . Scholarship ( minimum grade-point average of 2.75 in ail college and university work: minimum 
grade-point average of 3.0 in major). 

2. Breadth of understanding of subject matter relevant to single subject instruction. 

3. Proficiency in reading comprehension and written and spoken English expression. 


190 Teacher Education 


4. Specified personality and character traits relevant to teaching. 

5. Work experience with young people. 

6. Good mental and physical health. 

7. Certificate of clearance with respect to absence of a criminal record. 

8. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test. 

Details concerning admission procedures and criteria are available in the Credential Preparation 
Center. 

Admission to the second semester of student teaching is based on continuous and satisfactory 
progress in the program. Evaluations come from cooperating secondary school teachers and faculty 
working with the candidates in the program. Since student teaching is done on a full-time basis, 
student teachers will be limited to one additional course for that semester taken only in the late 
afternoon or evening. 

Within the program of preparation for teaching a single subject it is possible to elect an emphasis 
In teaching in secondary alternative schools; that is, different kinds of public school programs 
designed to meet diverse needs of students, teachers and parents. The student electing the emphasis 
in educational alternatives will be registered in the same courses but will focus much attention on 
current efforts to reform, Improve and revitalize secondary education. Students Interested in the 
secondary alternative schools emphasis may obtain additional Information from the secondary 
coordinator. 

APPLICATION FOR TEACHING CREDENTIALS 

Upon completion of a credential program (multiple subject, single subject, or any specialist or 
services credential) the credential candidate must submit an application to the Commission for 
Teacher Preparation and Licensing through the Cal State Fullerton credential analyst. The credential 
analyst Is located in the Credential Preparation Center. Additional information on the credential 
application process is available in the Credential Preparation Center. 

BILINCUAL/CROSS-CULTURAL SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL (Spanish-English) 

Eligibility for a Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Specialist Credential, authorized by the Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act), is offered through a 30-unit program developed cooperative- 
ly by the Department of Chicano Studies, the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, and 
the School of Human Development and Community Service working with the university's Board of 
Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Studies. The program develops specific competencies for teachers and 
resource personnel In bilingual /cross<ultural programs from kindergarten through the 12th grade. 
The credential program Includes experiences in language and culture of the target population, 
techniques and methods for bilingual /cross-cultural education, linguistics, fieldwork and community 
involvement planned to coordinate with a candidate's personal teaching schedule. 

Admission to the Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Specialist Credential Program 
Admission to the Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Specialist Credential Program requires: 

1. the possession of a teaching credential (elementary or secondary), or concurrent enrollment 
in a program leading to either a single or multiple subject credential; 

2. written and oral knowledge of the Spanish language at the equivalent of a level 2 on the FSI 
at entry and a level 3 on the FSI upon exit. This will be assessed by a formal assessment 
instrument; 

3. passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test; and 

4. a CPA of at least 2.8, both in the major and overall. While It is not required. It is strongly advised 
that candidates have prior experiences with children and youth groups in bilingual communities 
and/or other settings. 

Application information and materials are available In the Credential Preparation Center. 

Program of Study 

The following course work will be developed into a study plan in consultation with an adviser: 

Required: 

Foreign Language Education 443 Methods of Teaching English as a Second Language (3) 
Education 454 Bilingual Education in the United States (3) 

Education 461 Instructional Techniques in Bilingual Education (3) 

Education 462 Fieldwork in Bilingual Education (3) 

Education 463 Spanish Reading and Language Arts (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Applied Linguistics (3) 


Teacher Education 191 


One of the Following: 

Spanish 467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 

Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Select Nine Units from the Following. A maximum of 3 units may be taken at the 300 level. 
Chicano Studies 305 The Chicano Family (3) 

Barrio Studies (3) 

Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

The Chicano Child (3) 

Issues in Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

History of the Chicano (3) 

The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Mexico Since 1906 (3) 


Chicano Studies 306 
Chicano Studies 403 
Chicano Studies 420 
Chicano Studies 430 
Chicano Studies 431 
Chicano Studies 438 
Chicano Studies 445 
Chicano Studies 450 
Chicano Studies 453 


Students who have had equivalent experience prior to entry into the program, should see the 
program coordinator for advice on receiving credit for demonstrated competence. 


TEACHER EDUCATION COURSES 

210 The Teaching Experience: Exploration (3) 

Exploration of one's self In relation to other people In the schools and an encounter with the teaching 
experience, through fieldwork. Accompanying seminar to help students extend their observa- 
tions and explore relevant issues. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) (Credit/no credit only) 

310 The Teaching Experience: Participation (3) 

Active participation in school classrooms and analysis of the experience. Accompanying seminar 
will help students to analyze their fieldwork experiences. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 
May be repeated with consent of instructor. (Credit /no credit only) 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Psychology 101. Human growth and development. Childhood, adolescence and 
middle and old age. Mental, social, emotional and physical development. (Same as Child 
Development 312) 

314 Drugs and Human Development (1) 

Substance abuse in relation to personal development, social stress, and physiological and psycholog- 
ical effects. Methods of exploring values and making decisions in regard to substance abuse. 

331 Infant Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Associate of Arts degree with a major in child development or early childhood educa- 
tion or equivalent. A survey of models and processes for infant education. Procedures for 
enrichment, stimulation of development, and assessing readiness and progress. Intervention 
strategies in relation to developmental processes including linguistic, cognitive, social and 
emotional development. 

335 Educating the Non-English Speaking Parent (3) 

Prerequisite: Associate of Arts degree with a major in child development or early childhood educa- 
tion or equivalent. The role of non-English speaking parents in helping their children be success- 
ful in school. What parents need to be aware of, and what they can do at home and at school. 
How teachers can use parents as teachers. 

^ Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisites: Child Development/ Ed-TE 312 or Psychology 361. The physical growth and social and 
personality development of the human through the sixth year of life. (Same as Child Develop- 
ment 385) 

^ Adolescence (3) 

Prerequisites: Child Development/ Ed-TE 312 or Psychology 361. The physical, social and cultural 
development of human adolescents and youth. Contemporary factors producing change. 
(Same as Child Development 386) 

^ Middle Childhood (3) 

(Same as Child Development 390) 


192 Teacher Education 


401 Social Foundations of Education (3) 

Philosophical, historical and sociological foundations of education; their Influence on contemporary 
educational theory and practice in the United States. 

406 Educational Sociology (3) 

The school in the social order; the school as a social system; analysis of cultural factors affecting 
the school; the special culture of the school; roles and role conflicts in the school; policy 
questions flowing from social issues and school-cultural relationships. 

410 The Teaching Experience: Field Investigation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Field investigation in area of Interest. Needs assessment, study 
proposal, implementation of study and presentation of findings. Accompanying seminar. (4 
hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) (Credit/no credit only) 

411 Mainstreaming for Teachers (3) 

(Same as Special Education 41 1 ) 

429 Individualized Instruction (1-3) 

The principles and operational components of individualized teaching and learning. Classroom 
implementation of individualized Instructional strategies. May be repeated for a maximum 
credit of 3 units. 

430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Children's learning styles, and their overall growth and 
development. To be taken concurrently with Ed-TE 430B,C and 433. 

430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (1-3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Elementary school curricula, instructional materials, 
and teaching techniques. To be taken concurrently with Ed-TE 430A,C, and 433. 

430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Corequisites: Ed-TE 430A,B and 433. Students will serve 
as teacher participants in an assigned elementary school classroom. 

433 Reading Instruction in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. The teaching of reading. The behaviors necessary to 
work with children in public school. 

434 Children's Rights and Services (3) 

Prerequisite: Associate of Arts degree with a major In child development or early childhood educa- 
tion or equivalent. Analysis of the scope of the appropriate role of government vis-^-vis children 
and their families. Outline of framework for the distribution of decisional power among the 
child, the family, and various public and private agencies. 

437 Early Childhood Education (3) 

Current literature and recent research in the education of young children through individual and 
group study. Problems in cognitive processes, content, structure and Instruction at this level. 

439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (4-12) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Corequisite: Ed-TE 439B. 
Participation In a regular elementary school teaching program for the full school day. 

439B Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Corequisite: Ed-TE 439A. 
Seminar In problems and procedures of elementary school teaching. 

440F Supervised Fieldwork in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Observation and participation in Instruction in sec- 
ondary school learning centers 3 hours dally. Fieldwork associated with Ed-TE 440R, 440S and 
442. Taken concurrently with the courses. 

440R Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Instruction In developmental reading for prosfjcctive 
teachers in single subjects. Taken concurrently with Ed-TE 440F, 440S and 442. 

440S Foundations of Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Teaching competencies related to adolescent devel- 
opment, the learning process and diagnosis of learning problems, evaluation of pupil achieve- 
ment, and cultural differences in secondary school youth. Taken concurrently with Ed-TE 440F, 
440R and 442. 


Teacher Education 193 


441 Reading In Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor or student teaching. Strategies and problems of teaching reading 
to young children. Recent research in the fundamental skills of communication among pupils 
in the preschool, kindergarten, and primary grades. Curriculum developments and materials. 

442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Strategies and techniques for teaching a specified 
subject in the secondary school. Required before student teaching In the specified single subject 
credential area. 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School 

Ed>TE 442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School 

Ed‘TE 442S Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School 

Engl Ed 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School 

For Lang Ed 442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School 

Journ Ed 442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School 

Mu Ed 442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School 

Speech Ed 442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School 

Theatre Ed 442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School 

446 School Law for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing or consent of instructor. The legal aspects of professional 
rights and responsibilities of teachers and student teachers. Authority sources; teacher duties 
and responsibilities; employment, termination, certification, contracts, tenure and employee 
relations; and liability of teachers. 

449A,B Student Teaching in the Secondary School and Seminar (10,2) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching In a specified single subject 
credential area. Seminar in problems and procedures of teaching in secondary schools. 

Art Ed 449 Teaching Art in the Secondary School 

Ed-TE 449 Teaching Business in the Secondary School 

Ed-TE 449 Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School 

Engl Ed 449 Teaching English in the Secondary School 

For Lang Ed 449 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School 

Journ Ed 449 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School 

Math Ed 449 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School 

Mu Ed 449 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools 

PE 449 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School 

Sci Ed 449 Teaching Science in the Secondary School 

Speech Ed 449 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School 

Theatre Ed 449 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School 

451 Trends and Issues in Parenting (3) 

Prerequisite: Associate of Arts degree with a major In child development or early childhood educa- 
tion or equivalent. Study of those influences accompanying the complexities of life in a rapidly 
changing world which impact upon traditional patterns of parenting. Diverse patterns of parent- 
ing, including single parenting, alternative modes of response by parents to the problems of 
childrearing. 

452 Practicum in Infant/ Parent Education (4) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 451, Trends and Issues in Parenting and Ed-TE 331, Infant Education. Supervised 
practical experience with parents of infants or young children in selected community settings. 

454 Bilingual Education in the United States (3) 

Prerequisites: some knowledge of bilingual education. The literature, the laws, the history and the 
impact bilingual educational programs have had on the speaker of the foreign languages in the 
United States. 

461 Instructional Techniques in Bilingual Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 454, Foreign Language Ed 443. Purposes, philosophies and concepts of bilingual 
education. Theories of language learning, cultural differences in learning processes and me- 
thodologies of bilingual instruction. 


7—76604 


194 Teacher Education 


462 Fieldwork in Bilingual Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 461. Fieldwork in bilingual settings, for the Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Specialist 
Credential. The student must be enrolled In the second semester of training. 

463 Spanish Reading and Language Arts for the Bilingual Classroom (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 461, knowledge of Spanish (Intermediate level) and postbaccalaureate standing 

or consent of instructor. Theories and methods for Spanish reading instruction. Methods and 
materials for teaching Spanish language arts Including grammar, composition and spelling. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and division prior to registration. 
Individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member. Only students of demonstrated 
capacity and maturity will be approved. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Development and Implementation of Bilingual-Bicultural Curriculum (3) 

Identification and development of bilingual-bicultural curricula relative to Spanish-speaking students. 

Adaptation and modification or existing curricula. Development of units of Instruction for use 
in bilingual-bicultural classrooms. 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Ed-TE 339 or 439A,B or consent of instructor. Theories of 
knowledge, value and reality, and educational problems; contemporary systems of thought and 
education. 

509 Construction, Analysis and Interpretation of Educational Tests (3) 

Prerequisite: enrollment in M.S. Education or consent of instructor. Theory and procedures for 
constructing informal and standardized tests. Measurement theory, statistics and computer 
techniques for testing and interpreting test results. Item writing and analysis of standardized 
tests. 

511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Descriptive statistics and statistical Inferences in educational research. Representative research 
papers. Principles of research design. Prepare papers using research findings. 

526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar: the processes and techniques in 
working with parents, paraprofessionals, specialists and community people. Supervision and 
Interaction with adults. 

527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology: The Human from Conception Through 
Eight Years (3) 

Prerequisites: Ed-TE 312 or equivalent, teaching credential or consent of Instructor. The physical, 
social, cognitive-intellectual and emotional development of human Individuals from conception 
to middle childhood. Current problems, theories and research. 

529 Graduate Studies: Learning Theory for Classroom Use (3) 

Major theoretical positions in planning and interpreting classroom practices. Educational research 
findings, implications for curriculum developments and teaching practices. 

530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Second Languages (3) 

Prerequisites: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar: significant research, curriculum 
developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving second language programs 
including those for English as a second language. 

531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of Instructor. Seminar: significant research, trends and 
problems in teaching the fundamental skills of communication. Curriculum developments and 
materials, and criteria for planning and improving language arts programs. 

532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math Ed 103A, Ed-TE 439A,B or consent of instructor. Seminar: significant research, 
curricular developments and materials, criteria for planning and Improving mathematics pro- 
grams and instruction. 

533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439 A, B, or consent of instructor. Seminar: research in elementary school science. 
The development of materials. 

534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 339 or 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar: research developments and 
materials, criteria for planning and improving social studies programs and current techniques 
of teaching. 


Teacher Education 195 


535 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar: research developments and 
materials, criteria for planning and improving reading programs, and current instructional strate- 
gies. 

536 Curriculum Theory and Development in the Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Seminar: the elementary school curriculum 
including the forces operating on the curriculum and the participants involved in curriculum 
building. The process of curriculum building. 

537 Graduate Studies: Current issues and Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 439A,B, or consent of instructor. Problems and Issues in elementary education, 
their causes and possible solutions. 

538 Graduate Studies: Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar: Application of significant research 
in the education of young children. Current instructional strategies and criteria for planning and 
improving programs in early childhood education. 

539 Clinical Supervision: Analyzing Effective Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential. A systematic, research-based approach. Identifies basic compo- 
nents needed by teachers, staff developers, and administrators to improve their instructional 
skills. Includes principles of learning applied to supervision and applied practice in analyzing 
the instructional process. 

541 Psychological and Sociological Foundations of Bilingual-Bicultural Education (3) 

Application of psychological and sociological theory and techniques to the design of programs of 

instruction for limited and non-Engllsh-speakIng children. The use of these disciplines for the 
development of emotionally and socially supportive learning environments. 

542 Current Issues and Problems in BilinguaUBicultural Education (3) 

Problems and Issues In the development and Implementation of bllingual-bicultural education. 

550 Instructional Strategies (4) 

Prerequisite: baccalaureate degree or consent of Instructor. A general course In pedagogy designed 
for students whose professional work Involves instructional responsibilities. General teaching 
strategies, course design, instructional planning, and student evaluation are emphasized. 

551 Program Evaluation in Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-RP 510 or Ed-TE 511 or equivalent. Methods of evaluating educational programs. 
Analysis of the models, theories, and underlying assumptions of evaluation. Data-gathering 
methods, analysis of data and preparation of reports. 

553 Models of Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Explores varied strategies of instruction, 
culminating in the identification and study of sixteen unique "'models.'' Examines relationships 
among theories of learning and Instruction. Investigates various instructional alternatives. 

591 A Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 538 or consent of Instructor. Provides opportunity to demonstrate instructional 
abilities in working with young children. Also provides opportunity to work with parents, 
professionals and members of the community in early childhood programs. 

591 B Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: Ed-TE 538 and 591 A, or consent of instructor. Provides opportunities to demonstrate 
supervisory, coordinating and administrative abilities in working with children, parents, profes- 
sionals and members of the community in the development of early childhood education 
programs. 

594 Research Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The preparation, evaluation, development, and presentation of 
curriculum research proposals and projects. Individuals and groups will participate in critiquing 
proposals, curriculum projects, and research results. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars in such areas as behavior, teaching strategies, educational technology, program 
development, communication theory and interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 


196 Teacher Education 


598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequsites: a teaching credential and one year of teaching experience. Independent inquiry. 

701 Credential Studies (0) 

For students admitted to teacher education who find it impossible to maintain continuous enrollment 
while completing the 30 units beyond the baccalaureate. 


HUMANITIES AND 
SOCIAL SCIENCES 



198 A fro- Ethnic Studies 


SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES 
AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 

Dean: Don Schweitzer 
Associate Dean: Dennis Berg 


The School of Humanities and Social Sciences is composed of 1 7 departments, five cross-disciplinary 
programs and three special study centers. These units offer programs of study leading to bachelor 
degrees in 23 disciplines and to masters degrees in 19 areas. 

Some of these programs represent traditional areas of intellectual inquiry, others focus on emerging 
topics of study, and still others are professionally oriented. The common elements that unite these 
very different programs are the value of expanding the students' general knowledge, the worth of 
the intellectual pursuits, and the importance of humane inquiry. 

DEPARTMENT OF AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Carl jackson 

Department Chair 
Wacira Gethaiga, Boaz Namasaka 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 
UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAM 

Students majoring in the Afro-ethnic studies program have a special preparation in and sensitivity 
to the black experience as it relates to the life in America as a part of a world community. The 
program is multidisciplinary in nature in that all aspects of Afro-ethnic studies affect and are affected 
by other programs. 

Graduates from the Afro-ethnic studies program have gone into careers in teaching, community 
development, community leadership, social work, urban research, law, civil service, industrial rela- 
tions and a variety of comparable fields. 

Many have gone into graduate work in this field and some have entered more traditional disciplines 
where a general knowledge of social sciences and humanities is prerequisite. 

In addition to the broadly based program in ethnic studies with an option in Afro-American studies, 
the department provides course work in the American Indian experience. 

The purpose of the department is to provide an opportunity for majors and non-majors to become 
specialists in understanding the problems, achievements, contributions and failures of America's 
largest and smallest minority groups; to help these students to academically understand the black 
and native American experiences in the United States and within a world setting in terms of the past 
and contemporary problems and issues, and to enable them to lead effective and constructive lives 
in a culturally pluralistic and rapidly changing society. 

A minor in the Afro-American option is available for students majoring in other academic fields. The 
degree program also is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a variety of needs in 
contemporary higher education: extending opportunities for university education to students who 
have long been under-represented due to cultural differences between their experiences and the 
cultural emphasis of higher education; and revising curriculum and promoting research to give all 
students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of ethnic groups in past and contemporary 
civilizations. 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Afro-Ethnic Studies 103,* 107, and 240A,B or 220 
plus a minimum of 24 units in upper-division courses. 


Afro- Ethnic Studies 199 


Lower-Division Courses 

A. Core Courses (12 units required) 

103 Effective Communication (3)* 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

240A,B Afro-American History (3,3) or 

220 The Indian in American History and either 240A or 240B (6) 

B. Electives 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

255 The Age of Malcolm X (3) 

Upper-Division Courses: 24 units required 

A. Core Courses (18 units required) 

1. Nine units from; 

301 Afro-American Culture {Z) or 
346 The African Experience (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

2. Nine units from: 

311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

335 History of Racism (3) 

385 Schools and Minority Croups (3) 

436 American Indian Religions and Philosophy (3) 

B. Electives (6 units required) 

At least 6 units from the electives indicated below; 

300 Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

315 Pan- African Art (3) 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

334 Equal Employment Opportunity Laws (3) 

352 African Literature (3) 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

422 Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

431 Southwestern Indians (3) 

434 American Indian Education (3) 

440 Comparative Study of European, American and African Literature (3) 

460 Afro-American Music Appreciation (3) 

463 Black Music Ensemble (3) 

483 Black Child and the Educational Systems (3) 

497 Ethnic Internship (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

MINOR IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES 

Students interested in the Afro-American studies minor are required to take a minimum of 21 units. 
This includes six units of lower-division courses including Afro-Ethnic Studies 101 or 107 and an 
additional course. Fifteen units of upper-division courses including Afro-Ethnic Studies 301 and 309 
also must be taken. 

Lower-Division Courses (6 units required) 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) or 
101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

An additional course 

Upper-Division Courses (15 units required) 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) or 
346 The African Experience (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) 

Additional nine units from the upper-division electives 


Note; If the history requirements have been met, alternative courses will be suggested by the 
department adviser. 

* Students can be exempted from Afro-Ethnic Studies 103 by an examination and/or consent of departnr>ent. 


200 Afro-Ethnic Studies 


AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

The persp)ective through which black and brown (people have come to see themselves in terms of 
their own heroes, culture and contributions to societies in which they live and world society 
in general. 

103 Effective Communication (3) 

The basic skills, emphasizing writing and communication skills, stressing the use of idioms, proper 
pronunciation, intonation and correct English patterns. 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

The aims and objectives of the Afro-American studies. The basic terms and references that give 
substance to Afro-American studies. 

108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 108) 

220 The Indian in American History (3) 

A chronological study of the history of the American Indian people and their struggle for survival 
from the pre-European era to present. 

240A Afro-American History to 1885 (3) 

The economic, political and social history of black Americans in the United States, African origins, 
the slave trade, slavery, religion, abolition, slavery and territory and the Civil War. 

240B Afro-American History from 1885 to Present (3) 

The social, economic, political and cultural history of black Americans. The black reconstruction 
role, jim Crow, the relationship between black workers and white workers and labor unions, 
lynching, black protest. World War I, black emigration, the Harlem renaissance, the New Deal, 
World War II, the intensification of the black emigration, the civil rights movement, the Korean 
War, Vietnam War, the black power movement and cultural developments. 

255 The Age of Malcolm X (3) 

The ideas and ideals of Malcolm X; their roots, their impact on local, state, national and international 
levels. Compared with W. E. B. DuBois and Martin Luther King. 

300 Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

Black value systems, double standards, machismo figure, communication barriers caused by prede- 
fined roles, stereotype expectations according to the traditional class status, and their affect on 
individual abilities and self-esteem. 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

African cultural characteristics in the New World and contemporary events. Including art, ideas, 
dance and literature. 

309 The Black Family (3) 

The American social conditions that shaped the black family from the African cultural patterns to 
the family that exists today. The roles of poverty, racism and discrimination. 

311 Intracultural Socialization Patterns (3) 

Patterns of role learning as they vary within subpopulations; changes over time in the values, 
attitudes, and goals of both the general culture and of subcultures; stereotypes and realities; 
understanding and dealing with cultural variation as well as cultural "norms." (Same as Human 
Services 311) 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

Theory and practice of movement of African and Haitian peoples. Movement (dance) as quasi- 
language in perpetuating the life style of African cultures and cultures of African descent. 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

Tribalism in contemporary Indian affairs. Indian self-determination on reservations; political, eco- 
nomic and social lifeways relative to the dominant society: Field trips to local reservations. 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

The diverse philosophies of American Indian leaders; the political, sociological and religious aspects 
of their lives, and the impact on Indian-white relationships. 


American Studies 201 


335 History of Racism (3) 

Racism in terms of the historical roots of that racial phenomenon in American society and the world 
setting. 

346 The African Experience (3) 

African history from the origin of the black man and traditional African civilization through the 
African diaspora to the institutional realities of Africa today. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352 and Comparative Literature 352) 

385 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

The prevailing educational practices in regard to minority groups in elementary school through 
college, including minority students' failure patterns, what is being done to change failures, and 
the outcomes of these practices. 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

The literary contributions by major black American authors. Contemporary black writers and the 
recurring themes of protest and quest for identity. 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

Writing prose, fiction, drama, short stories, book reviews, poetry and essays from the perspective 
of the black experience. 

422 Psychology of the Afro-American (3) 

Black Identity and the life styles that have risen from racism. The socioeconomic, political, cultural 
conditions which have fostered the blackness concept and the psychological devices used by 
blacks to survive. 

431 Southwestern Indians (3) 

Indian tribes of the Southwestern United States; Anasazi, Mogollon and Hobokam. Cultural changes 
and assimilation. 

434 American Indian Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Afro-Ethnic Studies 220 and 331 or consent of instructor. Legislation which affects 
education. Field activities. Observations in public and government facilities. 

436 American Indian Religions and Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: Afro-Ethnic Studies 331 or consent of instructor. Examination of American Indian 
religious and philosophic perspectives. Survey of religious interpretations and thought in various 
facets of belief ranging from traditional Indian religion to Christianity. Contemp>orary religious 
activities will be highlighted. 

460 Afro-American Music Appreciation (3) 

Black music in America; the sociological conditions that help produce various forms of black music. 

483 Black Child and the Educational System (3) 

The cultural impact of traditional American educational system upon the black child. Civil rights acts 
and the black child; separate and equal doctrine, desegregation school plan. Article 3.3, the Stull 
Act, and sociological and psychological problems in the black community. 

497 Ethnic Internship (3) 

Career opportunities in industry and social services. Students work up to 20 hours per week and meet 
weekly for guidance. Supervision by instructor and cooperating agencies. Can be repeated for 
credit. (Same as Chicano Studies 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and acceptance of the subject by department chair and Instructor directing 
the study. 

DEPARTMENT OF AMERICAN STUDIES 

FACULTY 
John Ibson 
Department Chair 

Allan Axelrad, Jesse Battan, Wayne Hobson, Karen Lystra, Michael Steiner, E. James Weaver, Leila 
Zenderland 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

American studies Is a field that intensively examines the American cultural environment, past and 
present. The B.A. program is built around a core of work In the discipline of American studies itself 
but it requires work in related fields to discover the relationships among disciplines as they analyze 
the American experience. At the center of American studies training is the analysis of culture, that 


202 American Studies 


complex system of belief, behavior, symbols and material objects through which Americans give 
meaning to their lives. 

American studies is sound preparation for careers ih which a thorough understanding of American 
culture Is Important, such as law, government, business, journalism, library work and other services. 
The B.A. program also serves as a foundation for advanced study at the graduate level. 

Two alternative programs are available and consultation with a department advisor is essential to 
plan a rewarding course of study. The major consists of 36 units distributed between the core 
program and either Plan a or b: 

I. Core program (12 units) required of all majors. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

301 The American Character (3) 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

401 Prosemlnar in American Studies (3) 

II. Alternative plans (24 upper>division units in either plan — electives in American studies in 
conjunction with approved work In other departments) 

a. Work in American studies and one or two other fields related to the American experience 
such as history, sociology, literature, political science, anthropology and psychology. 

b. Course work pursuing a particular theme or subject such as law and society, ethnicity in 
America, the child and the family, American sex roles, urbanization. 

American Studies 350 fulfills the course requirement of the university upper-division baccalaureate 
writing requirement for American studies majors. 

MINOR IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The minor in American studies requires 21 units: American Studies 201, 301 or 345, and 401, plus 
12 units of electives. Six units may be lower division and three units may be taken In a related 
department upon approval of an American Studies Department adviser. 

THE DOUBLE MAJOR: AMERICAN STUDIES AND ANOTHER FIELD 

All American studies majors must include course work from another department; consequently, a 
double major is easy to arrange. 

AMERICAN STUDIES AS PREPARATION FOR A TEACHING CREDENTIAL 

The American studies major has been approved for the multiple subject credential option of the 
Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). The major has also been approved for 
the single subject credential option in history and the single subject credential option in social 
sciences. Students who have properly selected their undergraduate courses are eligible for a waiver 
which excuses them from taking the State Licensing Examination for a credential. Contact the 
Department of American Studies for further Information. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

See "'Graduate Programs." 


AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Culture Studies: American Studies as Interdisciplinary Social Science (3) 

The concepts of interdisciplinary culture studies, focusing on analysis of cultural change in complex, 
literate society. American culture, including cross-cultural comparisons. Topics Include popular 
culture, subcultures, regionalism, myths and symbols, and culture and personality. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

With the concept of culture as a unifying principle, focus Is on four separate time periods in order 
to provide the framework for an understanding of American civilization. Several different kinds 
of documents will be used to illustrate the nature and advantages of an Interdisciplinary ap- 
proach. 

300 Introduction to American Popular Culture (3) 

An historical exploration of popular culture in America as it both reflects and contributes to the 
search for meaning in everyday life. Themes include heroes, myths of success, symbols of 
power, images of romance, consumerism, race, and sexual identity. 


American Studies 203 


301 The American Character (3) 

Cultural environment and p>ersonality. The extent to which there have been and continue to be 
distinctly American patterns of belief and behavior. Similarities, as well as class, ethnic, sex and 
regional differences among Americans. 

318 Hollywood and America: Using Film as a Cultural Document (3) 

An examination of Hollywood as a cultural institution. Concentrating on the films of selected p)eriods, 
analyzes Hollywood's ability to create and transmit symbols and myths, and legitimize new 
values and patterns of behavior. 

325 30's America Through Films (3) 

A cultural history of Depression America using contemporary films as one measure of that culture. 
The relationship between social values and institutions and popular arts. Hollywood produc> 
tions such as King Kong and Duck Soup will be shown. 

333 Visual Arts in Contemporary America (3) 

Visual phenomena in America as they reveal changes in recent American culture. Areas covered 
include the "high" arts (painting, sculpture) as contrasted with the "low" arts (advertising, 
television); the artist as innovator, alienation, the business world, and American values in art. 

345 The American Dream (3) 

An Interdisciplinary analysis. In settings both historical and contemporary, of the myth and reality 
surrounding the notion of America as a land of unparalleled and unlimited possibilities, especial- 
ly In the achievement of p)ersonal material success. 

346 American Culture Through Spectator Sports (3) 

Study of the shifting meaning of organized sports in changing American society. Includes analysis 
of sports rituals, symbols and heroes. Focus is on the cultural significance of amateur and 
professional football, baseball and basketball. 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or consent of instructor. To provide an understanding 
and appreciation of methodology, theories of society and images of man as they affect Ameri- 
can studies contributions to scholarship. Fulfills the course requirement of the university upper- 
division baccalaureate writing requirement for American studies majors. 

355 American Sexual Politics (3) 

Why sexuality has become Increasingly Important in American culture and politics. Historical and 
contemporary reform and the current sexual counter-reform movement (Involving issues such 
as abortion and gay rights). 

360 Cultural Radicalism in America (3) 

The designs and strategies for cultural transformation of selected radical groups and individuals from 
the Puritans to the present. 

386A American Social History, 1750-1860 ( 3) 

(Same as History 386A) 

386B American Social History, 1865-1930 ( 3) 

(Same as History 386B) 

393 American Humor (3) 

Analyzes the cultural significance of various types of American humor in past and present settings. 
How humor reinforces existing culture and also serves as an index and agent of cultural change. 
Humor's relationship to ethnicity, region, social class and sex. 

395 The American West in Symbol and Myth (3) 

The meaning of the West to American culture through analysis of cultural documents such as 
explorer and captivity narratives, fiction, art and film. Topics include: perception of wilderness, 
Indians, frontiersmen and role of West in creating a sexist national mythology. 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or consent of Instructor. The relationship between 
theory and application. Analytic readings and research. Check the class schedule for topics 
being considered. May be repeated for credit. 

405 Images of Crime and Violence in American Culture (3) 

Cultural analysis of meanings ascribed to law and order, authority, violence and punishment In the 
American past and present. Examined in selected symbols, images, traditions, and realities, 
including: the gun, police, vigilantes, "hard-boiled detectives," "romantic outlaws," and "crime 
waves." 


204 Anthropology 


411 The White Ethnic in America (3) 

Past and present cultures of America's white ethnic groups, principally non-Anglo-Saxon people 
such as the Jews, Irish and Italians. Ethnic stereotypes, the survival, repression and loss of 
ethnicity. 

412 Freedom and Repression in American Culture (3) 

Focuses on pre-industrial American culture, comparing features of modern industrial American 
culture to that earlier "world we have lost." Topics include: privacy, social control, sexual 
expression, technology and change. 

413 The Shifting Role and Image of the American Male (3) 

The effect of economic, social, political and cultural changes on American males. Emphasis on the 
19th and 20th centuries. 

415 The Hero in American Popular Culture (3) 

Nineteenth- and 20th-century materials. Including dime novels, pulps, detective fiction, comic strips, 
and films, will be utilized to examine the role of the hero In American imagination. 

416 Southern California Culture: A Study of American Regionalism (3) 

Regionalism as a concept and as a fact of American life. Theories of regionalism measured against 
a study of Southern California and one other distinct American region. 

420 Childhood and Family in American Culture (3) 

Historical and contemporary culture study of childhood and family in America. The idea of child- 
hood, changing concepts of child-rearing, growing up in the American past, the impact of 
modernization, mother and home as dominant cultural symbols. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

(Same as English 425) 

450 Women in American Society (3) 

Socio-cultural history of women and women's movements in American society. Emphasis on 19th 
and 20th centuries. Examination of cultural models of American womanhood — maternal, do- 
mestic, sexual, social — their development and recent changes. 

498 American Studies Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior standing and consent of faculty supervisor. Work experience in the 
public or private sector related to the student's preparation in systematic study of American 
culture. Hours to be arranged. Limited to American studies majors only. 

499 Independent Study (1>3) 

Supervised research projects in American studies to be taken with the consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

501 The Search for Method in American Studies: Concept and Culture (3) 

The American studies movement. Its conceptual and methodological development. The way this 
development was affected by and in turn reflected larger trends in the culture itself. 

502 Graduate Colloquim in American Studies: Selected Topics (3) 

A particular problem or topic as a case study in the use of interdisciplinary methods in American 
studies. May be repeated for credit. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in American studies and consent of graduate coordinator. The writing 
of a thesis based on original research and its analysis and evaluation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in American studies and consent of graduate coordinator. May be 
repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

FACULTY 
Roger Joseph 
Department Chair 

Alleen Baron, Marlene Dobkin de Rios, LeRoy Joesink-Mandeville, Hans Leder, Jacob Pandlan, CHto 
Sadovszky, Richard See, Judy Suchey, Wayne Uptereiner, Corinne Wood 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The required minimum for the major is 45 semester units (in addition to those units taken for the 
general education requirement). Anthropology 101, 102, 103, 3(X), 480 and 481 are required. Of the 
remaining 27 units, a minimum of three units must be within the category of anthropology courses 
listed as "core topics," a minimum of three units from the category "area topics," a minimum of 
three units from the category "methods"; nine to 18 additional units of upper-division courses in 
anthrop)ology, and zero to nine units of upper-division courses in related fields. 


Anthropology 205 


Lower Division: Required 9 units 

Anthropology 101, 102, 103 

Upper-division entry course: Required 3 units 

Anthropology 300 

Core Topics: Required 3 units 

Anthropology 302, 303, 305, 306, 308, 309 

Area Topics: Required 3 units 

Anthropology 321, 324A, 324B, 325, 326, 327, 328, 340, 345, 346, 347, 349, 352, 353, 

360, 373, 395 

Methods: Required 3 units 

Anthropology 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406 

Anthropology 480: Required 3 units 

Anthropology 481: Required 3 units 

Additional Units: Required 9-1 8 units 

All upp>er-divlslon courses in anthropology, including specialized topics (Anthropology 
416, 417, 418, 432, 436, 440, 441, 442, 450). These courses must be selected in 
consultation with the adviser. 

Related Fields: Required 0-9 units 

These courses must be selected in consultation with the student's adviser; no related 
field courses will be counted toward the major requirements unless they have the 
approval of the adviser. 

Total 45 units 


Note: In anthropology courses, the 300 level is used for core and area, and 400 level 
is used for methods and specialized topics courses. This numbering system does 
not imply different levels of difficulty and complexity. Students are urged to select 
courses in any order from any of these categories that will best serve their interests 
and needs. 

MINOR IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The minor in anthropology is Intended as a second field for persons completing a major In another 
discipline. Twenty-one units must be taken In anthropology; 15 of these in upper division courses. 
Anthropology 101 (or 103), 102 and 480 are required. Two additional courses must be selected from 
area topical courses, such as Anthropology 321, 324A, 3248, 325, 326, 327, 328, 340, 345, 346, 347, 
349, 352, 360, 373 and 395. Another course must be selected from core topical courses such as 
Anthropology 302, 303, 305, 306, 308 and 309; or from specialized topical courses such as An- 
thropology 416, 417, 418, 432, 436, 440, 441, 442, 450. A final course must be either Anthropology 
401 or 481 . 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

See "Graduate Programs." 


ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES 

100 Non-Western Cultures and the Western Tradition (3) 

An examination of the changing views of man, nature and culture In Western civilization as related 
to the Impact of non-Western influences, including the use and interpretation of data on 
non-Western peoples and cultures. 

101 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) (Formerly 201) 

Humans as biological organisms and In evolutionary perspective. Concepts, methods, findings and 
Issues in the study of the order primates, including the relationships between fossil monkeys, 
ap)es and humans, and the significance of genetic diversity between modern populations. 

102 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) (Formerly 202) 

The nature of culture and its significance. Uniformities and variations in human cultures. Cultural 
analyses of major institutional forms such as the family, economy, government, religion and art 
with an emphasis on preliterate F)eoples. Central problems of cultural comparison and interpre- 
tation. 


206 Anthropology 

103 Introduction to Archaeology (3) (Formerly 203) 

Relationship of archaeology, culture history and culture process, field methods and analysis of 
archaeological data; the uses and abuses of archaeology. World culture history from Pleistocene 
beginnings to the threshold of civilization. 

104 Traditional Cultures of the World (3) 

A comparative, worldwide survey of traditional, selected and well-studied ways of life using ethno- 
graphic writings, novels and films. Examines representative bands, tribes, chiefdoms, primitive 
states and folk societies. 

300 Language and Culture (3) (Formerly 410) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 102 or consent of Instructor. Language as a factor in culture. Trends in 
the study of language and culture. (Same as Linguistics 300) 

302 Culture and Personality: Psychological Anthropology (3) (Formerly 415) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. The relationship between the individual and 

the culture. Child training in nonwestern cultures. Survey of concepts, studies, and research 
techniques. 

303 Economic Anthropology (3) (Formerly 430) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. The ethnology and ethnography of econom- 
ic life, principally in non-Western societies; the operation of systems of production and distribu- 
tion within diverse cultural contexts. 

305 Anthropology of Religion (3) (Formerly 421) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Beliefs and practices in the full human 
variation of religious phenomena, with an emphasis on primitive religions. The forms, functions, 
structures, symbolism, and history and evolution of religious systems. (Same as Religious Studies 
305) 

306 Comparative Aesthetics and Symbolism (3) (Formerly 423) 

The metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the ''grammars'' of the art, poetry, languages, 
myths, music and rituals of various nonliterate and literate peoples and their development into 
creative experiences. 

308 Culture Change (3) (Formerly 460) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Interrelations between cultural, social and 
psychological processes in the dynamics of culture growth and change. Impact of western 
technology on tribal and peasant societies. Anthropological contributions to the planning of 
directed sociocultural change in selected areas. 

309 Applied Anthropology (3) (Formerly 462) 

The uses of anthropological skills and sensitivities in approaching contemporary human problems. 
Cultural change, organizational development, program planning and evaluation, the consul- 
tant's role, and professional ethics. 

321 The American Indian (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. North American Indians north of Mexico; 
origins, languages, culture areas, cultural history; the impact of European contacts. 

324A The Ancient Maya (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. The archaeology and ethnohistory of the 
Maya area of Southern Mesoamerica. The problems of initial settlement of the area and the 
"rise" and dynamics of ancient Maya civilization. 

324B The Aztecs and Their Predecessors (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Archaeological survey of principal 
Mesoamerica pre-Columbian cultures north and west of Maya area. The Aztecs and their 
predecessors, religion, art architecture, intellectural achievements and the Olmec heritage. 

325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of Instructor. Central and South America. Representative 
cultural areas before and after contacts with Western countries. 

326 Archaeology of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Archaeological and ethnohlstorical survey 
of the culture areas and ecological zones of South America, lower Central America and the West 
Indies, including Inca civilization and its origin, possible trans-oceanic contact, religion, medi- 
cine and technology. 


Anthropology 207 


327 Origins of Civilizations (3) 

The development of civilization in both the Old and New Worlds In primary centers such as 
Mesopotamia, Egypt, the Indus Valley, China, Mesoamerica and Peru, and secondary centers 
such as the Aegean and Europe. 

328 Peoples of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Africa. Description of 
selected cultures and aspects of culture before and after contact with non-Africans. 

340 Peoples of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. A survey of Asian civilizations and cultural 
traditions, emphasizing the study of the personality configurations in different culture areas, the 
analysis of the structure of Aslan civilizations, and an examination of the peasant, tribal and 
ethnic groups of Asia. 

345 Peoples of the Middle East and North Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of Instructor. Interrelationship between culture, economy, 
political structure and belief system of selected cultures In the Middle East and North Africa. 

346 Archaeology of the Holy Land (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 103 or consent of instructor. Culture history of ancient Palestine from the 
Paleolithic to historic times. Changes in settlement patterns, resource base, and sociopolitical 
organization. 

347 Peoples of the Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. The Indigenous peoples and cultures of the 
Pacific Islands, including Tahiti, Hawaii and Australia. The forces and processes contributing to 
social change in Island communities and current problems being faced by them. 

349 California Archaeology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 101 or 103 or consent of Instructor. An archaeological survey of Califor- 
nia, emphasizing the examination of recent scientific excavations. Analysis of new archaeologi- 
cal methods, current research specializations, responsibilities of the modern archaeologist, and 
review of legislation affecting archaeology. 

352 Peoples of Ancient Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of Instructor. The cultural and social institutions of the 
peoples of pre-Christian Europe. The Creek, Italic, Germanic and Celtic peoples. Readings from 
original ancient writers. 

353 Peoples of Europe (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Culture areas in modern and historical 
perspective, including the origins of European religious beliefs, the folkloristic tradition and 
nationality, the rural-urban conflict, and the effects of the totalitarian systems on traditional 
peasant societies. 

360 Contemporary American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Application of anthropological methods, 
categories of analysis, and types of interpretation to American culture. Survey and critique of 
selected community studies and other kinds of relevant research. 

373 Health and Nutrition in the Third World (3) 

Traditional beliefs and practices related to health and nutrition in Third World cultures. Conflicts 
between tradition and attempts to introduce new approaches. 

395 Archaeological Fieldwork in Israel (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 103 or consent of instructor. Archaeological field course in Israel, stress- 
ing excavation, mapping, recording, and pottery and tool classification, description and registra- 
tion. May be repeated for credit. 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 102 and six additional units of anthropology or consent of instructor. 
Anthropological field research by students on various problems using participant observation 
techniques. 

402 Museum Science (3) 

Methods, principles and techniques used in natural history, and small scientific and historical 
museums. Subjects covered include scope of exhibit and research collections, care and repair 
of specimens, acquisitions, storage, and preparation of presentations in anthropological, histori- 
cal, biological and paleontological museums. 


208 Anthropology 


403 Archaeological Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 102 or 103 and consent of instructor. Excavation of a local archaeologi- 
cal site. Archaeological mapping, photography and recording. Laboratory methods of catalog- 
ing, preservation, description and interpretation of archaeological materials. Saturday field 
sessions. May be repeated once for credit as an elective. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

404 Analytical Methods in Archaeology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 103 and 403. The employment of physical data collecting techniques 
(e.g., photographic, palaeo-magnetic ) in the field and the analysis of artifact collections and 
data from previous field operations in the laboratory. May be repeated once for credit as an 
elective. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

405 Human Osteology (3) (Formerly 444) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques in the basic Identification of human skeletal remains. 
Aging, sexing, racing, and stature reconstruction. For those interested in archaeology, hominid 
evolution and/or forensic science. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 406) 

416 Anthropological Linguistics (3) (Formerly 409) 

Nature and functions of language; language structure and change; classification of languages; use of 
linguistic evidence in anthropology. (Same as Linguistics 416) 

417 Life Quests (3) 

Contemfxjrary ways to wisdom and humanness In cross<ultural and historical perspectives. New 
and comparative approaches to understanding the life cycle, development and fulfillment of 
individual personalities. 

418 Mental Illness in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Problems in the cross-cultural definition and treatment of mental illness. Cross-cultural perspectives 
on symptomatology and etiology, culture bound disorders, the folk healer, and the relationship 
between cultural change and mental disorders. 

432 Woman in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102. The influence of biological determinants as they are shaped by 
cultural beliefs, values, expectations and socially defined roles for women. The changing role 
of women in industrial society. 

436 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

jazz — its primitive and European roots; cross-cultural description of improvisation. Lectures, demon- 
strations, some concerts. 

440 Human Evolution (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 101. Advanced primate evolution; the origin of Homo sapiens as evi- 
denced In the fossil record and through biochemical and molecular studies. Evolutionary theory 
and problems In human evolution. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

441 Human Variation (3) (Formerly 370) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 101. The processes underlying and the theories for the existence of the 
present variation between and within human populations. The genetics of human populations 
and the significance of racial classifications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

442 Medical Anthropology (3) 

Human health and disease and their relationship to cultural practices, beliefs and environmental 
factors; histories of various diseases as factors of cultural change; health care delivery systems. 
(2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

450 Culture and Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or Ed-TE 301 or consent of instructor. The transmission of values, 
implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of education in cross-cultural perspective. 
American culture and development problems. 

480 History of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of Instructor. The principal contributions of anthropolo- 
gists 1850-1950; evolutionary, diffusionist, historical, particularist, configurationalist, and culture 
and personality approaches in anthropology. 

481 Contemporary Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 102 or consent of instructor. Anthropologists from 1950 to the present; 
neoevolutionist, sociological, structuralist, psychological and symbolic approaches. 


Chicano Studies 209 


490 Undergraduate Seminar in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Topics in anthropology. May be repeated for credit. 

491 Internship in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: 18 upper division units in anthropology and/or related fields. Career opportunities. 

On-the-job training under faculty supervision In museum, industry or governmental service. 
499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 15 units of anthropology and consent of adviser. Individual research project 
involving either library or fieldwork. Conferences with the adviser as necessary. Results in one 
or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Seminar: Methodology of Anthropological Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 102, 401 and consent of instructor. The contemporary methodological 
spectrum in anthropology and new trends in research planning and implementation. 

502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 480 or consent of Instructor. The basic assumptions and theoretical 
positions of leading contemporary anthropologists. 

504 Seminar. Selected Topics in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of undergraduate major In anthropology and/or graduate standing or 
consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of the seminar is circulated prior 
to registration. May be repeated. 

505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 505) 

507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 507) 

508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 508) 

592 Field Methods in Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 592) 

597 Project (3, 6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. The completion of a project derived from 
original field or laboratory research, and/or on library study. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

598 Thesis (3, 6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of Instructor. The writing of a thesis based on original 
field or laboratory research, and/or on library study, and Its analysis and evaluation. May be 
repeated for credit to a maximum of 6 units. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. Individual research involving fieldwork, laboratory, or library study, 
and conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting in one or more papers. May 
be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF CHICANO STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Isaac Cardenas 
Department Chair 

Dagoberto Puentes, Adolfo Ortega, Joseph Platt 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE CHICANO STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 

The degree program In Chicano studies fulfills a variety of needs in contemporary higher education: 
to educate students to the culture, language, education, history, politics, and socioeconomics of the 
Chicano p)opulation in the United States. 

The program emphasizes preparation for: ( 1 ) those interested in bilingual-bicultural education to 
meet elementary, secondary and cross-cultural specialist credentials; (2) students pursuing ad- 
vanced degrees (M.A. and Ph.D.); (3) those entering a variety of occupations In urban affairs, 
government, social work, school administration, counseling, business, criminology, law, foreign 
service and other related areas; and (4) majors In other academic fields such as liberal studies, 
history, sociology, psychology, literature, anthropology, who wish to include additional scope to 
their field. 

The Chicano studies option consists of 36 units of which a minimum of 27 units must be upper 
division. Students must consult with their advisers to develop an approved study plan. 


210 Chicano Studies 


Units 


Lower Division 6 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Upper Division 9 

(to be selected from the following) 


430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Electives 21 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

316 The Chicano Music Experience (3) 

335 Curanderismo: Chicano-Mexican Folk Medicine (3) 

336 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

360 Chicano and the Law (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

406 La Chicana (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 ( 3) 

438 Issues in Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Total 36 

MINOR IN CHICANO STUDIES 

The minor in Chicano studies consists of 24 units in the following areas: 

Required lower-division courses (6 units) 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Required upper-division courses (6 units) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Approved electives 

Twelve units of approved course work In lower- and upper-division classes that are selected by the 
adviser. 

TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The B.A. in Chicano studies is approved by the State Board of Education for those candidates seeking 
a single subject or multiple subject (Ryan) teaching credential. The department is approved for 
waiver of the examination requirement for Chicano studies major with a multiple subject credential 
objective. 


Chicano Studies 211 


This single subject waiver program has been approved by the Commission for Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing through December 31, 1983. Students wishing to pursue a single subject credential 
In this area after that date should contact the department office for current Information. 

An adviser in the department and in the Division of Teacher Education should be consulted for 
information. 

THE BILINGUAL/CROSS-CULTURAL SPECIALIST CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

Requirements for this credential are described in a brochure available at the offices of the Depart- 
ment of Chicano Studies, the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, or the School of 
Human Development and Community Service. The Chicano studies component of the specialist 
credential program requires nine units from the following Chicano studies courses: 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

438 Issues in Bilingual /Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Advanced Study 

Chicano studies offers courses for advanced study in the following graduate degree programs at 
California State University, Fullerton: 

M.A. Social Sciences 

M.S. Education: Bilingual/Bicultural Concentration 
M.A. Spanish: Bilingual Studies Concentration 


CHICANO STUDIES COURSES 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

The basic communication skills including oral and written expression. A unit on the mechanics of 
writing and reporting on a term paper. 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

The role of the Chicano In the United States. The Chicano's cultural values, social organization, 
urbanization patterns, and the problems in the area of education, politics and legislation. 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

The basic characteristics of the Mexican, especially the Chicano society and culture. From 1519 to 
the present. Emphasis on the arts, literature and history of Mexico and the Chicano In the United 
States. 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

Analysis of the Cal6 language of the southwestern states of the United States. The bicultural language 
of the Chicanos, origin, development and contemporary use In the barrios. 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

A historical and cultural survey of the principal pre-Columbian cultures of Mexico and their signifi- 
cance for Mexican society. 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

The Chicano family development as an American social institution. Historical and cross-cultural 
perspectives. The socio- and psychodynamics of the Chicano family. 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 200 or 220 or consent of instructor. The major characteristics of the 
barrio. Supervised fieldwork in the barrio is required. Analysis of the barrio or agency wil be 
made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 306. The major characteristics of the barrio and supervised fieldwork 
in the local barrios. An analysis of the barrio or agency will be made after fieldwork is com- 
pleted. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 


212 Chicano Studies 


316 The Chicano Music Experience (3) 

Mexican folk and popular music and its relation to the culture which produced it. The pre-Cortesian 
period to the present in Mexico and in the Southwestern United States. 

335 Curanderismo: Chicano-Mexican Folk Medicine (3) 

The nature of Mexican folk medicine. Ethno-medicine and culture in Mexico and the Southwest. The 
underlying aspects of modern and folk medicine. 

336 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

The main currents of Spanish American literature emphasizing contemporary works. The relation 
between the artistic expression and the ideological values of the period. 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 101 or 106, or 220, or 237, or consent of instructor. The modern 
Chicano writers in the United States: Allurlsta, Corky Gonzales, Octavio Romano, el treatro 
campesino and the major Chicano magazines and newspapers. 

360 Chicanos and the Law (3) 

The relationship between Chicanos and the legal and judicial system. Including the administration 
of justice, Chicano-pollce relations, and Chicanos and the prison system. Guest speakers will 
be a regular feature. 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

The cultural conflicts in Mexico as seen by the contemporary thinkers of Mexico and the United 
States. Urban and rural problems. 

406 La Chicana (3) 

The cultural influences that the family, religion, economic status and community play upon the 
lifestyles, the values and the roles held by Chicanas. 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

To improve the oral expression of teachers in the barrio elementary schools. The language patterns 
of the Chicano students and their parents. 

430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

Survey and analysis of the NahautI, Mexican and Chicano literature from the pre-Columbian period 
to the present. 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

The Chicano child from preschool through grade six. Motor, physical, social. Intellectual and emo- 
tional growth and development and their effect on school adjustment and achievement. Obser- 
vation of preschool and grade school children. 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

The Chicano adolescents' social, intellectual and emotional growth and development. The bicultural 
pressures from the barrio, family structure, school and achievement values. 

433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 

The literature of Mexico since 1940: Carlos Puentes, Luis Spota, Rodolfo Usigli, Xavier Villarrutia, Juan 
Jose Arreola, Octavio Paz, Roberto Blanco Moheno and Luis G. Basurto. 

438 Issues in Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Education (3) 

The Chicano community involvement in issues of bilingual-bicultural education. Chicano education, 
literature, legislation, court decisions, political issues and programmatic efforts. 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

Prerequisite: reading knowledge of Spanish and Chicano Studies 237 and 302 recommended. The 
emergence of the Chicano movement dealing with political, economic and sociological facets. 
The writings of the NahautI, Spanish, Spanish-American, Chicano and contemporary writers. 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

History of the Chicano from the pre-Columbian period to the present. The Chicanos' changing role 
in the United States, their cultural identity crisis and their achievements. 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

The socioeconomic and political problems confronting the Chicano including proposed solutions. 
The effect that social institutions have had on the Chicano community. 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division class standing. The Mexican Revolution of 1910 stressing the political, 
economic and social aspects as well as Its contributions In the fields of art, literature and social 
reforms. 


Communications 213 


460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Theory of urban politics and evaluation of issues that affect the Chicanos and American society. 
Evaluations and surveys will be made on political organizations in the Hispanic-surnamed 
communities. 

480 The Immigrant and the Chicano (3) 

Mexican immigration to the United States and its social, economic and political impacts on the 
Chicano and non-Chicano communities and other immigrant groups. 

497 Ethnic Internship (3) 

(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and approval by the department chair and instructor (s) in charge of 
directing the study. An opportunity to do independent study under the guidance of the faculty, 
of a subject of special Interest to the student. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor and classified status. Individual research for Chicano studies 
components in M.A. in Bilingual Studies (Spanish) M.S. in Bilingual Education (Education) and 
related programs. Maximum of 3 hours credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

FACULTY 
Edgar Trotter 
Department Chair 

Michael Adams, James Alexander, Kenward Atkin, Stephen Berman, Fenton Calhoun, Douglas 
Covert, Wendell Crow, Ronald Dyas, Lynne Cross, Mary Lynn Hartman, Terry Hynes, Carolyn 
Johnson, Raynolds Johnson, David Little, George Mastrolanni, R. Dean Mills, Norman Nager, 
Emma (Dshagan, Wayne Overbeck, Patrick Parsons, Rick Pullen, Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe, 
Don Sunoo, Larry Ward 

Effective ethical communications are essential for the well-being of a democratic society. Thus there 
is a need for persons trained in the theory and practice of informing, instructing, and persuading 
through communications media. The educational objectives of the programs leading to the Bachelor 
of Arts in Communications are: (1 ) to ensure that all majors receive a broad liberal education; (2) 
to provide majors with a clear understanding of the role of communications media in society; and 
(3) to prepare majors desiring communicatlons-related careers In the mass media, business, govern- 
ment and education by educating in depth in one of the specialized sequences within the depart- 
ment. 

A master of arts program in communications provides advanced study In communications and 
related disciplines for those seeking professional careers in teaching, research, and mass media. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take 1 2 units of core requirements in addition to 24 units 
in a chosen sequence. The department offers five sequences to choose from: advertising, news- 
editorial, photocommunications, public relations, and radio-television-film. 

The major totals 36 units. 

Collateral requirements: Twelve units of upper-division course work in other departments approved 
by the adviser are also required. Collateral courses for each sequence are recommended by the 
sequence coordinator. 

A minimum of 65 percent of the total units taken before graduation must be taken outside the 
Communications Department. 

COMMUNICATIONS CORE 

The communications core provides background and perspective appropriate to aJI the departmental 
sequences and an understanding of the role of communicators and their contribution to the develop- 
nient of high standards of professionalism. 

Nine units of required course work: 

Com 233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Com 407 Communications Law (3) 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

Plus three units selected from the following: 

Com 410 Principles of Communications Research (3) 


214 Communications 


Com 426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Com 427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Com 428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Com 431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 
Com 480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Com 481 Mass Communication and Conflict (3) 


COMMUNICATIONS SEQUENCES 

Every communications major must select and complete 24 units of course work in a major sequence. 

ADVERTISING 

The objective of the advertising sequence is to prepare students for entry level positions in one or 
more of the four basic advertising activities: creative (copy, layout design), media, research, and 
management. Students are provided with knowledge and skills needed for work with an advertiser, 
advertising agency, the print and broadcast media, or support service industry. 

Com 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Com 350 Introduction to Advertising (3) 

Com 352 Advertising Media (3) 

Com 353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Com 358 Graphics Communications (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Com 450 Advertising Communications Management (3) 

Plus three units selected from the following: 

Com 354, 361, 381, 451, 453 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
Recommended departments include Art, English, Management, Management Science, Marketing, 
Psychology, Sociology and Speech Communication. 


NEWS-EDITORIAL 

The principal objective of the news-editorial sequence is to provide the skills and practice necessary 
for careers in the print media. Specifically, the sequence objectives are: ( 1 ) to provide experience 
in writing various types of news stories, and to develop skills in reporting and news gathering 
techniques; (2) to develop critical acumen necessary to check news stories for accuracy and 
correctness; (3) to develop skills in graphics or photography that complement the journalistic writing 
skills; (4) to provide actual on-the-job experience by working on the campus newspap>er and 
through an internship; and (5) to add breadth and depth to the professional's specialized skills 
through collateral courses. 

Com 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Com 201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Com 332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Com 335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) 

Com 338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus three units from: Com 217 or 319. Com 358 permitted with adviser approval. 

And three units from: Com 334, 430, 435, 436 
AndM collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education which must be selected 
from the following list of approved courses, and this selection must represent at least one course 
from each of four departments: English 300, 303, 322, 462, 463, 464; History 476; Sociology 301, 341, 
345, 348; Political Science 300, 310, 350, 413; Economics 330, 335, 350, 361 and 365. 


PHOTOCOMMUNICATIONS 

The sequence in photocommunications provides a comprehensive study of the theories and prac- 
tices of photography for intelligent applications of principles to produce photographs acceptable to 
the mass media. 

Six units of writing courses selected from the following: Com 101, 301, 334, 335, 353, 362, 371. 
Com 217 Introduction to Black-and-White Photography (3) 

Com 319 Communications Photography (3) 

Com 321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Com 326 Advanced Communications Photography (2) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 


Communications 215 


Plus four units selected from the following: 

Com 220, 311, 338, 340, 358 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 

PUBLIC RELATIONS 

This sequence provides preparation in both theory and practice of two-way communication and 
management counsel for prospective professional public relations careers in business, industry, 
agency, government, and nonprofit sectors of society. 

Com 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Com 361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Com 362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Com 463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Com 301, 332, 338, 350, 358, 363, 4l0, 497 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 
Recommended departments include Management, Marketing, Psychology, Sociology, Political 
Science and Speech Communication. 

RADIO-TELEVISION-FILM 

Courses In this sequence are designed for an understanding of the history, theory and practice of 
radio-television and film. Students are prepared for entry level positions in business, education, and 
the broadcasting and film industries. 

Students who wish a film concentration In broadcasting should take six units of writing from Com 
101, 301, or 371; and 290A or 2908; 311; 375; 411; 439; and M collateral units of upper-division 
courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 

Com 301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Com 371 Radio Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Com 382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Com 311, 378, 381, 390, 411, 479, 484, 488 
Plus three units selected from the following: 

Com 345 The Language of Film and Television (3) 

Com 375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Com 478 Management in the Broadcasting and Film Industry (3) 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by adviser. 

WRITING REQUIREMENTS 

A communications major must satisfy both departmental and university writing requirements. 
English Usage Test (EUT): The EUT is a prerequisite to Communications department writing courses. 
It Is administered free in January, April, August and October. Students are allowed three attempts 
to earn a passing score, but all attempts must be completed within one year of the initial attempt. 
The test should be taken prior to declaring a major in communications or immediately following 
enrollment in communications classes. Only students who have earned a baccalaureate degree or 
who have equivalent EPT, SAT or ACT scores are exempt from the EUT requirement. 

University Writing Requirement: The course work portion of the university's upper-division bacca- 
laureate writing requirement for communications majors may be met by satisfactory completion of 
any one of communications 301, 334, 335, 338, 353, 362, 371 or 410. 

JOURNALISM EDUCATION 

The department offers a program approved by the California Commission for Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing for those seeking a secondary teaching credential. For advisement, consult the depart- 
ment and an adviser in the School of Human Development and Community Service. 

master of arts in COMMUNICATIONS 

See "Graduate Programs." 


216 Communications 


COMMUNICATIONS COURSES 

101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage Test; typing ability. Principles and practices 
of writing for major types of mass communications media. Content, organization, conciseness 
and clarity. 

103 Applied Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English Placement Test. Designed primarily for non-communication majors interested 
in learning to write effectively. Principles of writing including spelling, grammar and punctuation 
are put into practice through assignments. Assignments Include organizing and preparing letters, 
reports, documents and proposals required in most occupations. 

201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 101 or equivalent; typing 
ability. Development of expertise in the use of news reporting techniques combined with 
development of ability to compose complex journalistic writing forms for possible publication. 

217 Introduction to Black and White Photography (3)* 

Cameras, accessories, materials, exposure, processing, printing, finishing, composition, filters, flash, 
studio techniques, and special subject treatments and applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

220 Introduction to Color Photography (2) 

Theory, principles and practice of color photography in mass communication. Communicating with 
color photography and slide-tape presentations. Work done with commercially processed slide 
film. 

233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Newspapers, magazines, films, radio and television; their significance as social instruments and 
economic entitles in modern society. 

234 Sports Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 101 or equivalent. Preparation and writing of sports articles for specific audiences. 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of the Motion Picture (33) 

The study of motion picture as a global Influence in mass communications and entertainment. 
Examination of film movements, the rise and fall of the studio system, and social influences. 
A — Origins to 1945; B — 1945 to present. Film screenings on and off campus. 

301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage Test; typing ability. Theory and principles 
of writing in the broadcast and film media. 

303 Business Communications (3) 

Design and implementation of communications systems for business enterprises. Graphic analysis 
and analytical techniques. Practice in producing messages and channeling them to avoid 
ambiguities. 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Theory and practice of motion picture photography and film production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

319 Communications Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 217 or equivalent. Photography for publication in print media. News, advertising, 
feature, sports, lifestyle, photo essay, and documentary applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) , 

321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 21 7 and 220 or equivalent. Positive and negative color film processing, sensitome- 
try, and color printing. Creative and effective use of color in publications photography. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

326 Advanced Communications Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: six units of photography or consent of instructor. Photographs and photographic 
communications for the mass media, business, education, government, industry and science. 
(1 hour lecture, 3 hours activity) 

• Students wishing a non^aboratory introduction to photography may enroll in Com 220. 


Communications 217 


332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test and Com 201 or equivalent. Princi- 
ples and practice of newspaper editing: copy improvement, headline writing, news photos and 
cutlines, wire services, typography, copy schedules and control, page design and layout, law 
and ethics. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test and Com 101 or equivalent. Nonfic- 
tion writing for newspapers and magazines; sources, methods and markets. 

335 Public Affairs Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 101 and 201, or consent of 
Instructor. Com 407 recommended. Reporting public interest news such as courts, education, 
finance, government, police and urban problems. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 201 or equivalent and consent 
of instructor. Members of the class constitute the editorial staff of the university newspaper. 
Meets four hours per week for critiques in news reporting, writing, editing and makeup, followed 
by production. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. (More than 9 hours 
laboratory) 

340 Photography in Advertising and Public Relations (2) 

Prerequisite: a basic course in photography. Advertising and public relations photography. Materials 
and techniques for producing color and black-and-white photographs with visual impact suita- 
ble for photoreproduction. Techniques for shooting outdoors and indoors under studio and 
natural conditions. Students prepare a portfolio of photographs. ( 1 hour lecture, 3 hours activ- 
ity) 

345 The Language of Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 233 or consent of instructor. Critical and theoretical analysis of film and television 
as communication. Examines the manner in which an organized sequence of images and sounds 
communicates meaning using literature in semiology and visual communications. 

350 Introduction to Advertising (3) 

Advertising in America. The language and art of advertising and its role in marketing. 

352 Advertising Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 350 or Marketing 354. Principles and procedures in planning, execution and 
control of advertising media programs. Basic data and characteristics of the media. Buying and 
selling process, techniques, and methods in media planning process. Audience measurement 
and media analysis. 

353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test and Com 101, 350 or consent of 
instructor. Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, based on study of sales appeals, 
attention factors and illustrations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

354 Retail Advertising (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 350, 353, or consent of instructor. Retail advertising and sales; supervised field 
assignments in the analysis of advertising needs. 

358 Graphics Communications (3) 

Printing processes, publication formats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout principles, 
paper selection and distribution methods. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

The social, behavioral, psychological, ethical, economic and political foundations of public relations, 
and the theories of public relations as a communications discipline. 

362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test and Com 101 or consent of instruc- 
tor; typing ability. Communications analysis, writing for business. Industry and nonprofit organi- 
zations. Creating effective forms of public relations communication. 

363 Publications Editing (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 361 and six units of communications writing or consent of instructor. Editing 
functions and techniques involved in creative development of publications for business, industry 
and nonprofit organizations and institutions. Magazines, newspapers, newsletters and bro- 
chures. 


218 Communications 


371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 101 or 301, Com 382 and 390; 
typing ability. Covering news events and public affairs for radio and television. (2 hours lecture, 
3 hours lab) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and production requirements of the docu- 
mentary film. Future of the medium in business, government, education and television. 

378 Introduction to Audio Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications majors only. Audio production as it pertains to radio broadcasting, 
commercial production and recording, television and film audio. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

381 Broadcast Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 350. Writing of advertising copy for radio and television, based upon study of 
unique media and audience characteristics, costs and coverages. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications major or consent of instructor. The foundation course of the telecom- 
munications sequence. Radio and television from a professional perspective. Economic, histori- 
cal, regulatory aspects and the social effects of these media. 

390 Introduction to Video Production (3) 

Production of programs for broadcast stations and other video materials for cable, business, indus- 
trial and instructional applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

401 Report Writing (3) 

Planning, organizing, and writing of reports for business, education and government. Use of graphic 
aids and preparation of copy for reports that are to be printed. For non-majors. 

407 Communications Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. The Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and 
press; statutes and administrative regulations affecting freedom of information and publishing, 
advertising and telecommunication. Libel and slander, rights In news and advertising, contempt, 
copyright and invasion of privacy. 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. Research methods used to assess the effects of print, 
broadcast and film communications on audience attitudes, opinions, knowledge and behavior. 
Research design and data analysis in communications research. 

411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 217, 311, 301 or concurrent enrollment, or consent of instructor. Theory, proce- 
dures and practice in film production: motion picture (silent and sound), script-writing, transfer 
and mixes, production, distribution and financing. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours lab) 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. American mass communication; newspapers and peri- 
odicals through radio and television; ideological, political, social and economical aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. Major mass communication systems, both democratic 
and totalitarian, and the means by which news and propaganda are conveyed Internationally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233, 407 and 425. Exploration of current issues which cross department se- 
quences. Controversial and changing concepts of the function and role of the mass media 
including such topics as access, relevance, legal and ethical restraints, media for minorities, and 
persuasive arts. 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. How innovations — ideas, products, and practices per- 
ceived as new — are communicated to members of a social system. The roles of adopters, 
opinion leaders, change agents, and communications in the diffusion of innovations and conse- 
quent changes in social systems. 

430 Newspaper Management (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Organization, operation and administration of a newspaper's 
departmental activities: advertising, business, circulation, mechanical, news-editorial, and pro- 
motion. (3 hours lecture, field trips, detailed study of one selected newspaper department) 


Communications 219 


431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Mass media in Communist societies; the U.S.S.R., the People's Republic of China, Poland and 
Yugoslavia. The mass media, people and party. 

435 Editorial and Critical Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 101 and upper division writing 
course. The roles of the editorial and critical writer and opinion columnist. Techniques of 
editorial writing and aspects of critical thinking. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours lab and fieldwork) 

436 Investigative and Specialized Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 332, 335 and 407. Investigative 
and interpretive reporting of complex or specialized subjects. 

439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing, communications major and consent of instructor. Supervised Intern- 
ship, according to sequence, with newspaper, magazine, radio or television station, press 
association, public relations firm or advertising agency. Application must be made through 
department coordinator one semester prior to entering program. (Credit/ No Credit only) 

450 Advertising Communications Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 350 and 352. Theory and techniques for planning, directing and evaluating 
advertising programs with emphasis on media-message strategies. Managerial approach with 
case studies to the solution of advertising communications problems. 

451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 350, 352 and 353. Advertising campaigns and utilization of mass media — such 
as television, newspapers and magazines — in national advertising programs. Design of complete 
campaigns from idea to production readiness. . 

453 Advanced Advertising Copywriting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, Com 350 and 353. The practical 
problems and creative solution of professional advertising copywriting. Marketing strategy for 
creative platform, theme and execution in writing advertising copy for the mass media. In-class 
assignments on real accounts. 

463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 361 or consent of Instructor. Techniques for effective public relations in both 
p>ersonal and mass communications, and methods for managing public relations programs. 

478 Management in the Broadcasting and Film Industries (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing. Com. 382 or consent of instructor. The study of management of 
the broadcasting, cable-TV and film industries with attention to financial structures, program- 
ming and government regulation. 

479 Advanced Video Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 390 or consent of Instructor. Producing programs for broadcast and other applica- 
tions for cable, business, industrial and instructional use. Emphasis on location shooting and post 
production including electronic editing. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. Persuasive communications applied to mass communi- 
cation. The communicator, audience, message content and structure, and social context in 
influencing attitudes, beliefs, and opinions. 

481 Mass Communication and Conflict (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 233 and junior standing. Changes and similarities in the mass communication of 
conflict issues over the past 75 years; war and peace, the role of women, and various reform 
movements. Undergraduate seminar. 

484 Documentary Production (3) 

Prerequisites: B average in Com. 390 and 479 or 488 and consent of instructor. A lecture/ laboratory 
course in which students write and produce radio, television and film documentaries. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

488 Production Workshop for Cable Television (3) 

Prerequisites: B average in Com. 390 and 479 or consent of instructor. Students produce information- 
al and sports programs for cable TV systems and radio stations. May be repeated once for credit; 
only three units may apply to major. (9 hours laboratory) 


220 Criminal Justice 


4% $tudent-to*Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor and previous superior performance in a similar or equivalent 
course. Under faculty supervision, student provides tutorial assistance in a communications 
course. May involve small group demonstrations and discussions, individual tutoring, and 
evaluation of student performance as appropriate. May be repeated to a maximum of four units 
either separately or in combination with Com 499. 

497 Seminar in Public Communications Practices (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 463 and consent of instructor. Operationalizing public relations management 
principles. Role of public relations in contemporary society. Ethics, social responsibilities and 
trends in the emerging profession. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects and research 
on campus and In the community. May Involve newspaper and magazine publishers, radio and 
television stations and public relations agencies. May be repeated up to a maximum of four units 
either separately or in combination with Com 4%. 

500 Theory and Literature of Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: Conditional classified status. Theories and research on communication processes and 
effects; source, media, message, audience and content variables. Types, sources, and uses of 
communication literature. Graduate seminar. 

508 Humanistic Research in Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 410, 500 or concurrent enrollment and classified status. Humanistic methods of 
study in communications: historical research and critical analysis applied to problems, issues, 
and creative works in communication. Graduate seminar. 

509 Social Science Research in Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Com 410, 500 and classified status. Social-scientific research design and analysis and 
the study of communication processes and effects. Graduate seminar. 

515 Professional Problems in Specialized Fields (3) 

Prerequisite: Com 500. Selected topics and Issues in the field of mass communications. Subjects vary 
each semester. May be repeated for a maximum of six units. 

520A,B Communications Practicum (33) 

Prerequisites: Com 500 and six units of study-plan courses In area of specialization. Under supervi- 
sion of a faculty member, students plan, design, conduct and evaluate a team project in their 
field of specialization: A — News-Editorial, B — Radio-Television-Film. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Completion of a creative project in a sequence beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis In a sequence beyond regularly offered coursework. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects or research 
for graduate students. May be repeated. 


JOURNALISM EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Techniques of advising school newspaper and year- 
book staffs and teaching journalism. Relation of classroom instruction to staff assignments. 
449A,B Journalism Education (12) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching. A — Student teaching in the 
secondary school. B — Seminar. 

DEPARTMENT OF CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

FACULTY 
W. Garrett Capune 
Department Chair 
James Farris, William Hobbs 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts In Criminal Justice Is designed to acquaint preservice 
and Inservice students with the principles and practices of criminal justice in America. Although the 


Criminal Justice 221 


program's curriculum allows for the development of depth in one of the subject's substantive 
subsystems (i.e., law enforcement, courts or corrections), the overriding objective is to familiarize 
students with activities in all the above areas. 

The program is both academic and professional in that it Is an Interdisciplinary attempt to relate 
professional and practitioner perspectives to the challenge of crime In a free society. In this regard, 
the program provides preparation for employment with a related agency and/or further study, (e.g., 
law school). 

ADVISEMENT 

Students are urged to attend a "New Student's Advisement Session" prior to their first semester at 
the university as a criminal justice major. This is particularly important for community college 
transfers. Failure to do so may delay graduation. The department's "New Student Advisement 
Sessions" are regularly and frequently scheduled. See the bulletin board for details. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Every student must complete the core courses ( 1 5 units) and a minimum of 1 2 units in the concentra- 
tion curriculum. In addition, each student is required to complete 1 2 units in a correlated curriculum. 
For current information regarding the criminal justice program and its courses, consult the program's 
bulletin board. 

Core Curriculum (15 units) 

Criminal justice 300 Introduction to Criminal Justice 

Criminal Justice 31 OA Criminal Law: Substantive 

Criminal Justice 320 Criminal Justice Administratipn: A Survey 

Criminal Justice 330 Crime and Delinquency 

Criminal Justice 340 Criminal Justice Research Methodology 

Concentration Curriculum (12 units) 

Criminal Justice 31 OB Criminal Law: Procedural 

Criminal Justice 415 The Enforcement Function 

Criminal Justice 425 Juvenile Justice Administration 

Criminal Justice 435 Adjudication and the Judiciary 

Criminal Justice 445A Corrections: Community Programs 

Criminal Justice 445B Corrections: Institution Programs 

Criminal Justice 475 Topics in Administration of Justice: A Seminar 

Criminal Justice 480 Courtroom Evidence 

Criminal Justice 485 A, B Search, Seizure and Interrogation 

Criminal Justice 490 Legal Issues in Law Enforcement 

Criminal Justice 495 Internship 

Criminal Justice 499 Independent Study 

Correlated Curriculum (12 units) 

Courses from the related fields shall be selected in consultation with the student's adviser. The 
purpose of this requirement is to allow for the establishment of an emphasis, such as public 
administration or counseling. Upper-division courses in the following fields can be considered In this 
regard: human services, philosophy, political science, psychology, public administration, social 
welfare, sociology. 


CRIMINAL JUSTICE COURSES 

300 Introduction to Criminal Justice (3) 

A study of the underlying ideological issues confronting America's system of criminal justice, with 
an emphasis on key concepts in conflict (law and order, rehabilitation vs. retribution, etc.). 

310A Criminal Law: Substantive (3) 

The general doctrines of criminal liability in the United States and the classification of crimes as 
against persons, property and the public welfare. The concept of governmental sanction of the 
conduct of the individual. 


222 Criminal Justice 


310B Criminal Law: Procedural (3) 

Legal problems associated with the investigation of crime, the acquisition of evidence, the com- 
mencement of a criminal proceeding, the prosecution and defense of charges sentencing and 
appeal. The development of existing procedures and examination of current efforts for reform. 

320 Criminal Justice Administration: A survey (3) 

Justice administration as a "single system"; modern management materials as applied to the involved 
Institutions; line, staff, and auxiliary activities both in principle and practice, and the associated 
administrative theories. 

330 Crime and Delinquency (3) 

The nature and extent of criminality; traditional and topical theories regarding etiology; research 
methods, sociological and psychological theories. 

340 Criminal Justice Research Methodology (3) 

Elementary statistics Including descriptives, measurements and tests; data collection methods for 
effort evaluation and program prediction; systems analysis techniques. 

350 Principles and Concepts of Investigation and Reporting (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 31 OA or equivalent. Principles of Investigative activity practiced by 
p>olice, courts and correctional subsystems. Reporting procedures and requirements. Meets 
classroom portion of upper-division writing requirement for Criminal Justice majors. 

415 The Enforcement Function (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of Instructor. The historical and philosophical develop- 
ment of the enforcement function at federal, state and local levels; community controls, political 
pressures and legal limitations pertaining to law enforcement agencies at each level of govern- 
ment; police policies and problems vis-a-vis the administration of justice as a system. 

425 Juvenile Justice Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of Instructor. Definitions of "delinquency" and the 
related responses of the interested institutions (police, courts and correction); the juvenile court 
(past and present), and prevention and correction programs (practicing and proposed). 

435 Adjudication and the Judiciary (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of Instructor. The associated sociolegal doctrine and 
institutions at the federal, state and local levels; political controls and legal limitations pertaining 
to each; the nature of the judicial process; the participants' roles and relationships to the 
administration of justice as a system. 

445A Corrections: Community Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of instructor. The philosophy and practice of community 
corrections, including: historical antecedents, juvenile and adult probation, parole, diversion 
practices, private programs, and their interrelation with institutional corrections and the criminal 
justice system. 

445B Corrections: Institution Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of Instructor. Histories and philosophies of juvenile and 
adult correctional institutions; analysis of each "total institution" for prisoners and personnel; 
theory and practice of rehabilitation and alternative attitudes. Current research and experimen- 
tal programs. 

475 Topics in Administration of Justice: A Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 3(X) or consent of instructor. Current social, legal and practical problems 
confronting the police, the courts and corrections. A "variable topic" class with specific sub- 
jects to be announced each semester. 

4B0 Courtroom Evidence (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 3(X) or consent of instructor. The rules of evidence In the context of 
a criminal trial in a California court. The rules, their application and their rationale. Lecture, 
discussion and simulated courtroom situations. 

485A Search, Seizure and Interrogation I (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 3(X) or consent of Instructor. The more common rules of law that apply 
to searches, seizures and interrogations in California; how they have changed and where they 
are going. 

4a5B Search, Seizure and Interrogation II (3) 

Prerequisites: Criminal Justice 485A or consent of instructor. Rules of law that apply to searches, 
seizures and interrogations in California. Extension of Criminal Justice 485A. 


English and Comparative Literature 223 

490 Legal Issues in Law Enforcement (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal Justice 300 or consent of instructor. A review of current legal issues affecting 
law enforcement such as, the discovery of police personnel files, the use of deadly force and 
civil rights lawsuit. 

495 Internships (3) 

Prerequisites: Criminal Justice 300 and consent of instructor. The criminal justice professions. Eight 
to 20 hours per week as a supervised intern in a public agency or related organization. In 
addition to the job experience, interns meet In a weekly three-hour seminar. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 1 2 hours of criminal justice and consent of adviser. Student selects an individual 
research project, either library or field. Conferences with adviser as necessary, culminating In 
one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

510 Seminar in Selected Topics in Criminal Justice (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. Problems in criminal justice appropriate to the specialized research 
interests of the instructor, such as: corrections, law enforcement, juvenile delinquency or court 
administration. Topics to be announced each semester course offered. 

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH AND COMPARATIVE 
LITERATURE 

FACULTY 
Thomas Klammer 
Department Chair 

Don Austin, Arthur Bell, Rosemary Boston, John Brugaletta, George Friend, Stephen Garber, Joseph 
Glide, Joan Greenwood, Ann Haaker, Jean Hall, Mary Hayden, Dennis Hengeveld, Jane Hlpoll- 
to, Robert Hodges, Michael Holland, Wayne Huebner, Helen Jaskoski, Dorothea Kenny, Do- 
rothy Kilker, William Koon, Joanne Lynn, Willis McNelly, Keith Nellson, Priscilla Oaks, Paul 
Obler, Urania Petalas, June Poliak, Sally Romotsky, William Rubinstein, Joseph SawickI, Muriel 
Schulz, John Schwarz, Alice Scoufos, Howard Seller, George Spangler, Elena Tumas, Martha 
Vogeler, John White, Helen Yanko 

The Department of English and Comparative Literature offers the Bachelor of Arts and Master of Arts 
in Comparative Literature and Bachelor of Arts and the Master of Arts In English. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

The major In comparative literature provides professional competence and personal enrichment for 
students with an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study of the Interrelationships 
between the languages and literatures of various civilizations. The program offers courses in literary 
form and content, theory and philosophy, genres and movements, providing insight Into the back- 
grounds of mankind's worldwide culture and literature. The comparative literature courses are 
conducted in English and required reading is available in English. 

Upper-Division Requirements (42 units) ^ 

1. Eighteen units selected from among comparative literature courses and distributed as follows: 


Required Courses (9 units) Units 

Comp Lit 324 World Literature to 1650 3 

Comp Lit 325 World Literature 1 650 to Present _3 

6 

Three units from 

Comp Lit 332 Medieval Literature (3) 

Comp Lit 333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) 3 

Nine units from comparative literature courses _9 

18 


2. Reading competence in a foreign language, demonstrated by successfully completing an ad- 
viser-approved 400-level course offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures, provided it is not taught in translation. This requirement can be met through examination. 
Information on the examination is available in the Department of English and Comparative 
Literature office. 

3. Six units selected from literature courses listed under English and numbered 300 or above. 

4. Six units of anthropology, history, art history, music history or philosophy approved by the 
adviser and aimed at enlarging total perspective. 


224 English and Comparative Literature 


5. The remainder of the required 42 units selected from any 300- or 400-level literature course 
in comparative literature, English, French, German, Italian, Russian or Spanish. 

More detailed information on the comparative literature major can be obtained from the brochure 
available in the Department of English and Comparative Literature office. Special courses on 
mythology, theory and methods, literary genres, and literary movements will be offered periodi- 
cally. The Importance of close consultation with an adviser cannot be stressed enough for com- 
parative literature, since the diversity of language specialties and other factors may necessitate 
individual tailoring. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

See ''Graduate Programs." 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 


The courses in English concern the nature and development of our language, the literatures of 
England and America, and the disciplines involved In the various kinds of writing. 

The Department of English and Comparative Literature offers some specialized professional courses 
for the preparation of teachers. On the senior and graduate levels, various opportunities are provided 
for seminar work and independent study. The English and Comparative Literature Department offers 
a flexible program, designed to reflect various approaches to the study of language and literature. 
In planning a program to fit their particular interests, all students are urged to consult an English and 
Comparative Literature Department faculty member. 

Requirements: 42 units in addition to English 101, or its equivalent. 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) 

Any 200 level course. 

Upper Division (minimum of 30 units) 


Required courses (9 units) 

English 300 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

English 334 Shakespeare (3) 

Survey courses (minimum of 6 units), selected from among the following: 
English 311 Masters of British Literature to 1760 (3) 

English 312 Masters of British Literature from 1760 (3) 

English 321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

English 322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 
Comp Lit 324 World Literature to 1650 (3) 

Comp Lit 325 World Literature from 1650 ( 3) 


Period, genre and criticism courses (9 units — at least 3 units from courses prior to 1800, i.e., 332, 
335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 345, 423), selected from among the following: 


English 332 
English 335 
English 336 
English 337 
English 338 
English 339 
English 340 
English 343 
English 344 
English 345 
English 346 
English 391 
English 423 
English 445 
English 462 
English 463 
English 464 
English 465 
English 466 
English 467 


Medieval Literature (3) 

Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) 

Elizabethan Pdetry and Prose (3) 

17th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

The Drama of the Restoration and the 18th-Century (3) 
Restoration Literature (1660-1700) (3) 

18th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) 

Victorian Literature (3) 

The Development of the English Novel Through Jane Austen (3) 
The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel (3) 
Traditions of English Literary Criticism (3) 

Early American Literature (3) 

The American Tradition in Poetry (3) 

Modern British and American Novels (3) 

Contemporary British and American Novels (3) 

Modern British and American Drama (3) 

Contemporary British and American Drama (3) 

Modern British and American Poetry (3) 

Contemporary British and American Poetry (3) 


English and Comparative Literature 225 


Major author courses (Shakespeare — English 334 — plus 3 units) 

English 333 Chaucer (3) or 

English 341 Milton (3) 

Language courses (minimum of 3 units), selected from among the following: 

English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 

English 305 The English Language in America (3) 

English 490 History of the English Language (3) 

Electives to complete a minimum of 42 units shall be selected from courses in language and 
comp)osition, literature courses, literary criticism, and comparative literature. Comparative literature 
offerings are listed separately but count toward an English major. 

Students are urged to consult a faculty member when choosing electives or when seeking evaluation 
of work completed at other institutions. 

English majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire proficiency in at least one 
foreign language, and most graduate programs In English assume that the student has had a broad 
background in the study of major literary figures, periods and critical approaches, as well as some 
training In English language and linguistics. Both breadth and depth of preparation are Important. 
The California Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing has approved the English Depart- 
ment's waiver plan for both the Ryan Single Subject Credential in English and the Ryan Multiple 
Subjects Credential. Students who follow the prescribed courses of study will not be required to take 
the state teacher licensing examination. For further Information, consult the English Department. 
Note: The single subject waiver program has been approved by the Commission for Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing through December 31, 1983. Students wishing to pursue a single 
subject credential in this area after that date should contact the department office for current 
information. 

Students seeking a secondary teaching credential must complete the following: 

English 301 Advanced College Writing; and 
English 303 Structure of Modern English 

The following courses are required for the credential, but do not count toward the 42 units of major: 
English Education 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School 
English Education 449A,B English Education 


MINOR IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units 

A minimum of 1 5 units described below and 6 units of electives. In choosing their electives, students 
seeking a minor In English should consult a faculty member. 

Required courses (9 units) ^ 

English 3(X) Analysis of Literary Forms (3) j 

English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) ^ 

English 334 Shakespeare (3) 

Survey courses (minimum of 6 units), selected from among the following: 

English 311 Masters of British Literature to 1760 (3) 

English 312 Masters of British Literature from 1760 (3) 

English 321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

English 322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

Comp Lit 324 World Literature to 1650 ( 3) 

Comp Lit 325 World Literature from 1650 ( 3) 

Electives 

Six units drawn from additional Department of English and Comparative Literature courses. 


master of arts in ENGLISH 

See "Graduate Programs." 


8—76604 


226 English and Comparative Literature 


COMPARATIVE LITERATURE COURSES 

110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

(Same as English 110) 

111 Literature of the Western World from the Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 
(Same as English 111) 

112 Modern Literature of the Western World (3) 

(Same as English 112) 

202 Short Story (3) 

(Same as English 202) 

203 Introduction to the Novel (3) 

The techniques and structure of representative European and American novels. (Same as English 
203) 

257 Writing Haiku (1-3) 

(Same as English 257) 

312 The Bible as Literature (3) 

Literary qualities of biblical literature and the Influence of major themes upon Western literary 
traditions. 

315 Classical Mythology in World Literature (3) 

Creek and Roman myths which have been of continuing significance in Western world literature. 

316 Celtic Mythology and Early Irish Literature (3) 

Early Irish literature and Irish and Welsh mythological literature; comparative and archeological 
relationships. 

320 Greek and Roman Literature (3) 

Readings In English translation from the literature of classical Greece and Rome. 

321 Germanic Mythology and Saga Literature (3) 

Germanic mythology, including comparative myth and archeological relationships, and Icelandic 
saga. 

324 World Literature to 1650 (3) 

Oriental and western literature from the beginning to 1650. 

325 World Literature from 1650 (3) 

Oriental and western literature from 1650 to the present. 

332 Medieval Literature (3) 

(Same as English 332) 

333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) 

The Renaissance as a literary movement, from Erasmus to Montaigne and Cervantes. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352 and Afro-Ethnic Studies 352) 

355 Images of Women in Literature (3) 

(Same as English 355) 

360 Irish Literature (3) 

Irish literature from the early Middle Ages to the present. 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

Pushkin, Gogol, Dostoyevsky, Tolstoy, Chekhov, and others, and their relationship to western 
literature. 

426 Japanese Literature (3) 

Selected translations of Japanese literature. 

427 Modern Japanese Fiction (3) 

Major writers and literary movements in 2(Xh-century Japanese fiction. 

453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 

Novels in translation; principles of the narrative arts. Goethe, Stendhal, Flaubert, Mann, Kafka, Proust 
and others. 


English and Comparative Literature 227 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

572 Graduate Seminar Literary Genres (3) 

(Same as English 572) 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) 
(Same as English 574) 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) 

(Same as English 579) 

598 Thesis (3) 

599 Independent Study (1-3) 


ENGLISH COURSES 

For world literature in English translation see courses under Comparative Literature. 

099 Developmental Writing (3) 

An intensive course in basic writing skills. Designed to prepare students for English 101. Required 
of, and open only to, students who score below minimum standard on the English Placement 
Test (EPT). Degree credit is not awarded for this course. 

101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 099, a satisfactory score on the English Placement Test, or exemption from the 
EPT. An introductory course in the fundamentals of expository prose. Emphasizes grammatical 
and basic rhetorical concepts and practices necessary for successful college writing. 

105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 

Exploratory creative writing with the opportunity to write in various genres. No credit toward the 
major. 

106 Writing for ESL Students (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Fundamentals of written English for speakers of other languages. 
Emphasis on idiomatic usage and paragraph structure in written expression. 

110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

Representative writers and works from the ancient through the medieval world. (Same as Compara- 
tive Literature 110) 

111 Literature of the Western World from the Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 

Representative writers and works from the Renaissance through the 19th century. (Same as Com- 
parative Literature 111) 

112 Modern Literature of the Western World (3) 

Representative writers and works of modern literature. (Same as Comparative Literature 112) 

200 Introduction to Literature (3) 

An introduction to the study of fiction, drama and poetry. Concentration on the critical understand- 
ing of literary types rather than on their historical development. Carries no credit toward the 
major. 

201 Intermediate College Writing (3) 

Recommended; Introduction to College Writing. Techniques of investigation, documentation and 
organization essential for writing academic papers: the research paper, reports, critiques, essay 
examination. 

202 The Short Story (3) 

The structure and technique of the short story. Critical analysis of selected American and European 
short stories. (Same as Comparative Literature 202) 

203 Introduction to the Novel (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 203) 

204 Intermediate Creative Writing (3) 

Recommended; Introduction to Creative Writing, consent of instructor. A course providing experi- 
ence in creative writing beyond the Introductory level. Emphasis on poetry, the short story, 
and/or the one-act play. 

205 Introduction to Drama (3) 

'Analysis of individual examples of dramatic literature. 


228 English and Comparative Literature 


206 Introduction to Poetry (3) 

Analysis of the various kinds of English poems. 

210 Studies in Literature (3) 

Selected readings and discussion of English and American writers, emphasizing a particular theme, 
genre, trend or the works of individual writers. Section topics will vary according to the special 
interests of the instructor. 

257 Writing Haiku (1-3) 

After a brief study of the development of haiku in Japan, students will write and revise haiku in English 
and share them with the class. With consent of Instructor, may be repeated for no more than 
three units of credit. (Same as Comparative Literature 257) 

300 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, poetry and drama — are studied and analyzed. English majors 
should schedule this basic course as early as possible. 

301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or Communications 103. An advanced course in writing expository prose. 
Emphasizes precision In rhetoric and development of individual style by concentration on 
matters of diction, audience, emphasis and persuasion. Required of English majors seeking a 
secondary credential. 

303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The grammar of contemp)orary English. Modern English usage. This 
course required of English majors seeking a secondary credential. Must be taken before student 
teaching. 

304 Advanced Creative Writing (3) 

Recommended: Intermediate Creative Writing. Instruction and practice in a workshop setting for the 
student with some experience in creative writing; emphasis on writing for professional markets. 
Consult the class schedule to determine instructor's emphasis. May be repeated for credit. 

305 The English Language in America (3) 

American English, its origins, Its regional and social dialects, and its role in American history and In 
such institutions as schools, corporations, government, and the media. (Same as Linguistics 305) 

311 Masters of British Literature to 1760 (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Major periods and movements, major 
authors and major forms through 1760. 

312 Masters of British Literature from 1760 (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of Instructor. Major periods and movements, major 
authors and major forms from 1760 through modern times. 

320 Literature of the American Indians (3) 

The prose and poetry of the North American Indian tribes. 

321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

Major writers such as Hawthorne, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman, Dickinson. 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

Major writers such as Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

325 American Ballad and Folksong (3) 

Anglo-American balladry and folksong; their historical development, ethnic background and poetical 
values. 

326 The American Frontier in Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: any courses in American literature, American studies or American history. The Ameri- 
can frontier from the beginnings to the close of the 19th century. Explorers and naturalists; 
artistic, literary and popular treatments to identify the myths and symbols created by the fact 
of a frontier in American life. 

332 Medieval Literature (3) 

Readings in modern English translation from the medieval literature of England and the continent 
from St. Augustine to Sir Thomas Malory. (Same as Comparative Literature 332) 

333 Chaucer (3) 

The Canterbury Tales and Chaucer's language. The vocabulary, pronunciation, grammar, and syntax 
of the East Midland dialect of Middle English. 


English and Comparative Literature 229 


334 Shakespeare (3) 

A study of the major plays. 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) 

The dramatic tradition in plays by such dramatists as Marlowe, jonson, Webster, Beaumont and 
Fletcher. 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose (3) 

The nondramatic literature of the English Renaissance. 

337 17th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

Nondramatic literature of the period from 1603 to 1660 exclusive of Milton. 

338 The Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century (3) 

Representative plays of the Restoration and the 1 8th century. The development of such dramatic 
movements as the heroic play. Restoration comedy and sentimental drama. 

339 Restoration Literature (1660-1770) (3) 

Major writers such as Butler, Rochester, Dryden, Pepys; selected minor writers. 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

Major writers such as Swift, Addison and Steele, Pope, Boswell, Johnson; selected minor writers. 

341 Milton (3) 

The pK>etry and prose in the light of Milton's Intellectual development. 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) 

Major writers such as Burns, Blake, Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and Keats. 

344 Victorian Literature (3) 

Major writers such as Carlyle, Tennyson, Browning, Arnold, Ruskin, Pater. 

345 The Development of the English Novel through Jane Austen (3) 

The English novel from its beginnings to the 19th century; such novelists as Defoe, Richardson, 
Fielding, Sterne and Austen. 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel (3) 

Major novelists such as the Bronte, Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot, and Hardy. 

348 l-lorror Fiction (3) 

Horror/occult fiction (or "dark fantasy") from Mary Shelley to the present, including such writers 
as E. A. Poe, j. S. LeFanu, Bram Stoker, H. P. Lovecraft, Fritz Leiber and Stephen King. 

349 Fantasy Fiction (3) 

Fantasy in literature from Ariosto to Brautigan. 

350 Detective Fiction (3) 

Detective fiction from Edgar Allan Poe to the present, including writers such as Sayers, Christie, 
Chandler, Hammet and Ross Macdonald. 

351 Science Fiction (3) 

Science fiction as a literary genre, including future-scene fiction, the utopian novel, the superman/ 
woman novel and short stories. 

352 African Literature (3) 

African literature written In the English language; the fiction, poetry and drama of the new nations. 
(Same as Comparative Literature 352 and Afro-Ethnic Studies 352) 

354 Linguistics and Literature (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 354) 

355 Images of Women in Literature (3) 

Images of women in various genres, such as autobiography, poetry, drama and the novel. A 
conventional literary period (Victorian, Modern, etc.) and specific cultures (Great Britain or 
the United States, etc.) at the discretion of instructor. (Same as Comparative Literature 355) 
360 Scientific and Technical Report Writing (3) 

Expository writing applied to specific professional writing tasks; technical report, management 
report, grant proposal, internal memo, etc. Specific sections of the course shall be designated 
each semester as tailored to the needs of students in particular fields; consult class schedule. 
365 Legal Writing (3) 

Advanced composition; stressing logic, reasoning, and legal analysis. 

391 Traditions of English Literary Criticism (3) 

^ major English critics, from the Renaissance to the beginning of the 20&i century, in relationship 
to the classical theories of criticism. 


230 English and Comparative Literature 

392 Modern Literary Criticism (3) 

The major movements in 20th<entury British and American criticism. 

423 Early American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: English 321 or consent of instructor. The literature of colonial and revolutionary Ameri- 
ca, including the Puritans, 18th-century deism and rationalism and the literary antecedents of 
American democratic thought. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of Instructor. Selected writings of Darwin and of such 
Darwinians as Spencer and Huxley; literary adaptations and assimilations of Darwinism. (Same 
as American Studies 425) 

433 Children's Literature (3) 

World literature written primarily for children, including material from the oral tradition, realistic 
fiction, fantasy and poetry. 

434 Adolescent Literature (3) 

The evaluation, selection, and Interpretation of fiction, nonfiction, drama, and poetry reflecting the 
broad range of interest of young people from 12 to 17 years of age. 

435 Studies in Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of Instructor. Problems of dramatic structure and artistic mean- 
ings. 

445 The American Tradition in Poetry (3) 

American poems from the 17th century to 1914. Reading of individual F)oems. 

462 Modern British and American Novels (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. Modern British and American novels from 1900 to 1950. 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels (3) 

The novel in English since World War II. 

464 Modern British and American Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. British and American drama from 1900 to 1950. 

465 Contemporary British and American Drama (3) 

British and American drama from 1950 to the present. 

466 Modern British and American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. British and American poetry from 1900 to 1950. 

467 Contemporary British and American Poetry (3) 

British and American poetry from 1950 to the present. 

490 History of the English Language (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English vocabulary, 
phonology, morphology and syntax from Indo-European to modern American English. 

49B English Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: junior or senior status and consent of faculty supervisor. Experience in the practical 
application of studies in literature and language to work outside the university. Hours — to be 
specified; enrollment limited; C/NC — no credit toward major. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in English with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Studies in Literature (3) 

Research techniques, analytical approaches, and theories of literature. A course providing basic 
orientation in graduate literary studies. 

571 Graduate Seminar. Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor; major figures such as 
Shakespeare, Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Hawthorne, Joyce and Coleridge. May be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. 

572 Graduate Seminar. Literary Genres (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor; major literary types such 
as the epic, the novel, the short story, lyric poetry, tragedy, comedy and historical drama. May 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as (Comparative Literature 572) 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 231 

573 Graduate Seminar: Cultural Periods (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor; the literature of a cultural 
period from the Anglo-Saxon to modern times. May be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor; special problems such 
as influences on literature, including philosophical, religious, scientific, geographic and other 
ecological viewpoints. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as 
Comparative Literature 574) 

575 Graduate Seminar: Topics in High School Teaching (3) 

Specific topics will vary from semester to semester. 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) 

Historical development and schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course number may 
deal with only one aspect of critical problems. May be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. (Same as Comparative Literature 579) 

580 Special topics in Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 580) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate standing. A research paper, a critical study, a portfolio of creative 
writings, or the results of fieldwork or experiment. Supervising professor and English department 
graduate studies committee must approve the proposal in advance of registration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered course work. Oral and written 
reports. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 


ENGLISH EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Principles, methods and materials of teaching English 
in the secondary school. 

449A English Education (10) 

Student teaching in the secondary school. The candidate. In the field for four and one-half days each 
week, has the same instructional hours of responsibility as the master teacher. 

449B English Education (2) 

One afternoon a week the candidate partcipates in a seminar with the university supervisor. 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

FACULTY 

Leon Gilbert 

Department Chair 

Linda Andersen- Fiala, Oswaldo Arana, Nancy Baden, Gerald Boarino, Samuel Cartledge, Modesto 
Diaz, Michele Druon, Ronald Harmon, Arturo Jasso, Jacqueline Kiralthe, Walter Kline, C. 
Bording Mathieu, Doris Merrifield, Ervie Pena, Marcial Prado, Charles Shapley, Curtis Swanson, 
Marjorie Tussing, Eva Van Cinneken, Stephen Vasari, Jon Zimmermann 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

Several options are offered: 

1. French major. Requirements: French 101, 102, 203, 204, 230, 240, or their equivalents; plus a 
minimum of 27 units of upper-division courses including 315, 317 or 318, 325, 375, 415, 425 
and six units of 475 A,B,C,D. 

2. German major. Requirements: German 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents; plus 
24 units of upper-division course work, which must include 315, 317, 375 and three of the 
following literature courses: 430, 440, 450, 460 

3. Spanish major: Lower-division requirements: Spanish 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their 
equivalents. Upper-division requirements for: 


232 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

A. Standard major: Spanish 315, 316, 317 or 318, 375; plus 15 units of upper-division Spanish 
which must include 430, 441 and 461 . 

B. Bilingual emphasis major; Spanish 315 or 316, 317 or 318, 375, 400 (or its equivalent), 466, 
467, 468, plus two additional courses in Spanish at the 400 level, to be taken in consultation 
with the adviser. 

PLACEMENT: Students may enroll at any |X)int in the sequence of courses for which their previous 
study and/or experience prepares them. Students with no language background should enroll in 
fundamental 101 -level courses. Normally, two years of high school language study are counted as 
one year of college language. Students just completing two years of high school language should 
probably begin at 200-level intermediate courses. A minimum of four years of high school language, 
or its equivalent. Is considered a prerequisite for more advanced 300-level major work. Due to the 
sequential nature of language instruction, consultation with an adviser in the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures Is strongly recommended before enrolling. 

UPPER-DIVISION WRITING REQUIREMENT 

English 301 satisfies the course portion of the upper-division writing requirement for all foreign 
language majors. 

TRANSFER STUDENTS 

In accordance with university rules, all transfer students must complete 30 units in residence at Cal 
State Fullerton. Of these 30 units, the transfer student majoring in French, German or Spanish is 
required to complete 1 2 upper-division units, i.e., 300, 400 or 500-level courses. In the major on the 
Cal State Fullerton campus. The specific courses will be determined In consultation with the student's 
adviser and approved by the chair. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements: Courses 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214 (French 230, 240) or their equivalents completed 
satisfactorily; plus 1 2 units in upper-division courses as follows: 

1. French minor. French 315 or 325, 317 or 318 plus six units of upper-division electives to be 
selected in consultation with the student's adviser. 

2. German minor. German 31 5 or 325, 317 plus six units of upper-division electives to be selected 
in consultation with the student's adviser. 

3. Portuguese minor. Portuguese 315 or 325, 317 or 318 plus six units of upper-division electives 
to be selected In consultation with the student's adviser. 

4. Spanish minor. Spanish 315 or 316, 317 or 318 plus six units of upper-division electives to be 
selected in consultation with the student's adviser. 

ADMISSION TO TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS 

Students interested in applying to a credential or a certificate program must consult with a teacher 
education adviser for a preliminary program review In the semester prior to their application to the 
program. Information concerning the programs is available from the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures. 

SINGLE SUBJECT CREDENTIAL, SPECIALIZATION IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

Before being admitted to a credential program, all prospective teachers may be asked to pass a 
proficiency examination in which their skills of listening, speaking, reading, writing and knowledge 
of linguistic principles will be tested. Students should make arrangements with the department to 
take the test during their junior year. This single subject waiver program has been ap>proved by the 
Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing through December 31, 1983. Students wishing 
to pursue a single subject credential in this area after that date should contact the department office 
for current information. 

MULTIPLE SUBJECT CREDENTIAL WAIVER FOR FOREIGN LANGUAGE MAJORS 

The State Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing has approved the department's foreign 
language majors for the Multiple Subject Credential option of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing 
Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). For further information consult the Department of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures. 

CERTIFICATE FOR TEACHERS OF ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE 

In cooperation with the Departments of English and Linguistics, the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures offers a Certificate for Teachers of English as a Second Languages (TESOL). 
The program consists of 24 units, some of which (with consent of the admitting committee) may 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 233 


be taken during the candidate's undergraduate study. In order to participate in the program, students 
must declare the TESOL Certificate along with their degree objective. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Senior standing or admission to either postbaccalaureate or graduate standing. 

2. Overall CPA of 2.5 (minimal) and 3.0 in the major. 

3. Completion of English 301 and 303 with grades of B or better. 

4. At least two years of one foreign language or one year each of two different languages or the 
equivalent. This requirement will normally be waived for students from foreign countries who 
have studied English as a foreign language. 

5. An interview to determine oral proficiency in English at the time of application. 

6. Consent of the admitting committee to enter the program and to develop a study plan. 
Program Requirements 

1. Required Core (12 units): Foreign Language Education 443A, 443B, 468 (or Spanish 468) and 
5% (or Linguistics 5%) 

2. Electives (12 units) chosen, in consultation with the adviser, from the following: 

a. English (3 units): English 305, 490, 491 (if appropriate), 570 

b. Foreign Languages (3 units): French, German, Spanish 466, Spanish 467, Foreign Language 
Education 527 

c. Linguistics (3 units): Linguistics 351, 403, 406, 505, 507, 508 

d. Other (3 units): an appropriate course from the above or a course in American studies, 
American literature, American governmental Institutions, speech communication or foreign 
languages and literatures. 

3. Maintenance of a 3.0 CPA while in the program. 

The M.S. in TESOL (Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages) is offered by the Division 
of Teacher Education within the School of Human Development and Community Services In 
conjunction with the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures. See "Graduate Programs." 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

In accordance with recommendations made by the Modern Language Association of America, the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures encourages all majors interested in a teaching 
career to participate in a study-abroad program. This will enable a student to perfect mastery of the 
language and will afford additional insights into the foreign culture. The California State University's 
International Programs offers a wide variety of study opportunities on the junior, senior and graduate 
level. 

Language majors are required to complete the following minimum of courses on campus before 
departure for, or upon return from, overseas: 

A. for the B.A.: 12 units of upper-division courses consisting of a minimum of nine units at the 4(X) 
level in the major 

B. for the M.A.: 15 units consisting of a minimum of 12 units at the 500 level in the area of 
specialization. 

THE LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

Students enrolling In courses 101, 102, 203, 204 are required, in addition to the regular class periods, 
to practice in the language laboratory. The 36-statlon laboratory operates like a library; students may 
use it at a time most convenient to them preferably every day In sessions of 1 5 to 30 minutes. Further 
details will be announced by each instructor and by the supervisor of the language laboratory. 
Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural recordings in French, 
German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish available in the language laboratory. 

The CSU/UCLA Cooperative Program in Foreign Languages and Literatures 
The Cooperative Program in Foreign Languages and Literatures gives students the opportunity, 
without additional fees, to take courses in foreign languages not available on this campus or any 
neighboring CSU campus but offered at UCLA. For information regarding enrollment and qualifica- 
tions, interested students should inquire at this office. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

See "Graduate Programs." 


234 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


FOREIGN LANGUAGE COURSES 

1% $tudent-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See index. 

198 Programmed Courses in Uncommonly Taught Languages (1-3) 

Intensive individualized programmed instruction in specific languages other than those regularly 
offered, such as Turkish. To develop the skills of auditory comprehension and speaking in the 
language to form a basis for later development of the reading and writing skills. A minimum of 
3 hours per week in the learning laboratory and regular sessions with native informants are 
required for each unit of credit. May be repeated for credit. 

4% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See index. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGE EDUCATION COURSES 

105A,B English as a Second Language (4) 

English for non-native speakers. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing 
to improve control of the basic sounds and structures of English. Language laboratory assign- 
ments are included. (Same as Linguistics 105A,B) 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisites: French, German or Spanish 466; and admission to teacher education or consent of 
instructor. Principles, methods and materials of language learning and teaching. Includes lec- 
tures, activities and fieldwork. Required before admission to student teaching. 

443A Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: French, German or Spanish 466 or Linguistics 466. Recent trends, including the expand- 
ed use of electromechanical aids, programmed instruction and applied linguistics in the teaching 
of English to speakers of other languages. Techniques related to auditory comprehension and 
oral production of English. (Same as Linguistics 443A.) 

443B Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: French, German or Spanish 466 or Linguistics 406. Recent trends, including the use of 
electromechanical aids, programmed instruction, and applied linguistics in the teaching of 
English to speakers of other languages. Techniques related to the reading and writing of English. 
(Same as Linguistics 443B) 

449A Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education. 

468 TESOL Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing or above, successful completion of Spanish, French or German 466 and 
at least one 4(X)-level linguistics class. Theory and performance techniques for contrasting 
phonological, grammatical and lexical structures of English and three selected world languages. 

527 Theory of Bilingual Language Acquisition (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish, French or German 466 and Spanish 468 or Foreign Language Education 468 
or Linguistics 406 and consent of instructor. Methodology for research in bilingual language 
acquisition and development; socio-linguistic and psycholinguistic patterns in bilingualism; 
interactions of language and culture in the language acquisition process. 

5% TESOL Practicum (3) 

Prerequisites: Foreign Language Education 443 A, B, Spanish 468 or Foreign Language Education 468 
and one elective. Teaching English to speakers of other languages on campus or in local schools. 
Supervised by faculty and cooperating individuals. Seminar meetings by arrangement. May be 
repeated for credit upon consent of adviser. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 235 


ARABIC COURSES 

101 Fundamental Arabic — A (4) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic forms and structures of modern standard Arabic. 

102 Fundamental Arabic — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Arabic 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of modern standard 
Arabic. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Arabic 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Arabic language or literature to 
be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


CHINESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Chinese — A (4) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Chinese. Audiolingual assignments in the language laboratory. Con- 
ducted in Chinese. 

102 Fundamental Chinese — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Chinese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Chinese. Audiolin- 
gual assignments in the language laboratory. Conducted in Chinese. 

299. Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Chinese 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Chinese language or literature 
to be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


FRENCH COURSES 

101 Fundamental French— A (5) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic forms and structure of French. Audiolingual assignments in the language labora- 
tory. Conducted in French. 

102 Fundamental French — B (5) 

Prerequisite: French 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and basic structure of French. Assignments In the 
language laboratory. Conducted in French. 

203 Intermediate French — A (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in French. 

204 Intermediate French— B (3) 

Prerequisite. French 203 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in French. 

230 Intermediate Diction and Phonetics (2) 

Practice In oral delivery of cultural and literary materials. Analysis of individual problems in pronun- 
ciation. May be taken concurrently with French 203. Corniucted in French. 

240 Intermediate Conversation and Composition (2) 

Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. Discussion and practice in written expression based on 
cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently with French 204. Conducted in 
French. 


236 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

300 French Conversation (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Development of oral control of the language in the context 
of students' own or contemporary concerns. Conducted in French. 

307 French Film (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. The developing art of the French film, with special emphasis 
on the many roles of language. Subjects treated include: montage, visual /verbal meaning, 
literary/cinematic narrative, non-realistic language, read language, non-narrative continuity. 
Conducted in French. 

310 French in the Business World (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or consent of instructor. Designed to give students a working knowledge 
of business language (oral and written) in the French-speaking world. Emphasis on cultural and 
sociological contexts of business procedures. Analysis of appropriate current periodicals. Con- 
ducted in French. 

311 French for International Business (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or consent of instructor. Designed to give students experience in reading 
comprehension and analysis of materials dealing with economic and political realities in the 
French-speaking world. Analysis of appropriate current periodicals. Conducted in French. 

315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. The social, intellectual and artistic origins of French civiliza- 
tion: feudal society becoming the ancien regime; the medieval world-view transformed by the 
Renaissance. Literary selections in modern French translation. Conducted in French. 

317 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Free oral and written expression. Conducted in French. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or equivalent. The control of French as an instrument for free oral and 
written expression. Conducted in French. 

325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop understanding of the 
social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions of present-day France. Strengthening 
facility in the language. Conducted in French. 

375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. The nature of human language, the literary use of language, 
literary creation, reading, and what critics are able to say about literary works. Reading and 
discussion of some typical, mainly contemporary, texts. Conducted in French. 

415 French Classicism (3) 

Prerequisites: French 317 and 375. The decisive moment in French experience. Focus on literature 
of the Classic period ( 1660-1 685 ) but open at both ends to Include the formation and perennial- 
ity of French Classicism. Conducted in French. 

425 French Romanticism (3) 

Prerequisites: French 317 and 375. The revolution in feeling and intellect in 19th-century France. The 
Romantic period (1820-1850). May include material preceding or following those dates. Con- 
ducted in French. 

466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or 318. Analytical procedures of general linguistics applied to French. 
Structural contrasts between French and English. The application of linguistic analysis to the 
teaching of modern foreign languages. 

475A,B,C,D Seminar in 20th-Century French Literature (33^33) 

Prerequisites: French 315, 317, 375, and 415 or 425. If 415 or 425 has not been completed, one must 
be taken concurrently. The study of 20th-century French literature organized around four major 
themes. Conducted in French. 

475A Exploration of the Self (3) 

Search for identity and the quest for personal authenticity. The role of the conscious and unconscious 
mind and of artistic creativity. Proust, Cide, Mauriac, Val^, etc. 

475B In Search of the Real (3) 

The surrealist revolt against bourgeois logic, mores and literature. From Dada to automatic writing 
to Revolution to I'amourfou. Includes precursors and kindred spirits (e.g. Lautreamont, jarry). 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 237 


475C The Individual and Society (3) 

Attitudes toward personal freedom; the existential sense of responsibility toward one's fellows. 
Saint-Exup^ry, Malraux, Sartre, Camus, etc. 

475D Beyond Despair (3) 

Writers after World War II seeking tough-minded visions to replace the humanism of the '30's, new 
kinds of hope "beyond despair", (Sartre's "la vraie vie commence au-dela du d^sespolr"). 

485 Senior Seminar in French Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: French 315, 317, 375, and senior standing. A literary current, period, author, genre or 
problem. Subject will change each time course is given. May be repeated for credit. Conducted 
in French. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in French language or literature. Consent of the instructor and department chair 
required. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

520 Graduate Seminar: Old French (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Readings in the medieval literature of northern France. A variety 
of dialects and centuries. Conducted In French. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: French 466 or consent of instructor. Some previous study of Latin recommended. 
Introduction to the principles of historical linguistics. Primary emphasis on the transformation 
of classical Latin (phonology, morphology, syntax and lexicon) into contemporary French. 
Conducted in French. 

557 Graduate Seminar French Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Conducted in French. 

571 Graduate Seminar: French Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted In French. 

575 Graduate Seminar: French Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in French. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in French and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in French 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


GERMAN COURSES 

100A-J Personalized Instruction in Fundamental German (3-10) 

Equivalent to German 101 or 102. Students may enter at any level but must initially register for a 
minimum of three units. Course is divided into 10 one-unit modules. Students work independ- 
ently and meet individually with instructors for consultation and tests. 

101 Fundamental German — A (5) 

Practice in listening comprehension, sp)eaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic forms and structures of German. Audiolingual assignments in the language 
laboratory. 

102 Fundamental German — B (5) 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading, and 
writing on a basic level. Audiolingual assignments in the language laboratory. 

203 Intermediate German— A (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in German. 


238 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


204 Intermediate German — B (3) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in German. 

213 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Reading comprehension development. Required for major 
and minor. May be taken concurrently with German 203. Conducted in German. 

214 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Continuation of German 213. Reading comprehension 
development. Required for major and minor. May be taken concurrently with German 204. 
Conducted in German. 

300 German Conversation (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Development of oral control of the language in the context 
of students' own or contemporary concerns. Conducted in German. 

310 German in the Business World (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or consent of instructor. Designed to give students a working knowledge 
of business language in the German-speaking world. Emphasis on business correspornience, 
conversation between business partners and the language of advertising. Conducted in German. 

311 German for International Business (3) 

Prerequisites: German 204; 310 recommended. Designed to give students experience in reading 
comprehension and oral analysis of materials dealing with economic and political realities in 
the German-speaking world, seen In their cultural and sociological context. Conducted in 
German. 

315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower-division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in German literature, arts and institutions to develop insights Into 
German culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in German. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower-division students with consent of Instructor. 
Free oral and written expression. Conducted in German. 

325 Current Trends in Culture of German-Speaking Peoples (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower-division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussion of German contributions to present-day civilization while strengthen- 
ing facility with German language. Conducted in German. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. The principal literary forms, prose fiction, poetry, 
drama and the essay and the major concepts of literary techniques and criticism. Analysis and 
Interpretation of various texts. Conducted in German. 

399 German Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. Analysis of individual problems in pronuncia- 
tion. Work In class and the language laboratory. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in 
German. 

430 German Literature and Culture to the Baroque (3) 

Prerequisites: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. Masterpieces of German literature 
from the HHdebrandsHedXo Der Abenteuerliche SimpHcissimus arsd their relationship to cultural, 
historical and Intellectual developments between ca. 800-1670 A.D. Conducted in German. 

440 18th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisites: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. The principal authors and move- 
ments (Enlightenment, Storm and Stress, Classicism, early Romanticism) of the 18th century. 
Conducted In German. 

450 19th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisites: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of Instructor. 19th-century German literature 
from Romanticism to Naturalism. Decisive philosophic, political and economic Influences. 
Conducted in German. 

460 20th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisites: German 315, 317, 375, or consent of instructor. Major German prose, drama and 
poetry of the 20th century. Conducted in German. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 239 

466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite; German 317 or consent of instructor. Analytical procedures of general linguistics as 
applied to German. Structural contrasts between German and English. The application of 
linguistic analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

485 Senior Seminar in German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in German. Research and discussion of a literary movement, a genre 
or an author. Subject varies and Is announced in the class schedule. May be repeated for credit 
with a different topic. Conducted In German. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects In German language or literature to be taken with consent of Instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

550 Interpretation of Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Interpretation of literary works In advanced language classes. May 
be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

571 Graduate Seminar: German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the class schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the class schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in German and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in German 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


GREEK COURSES 

101 Fundamental Greek — A (3) 

Practice to develop a reading knowledge and a writing ability in ancient Greek. Biblical texts. 

102 Fundamental Greek — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Greek 101 or equivalent. Practice to develop a reading knowledge and a writing ability 
in ancient Greek. Biblical texts. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Greek 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Greek language or literature to 
be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


HEBREW COURSES 

101 Fundamental Hebrew — A (4) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing Hebrew. 

102 Fundamental Hebrew — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 101. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing He- 
brew. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Hebrew language or literature 
to be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


240 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


ITALIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Italian— A (4) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing of Italian. Audiolingual assignments in the 
language laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

102 Fundamental Italian — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Italian 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing of Italian. Audiolingual assignments. Conducted in Italian. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Italian language or literature to 
be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


JAPANESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Japanese — A (4) 

Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking and writing of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in Japanese. 

102 Fundamental Japanese — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking and writing 
of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments in the language laboratory. Conducted in Japanese. 

203 Intermediate Japanese — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 102 or equivalent. Instruction in reading, writing, speaking, and comprehend- 
ing of modern Japanese. Conducted in Japanese. 

204 Intermediate Japanese — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 203 or equivalent. Instruction in reading, writing, speaking and comprehend- 
ing of modern Japanese. Conducted in Japanese. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Japanese language or literature 
to be taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


LATIN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Latin— A (3) 

Practice to develop a reading knowledge and a writing ability in Latin. Modern techniques of 
language instruction will be applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 101 or equivalent. Practice to develop a reading knowledge and a writing ability 
in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will be applied. 

299 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 102 or equivalent. Supervised study projects in Latin language or literature to be 
taken with consent of instructor and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


PORTUGUESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Portuguese — A (4) 

Prerequisite: previous study of a Romance language. Listening comprehension, speaking, reading 
comprehension, and writing of Portuguese. Conducted in Portuguese. 

102 Fundamental Portuguese — B (4) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehen- 
sion of Portuguese. Conducted in Portuguese. 

315 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese or consent of instruc- 
tor. The main currents of Portuguese culture and civilization and Brazil's intellectual and artistic 
development from discovery to independence. Conducted in Portuguese. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 241 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Emphasis on free oral and written 
expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Use of Portuguese as an instru- 
ment of free oral and written expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Readings and discussion to develop under- 
standing of the social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions to Brazil since in- 
dependence. Present day Brazil. Conducted In Portuguese. 

431 Portuguese Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Portuguese literature from the Middle Ages to 
the present. The major works of Gil Vicente, Luis de Camoens, E^a de Queiroz and others 
examined from an aesthetic and cultural standpoint. Conducted in Portuguese. 

441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The literature of Brazil from the colonial period to the present. 
Conducted in Portuguese. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects In Portuguese language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


SPANISH COURSES 

101 Fundamental Spanish — A (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing of Spanish. Assignments 
in the language laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

102 Fundamental Spanish— B (5) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing of Spanish. Assignments in the language laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

103 Intensive Review of Fundamental Spanish (5) 

For students who have completed 3 years of high school Spanish or equivalent and need an Intensive 
review of first-year Spanish, equivalent to Spanish 101 and 102. Assignments In the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

201 Spanish for Hispanics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An intermediate course designed to improve the communication 
skills in Spanish for bilingual students. Emphasis on spelling, grammar and composition. Con- 
ducted In Spanish. Students may not receive credit for both Spanish 201 and 203. 

203 Intermediate Spanish — A (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

204 Intermediate Spanish — B (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 or equivalent. Practice in speaking, understanding, reading and writing 
based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

213 Intermediate Conversation (2) 

Practice in oral expression. May be taken concurrently with Spanish 203. Conducted in Spanish. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Spanish 204. Conducted in Spanish. 

299 Spanish Diction and Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisite: concurrent enrollment in, or former completion of, a 200-level Spanish course. Analysis 
of students' specific problems in pronunciation. Work in class and the language laboratory. May 
be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 


242 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

300 Spanish Conversation (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. To develop oral control of the language in the context of 
students' own or contemporary concerns. No credit for major. Conducted in Spanish. 

310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or consent of instructor. Practical vocabulary and structure of business 
language, as well as the cultural background of business procedures in the Hispanic world. No 
credit toward Spanish major. Conducted in Spanish. 

315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Readings and discussions in Spanish 
literature, arts and institutions. Strengthening of facility in the language. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Readings and discussion in Spanish- 
American literature, arts and institutions. Strengthening of facility in the language. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower-division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

318 Advanced Spanish Syntax and Composition (3) 

Emphasis on linguistic problems of the Spanish/ English bilingual student In connection with written 
expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Introduction to literary forms and concepts of 
literary techniques and criticism. Analysis and interpretation of various texts. Strengthening of 
students' abilities in reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted In Spanish. 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318 or consent of instructor. Spoken and written Spanish. Development 
of students' powers of self-expression and ability to analyze the structure of the written lan- 
guage. Conducted in Spanish. 

415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of Instructor. The cultural — social, economical, political — 
characteristics of contemporary Spanish life. Conducted in Spanish. 

416 Contemporary Spanish-American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. The social, economic, artistic, and political aspects 
of contemporary life In Spanish America. Conducted in Spanish. 

430 Spanish Literature to Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 and 375. Spanish literature from its beginnings to 1700. Representative 
works of each genre. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 316 and 375 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from 
modernismo to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 

461 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 315 and 375 or consent of instructor. Representative works of 19th- and 
20th-century Spain. Conducted in Spanish. 

466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318 or equivalent with consent of instructor. The analytical procedures 
of general linguistics as applied to Spanish. Structural contrasts between Spanish and English. 
The application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 317 or 318, 400 or equivalent and 466, which may be taken concurrently. The 
differences in phonology, morphology, syntax and lexicon in linguistic patterns In ail Spanish- 
speaking regions. Conducted in Spanish. 

468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 317 or 318, 400 or equivalent, and 466 which may be taken concurrently. 
Theory and performance techniques for contrasting phonological, grammatical and lexical 
structures of Spanish and English. Conducted in Spanish. 


Geography 243 


475 Senior Seminar: Topics in Spanish Peninsular Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in Spanish. Selected topics of the literature of Spain. Subject matter will 
change. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

485 Senior Seminar. Topics in Spanish American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in Spanish. Selected topics of the literature of Spanish America. Subject 
matter will change. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1>3) 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar Spanish-American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 441 or equivelent. Conducted in Spanish. 

567 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Novel (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 441 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

571 Graduate Seminar. Spanish Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduate Seminar. Spanish Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 461 or equivalent. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Hispanic Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or 441 or 461 or equivalent. May be repeated for credit with different 
subject matter. Conducted in Spanish. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in Spanish and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in Spanish 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 

FACULTY 
Wayne Engstrom 
Department Chair 

Peter Eilers, Cary Hannes, Ronald Helin, William Ketteringham, Tso-Hwa Lee, Bill Puzo, Gertrude 
Reith, Imre Sutton, Barbara Weightman, Robert Young 
The major in geography provides knowledge of variation in locational patterns and processes of the 
earth's physical and cultural features. From this course of study, students gain an appreciation for 
the richness and diversity of the world's human and physical environments and regional settings. 
They are furnished with sound preparation for employment In both the private and public sectors. 
The field also provides a foundation for teaching at the elementary and secondary levels and for 
advanced geographic study on the graduate level leading to university teaching and research. 
Students and counselors are advised that departmental offerings are numbered according to course 
content as follows. 

(X)-09 (e.g.. Geography 100) 

10-29 (e.g.. Geography 110 or 323) 

30-49 (e.g.. Geography 344 or 431 ) 

50-79 (e.g.. Geography 160 or 367) 

80-89 (e.g.. Geography 280 or 381 ) 

90-99 (e.g.. Geography 495 or 599) 


general courses: 

00-09 

physical courses: 

10-29 

regional courses: 

30-49 

human courses: 

50-79 

technical courses: 

80-89 

special studies: 

90-99 


JOB-RELATED EMPHASES 

Geography graduates typically find employment opportunities in such areas as environmental analy- 
sis, urban affairs, regional and urban planning, the travel industry and related technical fields. A 
program of study leading to specialization in these and other career areas may be designed in 
consultation with the undergraduate adviser. 


244 Geography 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

The major consists of at least 42 units of geography, excluding all work used to satisfy the general 
education requirements and including: 

A. A 9-unit geography core (110, 160, 280) 

B. A 12-unit breadth requirement in upper-division geography, including one course from each 
of the following groups — physical, regional, human, technical. 

C. A six-unit requirement in 400-level geography, excluding the 490s and all work used to satisfy 
the 12-unit breadth requirement. 

Students may satisfy requirements A, B and C with equivalent course work taken at other institutions; 
they may also transfer into the major an additional six units of lower-division geography and an 
unlimited amount of upp)er-division geography. 

No unit credit toward the major will be allowed for geography courses in which a grade of D is 
received. Content credit for such courses may be allowed by the departmental undergraduate 
adviser. 

UPPER-DIVISION BACCALAUREATE WRITING REQUIREMENT 

Geography 3(X), designated to meet the classroom portion of the upper-division writing requirement, 
constitutes three units to be taken In addition to the 42 units r^uired in the major. 

For students exempt from this writing requirement. Geography 300 may be taken as part of the 
42-unit major, but it cannot serve to satisfy the departmental breadth requirement in techniques. 

MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor In geography serves students who wish to pursue a second field related to interdisciplinary 
studies or an elective concentration. Interested students should take at least 21 units of geography, 
including the core (110, 160, 280) and a minimum of nine units of upper-division work from at least 
three of the following groups — physical, regional, human, technical. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

See '"Graduate Programs." 


GEOGRAPHY COURSES 

100 World Habitats (3) 

The world's major geographical regions. The physical and human elements that differentiate the 
regions and give identity to each. Ways of life and the environments in which they are found. 

110 Principles of Physical Geography (3) 

The major components of the physical environment, including landforms, climate, natural vegetation 
and soils. 

120 Environment and Change (3) (Formerly 150) 

A geographic analysis of the use and misuse of environment. 

160 Culture and Environment (3) 

Patterns of settlement and livelihood, and the varying roles of population, social organization, 
religious and political ideologies, resources and technology. 

170 Introduction to the City (3) 

Geographic variations in the urbanization process, great world and American cities, and spatial 
patterns within the city. The city as a man-made environment. 

280a-g Introduction to Geographical Analysis (1) 

Prerequisite: minimum of one other core course In geography (i.e., 110 or 160) or consent of 
instructor. The technical interpretation of physical and human features and activities in the 
landscape. Majors must take a total of three units. 

280a Interpretation of Maps and Aerial Photographs (1) 

The uses of maps and aerial photographs in geographic research. Types of data which can be 
obtained from these sources. Rudimentary measurement techniques. 

280b Introduction to Field Methods (1) 

Geographic phenomena in their actual setting — "the field." 


Geography 245 


280c Introduction to Quantitative Methods (1) 

Descriptive statistics in geography. Graphs, functions and equations, logarithms and exponents, 
and an overview of the linear regression model. 

280e Library Techniques for Geographers (1) 

Library research for geographic inquiry. How and where to find the needed information. 

280g Analysis of Weather Maps (1) 

The use and analysis of weather maps. 

300 Geographical Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or 12 units In geography. Experience in and analysis of geography 
writing: reviews of literature, essays, major research paper, oral presentation. Croup and tutorial 
sessions. Meets the classroom portion of upper-division writing requirement for geography 
majors. 

312 Geomorphology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 110 or Earth Science 101 or consent of Instructor. Landforms and the 
processes responsible for their evolution. 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 110 or consent of instructor. Atmospheric elements and controls, fronts, 
severe weather, and climatic classification systems. 

325 Plant Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 110 or consent of instructor. World distribution, ecology, and patterns of 
vegetation, including human influences. 

330 California Landscapes (3) 

The landscapes of California — ^their environmental characteristics, development patterns and current 
problems. 

332 United States and Canada (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The United States and Canada. The interrelated physical and 
cultural features that give geographic personality to the regions. 

333 Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. Middle and South America. The interrelationships of the physi- 
cal and social factors of the area. 

336 Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The basic physical and human lineaments of Europe. The 
elements that distinguish and give character to its major regional divisions. 

338 Soviet Union (3) 

Prerequisite, upper-division standing. Physical, historical and political geography of the Soviet Union. 
Economic and social themes that lend identity to the country's major geographical regions. 

344 Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The physical, human and regional geography of Africa. Saha- 
ran borderlands. East Africa and Southern Africa. 

346 Australia and the Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The physical, cultural and regional geography of Australia, 
New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia and Polynesia. 

349A The Arctic (1) 

The far northern lands and seas, including the Arctic Basin, the Northwest Passage, Greenland and 
the Northeast Passage. Attention to the natural setting, exploration and recent developments 
in resource use. (3 hours lecture and discussion per week for 5 weeks) 

3498 The Antarctic (1) 

An introduction to Antarctica, with attention to Its natural setting, discovery and exploration, political 
status, resource use, and techniques of living. (3 hours lecture and discussion per week for 5 
weeks) 

349C The Oceans (1) 

The four oceans. Their discovery by Europeans; their appropriation; their use as commercial high- 
ways; their use as sources of food, fresh water and energy. (3 hours lecture and discussion per 
week for 5 weeks) 


246 Geography 

349D The Ocean Floors (1) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. Depth and configuration of the sea floor. Living conditions at 
great depths. Entry by human beings. Extraction of natural resources. National claims to subma- 
rine territory. Submerged settlements. (3 hours lecture and discussion per week for 5 weeks). 

350 Conservation and Ecology in America (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. Environmental change and resource-use problems. Land eth- 
ics, environmental law, public policy and technological impacts. 

352 Parks of North America (3) 

The park system and Its evolution as related to conservation, preservation, and recreational land use. 
Cultural heritage and physical environment. 

357 Social Geography — Perception and Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 160 or consent of instructor. Perception and behavior in various spatial 
settings In cultural and physical environments. Significance to social planning. 

359 Topics in Human Geography (1) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. Social, cultural, economic or political relationships and the 
environment. May be repeated for credit. 

360 Economic Geography (3) 

The spatial distribution of economic activities: agriculture, manufacturing industries, and tertiary 
services. 

362 Geography of Wine (3) 

Vineyards and wineries of California and the world. Physical, historical, economic and social factors 
and forces. (Age 21 or over) 

363 International Travel (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. Natural and cultural conditions influencing travel; modes and routes 
of travel; and a cost/ benefit evaluation of the economic, cultural and environmental impact of 
travel. 

367 Geopolitics (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The geographic bases of political territories, from the municipal 
to the international level. Sovereign states and international affairs. 

370 Urban Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. American metropolitan systems and city-region linkages. Theo- 
ries and spatial models of social and economic patterns within cities and suburbs; planning 
Implications of these locational patterns. 

381 Cartography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Compilation and construction of maps and 
graphs as geographic tools. The principles of effective cartographic representation. (1 hour 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

384 Airphoto and Image Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Use of aerial photography, space photography 
and other remote sensors as tools and research sources. Interpretation of physical and cultural 
elements of the landscape. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

385 Quantitative Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of Instructor. Spatial analysis and geographic application of 
descriptive and inferential statistics. Use of the electronic computer. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity.) 

386 Data Processing for Geographic Information (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. The digital computer in solving geographical 
problems. The acquisition of basic computer programming skills. Spatially-oriented problems. 
(2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

412 Regional Geomorphology of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 312 or consent of instructor. The major physiographic provinces of the 
United States. The record that present and past geomorphic processes have left on the land- 
scape. 

422 Regional Climatology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 323 or consent of Instructor. Major climatic regions of the world; the 
physical factors that produce climatic patterns. 


Gerontology 247 


426 Man and the Coastal Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 110, 325 and 312 recommended. An ecological approach to man's impact 
on coastal environments, emphasizing the West Coast of North America. 

431 Man's Impact on the California Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. Geographic problems caused by man's impact on the land and 
its resources. 

450 Man, Hazards and Disasters (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 350 or Earth Science 101 or 120. The hazardous environment; impact of 
hazards and disasters on land utilization and settlement; adaptive strategies in land use planning. 

463 Advanced Travel Geography (3) 

Prerequisites: Geography 363, upper-division standing and consent of instructor. A research based 
course designed to examine the economic significance and geographic patterns of world travel. 
Students will prepare detailed descriptions of routes and conditions of commercial and passen- 
ger movement. 

468 Law and Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 350 or consent of instructor. The role of law in the management of resources 
and in environmental planning. Property and land use regulations. 

472 Urban Dynamics and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 370 or consent of Instructor. Urban development; the decentralizing forces 
operating in contemporary urban space; identification of trends in the planning process. 

488 Land Use Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: geography core and consent of Instructor. Urban and rural land use and settlement; 
geographic field problems. Application of geographic techniques and tools to local field studies. 

489 Advanced Topics in Geo-Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 381, or 384, or 385, or 386 or consent of instructor. Selected topics pertain- 
ing to the theory and application of various geo-techniques. May be repeated more than once 
for credit as long as topic discussed Is different. 

495 Internship in Applied Geography (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and consent of instructor. Students work specified number of hours 
in appropriate public or private organizations under the supervision of their staff and as coor- 
dinated by departmental faculty. Interns meet with Instructor by arrangement. May be repeated 
for a maximum of three units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing. Consent of instructor under whom study will be taken required before 
enrolling. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

530 Seminar: Selected Topics in Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of Instructor. Various topics selected from any of the 
subfields of geography. The topic chosen and a general outline of the seminar are circulated 
prior to registration. May be repeated for credit. 

590 Seminar in Geographic Research (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. A required seminar to be taken prior to 
the development of a thesis. The research, organization and written preparation of a thesis 
proposal. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: Geography 590 and consent of adviser. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of Geography 590, advancement to candidacy and consent of instructor. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

GERONTOLOGY PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

Rosalie Gilford 
Program Coordinator 

PROGRAM COUNCIL 

Helene Ballmer (Psychology), Natalie Barish (Biological Science), Tony Bell (Sociology), Rosalie 


248 History 


Gilford (Chair), Sallie Kerpan (Student), Loretta Nelson-Zietz (Student), Paul Pastor (Physical 
Education), Don Schweitzer (School of Humanities and Social ScierKes), Barbara Talento (Nurs- 
ing), David Walkington (Extended Education) 

MINOR IN GERONTOLOGY 

The gerontology minor is a multidisciplinary program that examines the biological, psychological and 
social changes experienced by most people during their adult lives. It is available and appropriate 
to strengthen and otherwise complement the course work of students in any major. Notation of the 
minor appears on the transcript and the diploma. 

The minor in gerontology helps to prepare students for careers In business, government, industry, 
public and private agencies, and health and human service organizations by providing them with 
knowledge and critical understanding of the processes of adult development and aging. Gerontology 
is a field of study which students may analyze with the concepts, theories and methods learned In 
their major area of study. It introduces students to the field of services to older people. It provides 
a firm grasp of the historical development and possible future forms and processes of relationships 
between age groups In society. 

The gerontology minor consists of 21 units in the following areas: 

Lower Division (3 units) 

Sociology 133 Introduction to Gerontology (3) 

Upper Division (12 units) 

Sociology 333 Sociology of Aging (3) 

Psychology 362 Psychology of Aging (3) 

Biology 306 Biology of Aging (3) 

Nursing 360 Promoting Health of the Elderly (3) 

Upper-Division Electives (6 units, adviser approved) 

A 300/400 level course in a related field (3) 

A 300/400 level internship In a related field (3) 

Possible Electives 

Human Services 385 Program Design and Proposal Writing (3) 

Nursing 357 Health PronrK)tion: Adult-Aged Nursing (3) 

Philosophy 314 Medical Ethics (3) 

Sociology 433 Aging and Social Services (4) 

Sociology 446 Aging and Sexuality (3) 

Sociology 460 Death and Dying (3) 

Additional elective courses are available in selected departments across campus. 

ADVISEMENT 

Students are advised to see a program adviser prior to their first semester at the university as a 
gerontology minor. A flyer describing the gerontology minor in greater detail Is available from the 
Cross-Disciplinary Programs office. 

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

FACULTY 
lames Woodward 
Department Chair 

Cordon Bakken,* Warren Beck, Leland Bellot, Lauren Breese, Giles Brown,* Jack Crabbs, Lawrence 
de Graaf, jack Elenbaas, George Etue, Robert Feldman, Charles Frazee, Arthur Hansen, B. 
Carmon Hardy, Harry Jeffrey, Sam Kupper, Sheldon Maram, Frederic Miller, Michael Onorato, 
David PIvar, Charles Povlovich, Jackson Putnam, Ronald Rietveld, Danton Sailor, Seymour 
Scheinberg, Cary Shumway, Cameron Stewart, Ernest Toy,* David Van Deventer, Nelson 
Woodard, Kinji Yada, Ceclle Zinberg. 


University administrative officer 


History 249 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The undergraduate major in history is designed to provide cultural enrichment, a sense of alternative, 
and perspectives especially relevant to a society confronted with widespread institutional change. 
The department offers courses which expose the student to humanities' rich and diverse experience 
and the various methodologies and ways of thinking about our past. The major may be pursued to 
fulfill professional and cultural objectives common to a liberal arts program. It serves especially as 
a preparation for teaching, law, business, government and other fields. 

To aid students pursuing specific career orientation, the History Department has developed advise- 
ment material concerning careers in law, public policy, international business, domestic business, 
archival /library work and religious studies. Students seeking to combine an interest in one of these 
fields with a history major should seek advisement as soon as possible. The History Department 
offers internships (History 498) which provide work experience as part of the regular class load. 
The undergraduate program for the history major contains three well defined levels of study: 
introductory, intermediate and advanced. At the introductory level, the student has the opportunity 
to enroll in topical or survey courses in various fields. At the intermediate level, students build on 
the foundations established in early study, extending their understanding and moving toward greater 
sophistication in the use of historical materials. At the advanced level, they will devote themselves 
to seminar work and independent study in their area or areas of specialization, at which time they 
will be required to apply their knowledge and training in original and challenging ways. 

The undergraduate major requires a total of 42 units: 12 in introductory classes, including 1 10A and 
HOB and 30 in intermediate and advanced courses. At the intermediate level, History 300A, Histori- 
cal Thinking, and History 3(X)B, Historical Writing, must be taken along with 18 units, six each in 
the three fields of United States history; European history; and Latin American, Asian or African 
history. At the advanced level the student will be required to enroll in a research seminar and any 
other elective, at the upper-division level. 

Students majoring in history are encouraged to take work in other of the social sciences and 
humanities. Those intending to do graduate work in history should commence the study of at least 
one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced study in their particular specialty. 

Program of Study for the Major 

1. Introductory requirements: 

A. All students must complete both History 110A and HOB (6 units); 

B. The additional six units may be completed by taking: 

(1 ) History 170A and 170B, or 

(2) History 180 and one other three-unit history course 

2. Intermediate requirements: 24 units 

A. History 300A,B 

B. At least six units of U.S. history 

C. At least six units of European history (including Ancient World) 

D. At least six units in Latin America, Middle East, Asian, African or Canadian history 

3. Advanced requirements: 6 units 

A. History 490 

B. Three units of elective, upper-division level 

HISTORY MAJOR AND THE RYAN ACT 

The State Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing has approved the department's history 
major for the multiple subj^t credential option of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 
1970 (Ryan Act), as well as for the single subject credential option in history and for the single 
subject credential option in the social sciences. The successful completion of any of the three subject 
waivers mentioned above permits a student to receive a credential without taking the State Licensing 
Examination. For further information consult the History Department. 

MINOR IN HISTORY 
Requirements 24 units 

1. Lower-division course work — 6-8 units (including general education requirements) 

2. Upper-division course work — 15-18 units 

a. 3 units of History 300A or 490 

b. 12-15 units approved by the undergraduate coordinator 


250 History 


MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

See "Graduate Programs." 

HISTORY MAJOR CATEGORIES 

I. INTRODUCTORY COURSES (for undergraduate students) 

A. Survey Courses ( Lower division ) 

110A, Western Civilization to the 16th Century; 11 OB, Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century; 170A,B, United States; 180, Survey of American History. 

B. Topical Course (Lower division) 

231, The Ascent of Man. 

II. INTERMEDIATE COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

A. Historical Methodology (Upper division) 

300A, Historical Thinking; 300B, Historical Writing 

B. Subject Area Courses (Upper division) 

The Ancient World 

41 5A, Classical Greece; 41 5B, Hellenistic Civilization; 41 7A, Roman Republic; 41 7B, Roman 

Empire 

Europe 

310, Behind the Lines: World War II; 340, Ancient and Medieval Britain: Law and Society; 
341, Tudor-Stuart England; 342, History of Modern England and Great Britain; 395, A History 
of the First World War; 401, European Intellectual History from 1500 to the Present; History 
405, History of the Jews; 410, World at War; 419, The Byzantine Empire; 421 A,B, History 
of the Christian Church; 423A,B, Medieval Europe; 425A, The Renaissance; 425B, The 
Reformation; 426, Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763; 429, Europe Since 1914; 432, Modern 
Germany from the 18th Century; 434A, Russia to 1890; 434B, The Russian Revolution and 
the Soviet Regime; 437, East Europe; 439, History of Spain; 442, British Constitutional History 
from the Restoration to the Present. 

Canada 

380, Canada, 1 534-1 %7. 

Latin America 

350, History of Latin American Civilization; 453A, B, Mexico. 

Africa 

458, Southern Africa In the 2(Xh Century. 

Asia 

360, Modern Asia: Nationalism & Revolutionary Change; 460, Problems of the Contempo- 
rary Far East; 462A, B, History of China; 463A, B, History of Japan; 464A, Southeast Asia; 
464B, History of Contemporary Southeast Asia; 465 A, B, History of India. 

Middle East 

466A, Islamic Civilization: Arab Era; 466B, Islamic Civilization: Imperial Age; 467, Middle 
East in the 19th Century; 468, Middle East in the 20th Century. 

United States 

370, American Sex Reformers; 383, History of California; 384, Leisure in America: A Social 
History; 386A, B, American Social History; 394, The American Civil War; 470, American 
Colonial Civilization; 471, The United States From Colony to Nation; 472, Jeffersonian 
Themes In American Society, 18(X>-1861; 473, Democracy on Trial, 1845-1877; 474, The 
United States — 1 876-1914; 475, America Comes of Age, 1 914-1945; 476, United States Since 
1945; 478, The History of Orange County; 479, The Urbanization of American Life; 480, 
Development of American Law; 481, Westward Movement In the United States; 483, Ameri- 
can Religious History; 484, American Legal and Constitutional History; 485 A, B, United States 
Foreign Relations; 486, United States Cultural History; 487, History of American Parties and 
Politics; 488, Black American Since 1890. 

Science and Technology 
430A,B, History of Science. 

World or Comparative 

303A,B, Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies; 407, War and Civilization. 

III. ADVANCED COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

490, Senior Research Seminar; 492, Community History; 493A, Oral History; 498, Internship; 
499, Independent Study. 


History 251 


IV. GRADUATE COURSES (for graduate students) 

502, History and Historians; 503, Theory and History; 504, Historical Research; 520, Seminar 
in European History; 570, Seminar in American History; 590, History and Historians; 597, 
History Project; 598, Thesis; 599, Independent Graduate Research. 


HISTORY COURSES 

110A Western Civilization to the 16th century (3) 

Western Civilization from its origins to the 16th century. 

HOB Western Civilization Since the 16th century (3) 

Western Civilization from the 16th century to the present. 

170A United States to 1877 (3) * 

The political, social, economic and cultural development of the United States to 1877. Old World 
background, rise of the new nation, sectional problems, the Civil War and Reconstruction. 

170B United States Since 1877 (3) * 

U.S. history from the late 19th century to the present. Economic transformation, political reform 
movements, social, cultural, and intellectual changes, and the role of the United States in world 
affairs. 

180 Survey of American History (3) 

American history from prehistoric times (before 1492) to the present according to chronological 
time periods. Basic themes which pervade the entire sweep of the nation's history. Satisfies state 
requirement in U.S. history. 

231 The Ascent of Man (3) 

Science and technology in the development of human culture. Especially the development of science 
in western culture since the 1 7th century. Scientific concepts, their emergence, and the social 
impact of science. 

300A Historical Thinking (3) 

The nature of history, history of historical thought, and history's relationship to the humanities and 
social sciences. Seminar required of all history majors. 

300B Historical Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: History 300A (may be taken concurrently) . Research and writing as related to historical 
topics. Meets the classroom portion of the upper-division writing requirement for history 
majors. Seminar required of all history majors. 

303A,B Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies (3^) 

The origins and development of modes of thought and forms of expression in the three core areas 
of liberal studies, the natural sciences, the social sciences, and the arts and humanities. 

310 Behind the Lines: World War II (3) 

World War II. The home fronts, military occupation, the resistance, espionage, genocide and the war 
in historical perspective. Extensive use of films. 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain: Law and Society (3) 

Britain from 55 B.C. to 1485. The constitutional, institutional and cultural aspects of Roman, Celtic, 
Anglo-Saxon, Norman and Plantagenet Britain. 

341 Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

England from the accession of Henry VII to the Glorious Revolution. The political, institutional, 
ecclesiastical and cultural aspects of the period of the Tudors and Stuarts. 

342 History of Modern England and Great Britain (3) 

Modern British history (Glorious Revolution to present). The achievement of constitutional monar- 
chy, transition from agragarian to industrial society, establishment of political democracy and 
the rise of socialism. 

350 History of Latin American Civilization (3) 

The social, economic, political and cultural evolution of Latin America from the European conquest 
to the present. 

360 Modern Asia: Nationalism and Revolutionary Change (3) 

A modular analysis of nationalism, revolution and modernization as drawn from the experiences of 
the countries of China, japan, India and Southeast Asia. 

* Both History 17a\ and 170B must be taken to satisfy the state requirement in U.S. history. 


252 History 


370 American Sex Reformers (3) 

Sex reform and its implication for social thought and behavior. Sex reformers to be considered are 
Havelock Ellis, Charlotte Perkins Gilman, Alfred Kinsey, William Masters and Virgina Johnson, 
and David Reuben. 

380 Canada, 1534-1%7 (3) 

Canadian history from the founding of New France and the rise of British power in North America 
to the establishment of an independent Canadian nation which celebrated the centenary of 
self-governing status in 1%7. 

383 History of California (3) 

The political, economic, and social history of California from the aboriginal inhabitants to the present; 
the development of contemporary institutions and the historical background of current issues. 

384 Leisure in America: A Social History (3) 

Leisure In America from the colonial period to the present. The contest in the early period between 
man's urge to play and the Puritan work ethic until the contemporary triumph of the fun society. 
(Same as Recreation 384) 

386A American Social History 1750-1860 

A social history of the United States to the Civil War; reform movements, temperance, moral purity, 
women's rights, anti-slavery, spiritualism and their Importance to the formation of a modern 
society. (Same as American Studies 386A) 

386B American Social History 1865-1930 (3) 

A social history of the United States from the Civil War; reform, social organization and values. The 
woman's movement, censorship, divorce, the child and the limits of reform movements in an 
organizational society. (Same as American Studies 386B) 

394 The American Civil War (3) 

Prerequisites: History 1 70A or 180 or consent of instructor. A history of the American Civil War. Both 
contemporary and current analyses of the war will be amplified by the use of films and slides. 

395 A History of the First World War (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 1 OB or consent of instructor. A history of the Great War stressing the military, 
social, economic and political aspects of the war. Films documentaries and special lectures. 

3% Introduction to Public History (3) 

Prerequisites: History 180 or its equivalent. Applications of history to activities outside of teaching 
and academic research. Will introduce archival work, historic preservation, exhibit interpreta- 
tion, and historical research and writing in business, government and individual consulting. 

401 European Intellectual History from 1500 to the Present (3) 

The competing ideas in European history from 1 5(X) to the present which have shaped modern 
European institutions. 

405 History of the Jews (3) 

The Jewish people from the biblical period to the present. The literature of each period as well as 
the relationships which exist between the Jewish communities and the societies in which they 
exist. 

407 War and Civilization (3) 

The political and social implications of modern warfare, of the development of military technologies 
and of changing concepts of military organizations. 

410 World War II (3) 

A history of World War II: Films, documentaries, lectures and discussion. 

415A Classical Greece (3) 

The civilization of ancient Greece. The rise and flourishing of the classical city-states; the literary and 
philosophic contributions to modern civilization. 

4158 Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

The hellenistic synthesis and the new patterns in government, the arts and sciences, philosophy and 
literature between the Macedonian conquest and the intervention of Rome. 

417A Roman Republic (3) 

Roman social and political institutions under the republic. 


History 253 


417B Roman Empire (3) 

Roman imperial institutions and culture with attention to the rise of Christianity. 

419 The Byzantine Empire (3) 

The East Roman Empire from Constantine to the Ottoman conquest of 1453. Institutional aspects of 
Byzantine society: church, state, the economy, law and culture. 

421A History of the Christian Church to 1025 ( 3) 

The Christian Church from its origins in the apostolic preaching through the Middle Ages in both 
the East and West. 

421 B History of the Christian Church from 1025 to the Present (3) 

The western church as an institution from 1025 to the present. Orthodoxy, Catholicism and Protes- 
tantism in historical perspective. 

423A Medieval Europe, 300-1000 ( 3) 

The emergence of western Europe from the decline of Rome to the age of the Vikings. 

423B Medieval Europe, 1000-1400 ( 3) 

The political, intellectual and artistic aspects of western Europe in the High Middle Ages. 

425 A The Renaissance (3) 

Europe from 1400 to 1525. The beginnings of capitalism, the beginnings of the modern state, 
humanism, the pre-Reformation and the church on the eve of the Reformation. 

425 B The Reformation (3) 

Europe from 1525 to 1648; The Protestants and Catholic Reformations; the religious wars; the price 
rise; royal absolution; the rise of science. 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 10B. European diplomatic history and the balance of power from 1648 to 1763. 
The social and philosophical developments of the period. 

429 Europe Since 1914 (3) 

A survey of European history from 1914 to the aftermath of World War II. 

430A History of Science: Ancient to Renaissance (3) 

Western science and its role in culture from the third millennium B.C. through the beginnings of the 
Scientific Revolution of the 16th and 17th centuries. The hellenic, hellenistic and later medieval 
periods will receive special attention. 

430B History of Science: Copernicus to the Present (3) 

Science from the 1 6th century to the present especially the scientific revolutions of the 1 7th and 20th 
centuries and the interaction between science, technology and culture. 

432 Modern Germany from the 18th Century (3) 

German history from the era of Frederick the Great to the present. 

434A Russia to 1890 (3) 

The establishment of the Russian state at Kiev through the great reforms, the revolutionary movement 
and reaction of the 19th century. The shaping of contemporary Russia. 

434B The Russian Revolutions and the Soviet Regime (3) 

The 1905 and 1917 revolutions and the subsequent consolidation of power under the Communist 
regime. The continuity and change in Russian social political, cultural institutions and foreign 
policy effected by the impact of Marxist-Lennist-Stalinist ideology. 

437 East Europe (3) 

The political and social history of the central East European peoples. 

442 British Constitutional History from the Restoration to the Present (3) 

Prerequisite: History 340 or 341 or 342, or Political Science 375 or consent of instructor. Evolution 
of responsible government and the rule of law in Great Britain and dependent countries from 
the Age of Aristocracy, through industrialization and democratization, into an era of war and 
centralization. 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

Mexico from the pre-Columbian period to 1910. The Indian heritage, the impact upon the native 
civilizations of the Spanish Conquest and the blending of Hispanic institutions with those of the 
first Mexicans. 

453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

The background of the Mexican Revolution of 1910; the revolution itself from 1910 to 1921; the 
political, economic, and social features; the Revolution as the first of the great upheavals of the 
20th century. 


254 History 


458 Southern Africa in the 20th Century (3) 

Twentieth-century developments in the Union (Republic) of South Africa, Central Africa (the 
Rhodesias and Nyasaland) and the Portuguese colonies; the political, economic and social 
ramifications of race relations. 

462A History of China (3) 

Chinese history from ancient times to the middle of the 1 7th century; society, thought, economy 
and political institutions. 

462B History of China (3) 

Chinese history from the middle of the 17th century to the 1950s. China's internal developments and 
foreign intrusion, the rise of modern Chinese nationalism and intellectual developments in the 
Republican period, and the attempts at modernization and the triumph of communism. 

462C China Since 1949 (3) 

History of China from 1949 to the present. The Communist Party, political institutions. Ideology, 
economic modernization and foreign relations of China. 

463A History of Japan (3) 

The social, political, and economic history of japan until 1868 stressing the Tokugawa era. 

463B History of Japan (3) 

The rise of the modern Japanese state, Japanese imperialism and the postwar era. 

464A History of Southeast Asia, 1850-1945 (3) 

Southeast Asia under the impact of the Imperialism and the effects of the Pacific War on the 
European empires. 

464B History of Contemporary Southeast Asia (3) 

Southeast Asia since the Pacific War to the present. The problems of the area and American 
involvement in Southeast Asia. 

465A History of India (3) 

Survey of the history of India from ancient times through the arrival of Islam to the decline of the 
Mughul Empire in 18th century. Political developments, social and religious institutions: 
Hinduism, Buddhism, Jainism, class, caste; early impact of Europeans. 

465B History of India (3) 

India from early activities of British in 18th century through Indian Independence 1948. Political, 
economic, religious developments: crystallization of British supremacy in South Asia through 
the Indian Mutiny of 1857; India's struggle for Independence; emergence of Gandhi and Nehru. 

466A Islamic Civilization: Arab Era (3) 

Arab predominance in the Middle East from the rise of Islam to the Mongol invasions of the 13th 
century. 

466B Islamic Civilization: Imperial Age (3) 

The Mongol invasions of the Middle East and their effects. The Ottoman Turkish, Safavid Persian 
and Moghul Empires down to A.D. 1800. 

467 The Middle East in the 19th Century (3) 

Western penetration of the Middle East and the reaction to it, modernization, the growth of national- 
ist movements and revolutionary disturbances ending with World War I. 

468 Middle East in the 20th Century (3) 

Social, political and economic changes in the Middle East since World War I. The period after World 
War 11 and recent independence movements. 

470 American Colonial Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or 180 or consent of instructor. Analyzes the creation and development 
of societies In English North Anr>erlca from 1492-1754; the emergence of economic, social and 
political patterns and structures in a maturing Anglo-American culture. 

471 The United States from Colony to Nation (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or 180 or consent of instructor. Social, economic, political and intellectual 
developments in late 18th-century America, the coming of American Revolution, origins of 
American nationalism, social structure of the new nation, and formation and ratification of the 
Constitution. 

472 Jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. Jeffersonian values and their impact upon the 
social, political and cultural life of the nation. 


History 255 


473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 ( 3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. America's "great national crisis" and the impact 
of slavery, civil war and national reconstruction upon the democratic process of the republic. 

474 The United States 1876-1914 (3) 

American industry and its impact upon American life. The populist and progressive reform move- 
ments. 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 ( 3) 

Major trends in U.S. domestic policy, foreign policy, economy and society from World War I through 
World War II. Conflicting values and ideals of domestic policy and U.S. role In world affairs. 

476 United States Since 1945 (3) 

U.S. History from 1945 to the present; the interrelationship of foreign policy, economic prosperity, 
domestic tensions and protest movements. 

478 The History of Orange County (3) 

The history of Orange County. Stress on the process of urbanization. 

479 The Urbanization of American Life (3) 

Urban life In America; the colonial town, the western town and the industrial city. 

480 Development of American Law (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or 170B. American law; contracts, property, commercial law, criminal 
law, corporations, torts, civil procedure and the legal profession. 

481 Westward Movement in the United States (3) 

The expansion of the United States pK)pulation and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard to the 
Pacific, colonial times to 1900; regional development during the frontier period. 

483 American Religious History (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. American religious life and the proliferation of religious organi- 
zations as the result of the transplanting of European Christianity In the new environment. 

484 American Legal and Constitutional History 

Examination of legal and constitutional Issues affecting the development of the U.S. Constitution, 
American law and government. The course will survey developments from English and colonial 
legal origins to constitutional problems of the post- World War II era. 

485A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 (3) 

The foreign relations of the United States from the beginning of the nation until 1900. Bases of policy, 
major policies and relationships between domestic affairs and foreign policy. 

485B United States Foreign Relations from 1900 ( 3) 

Relations from 1900 to the present. The United States as a world power in the 20th-century; the 
search for world order and the diplomacy of the atomic age. 

486 United States Cultural History (3) 

The social and intellectual development of the United States from the Civil War to the present. 

487 History of American Parties and Politics (3) 

Development of American political parties and issues from 1787 to the present. Analyzes the 
evolution and change in American political parties and the recent impact of mass media upon 
them. 

488 Black American Since 1890 (3) 

Black Americans from Booker T. Washington to present; their culture and role in American life and 
the issues involved In their relations with other segments of the p>opulation in various regions. 

490 Senior Research Seminar (3) 

Directed research seminar with class discussions applied to specific topics and areas as schedule 
and staff allow. Original research and writing. Required of all history majors. Various topics may 
be repeated for credit. 

492 Community History (3) 

Historical development communities in general including the Orange County area. Techniques of 
gathering and processing local historical data, Including oral interviews and other archival 
materials. 

493A Oral History (3) 

The utilization of tape recorded interviews to document significant events in 20th-century history. 
Training will be given in interviewing techniques, specific background research and equipment 
use, after which students conduct a number of tape recorded interviews. 


256 Latin American Studies 


498 History Internship (3) 

The internship program offers work experience related to the history academic program or to areas 
of public and private employment where any liberal arts major is appropriate. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

502 History and Historians (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar in historical criticism where students examine modern 
historians for their methods and methodologies, their abilities to enlarge conceptions of history, 
and for the manner in which the historical profession receives new knowledge and methods. 

503 Theory and History (3) 

Prerequisite: History 502 or consent of instructor. Seminar introducing student to philosophical issues 
in history as a humanistic social science, to epistemological considerations of the relationship 
of history to other disciplines, and to new subdisciplines in history. Required for the M.A. 

504 Historical Research (3) 

Prerequisites: History 502, 503 or consent of instructor. Theory applied to particular historical topics. 
Students will develop theoretical and analytical frameworks that are effective in explaining the 
historical problem under consideration. Seminar required for the M.A. 

520 Seminar in European History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

570 Seminar in American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

597 History Project (3 or 6) 

The editing of a significant body of primary source materials, including a critical and interpretive 
introduction as well as appropriate reference and explanatory notes. Foreign sources will 
normally be translated into English. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be rep)eated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

William Ketteringham 
Program Coordinator 
PROGRAM COUNCIL 

Oswaldo Arana (Foreign Languages), Nancy Baden (Foreign Languages), Warren Beck (History), 
Isaac Cardenas (Chicano Studies), James Dietz (Economics), Dagobert Fuentes (Chicano 
Studies), Ron Harmon (Foreign Languages), Pierre Hostettler (Management), Arturo Jasso 
(Foreign Languages), Leroy Joesink-Mandeville (Anthropology), Carolyn Johnson (Communi- 
cations), Paul Kane (Education), William Ketteringham (Geography), Jackie Kiraithe (Foreign 
Languages), John Lafky (Economics), Neil Maloney (Earth Science), Sheldon Maram (His- 
tory), Lon McClanahan (Biological Science), Michael Mend (Sociology), Adolfo Ortega 
(Chicano Studies), Ervie Pena (Foreign Languages), Joseph Platt (Chicano Studies), Ivan 
Richardson (Political Science), Marlene de Rios (Anthropology), Gerald Rosen (Sociology), 
Jon Yinger (Political Science) 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The Latin American studies program is for students desiring a general education with focus on Latin 
America, careers which will involve residence in, or a knowledge of Latin America (such as teaching, 
business, government, scientific research, engineering, or journalism), for teaching Spanish or the 
social sciences in the secondary schools, or for graduate work in Latin American studies or other 
disciplines involving a specialization in Latin America. 

Teachers 

The Latin American studies program has been approved for the multiple subject waiver, under 
provisions of the Ryan Act. 


Latin American Studies 257 


Foundation Courses 

All students should develop a language proficiency level which is the equivalent of Spanish 204 and 
Portuguese 102. 

Students with no language background should take: 

Spanish 101 Fundamental Spanish — A (5) 

Spanish 102 Fundamental Spanish — B (5) 

Spanish 203 Intermediate Spanish — A (3) 

Spanish 204 Intermediate Spanish — B (3) 

Portuguese 101 Fundamental Portuguese — A (4) 

Portuguese 102 Fundamental Portuguese — B (4) 

However, a student with a knowledge of Spanish and/or Portuguese may be able to meet part or 
all of the foundation course requirements by taking a test administered by the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures. 

Required Fields of Study 

Language (3 units): 

Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition or 318 Advanced Spanish Syntax and 
Composition (3) (318 is designed for bilingual students) or either 
Portuguese 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

History and Culture (9 units): 

Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) or 
Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

History 350 History of Latin American Civilization (3) aoc/ three additional units in upper- 
division Latin American history 

Social Science (6 units) selected from two departments: 

Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 324A The Ancient Maya (3) 

Anthropology 324B The Aztecs and Their Predecessors (3) 

Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Anthropology 326 Archeology of South America (3) 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 

Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Political Science 430 * Government and Politics of a Selected Nation-State 

Political Science 431 * Government and Politics of a Selected Area 

Political Science 452 * Foreign Policy of a Selected Country or Group of Countries 

Elective Fields of Study 

Twelve units selected from three or more of the following groupings: 

/. Culture: 

Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 324A The Ancient Maya (3) 

Anthropology 324B The Aztecs and Their Predecessors (3) 

Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Anthropology 326 Archaeology of South America (3) 

Chicano Studies 302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

Chicano Studies 403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and the Southwest (3) 

Portuguese 315 Introduction to Luso Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 317 o/* 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) or 
Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization {3) or 
Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 

Spanish 416 Contemporary Spanish-American Culture (3) 

//. Fine Arts and Literature. 

Art 460B Pre-Columbian Art (3) 

Chicano Studies 430 The Evolution of Mexican Literature (3) 

Chicano Studies 433 Mexican Literature SirKe 1940 ( 3) 

Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) or 

• Latin American focus only 


9—76604 


258 Liberal Studies 


Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 485 Senior Seminar: Topics in Spanish American Literature (3) (with consent of pro- 
gram director) 

///. History and Politics: 

History 453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

History 453B Mexico since 1910 (3) 

Political Science 430 * Government and Politics of a Selected Nation-State 
Political Science 431 * Government and Politics of a Selected Area 
Political Science 452 * Foreign Policy of a Selected Country or Group of Countries 
IV. Geography and Economics 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 

Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

MINOR 

A minor in Latin American studies is currently being developed. Students should consult the program 
office for information. 


LIBERAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Ronald Clapper 
Program Coordinator 
PROGRAM COUNCIL 

Susan Benes (Student), Fredrick Borges (Student), Fenton Calhoun (Communications), Gaylen 
Carlson (Science Education), Ronald Clapper (Chair), Carol Copp (Sociology), David Depew 
(Philosophy), Gerald Gannon (Mathematics), Suzanne Hale (Student), Linda Harris (Stu- 
dent), Ronald Hughes (Sociology), joy Kost (Student), Emmett Long (Speech Communica- 
tion), Don A. Schweitzer (School of Humanities and Social Sciences), Vera Simone (Political 
Science), James Weaver (American Studies), Ronald Wood (Theatre), James Woodward 
(History) 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LIBERAL STUDIES 

The B.A. in Liberal Studies is a diversified or liberal arts degree for students who do not wish to 
specialize in one academic discipline. Liberal studies majors may take either of the following plans: 

I. Elementary Education Plan (84 units) 

Students who complete the elementary education plan can be granted the multiple subjects (ele- 
mentary) credential without having to take the state examination otherwise required by the Ryan 
Act. The 84 units required under this plan are distributed evenly In four major areas. 

A. English Requirements (21 units) 

1. Speech Communication 305 Liberal Studies in Communication Processes (3) 

2. English 301 Advanced College Writing t 

3. English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) t 

4. World Literature (6) English 110-111 or Comparative Literature 324-325 t 

5. Elective in communications, comparative literature, English, linguistics or speech com- 
munication (6 units) 

B. Science and Mathematics Requirements (21 units) 

1 . Nine units of general education courses In the natural sciences 

2. Liberal Studies 307 Liberal Studies In the Sciences (3) 

3. Mathematics 303A,B Fundamental Concepts of Elementary Mathematics (3, 3) f 

4. Science Education 310 Elementary Experimental Science (3) t 
Science Education 453 Life Science Concepts (3) t 

C. Social Sciences Requirements (21 units) 

1 . Nine units of general education courses in the Social Sciences 

2. History 303A,B Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies (3,3) 


* Latin Arnerican focus only 

t In exceptional cases sub^itutions nuy be nnade with the approval of the program coordinator and the department corKemed. 


Liberal Studies 259 


3. Liberal Studies 308 Liberal Studies in the Social Sciences (3) 

4. Upper-division electives in Afro-ethnic studies, American studies, anthropology, Chicano 
studies, criminal justice, economics, geography, history, political science, psychology or 
sociology (3 units). 

D. Humanities and Fine Arts Requirements (21 units) 

1 . Nine units of general education courses In arts-humanities including a foreign language 

2. Philosophy 304 Methods of Inquiry (3) 

3. Liberal Studies 306 Liberal Studies In the Humanities and Arts (3) 

4. Upper-division electives In art or music (3 units) 

5. Upper-division electives In Afro-ethnic studies, American studies, Chicano studies, foreign 
languages and literatures, philosophy, religious studies or theatre (3 units) 

Note: The Elementary Education Plan does not include all requirements in general education and 
American institutions and values. The complete requirements are listed in this catalog under gradua- 
tion requirements for the bachelor's degree. 

II. Thematic Plan (51 units) 

The thematic plan allows students to synthesize and integrate their knowledge and experience by 
focusing on a theme that is broad in scope and cuts across the traditional lines of the academic 
disciplines. The 51 units required are distributed in three major phases: the liberal studies core 
courses, the personalized coordinated program and the senior project. 

A. The Liberal Studies Core Courses (21 units) 

The liberal studies core courses build a foundation for Interdisciplinary study by providing an 
overview of the major areas of human knowledge and an introduction to the basic 
methodologies of interdisciplinary study. The following courses are required: 

1. History 303A,B Historical Dimension of Liberal Studies (3-3) 

2. Philosophy 304 Methods of Inquiry (3) 

3. Speech Communication 305 Liberal Studies in Communication Processes (3) 

4. Liberal Studies 306 Liberal Studies in Humanities and Arts (3) 

5. Liberal Studies 307 Liberal Studies in the Sciences (3) 

6. Liberal Studies 308 Liberal Studies in the Social Sciences (3) 

B. The Personalized Coordinated Program (24 units) 

Students apply the basic methodologies learned In the core courses by selecting, in consulta- 
tion with an adviser, a theme and 24 units of upper-division course work. Upper-division 
course work may be selected from each of the three major areas of human knowledge 
(humanities and arts, science, and social sciences.) A minimum of six units of course work 
must be chosen from each area. Or upF>er-division course work may be selected from two 
of the three areas of human knowledge. Not more than 1 5 units may be chosen from one 
area and not more than nine units from one department. 

Note: Students must have their study plan approved by a liberal studies adviser prior to taking course 
work. 

C. The Senior Project (6 units) 

Students apply some of the knowledge obtained from courses taken in the personalized 
coordinated program by writing a thesis or engaging in a project or creative work under the 
direction of an instructor of the student's choice. 

English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

499 Independent Study (3) 

Directed by an instructor chosen by the student. Student will enroll in the home department 
of the instructor. 

INTERNSHIP 

Liberal studies majors may take up to three units of an approved internship offered by any depart- 
ment or program In the university as part of their liberal studies major. 

ADVISEMENT 

Students are urged to see a program adviser prior to their first semester at the university as a liberal 
studies major. A handbook describing the liberal studies program in more detail Is available from 
the Cross-Disciplinary Programs office. 


260 Linguistics 


LIBERAL STUDIES COURSES 

306 Liberal Studies in the Humanities and Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: completion of arts-humanities general education requirement. An interdisciplinary 
approach to the humanities and arts which examines their purposes, structures, and major 
developments in this century. 

307 Liberal Studies in the Sciences (3) 

Prerequisite: completion of natural sciences general education requirement. The nature of the 
scientific enterprise, contemporary models in physical and biological sciences; and the role of 
science in society. 

308 Liberal Studies in the Social Sciences (3) 

Prerequisite: completion of social sciences general education requirement. The theoretical frame- 
works of the social sciences and their methodologies and strategies for formulating and answer- 
ing social questions. 

DEPARTMENT OF LINGUISTICS 

FACULTY 
Donald Sears 
Department Chair 

Angela Della-Voipe Farrell, Alan Kaye, James Santucci 

Linguistics is the scientific study of language — its nature and development, its universal properties, 
its diversified structures and their variants, its systems of writing and transcription, its cultural role 
in the speech community, and its application to other areas of human knowledge. As such, it is 
concerned with the multiple aspects of human communicative behavior which encompasses 
thought, symbolization, language, meaning, acoustics, perception and the physiological processes 
of utterance and audition. 

The interdisciplinary aspects of this study are reflected in the organization of the program which 
offers a core of general linguistics courses and draws upon linguistically related courses In other 
departments. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 

For students with an exceptional interest in and aptitude for the study of the systems of human 
communication. The essential relationships between language and thought and language and culture; 
the structure of foreign languages as well as English; the historical study of language and formal 
techniques and theoretical foundations of linguistic analysis. 

Language Requirement 

Two progressive semesters of any two languages or four progressive semesters of any one language. 


Lower-Division Requirements ^ ^ 

Linguistics 106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

Any one 200-level linguistics course (3) 

Upper-Division Requirements 27 units 

Linguistics 300 Language and Culture (3) 


Linguistics 351 Introduction to Linguistic Phonetics and Phonology (3) 

Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 430 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Any one 300- or 400-level linguistics course (3) 

Four electives: ( 1 ) two must be from linguistics upper-division courses other than those listed as 

required above; and (2) two may be in linguistics upper-division courses or 
Educatlon-TE 312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

English 303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

English 490 History of the English Language (3) 

Foreign Languages, any upper division course (3) 

Mathematics 304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

Mathematics 305 Elements of Set Theory (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Physics 405 Acoustics (4) 

Psychology 415 Cognitive Processes (3) 


Linguistics 261 


Students must consult with an adviser in linguistics before establishing their individual programs of 
study. Other courses in the university may be taken as an elective with the permission of the adviser. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 
See "'Graduate Programs." 

MINOR IN LINGUISTICS 

The minor in linguistics provides a solid introduction to the scientific study of language for students 
in a related major field. The program consists of three general linguistics courses and four elective 
courses selected with the approval of a departmental adviser. It is thus possible to tailor the minor 
to individual needs in rounding out a course of study in the student's major area of specialization. 
For more information contact the department office. 

LABORATORY OF PHONETIC RESEARCH 

See Research Organizations and Services and Special Study Centers. 


LINGUISTICS COURSES 

105A English as a Second Language (4) 

(Same as Foreign Language Education 105A) 

105B English as a Second Language (4) 

(Same as Foreign Language Education 105B) 

106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

The nature of language, its origin and development; language in culture, the structure of language 
and Its systems of writing and transcription, and its application to other areas of humanistic and 
scientific knowledge. 

108 Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3) 

The sounds, meanings and vocabulary of Afro-American, Caribbean, and other English dialects and 
their historical origin. (Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108) 

251 Animal Language and Communication (3) 

Animal linguistic behavior in comparison with human speech and its derivatives, and an exploration 
of experiments concerned with dolphins, chimps, and other species. 

254 Introduction to Paralanguage and Kinesics: Body Language (3) 

The physical actions, gestures, and changes In the physiognomy that occur together with language 
and paralanguage in human communication; substitutions for language and modifications of It 
in varying cultures. 

300 Language and Culture (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 300) 

301 Sanskrit (3) 

An introduction into the devanagari script as well as the phonology, morphology and syntax of the 
Sanskrit language. A reading knowledge of Sanskrit will be the main goal of the course. (Same 
as Religious Studies 301 ) 

305 The English Language in America (3) 

(Same as English 305) 

351 Introduction to Linguistic Phonetics and Phonology (3) 

The nature and structure of sound systems In language; a thorough investigation of the International 
Phonetics Alphabet as applied to many different languages including English; analytic methods 
and techniques. 

354 Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: a course in linguistics or English linguistics. Language as the medium of literature; the 
new stylistics, including theories of word choice, prosody, prose style, structure, statistical 
analysis, metaphor. Application to various literary forms. (Same as English 354) 

375 Introduction to Philosophy of Language (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 375) 


262 Linguistics 


402 Advanced Phonetics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 402) 

403 Speech/ Language Development (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 403) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

A study of the sounds (phonology), forms and meanings (morphology), and syntax of languages. 
Examples and problem solving in various languages will be emphasized. (Same as Anthropology 
406) 

411 Bilingualism (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. The personal and social development of bilingual com- 
munities as reflected In the conflict between the language of the home and the language of the 
community. 

412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. Social dialects in relation to the surrounding communities. 
Social stratification, acculturation, language maintenance, standardization, language planning 
and language change. 

416 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 416) 

417 Psycholinguistics (3) 

(Same as Psychology 417) 

430 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of instructor. The comparative method in 
diachronic linguistic methodology and theory, graphemics, glottochronology, language families, 
dialect geography and internal reconstruction. Fulfills the course requirement of the university 
upper division baccalaureate writing requirement for linguistics majors. 

443A Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

(Same as Foreign Language Education 443 A) 

443B Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

(Same as Foreign Language Education 443 B) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects with consent of department chair. Topic varies with the student. May be 
repeated for credit. 

501 Research Methods and Bibliography (1) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Linguistics 406, or equivalent. Principal books, periodicals, and 
collections in general linguistics, specific languages and related fields; techniques of preparing 
research papers and field reports In linguistics. To be taken concurrently with Linguistics 597. 
505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 351 and 406 or consent of instructor. Phonological systems that occur In 
languages; emphasis on terminology used to describe changes In the system and processes 
effecting it; problem solving of selected language data. (Same as Anthropology 505) 

507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. Word formation in a variety of languages with 
emphasis on the terminology used to describe morphological representation on various levels; 
problem solving of selected language data. (Same as Anthropology 507) 

508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 507 or consent of Instructor. Contemporary theories of grammar, such as 
transformational-generative, with emphasis on theoretical problems in the analysis of language 
structure. (Same as Anthropology 508) 

515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 417 or equivalents. The behavioral, conceptual, motivational and 
social aspects of language; recent developments in information theory, behavioral theory and 
linguistic theory as applied to human communication. (Same as Psychology 515) 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 430, Its equivalent or consent of Instructor. The history of language. Including 
principles and techniques for the historical study and classification of individual languages and 
language families, writing systems, lexicostatlstical methods and linguistic geography. 


Philosophy 263 


580 Special Topics in Linguistics (3) 

Seminar devoted to a topic in contemporary linguistics: linguistic typology; a major language family; 
areal linguistics; language and the computer. Topic will be circulated In advance of registration. 
May be repeated for credit. (Same as English 580) 

592 Field Methods in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Methods of analysis and description of language structures. Data 
elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. (Same as Anthropology 592) May be 
repeated for credit. 

5% Internship in Applied Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 443 or consent of Instructor. The practical application of linguistic theory to 
second language learning, particularly at the community college level. Individual supervision by 
the faculty and cooperating Individuals. Interns meet with the instructor by arrangement. May 
be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (2) 

Preparation and completion of an approved project. To be taken concurrently with Linguistics 501. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites; graduate standing and consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 

FACULTY 
Craig lhara 
Department Chair 

John Cronquist, David Depew, Albert Flores, Merrill Ring, Gloria Rock, J. Michael Russell, Betty 
Safford, Richard Smith, Frank Verges, Marjorie Weinzweig 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY 

A major in philosophy provides a classic form of liberal education in which powers of reasoning 
and analysis are developed. The study of philosophy Includes ( 1 ) the development of general 
analytic and problem-solving skills, (2) the Investigation of problems central to philosophy, (3) the 
assessment of assumptions underlying other fields, and (4) a fundamental pers|[)ectlve on intellectual 
history. 

Requirements for the Major 

1. A minimum of 39 units in philosophy. 

2. University upper-division writing requirement 

Philosophy 315 (3) 

3. Required courses (15 units): 

Philosophy 290 (3) 

Philosophy 291 (3) 

Philosophy 300 (3) 

Philosophy 301 (3) 

Philosophy 499 (3) 

4. History of contemporary philosophy requirement: Three units to be met by one of the following 
courses: 305, 323, 380, 382, 490. 

5. Area requirements: Nine units (three courses) to include courses from at least two of the 
following areas: 

Area I — Ethics, Aesthetics, Value Theory: 310, 311, 345, 365, 455. 

Area II — Metaphysics and Epistemology: 420, 425, 430, 440, 470 
Area III — Logic and Language: 368, 369, 375, 460 

Area IV — Philosophy of the Natural and Social Sciences; 303, 341, 360, 384, 385, 386 

6. Seminar requirement: Three units to be met by any senior seminar not used to fulfill area or history 
of philosophy requirements. (Senior seminars in philosophy are numbered between 447 and 
490.) 

7. Electives: 6 units of philosophy courses, upper- or lower-division, which have not been used to 
meet requirements 3-6, above. 

Recommended Work 

A program in philosophy profits greatly from the study of psychology, the natural and social sciences, 
and literature. Students are advised to supplement their studies in philosophy with course work 
offered in these and other fields. Double majors are encouraged. 


264 Philosophy 


Preparation for Graduate School 

Students who are planning to attend graduate school in philosophy are urged to acquire proficiency 
in a foreign language, and to include In their programs, besides the required courses, as many as 
possible of the following: 

Philosophy 310 and 455, Ethics 
Philosophy 368 and 369, Logic 
Philosophy 375, Philosophy of Language 
Philosophy 380, Analytic Philosophy 
Philosophy 420, Metaphysics 
Philosophy 430, Epistemology 
Philosophy 440, Philosophy of Mind 

Transfer Credit 

Work done at other institutions may be counted toward the major, subject to the rules of the 
university and the following departmental rules: ( 1 ) only senior seminars can fulfill the seminar 
requirement; (2) only upper-division work can fulfill upper-division requirements; (3) in no case 
can more than six units of lower-division work taken at another institution count toward the major 
requirement of 39 units. 

MINOR IN PHILOSOPHY 
Requirements for the Minor 

The minor In philosophy requires 21 units In philosophy, at least 12 of which must be upper-division. 
It may be satisfied in two ways: 

1. Among the 21 units, at least six units from among these courses: 115A, 115B, 290, 291, 300, 
301, 305; 

and either a senior seminar or else 3 units of Philosophy 499. 

2. Among the 21 units, at least 15 units chosen from among philosophy courses correlative to the 
student's major. 

In either case a student's plan for the minor must be approved by the Philosophy Department 
adviser. 


PHILOSOPHY COURSES 

For more detailed course descriptions, consult the course guide which Is available each semester 

at registration time in the Philosophy Department office. 

100 Introduction to Philosophy (3) 

The nature, methods and some of the main problems of philosophy. Primarily for freshmen and 
sophomores. Not a prerequisite for advanced courses. 

110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) 

A philosophical study of some of the world's important religions: Christianity, Judaism, Islam, 
Buddhism, Hinduism, et cetera. (Same as Religious Studies 110) 

115A The Western Tradition: Philosophy (3) 

Major developments In the philosophical heritage of Western civilitzatlon to the 16th century. 

115B The Western Tradition: Philosophy (3) 

Major developments in Western civilization's philosophical heritage from 16th /1 7th centuries to the 
present. 

200 Argument and Reasoning (3) 

Development of non-mathematical critical reasoning skills. Including recognition of arguments, 
argument evaluation and construction of arguments. 

210 Logic (3) 

The logical structure of language and correct reasoning: deduction. Induction, scientific reasoning, 
informal fallacies. Recommended for students majoring in humanities and social sciences. 
(Linguistics, mathematics, philosophy, or science majors should usually take Philosophy 368.) 

290 History of Philosophy: Greek Philosophy (3) 

The origins of Western philosophy, and its development through Socrates, Plato and Aristotle. 


Philosophy 265 


291 History of Philosophy: Medieval Philosophy (3) 

Scholastic philosophy and its precursors in ancient thought. 

300 History of Philosophy: Rationalism and Empiricism (3) 

The rationalism of Descartes, Spinoza and Leibniz, and the empiricism of Locke, Berkeley and Hume. 

301 History of Philosophy: Kant and the 19th Century (3) 

The empiricistic and rationalistic influences on Kant, followed by a study of the major trends in 
19th-century philosophy. 

303 Introduction to the Philosophy of Science (3) 

Logical and methodological features of scientific inquiry; nature of theories and theoretical terms; 
impact of science on social issues and values. (Not a prerequisite for 384 or 385) 

304 Methods of Inquiry (3) 

An examination of problems and issues, especially philosophical ones, which arise in interdiscipli- 
nary inquiry. 

305 Contemporary Philosophy (3) 

Main trends of 20th-century philosophy: pragmatism, linguistic analysis and existentialism. 

310 Ethics (3) 

Problems of human conduct and moral evaluation: standards for moral assessment of conduct and 
persons; morality and its relation to mores, social demands, and personal commitments. 

311 Aesthetics (3) 

The conditions and aims of art and of aesthetic experience. 

312 Moral Issues in Business (3) 

An analysis of moral issues in business, such as those related to advertising, the environment, product 
safety, employee responsibilities and the nature and basis of business. (This course will not 
emphasize business law, nor one's obligations according to law.) 

314 Medical Ethics (3) 

An examination of ethical Issues raised by recent technical developments in medicine, and of ethical, 
social and political issues Involved in the physician-patient relationship and the delivery of 
health care. 

315 Philosophical Argument and Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: three units of philosophy. Philosophical concepts, distinctions and methods are used 
to teach philosophical and argumentative writing which is clear, critical, expressive and precise. 
This course is designed to satisfy the classroom portion of the upper-division writing require- 
ment for philosophy majors. 

323 Existentialism (3) 

Introduction to existentialist perspectives on freedom, meaning, responsibility, authenticity and 
self-deception. The course typically includes discussion of Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Heidegger 
and Sartre 

324 Existential Group (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. An Investigation of how themes in the writings of existentialist 
philosophers pertain to the life styles, actions, and feelings of the class participants. 

341 Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 

Philosophical concepts and assumptions pertinent to the theory of psychotherapy, such as the 
Cartesian, the mechanistic and the deterministic assumptions of Freud. 

343 Philosophy and Women's Liberation (3) 

The basic value concepts and moral principles underlying such issues in the women's movement 
as: oppression of women, marriage as exploitation, sex stereotypes and femininity, sexuality, 
alternative family styles, the morality of abortion, and preferential hiring. 

345 Political Philosophy (3) 

Discussion of such topics as: the nature and purpose of the state, political authority, civil disobedi- 
ence, natural law, and natural rights, usually In relation to such thinkers as Hobbes, Locke, 
Rousseau and Marx. (Not the same as Political Science 340) 

347 Selected Problems in Philosophy (1-3) 

Examination and clarification of some philosophical topic or group of related topics not adequately 
covered in other listed philosophy courses. May be repeated with different content for addition- 
al credit. 


266 Philosophy 


350 Oriental Philosophy (3) 

Major philosophical systems of India, China and japan, including various schools of Buddhism, 
Confucianism and Taoism. 

355 Legal Philosophy (3) 

Theories about the nature of various legal institutions and processes. The concept of law and 
important subsidiary concepts. 

360 Philosophy of History (3) 

Conceptual problems about historical inquiry, argument and writing. Assessment of traditional 
speculative philosophy of history in the light of these problems. 

365 Social Philosophy (3) 

Theories about the nature of various social, political and legal institutions, and arguments about what 
these institutions ought to be. 

368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

The recognition and construction of correct deductions in the sentential logic and the first-order 
predicate calculus. (Same as Math 368) 

369 Second Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 368 or Math 368. Continuation of the study of the recognition and construc- 
tion of correct deductions in the full first-order predicate calculus with identity and the calculus 
of descriptions. Axiomatized deductive systems of propositional calculus. (Same as Math 369) 

370 Philosophy of Religion (3) 

The role of philosophy in shaping theological doctrine, In critically evaluating religious experience, 
in arguing for or against the existence of God, and in considering the problem of evil. 

373 Philosophy in Literature (3) 

Philosophical themes in literature. Mostly recent American novels; some British and continental 
authors. 

375 Introduction to the Philosophy of Language (3) 

The major issues in semantic theory: truth, meaning, analytic-synthetic, semiotics. (Same as Linguis- 
tics 375) 

380 Analytic Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: six units In philosophy or consent of instructor. 20th-century analytic philosophers such 
as Russell, Moore, Wittgenstein, Ryle, Austin, Quine, Strawson, and Hare. 

382 Marx and Marxism (3) 

Marx and his followers in their philosophic aspect. Theories of human nature, society and intellectual 
activity; conceptual tools for the analysis of phenomena; sources; and followers, critical or 
dogmatic. 

384 Philosophy of the Physical Sciences (3) 

Space, time and relativity; quantum mechanics, causality and real existence; laws, theories and 
models; topics in the history of science. Some facility in either mathematics or philosophy is 
presupposed. (Same as Physics 384) 

385 Philosophy of the Social Sciences (3) 

Methodological problems about psychology, sociology, anthropology, economics, political science 
and history. Objectivity and value judgments In social science; emergence; explanation; reduc- 
tionist and functionalist accounts. Some acquaintance with the social sciences is presupposed. 
(Same as Social Sciences 385) 

386 Philosophy of Biology (3) 

Prerequisite: completion of general education requirements in science. Examination of the conceptu- 
al foundations of biological science. Applicability of concepts such as law, theory reduction, 
emergence and teleology to investigation of living things from the molecular to the environmen- 
tal level. 

399 Directed Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval of department. Supervised individual study as an elective. May be repeated 
for credit with different content. No more than three units may be taken with any one adviser 
in any one semester. 

420 Metaphysics (3) 

Prerequisite: six units In philosophy or consent of instructor. Such philosophical problems as freedom 
and determinism, mind and body, time and becoming, causation, deity, substratum, personal 
identity. 


Political Science 267 


425 Introduction to Phenomenology (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or consent of instructor. The historical background and l^asic 
viewpoints which have provided a framework for philosophical research and study in the 
writings of Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, and Merleau-Ponty. 

430 Epistemology (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or consent of instructor. The nature of knowledge, belief, 
certainty, truth, perception, and the a phorr, examinations of skepticism, traditional responses 
to skepticism, and the foundations of knowledge. 

440 Philosophy of Mind (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or consent of instructor. The concept of mind, and such related 
issues as the mind-body relation, behavior, consciousness, voluntary action, weakness of will, 
and our knowledge of other minds. 

447 Seminar in Selected Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or consent of Instructor. Intensive study of one philosophical 
concern, such as an individual philosopher or topic. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

455 Seminar in Values (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 310 or 311, or consent of Instructor. Valuation or some Important form of 
value: ethical, aesthetic, political. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

460 Seminar in Logic and Language (3) 

Prerequisite: appropriate course from among Philosophy 368, 369, 375. Topics In advanced logic, 
theory of meaning and formal semantics, foundations of logic and mathematics. May be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. 

470 Seminar in Metaphysics (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 420 or 430 or 440, or consent of instructor. Some single concept, such as 
identity, person, time, causality, substance, understanding, reality; or some cluster of issues, 
such as thought and reality, freedom and determinism. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

480 Seminar in the History of Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: an appropriate course from among 290, 291, 300, 301, or consent of Instructor. Some 
important work, figure, school, or problem in the history of philosophy before 1900. May be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. 

490 Seminar in Contemporary Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: appropriate course work or consent of Instructor. Issues raised by such 20th-century 
philosophers as Russell, Moore, Wittgenstein, Austin, Quine, Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, Mer- 
leau-Ponty or Foucault. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval of department. To develop competency in research. May be repeated for 
credit. No more than three units may be taken with any one adviser in any one semester. 

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

FACULTY 

Julian Foster 

Department Chair 

Sidney Baldwin, Charles Bell, Virginia Bott, Keith Boyum, Michael Brown, Vincent Buck, Bert Buzan, 
Anne Feraru, Phillip Gianos, Harvey Grody, Gary Guertner, Karl Kahrs, Frank Marini,* Alana 
Northrop, James Pfiffner, Ivan Richardson, Karen Rosenblum-Cale, Alan Saltzstein, Vera Si- 
mone, Raphael Sonenshein, Barbara Stone, Irving Stone, Sandra Sutphen, Bruce Wright, Jon 
Yinger 

Political science Is the study of people's behavior as It relates to power and public organizations. 

The discipline is normally divided into six subfields: 

Political philosophy, which deals with normative questions about how power should be used and 
distributed, rights and obligations, the nature of justice and the ideal state. 

American p>olitics, which is concerned with campaigns and elections, parties, elected executives, 
legislative processes, and issues of public policy. 

Public administration, the role played by the public employees in policy making, planning, person- 
nel management, taxation and finance, and in responding to the needs and problems of 
communities and the nation. 


University administrative officer 


268 Political Science 


Public law, which involves the judicial process, civil rights and liberties, and the significance of 
such terms as "equal opportunity" and "due process" in the United States. 

Comparative government, which raises the same questions of politics, administration and law 
about other countries, and moves towards conclusions based on comparisons between them. 

International relations, which is concerned with relations between states and other international 
actors such as multinational corporations and the United Nations; and with the underlying 
realities of power, based on resources, wealth, military preparedness and national security. 
A major in political science prepares students for law school, government employment on the local, 
state and national levels, foreign service, teaching, business, journalism, or leadership In civic and 
political activities. 

The department offers a concentration In public administration for those who seek careers In public 
service. The concentration describes the environment within which the profession exists and the 
concepts and goals which underlie such functions as budgeting, personnel work, policy analysis and 
management. Experience is gained through the administrative Internship. 

For prelaw students, the department provides a series of law-related courses numbered in the 370 
and 470 series (see course descriptions). There is a prelaw adviser and and active Prelaw Society 
which enables students to make close and direct contact with the work of attorneys, judges, etc. 
The department is closely tied to the College Legal Clinic, which provides free legal advice for 
students and others who cannot afford the usual costs. 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 
Basic Requirements 

The major consists of 36 units of political science, of which at least 30 units must be In the upper 
division, plus 12 upper-division units in related disciplines, such as American studies, anthropology, 
economics, geography, history, philosophy, psychology, sociology and statistics. Work in related 
fields must be approved in writing by one of the department's undergraduate advisers. The 48 units 
required for majors are In addition to those meeting the general education requirement. 


Breadth Requirements 

Majors, with the exception of those choosing the public administration concentration, are required 
to take Political Science 340 (Political Philosophy) and an introductory course (as listed below) in 
four of the five remaining subfields of political science. 

Political Science 310 American Political Behavior or 31 5 American Political Process 

Political Science 320 Politics, Policy and Administration 

Political Science 330 Comparative Political Analysis 

Political Science 350 World Politics or 352 American Foreign Policy 

Political Science 375 Public Law 


Those choosing the public administration concentration described below take Political Science 320 
and one other course listed above. 


Research Methods Requirement 

All majors must acquire a knowledge of research methods and approaches either hy taking Political 
Science 407, Quantitative Methods in Political Science, or by taking one of the research proseminars: 
Political Science 311, 316, 321, 341, 351 or 376. Those concentrating in public administration must 
take either 407 or 321. 

UPPER-DIVISION BACCALAUREATE WRITING REQUIREMENT: 

The university upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement may be satisfied by taking one of 
the following courses: Political Science 320W, Political Science 340W, Political Science 375W. 

Public Administration Concentration 

In addition to fulfilling the breadth and research methods requirements In the ways described above, 
those who wish to concentrate in public administration must take: 

1. Nine units from among the following courses on administrative and management processes: 
Political Science 421, 422, 423, 424, 426, 428, 429, 475 and 497. 

2. Six units from among the following courses on policy and administrative analysis: Political 
Science 418, 420, 427, 455, 456 and 482. 

3. Nine units from courses In the general area of the American political process, as approved by 
the adviser. 

A total of 36 units In public administration and political science Is required. 


Political Science 269 


Internships 

The department offers a variety of interships. Each one involves students in working in an agency 
or political organization, and in meeting in an on-campus seminar to discuss and analyze their 
experiences. Internship courses are numbered 298, 491, 492, 497 and 498 (see course descriptions). 

Advisers 

The department emphasizes proper advisement, and all majors are strongly urged to talk with either 
the undergraduate, the prelaw or the public administration adviser as soon as possible after entering 
the program. The adviser helps with study plans, and gives information about subsequent career 
possibilities, including law and other graduate schools, postbaccalaureate fellowships and scholar- 
ships, and job possibilities in local government. 

MINOR IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

The minor is compxjsed of 18 units in upper-division political science courses plus Political Science 
1(X). 

MINOR IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 

The minor is composed of 18 units. Students must take Political Science 320, 12 units selected from 
the courses on administrative and management processes (defined under the public administration 
concentration, above) and one additional upper-division political science course. 

MINOR IN INTERNATIONAL POLITICS 

The minor consists of 21 units, of which 15 must be in political science. At least six units must be 
taken from: Political Science 350, 352 or 457. The remaining units must be taken from: Political 
Science 350, 352 or 457, If not already taken to fulfill the six-unit requirement specified above. 
Communications 426, Economics 330, Economics 335, Geography 367, History 485B, Political 
Science 351, Political Science 430, Political Science 431, Political lienee 451, Political Science 452, 
Political Science 455, Political Science 456, Political Science 461, Political Science 491 . Students who 
wish to specialize in a SF>ecific geographical area are encouraged to investigate the possibility of 
taking related units in anthropology, economics, foreign languages, geography, history and literature, 
etc. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 
MASTER OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 

See '"Graduate Programs." 


POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES * 

Political Science 100 or its equivalent is the prerequisite for all upper-division political science 

courses; 3(X)-level courses beginning with 310 may require concurrent enrollment in a research 

proseminar. See the department bulletin for details not provided in the course descriptions below. 

100 American Government (3) 

People, their politics, and power; contemporary issues, changing political styles and processes, 
institutions and underlying values of the American political system. Satisifies state requirements 
in U.S. Constitution and California state and local government. 

200 Introduction to the Study of Politics (3) 

Describing and evaluating politics; political science as an academic discipline. 

210 Problems in American Government (3) 

The role of the federal government regarding pollution, drugs and narcotics (education, law enforce- 
ment). The seniority system in Congress; the role of lobbies, etc., using government reports. 
Congressional hearings, newspapers and journals of opinion. 

298 Political Externship (3) 

Politics for the nonmajor or beginning political science student. Work in campaigns or in the offices 
of elected public officials; supervision by faculty and cooperating agency; seminars and individ- 
ual conferences. May be repeated once. 

300 Contemporary Issues in California Government and Politics (3) 

The political process in state and local institutions; crisis in the cities, flight to the suburbs, and race 
relations. Comparisons will be made with other states and their subdivisions. Satisfies state 
requirement in California state and local government. 

* Prerequisite may be waived only with consent of instructor. 


270 Political Science 


309 Introduction to Metropolitan Politics (3) 

The inner city and suburbia. Political processes: power in the city, the urban-suburban relationship, 
political fragmentation and the national government in urban areas. 

310 American Political Behavior (3) 

Political behavior in America. Perspectives examined include those drawn from psychology and 
biology; the analysis of social structure and politics as rational behavior. 

311 Research Proseminar in American Political Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 310 (may be taken concurrently). Research concepts and techniques 
applied to an individual project In American political behavior. 

315 American Political Process (3) 

The structure, functions and relationships among American national Institutions: executive, legisla- 
tive, judicial, press, political parties and pressure groups — with a focus on the decision-making 
process. 

320 Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 

Public administration and the roles played by administrators in the formulation and execution of 
public policy. May not be taken for credit by the student who has taken Political Science 320W. 

320W Politics, Policy and Administration (4) 

Same as Political Science 320, with additional writing component designed to satisfy university 
writing requirement for political science majors and for concentration In public administration. 
May not be taken for credit by the student who has taken Political Science 320. 

321 Research Proseminar in Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 (may be taken concurrently). Research concepts and techniques 
applied to an individual project in public administration and policy analysis. 

330 Comparative Political Analysis (3) 

Compares patterns of political behavior and interaction in various political systems. 

335 Comparative Political Change (3) 

A comparative study of sources and patterns of political change. 

340 Political Philosophy (3) 

The major thinkers in the Western tradition of political philosophy from Plato to the present; the 
principal concepts and theories. (Not the same as Philosophy 345) May not be taken for credit 
by the student who has taken Political Science 340W. 

340W Political Philosophy (4) 

Same as Political Science 340, with extensive writing assignments designed to satisfy university 
writing requirement for Political Science majors. May not be taken for credit by the student who 
has taken Political Science 340. 

341 Research Proseminar in Political Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 340 (may be taken concurrently). Research concepts and techniques 
applied to an individual project in political philosophy. 

347 Political Theory and Political Practice (3) 

Thought and action in politics. Alternative modes of participation in political activity. 

350 World Politics (3) 

Political relationships among governments and other participants within the global system; foreign 
p)olicy-making and implementation through such means as diplomacy, alliances, aid, force; the 
role of non-state actors such as the United Nations, multinational corporations, and liberation 
movements. 

351 Research Proseminar in International Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350 (may be taken concurrently) or Political Science 352. Research 
design, strategies and techniques applied in the study of international politics. 

352 American Foreign Policy (3) 

United States' foreign policy since World War II. Institutions and bureaucracies of foreign policy 
decision-making, military and national security policy, domestic sources of foreign policy. 

375 Public Law (3) 

Nature and function of public law particularly within the Anglo-American political tradition. May 
not be taken for credit by the student who has taken Political Science 375W. 

375W Public Law (4) 

Same as Political Science 375, with additional writing component designed to satisfy university 
writing requirement for political science majors. May not be taken for credit by the student who 
has taken Political Science 375. 


Political Science 271 


376 Research Proseminar in Public Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 375 (may be taken concurrently). Research concepts and techniques 
applied to an individual project in public law. 

407 Quantitative Methods in Political Science (3) 

Quantitative research methods in political science. Introduction to research design and statistical 
measures employed in analyzing social science research data. 

410 Political Parties (3) 

The structure and methods by which the political parties op)erate in the American political system 
with some comparisons to their structure and operation in other democratic societies. 

411 Art of Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Public administration as ''art" rather than "science." Administra- 
tive novels and other fictional literature, and other audio-visual media. 

412 The Art of Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Politics as practiced and understood by practitioners of the art. 
A seminar which features guest lecturers. 

413 Pressure Groups and Public Opinion (3) 

The power and growth of farm, labor, business, and noneconomic pressure groups; Interest group 
activity in Congress, administration and courts; public opinion and propaganda. 

414 The Legislative Process (3) 

The legislative process In Congress and state legislatures. Policy, representation, reform and behavior 
of individual legislators. Bureaucratic lawmaking and the legislative roles of the President and 
interest groups. 

415 Power and Participation in America (3) 

How and why people behave politically in the United States. The "power elite" debate, the changing 
American voter, and the dynamics of political participation. 

416 The American Presidency (3) 

Presidential power, the resources on which that power is based, and the limitations on the use of 
that power. The relations between the President and Congress, the bureaucracy, the press and 
the public. 

420 Governing the Urban Community (3) 

Ideas, institutions, interests In the governance of urban communities, emphasizing decision-making, 
problem-solving, policy-making, and administrative institutions. 

421 Public Finance Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. Survey of national, state, and local taxing and spending systems. 
Emphasis on political determinants of budget policy. 

422 Public Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The civil service and the merit system; recruitment procedures 
and examinations; position classification, salary structures retirement plans, in-service training, 
employee organizations, and personnel supervision. 

423 Regional Planning and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or consent of instructor. Governmental policies, procedures, and 
agencies Involved In planning and development of regions. Regional problems and objectives, 
emerging views of regional planning, and investment allocation during the development proc- 
ess. 

424 Urban Planning and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or consent of Instructor. City planning; the legal bases and funda- 
mental concepts of planning; and the organization of the general plan, zoning laws and adminis- 
tration, urban renewal, and capital programming. 

425 Comparative Public Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Political Science 320. Cross-cultural comparison of public administration systems; 
application of different models of analysis to administrative institutions; bureaucracy; ecology 
of public administration In modernized and developing societies; and the role of public adminis- 
tration in nation-building. 

426 Collective Bargaining in the Public Sector (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. Bargaining in the public sector; principles, practices, problems in 
negotiating labor contracts; mediation, conciliation, fact-finding and arbitration settlement tech- 
niques; government as an intervenor, moderator, and judge of last resort. 


272 Political Science 


427 Current Issues in Urban and Metropolitan Policy (3) 

Policy issues and alternatives in urban and metropolitan problem areas such as law enforcement, 
transportation, housing or education. 

429 Public Personnel Training (3) 

Training methodology in public administration. The problems, methods and institutions in the train- 
ing of public personnel emphasizing labor-management relations. 

430 Government and Politics of a Selected Nation-State (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 330 or consent of instructor. The political institutions and processes 
of a selected nation-state. May be repeated for credit. 

431 Government and Politics of a Selected Area (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 330 or consent of instructor. The structures and functions of national 
political systems in a selected geographic area. May be repeated for credit. 

440 Political Ideologies and Attitudes (3) 

The content and historical evolution of modern ideologies such as liberalism, democracy, commu- 
nism, socialism and fascism. Their relationship to social and p>olitical change. 

442 Problems of Democratic Political Thought (3) 

Philosophies and theories of democratic political systems; American political thought. 

443 The Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 340. Marxist theory and philosophy from its pre-Hegelian roots to the 
present. 

446 Corruption, Ethics and Public Policy (3) 

Ethical problems which face p>ersons in the public service. The focus is on practical decision-making. 

451 Problems in International Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. Selected contemporary problems in world politics. See depart- 
ment bulletin for subject focus each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

452 Foreign Policy of a Selected Country or Group of Countries (3) 

Objectives, capabilities, policy-making processes, and implementation of the foreign policies of a 
particular country or group of countries. Focus may be on United States, Soviet Union, Latin 
America or other countries or areas. May be repeated for credit. 

455 Comparative Analysis of Foreign Policies (3) 

Frameworks for analyzing the foreign policies of state; domestic and external determinants of foreign 
policy actions; foreign policy decision-making institutions and processes, foreign policy objec- 
tives and instruments. 

456 The National Security Establishment (3) 

Conflicting theories of national security, the functions of defense and intelligence bureaucracies In 
foreign and domestic policy making, problems of arms control, and the dangers to democratic 
values and institutions posed by the technology of national security. 

457 Politics of International Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or consent of instructor. The link between economics and international 
politics. The political economy of free trade and imperialism, of neo-colonialism and foreign 
aid. 

461 The United Nations and Other Public International Organizations (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. Structure and functions of United Nations and various specialized 
and regional international organizations. 

470 judicial Process (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 375 or consent of instructor. The nature, functions and roles of courts 
in the Anglo-American legal system; the nature, functions and roles of major participants in the 
American legal system, including judges, attorneys and citizens. 

473 Introduction to Constitutional Law (3) 

The role of the courts, the presidency, Congress and the states within the US constitutional system, 
judicial review, presidential impoundment and impeachment, presidential foreign and military 
powers, regulation of the economy and public morals, and congressional investigations. 

474 Seminar in Constitutional Law: Civil Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 375 or consent of instructor. Case studies In constitutional rights and 
liberties. Involving relationships between the individual and government which are affected by 
the Bill of Rights and the 14th Amendment. 

475 Administrative Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or 375 or consent of instructor. Law as it affects public officials 
and agencies in their relations with private citizens and the business community. Case materials 
and regulatory practices. 


Political Science 273 


482 Environmental Policy and Politics (3) 

The nature of environmental problems, national and international. The public policy-making process 
and environmental Issues. 

485 Politics of Change (3) 

A specific cultural, religious, or ethnic interest group; the Impact of an ideology, movement or 
Individual or political processes and behavior. Role of women, politics of women and the law, 
women's liberation movement. May be repeated for credit. 

491 International Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. 10 hours work per week with officials of foreign governments in 
the Los Angeles-Orange County area, usually consular officials. Individual supervision by faculty 
and cooperating officials. Interns meet with Instructor by arrangement. 

492 Prelaw Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The legal profession the public rather than private spheres. A 
supervised working commitment of 10 hours weekly with an assigned Individual or organiza- 
tion. 

497 Government Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: public administration concentration and consent of Instructor. Students work 15-20 
hours per week as supervised interns in a public agency. Supervision by the faculty and 
cooperating agency. In addition, a weekly three-hour seminar. 

498 Political Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: |x>litical science concentration and consent of Instructor. Students work 8-12 hours 
per week with elected officials or candidates for elective office. Individual supervision by the 
faculty and cooperating individuals. Interns meet with instructor by arrangement. May be 
repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: open to advanced students in political science with consent of department chair. 

509 Administrative Organization and Process (3) (Formerly 419) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. For graduate students In public administration who have not had 
an introductory course In public administration. Organizational theory and practice, decision 
making, systems analysis, performance evaluation and administrative improvement. 

511 Seminar in American Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The political process In the United States. 

519 State and Local Government (3) 

The structure, processes, functions, and Interrelationships of state and local governments in Ameri- 
can society. State, county, municipal and special district government In California as compared 
with other states. 

521 Seminar in Public Administration Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: a course in basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. The concepts, models and 
ideologies of public administration within the larger political system. 

522 Seminar in Public Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: A course in basic statistics Political Science 320 or 509. Topics in public personnel 
administration. 

523 Administrative Research and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: a course in basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. Concepts and methods 
employed in administrative research and analysis: Organization and procedure surveys, (per- 
formance evaluation techniques, administrative data sources and their uses, and report writing. 

524 Seminar in Environmental Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: a course in basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. Problems and Issues In the 
physical and human environment of the urban community. 

525 Seminar in Metropolitan Area Government (3) 

Prerequisites: A course in basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. Political and (X)licy Issues 
facing metro|X)litan America, and the capacity of governmental institutions to handle urban 
problems. 

526 Seminar in Administrative Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: A course In basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. Management oriented 
analysis of organizational behavior. Treatment of decision making, leadership, communication, 
group dynamics and ethical aspects of organization. 


274 Psychology 


528 Seminar in Public Administration and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: a course in basic statistics and Political Science 320 or 509. Interplay between public 
policy and program administration in federal government. Discussion of administrators' role in 
policy development, administrative discretion In implementing policy, use of political resources 
by administrators. 

530 Seminar in Cross-National Politics (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. The integration of international relations and comparative poli- 
tics, emphasizing the interdependence of nations and non-state actors in the world political 
system. 

540 Seminar Readings in Political Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite: undergraduate preparation In political theory or philosophy. This course examines the 
foundations of contemporary political science through readings in the classics of political 
philosophy. 

541 Seminar in Contemporary Political Theory (3) 

Analysis of contemporary trends In the study of politics. Emphasis on behavioral political science, 
criticisms of it and current empirical approaches to the study of politics. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. To be taken only after or concurrent with the completion 
of the required 1 5 units of graduate seminars. 

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

FACULTY 

P. Christopher Cozby 
Department Chair 

Frank Bagrash, Ernest Dondis, Peter Ebersole, Allen Gottfried, Arthur Craesser, Daniel Kee, Richard 
Lindley, Carol Lindquist, Richard Lippa, Richard McFarland, Douglas Navarick, David Perkins, 
Ronald Riggio, Michael Scavio, Louis Schmidt, Don Schweitzer,* William Smith, Edward 
Stearns, George Watson, Arthur Webber, Geoffry White, Margaret White, Stanley Woll, Patricia 
Worden 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

The major is designed to educate students In a wide variety of the content areas in psychology. A 
structured program of core requirements presents the multifaceted nature of psychological inquiry. 
The program also allows flexibility In constructing a concentration. 

Courses provide the present knowledge in the field and the methods used to obtain new knowledge. 
Thus, course content generally reflects the Interplay among theory, method, data, and practice. 
Majors may expect to become familiar with the scientific method, statistics, experimental design, 
and the use of psychological tests as tools of inquiry into the nature of behavior. 

The major provides a sound background in psychology as part of a liberal arts education. This 
background may serve as preparation for career choices related to the field of psychology. Alternate- 
ly, It may provide a basis for employment and professional training in business, law, or public 
organizations. The major also provides a foundation for professional careers In psychology through 
graduate education. 


Requirements for the Major Units 

I. Lower Division 9 


Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

Psychology 202 Research Methods in Psychology (3) 
Psychology 203 Elementary Statistics (3) 


University administrative officer 


Psychology 275 


II. Upper Division 15 

Psychology 302 Learning and Memory (3) 

One of the following three courses (3): 

Psychology 303 Sensation and Perception 
Psychology 304 Comparative Animal Behavior 
Psychology 321 Physiological Psychology 
One of the following three courses (3): 

Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality 
Psychology 351 Social Psychology 
Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology 
Psychology 408 History of Psychology (3) 

Psychology 461 Psychological Testing (3) 

III. Upper Division (300/400 level) Psychology Electives 12 

A full range of options, including complementary courses, are available for the 12 units 

of upper-division (300-4(X) level) electives. These courses can form an area of 
focus wherein students can pursue their own interests in depth, especially at the 
400 level. These courses should be selected in consultation with a psychology 
adviser. 

IV. Total 36 

No more than three units of Independent Study ( Psychology 498 or 499) may be counted toward 
the major. Each course counted toward the major must be completed with a grade of C or higher. 

Student Advisement 

The department undergraduate advisement coordinators serve as general advisers and assist students 
in selecting a sp)ecific faculty member to provide advisement. 

All who declare psychology as their major should meet with a psychology faculty adviser during 
the first semester to develop a study plan. Students are also encouraged to obtain a copy of the 
Psychology Department Student Handbook from the department office. The handbook presents 
information on student advisement and faculty teaching and research interests. Early consultation 
with a psychology faculty adviser is especially Important for those interested in pursuing graduate 
training, careers in psychology or related fields or a double major or minor. 

Community College Transfer Students: A maximum of nine units of psychology credit may be applied 
towards the requirements for the major by community college transfer students. These must fit the 
requirements of Psychology 101, 202, and 203 as specified in the course descriptions. Any additional 
units taken in psychology at a community college and approved by the university may be used for 
university credit towards the required 124 units for graduation. 

Elementary/Secondary Teaching Credential 

The Psychology Department has been granted a waiver by the Commission for Teacher Preparation 
and Licensing which means that psychology majors, providing they follow an acceptable program 
of courses, can be granted either the multiple subject (elementary) or single subject (secondary) 
credential without having to take the state examination otherwise required by the Ryan Act. See the 
department's undergraduate advisement coordinator. 

Minor in Psychology 

The Psychology Department offers an approved minor program consisting of 21 units. The minor 
permits recognition for a concentration In Psychology. Students majoring in related disciplines (e.g., 
sociology, human services) may find the minor useful In improving their career opportunities. 
The minor program consists of the following courses: 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology 

Psychology 202 Research Methods in Psychology 
One of the following laboratory /field research courses: 

Psychology 302 Learning and Memory 

Psychology 303 Sensation and Perception 

Psychology 304 Comparative Animal Behavior 

Psychology 321 Physiological Psychology 

Psychology 451 Experimental Social Psychology 

Psychology 453 Attitude Formation and Change 

Psychology 463 Experimental Child Psychology 

Psychology 470L Behavior Modification Laboratory 


276 Psychology 


One of the following: 

Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality 

Psychology 341 Abnormal Psychology 

Psychology 351 Social Psychology 

Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology 

Plus three other upper-division courses or two other upper-division courses and Psychology 203. 
No more than three units of Independent Research (Psychology 498 or 499) may be used to meet 
the requirements of the minor. Each course counted toward the minor must be completed with a 
grade of C or higher. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PSYCHOLOGY (Clinical/Community) 

See ''Graduate Programs." 


PSYCHOLOGY COURSES 

101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

Basic concepts and problems in psychology. Perception, learning, cognitive processes, development, 
motivation, personality, abnormal behavior, physiological and social psychology. 

202 Research Methods in Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. The fundamentals of psychological research methods. Participation in 
conducting experiments and analyzing data. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

203 Elementary Statistics (3) 

Descriptive statistics, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance, correlational techniques. 

204 Introduction to Computer Use in Psychology (1) 

Prerequisite: completion of general education math requirement. General introduction to computer 
systems, data input, use of software packages and the role of computers in research, teaching, 
counseling and testing. Not open to students who have completed Computer Science 112 or 
Management Science 289. 

301 The Psychology of Human Sexual Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101 or consent of instructor. Topics in human sexual behavior integrating sexual- 
ity as social, clinical, developmental and biological. Sexual identity, sexual behaviors, romantic 
love, causes and treatment of sexual dysfunctions. 

302 Learning and Memory (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 202, 203 or consent of instructor. Theoretical and experimental investiga- 
tions in learning, memory, thinking, problem solving and motivation. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

303 Sensation and Perception (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 202, 203 or consent of instructor. Theoretical and experimental investiga- 
tions in sensory and perceptual processes, including vision and audition. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

304 Comparative Animal Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 202, 203 or consent of instructor. Theoretical and experimental investiga- 
tions in animal behavior, including humans. The interspecies comparisons of behavior and 
sensory, motor, endocrine, and neural structures. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory; one or 
more field trips required) 

311 Educational Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Application of psychological research and theory to educational processes, 
including learning, motivation, individual differences, teaching methods and evaluation. 

321 Physiological Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 202 or Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Anatomy and physiology of the nervous 
system, role of neural and humoral agents in complex behavior. Relation between behavioral 
and biological processes. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

331 Psychology of Personality (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Broad survey of research, theory and assessment techniques in the area of 
personality. 


Psychology 277 


341 Abnormal Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Symptoms, causes, treatment and prevention of psychopathology; the 
neuroses, the personality disorders, psychophysiological disorders, psychoses, addictions, sexu- 
al deviations and organic disorders. 

343 Program Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Sociology 343) 

350 Environmental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101 or consent of Instructor. Theory, research and method in the study of 
behavior-environment relationships. The influence of such variables as population density and 
urban design on human behavior. 

351 Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Phenomena related to social behavior and the nature of group processes 
and influences. Attitude formation and change, aggression, altruism, affiliation and socialization. 

361 Developmental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Psychological and physical development from birth through adulthood. 
Theories, methods and research findings regarding the development of perception, cognition, 
learning, personality and social behavior. 

362 Psychology of Aging (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101 . Characteristics of humans during the adult years. Topics include physical, 
intellectual, cognitive, personal, social, and psychological development, vocational and family 
changes, retirement, and death. 

364 Intelligence: A Life-span Perspective (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101 or consent of instructor. Nature, determinants and consequences of Intelli- 
gence. Sociopolitical aspects of the testing movement. Stability, change, and prediction of IQ, 
social and biological influences, educational and occupational consequences, genetic vs. envi- 
ronmental controversy. 

391 Industrial Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Traditional and current psychological principles and techniques In Industrial 
and business settings. Selection, placement, training, work motivation, human factors, environ- 
mental influences, system safety, product liability, problems of people at work, organizational 
development and consumer behavior. 

408 History of Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing. The development of psychology from early times to the present; major 
traditions and conceptual issues. 

412 Theories of Learning (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 or consent of instructor. Principles of learning according to the major 
theoretical systems. Critical evaluation of the theories and systems. 

413 Perception (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 303 or consent of instructor. Psychological problems in perception. 

415 Cognitive Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302, 303 or consent of instructor. Theory and research with respect to problem 
solving, thinking, concept learning, language, decision making and judgment, cognitive struc- 
ture, cognitive development. 

416 Motivation (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 or consent of instructor. Concepts and evidence concerning the activation 
and direction of behavior, including consideration of needs, wishes, drives, incentives and 
preferences. 

417 Psycholinguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: six hours of upper-division work in psychology or linguistics, or consent of instructor. 
Psychological and linguistic approaches to the study of language. Innate and learned aspects 
of language development, motivational and social aspects of language, symbolism, language 
disorders and universals. (Same as Linguistics 417) 

431 Theories of Personality (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 331. Traditional and contemporary theories of personality. Including psy- 
choanalytic, humanistic-existential, behavioral, trait and social interaction approaches. 


278 Psychology 


451 Experimental Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 203 or equivalent, 202 and 351. Topics in social behavior, group processes and 
Influences. Laboratory experiments in attitude formation and change; group processes such as 
communication, problem solving, and norm formation; interpersonal Influence and perception. 
(2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

452 Interpersonal Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 351 or Sociology 341, or consent of Instructor. Theory and research on basic 
interpersonal processes (interpersonal judgment, communication, social performance, attrac- 
tion and affiliation) and current models of Interaction. 

453 Attitude Formation and Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 351 or consent of instructor. The theories of attitude formation and change; 
research methodologies and measurement strategies. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

454 Social Cognition (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 351 or 415. Theory and research on the processing and representation of social 
information. Cognitive and social psychology, including Impression formation, attribution theo- 
ry, non-verbal communication, sociolinguistics, developmental issues. 

461 Psychological Testing (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 203 or equivalent. Intelligence, aptitude, interest, and personality testing. Theory, 
construction, evaluation, interpretation and uses of psychological tests. 

463 Experimental Child Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 202 and 361. Research methodology in developmental psychology. Critical 
examination of empirical studies. Design and execution of an original empirical investigation 
In an area of the student's choice. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

465 Advanced Psychological Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 203. General linear model, regression, analysis of variance techniques and 
applications to research design and evaluation of data. 

466 Social Science Computer Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 203 or consent of Instructor. Computers in psychology. Batch processing; interac- 
tive computing; on-line experimentation. 

467 Multivariate Analyses in Psychological Research (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 465 or consent of Instructor. Bivariate and multivariate regression, multivariate 
analysis of variance, discriminant analysis, factor analysis, applications to psychological re- 
search. 

470 Behavior Modification (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 341, and junior or senior standing. Recommended: Psych 202 or 302. 
Exposition and evaluation of theory, research, and procedures for human behavior modifica- 
tion. 

470L Behavior Modification Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 470 (may be taken concurrently), and consent of instructor. A laboratory 
experience in the natural environment where students apply the principles and procedures of 
behavior modification. (9 hours per week). 

472 Community Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 341, or consent of instructor. Theory and research. A survey of a variety 
of programs developed within this model; their service delivery aspects and the methodology 
of program evaluation. 

474 Medical Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101 and 341 or consent of instructor. Behavioral medicine; neuropathology; 
clinical neuropsychology; psychosomatic, nutritional, endocrine and developmental disorders. 

475 Psychopharmacology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 321 or 15 units of biological science. Basic principles underlying the use of drugs 
and related substances to modify experience and behavior. Historical and cultural variations 
in drug usage. Psychological, medical and social potentialities and limitations of these tech- 
niques. 

477 Human Sexual Dysfunction (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 301 and 341, and constent of instructor. Symptoms, causes, treatment and 
prevention of sexual disorders. Male and female iriadequacy, aging, sex and disability, drug 
complications, homosexuality, transvestism and transexuals, ethical and legal Issues. 

481 Survey of Clinical Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 331, 341 and 461. Methods, diagnosis, therapeutic techniques, research, and 
problems. 


Psychology 279 


495 Internship in Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: 9 units of psychology and consent of instructor. Supervised experience in an off- 
campus location. Class meetings will be sp)ent discussing the internship exF>erience both from 
a practical and a theoretical standpoint. Application forms must be completed prior to enroll- 
ment. 

4% Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Consult "Student-to-Student Tutorials" in this catalog for more complete course descriptions. 

498 Independent Laboratory Research (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of one upper-division laboratory course in psychology and consent of 
instructor. Study plan must be approved by university census date. Individual laboratory investi- 
gation under direction of a faculty member. No more than three units of credit towards the 
major. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: completion of at least one upper-division laboratory course in psychology and consent 
of instructor. Study plan must be approved by university census date. Individual library study 
under direction of a faculty member. No more than three units of credit toward the major. 

501 A Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of instructor. To prepare 
beginning graduate students for more advanced courses. Intensive coverage of three of the 
following topics: sensation and perception, physiological psychology, learning, cognitive proc- 
esses. 

501 B Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of Instructor. To prepare 
beginning graduate students for more advanced courses. Intensive coverage of three of the 
following topics: personality, social psychology, abnormal psychology, developmental psy- 
chology. 

510 Experimental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 203, 465 and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of 
instructor. Principles and methods of planning and carrying out systematic investigations on the 
behavior of complex organisms, interdependence of experimental design and statistical evalua- 
tion of results. Practice in formulation of testable hypotheses. 

515 Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 515) 

520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 465, 501 A and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of 
Instructor. Content of seminar varies each semester but is devoted to an examination of current 
topics within experimental psychology. May be repeated for credit. 

521 Seminar: Personality (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 501 B and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of instructor. 
Central problems in personality. May be repeated for credit. 

522 Seminar: Developmental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 361 and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of instructor. 
Theory and research in developmental psychology. May be repeated for credit. 

531 Individual Mental Testing (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 461 and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of instructor. 
The major tests of intelligence. Practical experience in administration, scoring and interpretation 
of these instruments. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

540 Proseminar: Community Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to the M.S. Clinical/Community program or consent of Instructor. Commu- 
nity psychology; Its historical and philosophical roots, theoretical framework, research within 
the area, and current practical applications. 

542 Proseminar: Clinical Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 481 or equivalent; and admission to M.S. Clinical/Community program or 
consent of instructor. Clinical psychology; broad theoretical considerations as well as their 
relationship to clinical practice In testing, diagnosis, ethics, and psychotherapy. 

544A Psychodiagnostics A (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. Clinical/Community program or consent of instructor. A skills course 
in conducting diagnostic Interviews, writing case histories, and giving and scoring objective 
diagnostic tests, and relevant issues in testing assessment. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


280 Religious Studies 


544B Psychodiagnostics B (3) 

Prerequisites; admission to M.S. Clinical /Community program or consent of instructor and successful 
completion of Psych 544 A. A laboratory course covering administration, scoring, and interpre- 
tation of traditional projective tests and relevant issues in testing assessment and research. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

546 Behavior Therapy (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. Clinical /Community program or consent of instructor. Behavior 
influence. The student will design and execute project in a clinical setting. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

551 Seminar: Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 501 B and admission to a psychology graduate program or consent of instructor. 
Central problems and major theories in the field of social psychology. May be repeated for 
credit. 

560 Individual Therapy Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to M.S. in Clinical /Community program or consent of instructor. Specific 
therapy techniques and general approaches to individual psychotherapy. Theoretical material, 
and the material's practical application to clients. 

562 Croup, Marital and Family Therapy (3) 

Prerequisites: satisfactory completion of the first one and one-half years' work in the M.S. in 
Clinical /Community Psych program. Croup, marital and family therapy. Theoretical material 
and the material's practical application to clients in field work. 

564 Fieldwork Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: satisfactory completion of first year's work in the M.S. in Clinical/Community Psych 
program. Theoretical and applied problems arising from the fieldwork experience. Must be 
taken concurrently with Psych 566A. 

566A,B Fieldwork (4,4) 

Prerequisite: satisfactory completion of first year's work in the M.S. in Clinical /Community program. 
Supervised clinical work in mental health agencies. Psych 566A must be taken concurrently with 
Psych 564. (Minimum of 12 hours field experience per week.) 

598 Thesis Research (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: formal advancement to candidacy and consent of instructor. Development of a 
proposal for a major piece of empirical research, execution of the study, analysis of the results, 
and writing of a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to a psychology graduate program and consent of instructor. Empirical 
research in a selected area of psychology. Designed, conducted and written by the student with 
the collaboration of a member of the faculty. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF RELIGIOUS STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Donald Card 
Department Chair 

Daniel Brown, Joseph Kalir, George Saint-Laurent, James Santucci 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES 

This program provides the intellectual tools and scholarly background required for understanding 
the forms and traditions of religion that have appeared in human culture. 

Students are encouraged to ask the questions which particular religions attempt to answer in their 
own way. The aim of each course is an open and academic examination of ultimate questions as 
they apply to contemporary situations. The relevance of beliefs, ethics and worship in both Eastern 
and Western civilizations for the cultural development of mankind is examined. 

Major in Religious Studies. 

(Each course counted toward the major must be completed with a grade of C or higher.) 
Language: One year of the classic languages of religious literature (e.g., Arabic, Creek, Hebrew, Latin 
or Sanskrit) required of all majors. One semester of two different languages may be taken. 
Lower-Division Requirements: 12 units 
Religious Studies 2(X) Introduction to Christianity (3) 

Religious Studies 210 Introduction to Judaism: From the Beginning to the Middle Ages (3) 

Religious Studies 250 The Religion of Islam (3) 

Religious Studies 270 Introduction to the Oriental Religions (3) 


Religious Studies 281 


Upper-Division Requirements: 27 Units 
Western Religions: 6 units, 3 units from each section 
Section A: Scripture 

Religious Studies 330 Hebrew Scriptural Studies (3) 

Religious Studies 331 New Testament Studies (3) 

Section B: Development of Thought 

Religious Studies 332 The Land of the Bible: Everyday Life in Old Testament Times (3) 
Christianity and Judaism (3) 

History and Development of Christian Thought: The Beginning to 1274 
(3) 

History and Development of Christian Thought: 1 275 to the Present ( 3 ) 
History and Development of Jewish Thought: The Beginning to Moses 
Maimonides (3) 

History and Development of Jewish Thought: Ben Gerson to the 
Present (3) 

Major Christian Traditions (3) 

Old Testament Criticism (3) 

New Testament Criticism (3) 

History of the Jews (3) 

Roman Empire (3) 


Religious Studies 335 
Religious Studies 345A 

Religious Studies 345B 
Religious Studies 346A 

Religious Studies 346B 

Religious Studies 350 
Religious Studies 435 
Religious Studies 436 
History 405 
History 41 7B 


History 425B The Reformation (3) 

History 466A Islamic Civilization: Arab Era (3) 

Asian and Non-Western Religions: 6 units 

Religious Studies 370 Modern Non-Traditlonal Religious Movements in America (3) 
Religious Studies 470 Seminar in Oriental Religions (3) 

History 465 A History of India (3) 

Philosophy 350 Oriental Philosophy (3) 

Religious Experience/ Phenomenology of Religion: 6 units 
Religious Studies 343 The Bible and Its Ethics (3) 

Dimensions of Religion (3) 

Inter religious Relationships (Christianity, Islam, Judaism) (3) 

Jewish Mythology, Religion and Mysticism (3) 

Myth and Legend in the Bible (3) 

Anxiety, Guilt and Freedom (3) 

The Holocaust: The Destruction of European Jewry, 1933-1945 (3) 
Anthropology of Religion (3) 


Religious Studies 376 
Religious Studies 380 
Religious Studies 431 
Religious Studies 433 
Religious Studies 475 
Religious Studies 476 
Anthropology 305 


Philosophy 370 Philosophy of Religion (3) 

Sociology 458 Sociology of Religious Behavior (3) 

All majors must take the following three upper-division courses: 

Religious Studies 3(X) Methodologies of Religious Studies (3) 

Religious Studies 485 Major Contemporary Religious Thinkers (3) 

Religious Studies 486 Major Contemporary Religious Topics (3) 

Total units required for the major (including language) 45. Courses in other schools and departments 
may be acceptable up)on consultation with the chair of the Department of Religious Studies. 

Minor in Religious Studies 

The minor in religious studies is composed of 24 units in religious studies exclusive of the general 
education requirements. 

Lower Division: 1 2 units 

Religious Studies 110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) 

Any introductory course in psychology, sociology, anthropology, philosophy, etc., with the ap- 
proval of the department chair. 

Any two of the following: 

Introduction to Christianity (3) 

Introduction to Judaism: From the Beginning to the Middle Ages (3) 
The Religion of Islam (3) 

Introduction to the Oriental Religions (3) 


Religious Studies 200 
Religious Studies 210 
Religious Studies 250 
Religious Studies 270 
Upper Division: 1 2 units 
Religious Studies 485 
Religious Studies 486 


Major Contemporary Religious Thinkers (3) 
Major Contemporary Religious Topics (3) 


Six additional units in a package emphasis (i.e., Christianity, Judaism, Eastern Religions, etc.) 


282 Religious Studies 

RELIGIOUS STUDIES COURSES 

110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 110) 

200 Introduction to Christianity (3) 

The Christian scriptures and their background in the light of modern exegesis; the Synoptic Gospels, 
written creeds and liturgical formulae associated with the Orthodox, Roman and Protestant 
communions. 

201 Origins of the New Testament (3) 

The sources and content of the New Testament writings which reflect the life and beliefs of the 
Christians in the first century of the Common Era, including literary and historical criticism. 

210 Introduction to Judaism: From the Beginning to the Middle Ages (3) 

Review of the laws, rituals, customs, holidays and ceremonies of Judaism from the beginning. 

211 Introduction to Judaism: From the Middle Ages to the Present (3) 

Review of the concepts, teachings, philosophy, basic ideas, way of life, and religious aspects of 
Judaism. 

220 Ancient Near Eastern Religions (3) 

An investigation of the archaic religious systems of Mesopotamia, Egypt and Canaan insofar as their 
myths, rituals and legal codes have emerged from literary and other artifacts of archeological 
discovery. 

246A Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 

(Same as PE 246A) 

246B Intermediate Hatha Yoga (2) 

(Same as PE 246B) 

250 The Religion of Islam (3) 

The religion of Islam, its background and main teachings: the rise of Islam, the caliphate, Islamic 
theology, teachings, mysticism and philosophy. 

270 Introduction to the Oriental Religions (3) 

The main teachings of a major South Asian, Far Eastern, or 'Oriental' religion per semester. Such 
religions as Buddhism, Hinduism, Taoism, Shintoism, and Zoroastrianism will be discussed. May 
be repeated for credit with different subject matter. 

300 Methodologies of Religious Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Religious Studies 110 or consent of instructor. Religious studies as an academic disci- 
pline; contributions from history, sociology, psychology, phenomenology and anthropology. 
Definition and function of religion, its varieties, its categories, and the methodologies by which 
it is studied. 

301 Sanskrit (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 301 ) 

305 Anthropology of Religion (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 305) 

330 Hebrew Scriptural Studies (3) 

Specific areas of Hebrew Scriptures such as major and minor prophets. Psalms, values of wisdom 
writers, books of the Old Testament. May be repeated for credit with different subject content. 

331 New Testament Studies (3) 

Specific areas of the New Testament such as the Synoptic Gospels, The Pauline Corpus, The 
Johannine Corpus, etc. May be repeated for credit with different subject matter. 

332 The Land of the Bible: Everyday Life in Old Testament Times (3) 

How people lived in the Mediterranean world in the first century of the Christian era. 

335 Christianity and Judaism (3) 

Differences and similarities between Christianity and Judaism. The age of transition from Judaism to 
Christianity; origins and destinies. 

343 The Bible and its Ethics (3) 

The ethics of the Bible, its significance, its problems and its meaning for modern times. The ideals 
of the ethics of the Bible and Its approach to the contemporary problems. 

345A History and Development of Christian Thought: The Beginning to 1274 (3) 

Christian thought from apostolic times to the death of Thomas Aquinas; Old and New Rome, the 
Great Councils, the Middle Ages, and the marriage of faith and reason. 


Religious Studies 283 

345B History and Development of Christian Thought: 1275 to the Present (3) 

Christian thought from the death of Thomas Aquinas to the present; the cultural and philosophical 
backgrounds of the successive ages of scholasticism, the renaissance, baroque, reason and 
revolution, and the modern world. 

346A,B, History and Development of Jewish Thought (3^) 

Every philosophy of Judaism dealing with the fundaments of the Jewish religious experiences. 
A — The beginning to Moses Maimonides. B — Ben Cerson to the present. 

350 Major Christian Traditions (3) 

Catholocism, Protestantism, Eastern Christianity, or Post- Reformation Communities; historical devel- 
opment and self-understanding, liturgy, creeds, moral norms, canonical laws, and outstanding 
figures. May be repeated for credit with different content. 

370 Modern Non-traditional Religious Movements in America (3) 

Beliefs, history, ritual and organizational make-up of non-traditional modern religions in America, 
such as Scientology, the Unification Church, Hare Krishna (ISKCON) and Rajneeshism as 
presented by guest speakers. Discussion of 'cult,' 'sect' and the occult will comprise portion 
of course. 

376 Dimensions of Religion (3) 

The great themes of religious thought viewed objectively and subjectively in history and in the 
present day. Seminar and discussion presentation. 

380 Interreligious Relationships (Christianity, Islam, Judaism) (3) 

A study of the attitudes of the religions of Christianity, Islam and Judaism toward each other, and 
the relationships between Christians, Jews and Moslems through the centuries. 

431 Jewish Mythology, Religion and Mysticism (3) 

Prerequisite: Religious Studies 21 1 or consent of Instructor. Jewish mysticism, its inner significance, 
problems and meaning. The function which Jewish mysticism has had at varying periods. 

433 Myth and Legend in the Bible (3) 

Prerequisite: Religious Studies 210 or consent of instructor. An analysis of the stories of the Bible and 
a comparison with the folklore and mythology of other cultures. 

435 Old Testament Criticism (3) 

The Old Testament, its development and a literary study of its contents. 

436 New Testament Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: Religious Studies 201 or consent of Instructor. The history of the New Testament, its 
development and literary study of its contents. New Insights Into the critical studies of the New 
Testament. 

458 Sociology of Religious Behavior (3) 

(Same as Sociology 458) 

470 Seminar in Oriental Religions (3) 

A detailed Investigation of a specific topic appropriate to the Oriental Religion under question or 
a specific segment of a major oriental religion such as the Yoga school in Hinduism, and 
Mahayana Buddhism. May be repeated for credit with different subject matter. 

475 Anxiety, Guilt and Freedom (3) 

The distinction between psychiatry and religious methods of understanding basic human emotions: 
"authority", "God", "faith", "forgiveness", "sin", "error", "repentance", "sex" and "absolu- 
tion". 

476 The Holocaust: The Destruction of European Jewry 1933-1945 (3) 

The ordeal of European Jewry during World War II as reflected in art, music, drama, fiction, poetry, 
historical, psychological and religious writing. 

485 Major Contemporary Religious Thinkers (3) 

Prerequisites: Philosophy 110 or the equivalent. Religious thinkers contemporary to the modern 
world. Fulfills the course requirement of the university upper division baccalaureate writing 
requirement for religious studies majors. May be repeated with different content for additional 
credit. 

486 Major Contemporary Religious Topics (3) 

Prerequisites: Philosophy 1 10 or the equivalent. Modern topics of a religious nature related to social, 
political, psychological trends. Fulfills the course requirement of the university upper division 
baccalaureate writing requirement for religious studies majors. May be repeat^ with different 
content for additional credit. 


284 Russian and East European Area Studies 

495 Religious Studies Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: junior or senior standing and consent of faculty coordinator. Designed to provide an 
in-depth work experience in the area of religion. Supervision by both faculty and cooperating 
institution. Interns meet for a biweekly seminar. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in religious studies to be taken with consent of instructor and the 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

RUSSIAN AND EAST EUROPEAN AREA STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Robert Feldman 
Program Coordinator 

David Depew (Philosophy), Robert Feldman (History), Charles Frazee (History), Cary Cuertner 
(Political Science), Ronald Helin (Geography), Karl Kahrs (Political Science), R. Dean Mills 
(Communications), Joyce PIckersgill (Economics), Otto Sadovszky (Anthropology), Elena 
Tumas (Comparative Literature), Bruce Wright (Political Science), Michael Yessis (Physical 
Education) 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN RUSSIAN AND EAST EUROPEAN AREA STUDIES 

The Russian and East European area studies program is an interdisciplinary program designed for 
students whose interests and career objectives are in government service, communication, interna- 
tional business or education. The program provides students already majoring in an existing disci- 
pline or department (i.e., history, business, biology, etc.) the opportunity to have a second major. 
In addition, the program fulfills the various cultural objectives common to any liberal arts program. 
To qualify for this major, a student must complete (1) 16 units of Russian language or their 
equivalent, (2) 24 units of upper-division Russian area courses from at least four of the following 
fields: anthropology, comparative literature, economics, geography, philosophy, political science, 
history, foreign language, (3) 15 units of upper-division course work In a related discipline to be 
determined in consultation with a Russian area counselor. Students are encouraged to have these 
units apply toward a major In a traditional discipline. 

The basic lower-division courses also may be used to meet general educational requirements. 

RUSSIAN AND EAST EUROPEAN AREA STUDIES COURSES 

All courses within the Russian and East European area studies program originate in other departments 
within the university. Students should refer to the department originating the course for description. 
Communications 

431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Comparative Literature 
373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

Economics 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Geography 

338 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) 

History 

419 The Byzantine Empire (3) 

434A Russia to 1890 (3) 

434B Russian Revolution and the Soviet Regime (3) 

437 East Europe (3) 

490 Senior Research Seminar (3) 

(when topic is Russian Revolution or Polish History) 

Philosophy 

382 Marx and Marxism (3) 

Political Science 

430 Government and Politics (of the U.S.S.R.) (3) 

431 Government and Politics (of East Europe) (3) 

443 Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

452 Foreign Policy of the U.S.S.R. (3) 


Sociology 285 


SOCIAL SCIENCES— MASTER OF ARTS 

An interdisciplinary program offered by the School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

FACULTY 

Roger Joseph (Anthropology) 

Graduate Program (Coordinator 

Wayne Hobson (American Studies) 

Graduat